Irrigation Codes3

IS : 11223 - 1985
(Reaffirmed 2004)
Edition 1.2
(1991-09)
Indian Standard
GUIDELINES FOR
FIXING SPILLWAY CAPACITY
(Incorporating Amendment Nos. 1 & 2)
UDC 627.83.04
© BIS 2005
BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

MANAK BHAVAN , 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG
NEW DELHI 110002
Price Group 3
IS : 11223 - 1985
Indian Standard
GUIDELINES FOR
Spillways Including Energy Dissipators Sectional Committee, BDC 54
Chairman Representing
SHRI J. F. MISTRY Irrigation Department, Government of Gujarat,
Gandhinagar
Members
SHRI R. K. AGGARWAL Irrigation Department, Government of Uttar
Pradesh, Lucknow
SHRI AMAR SINGH RAJPUT ( Alternate )
DR A. S. CHAWLA University of Roorkee (WRDTC), Roorkee
CHIEF ENGINEER, CDO Irrigation Department, Government of Andhra
Pradesh, Hyderabad
SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER
(DAMS) ( Alternate )
CHIEF ENGINEER & DIRECTOR Maharashtra Engineering Research Institute,
Nashik
CHIEF ENGINEER (PWD) Irrigation Department, Government of Karnataka,
Mysore
(DESIGNS) ( Alternate )
CHIEF ENGINEER/R-cum-DIRECTOR Irrigation & Power Research Institute, Government
of Punjab, Amritsar
CHIEF ENGINEER, THEIN DAM Irrigation Department, Government of Punjab,
DESIGN Chandigarh
DIRECTOR (SPILLWAYS &
POWER PLANT) ( Alternate )
SHRI M. L. DAS Irrigation & Power Department, Government of
Orissa, Bhubaneshwar
SHRI B. DASS Irrigation & Waterways Directorate, Government of
West Bengal, Calcutta
DIRECTOR Central Water and Power Research Station, Pune
SHRI R. M. KHATSURIA ( Alternate )
DIRECTOR (CMDD-I) Central Water Commission, New Delhi
KUMARI E. DIVATIA National Hydroelectric Power Corporation Ltd,
New Delhi
SHRI K. K. FRAMJI Consulting Engineering Services (India) Pvt Ltd,
New Delhi
PROF HARI KRISHNA ( Alternate )
( Continued on page 2 )
© BIS 2005
This publication is protected under the Indian Copyright Act (XIV of 1957) and
reproduction in whole or in part by any means except with written permission of the
publisher shall be deemed to be an infringement of copyright under the said Act.
IS : 11223 - 1985
( Continued from page 1 )
Members Representing
DR JAGDISH NARAIN Institution of Engineers (India), Calcutta
SHRI S. P. JAIN Bhakra Beas Management Board, Nangal Township
SHRI J. C. BASUR ( Alternate )
SHRI D. G. KADKADE Jaiprakash Associated Pvt Ltd, New Delhi
SHRI A. B. ODAK ( Alternate )
SHRI H. K. KHOSLA Irrigation Department, Government of Haryana,
Chandigarh
SHRI M. L. GUPTA ( Alternate )
SHRI M. U. PUROHIT Irrigation Department, Government of Gujarat,
Gandhinagar
SHRI N. B. DESAI ( Alternate )
SHRI M. S. RAMA RAO Karnataka Power Corporation Ltd, Bangalore
REPRESENTATIVE Irrigation Department, Government of Tamil Nadu,
Madras
SHRI D. M. SAVUR The Hindustan Construction Co Ltd, Bombay
SHRI M. V. S. IYENGAR ( Alternate )
SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER (MD) Irrigation Department, Government of Maharashtra,
Bombay
SHRI V. N. PENDSE ( Alternate I )
KUMARI PRATIMA NAIDU ( Alternate II )
SHRI C. D. THATTE Gujarat Engineering Research Institute, Vadodara
SHRI B. K. RAO ( Alternate )
DR R. S. VARSHNEY In personal capacity ( Central Water Authority, St.
Paul Phoenix, Mauritius )
SHRI G. RAMAN, Director General, ISI ( Ex-officio Member )
Director (Civ Engg)
Secretary
SHRI K. K. SHARMA
Deputy Director (Civ Engg), ISI
2
IS : 11223 - 1985
Indian Standard
GUIDELINES FOR
0. F O R E W O R D
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards
Institution on 13 February 1985, after the draft finalized by the
Spillways Including Energy Dissipators Sectional Committee had been
approved by the Civil Engineering Division Council.
0.2 An essential component of any river valley project, the spillway,
performs a very important function of disposing off safely the flood
waters that enter the reservoir and which are found surplus to the
requirements. The determination of adequate spillway capacity and
surcharge storage is of paramount importance since upon it depends
the maximum flood level attained and the consequent safety of the
dam itself as also the pattern of flooding upstream and downstream of
the reservoir.
0.3 Every artificial storage can be a potential hazard to downstream
life and property and also cause upstream submergence. Primary
purpose of the spillway is to reduce this hazard to negligible or
acceptable level. In operational terms, the spillway capacity should be
such as to safely pass a pre-determined inflow design flood without
irreparable damage to the spillway structure and other components of
the dam. Apart from this primary purpose, the capacity of the spillway
may be so fixed as to fulfil one or more of the following additional
purposes:
a) to provide a small surcharge storage to compensate the effect of
the reservoir in decreasing the naturally available valley storage
and in decreasing the travel time of the flood waves from the
natural condition so as not to change the natural flood regime on
the downstream in a detrimental manner.
b) to change the flood regime downstream to reduce the frequency of
flood damage, through provision of surcharge storage.
c) to control the floods on the downstream by using a permanent
flood control capacity or a joint use capacity in the reservoir.
d) to control the backwater upstream of the reservoir so that the
frequency of flooding of an upstream structure or property is
reduced to acceptable limits.
3
IS : 11223 - 1985
e) to economize the dam design by adopting an appropriate combi-
nation of surcharge storage versus spillway capacity.
0.4 This edition 1.2 incorporates Amendment No. 1 (December 1990) and
Amendment No. 2 (September 1991). Side bar indicates modification of
the text as the result of incorporation of the amendments.
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard lays down guidelines for fixing the spillway capacity
consistent with the safety of the dam.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the following definitions in
addition to those given in IS : 4410* shall apply.
2.1 Probable Maximum Flood (PMF) — It is the flood that may be
expected from the most severe combination of critical meteorological
and hydrological condition that are reasonably possible in the region
and is computed by using the Probable Maximum Storm which is an
estimate of the physical upper limit to maximum precipitation for the
basin. This is obtained from transposition studies of the storms that
have occurred over the region and maximising them for the most
critical atmospheric conditions.
2.2 Return Period Flood — A flood with a return period of ‘T’ year
(‘T’ year flood) is defined as a flood that is expected, on the average, to
be equalled or exceeded once in ‘T’ years. Thus the probability of
occurrence of a flood equalling or exceeding the ‘T’ year flood is 1/T.
NOTE — The T year flood should specify the flood element (for example peak
discharge volume, volume above a threshold, etc) which is considered in the probabi-
lity analysis. While using this concept in application, the flood element to be used in
the analysis is to be decided with reference to the engineering design requirements.
2.3 Spillway Capacity — Capability of the spillway, as determined
by its dimensions, crest level and hydraulic characteristics in
disposing off water at any specific level.
2.4 Standard Project Flood (SPF) — It is the flood that may be
expected from the most severe combination of hydrological and
meteorological factors that are considered reasonably characteristic of
the region and is computed by using the Standard Project Storm (SPS).
While transposition of storms from outside the basin is permissible,
very rare storms which are ‘not characteristic’ of the region concerned
are excluded in arriving at the SPS rainfall for the basin.
*Glossary of terms relating to river valley projects.
4
IS : 11223 - 1985
2.5 Surcharge Storage — It is the storage between the full reservoir
level and the maximum water level.
3. FACTORS GOVERNING SPILLWAY CAPACITY
3.0 The performance of a spillway under a flood situation is affected by
the following:
a) Inflow flood.
b) Reservoir and outflow conditions at the beginning of the flood.
c) Hydraulic characteristics of the spillway including those for the
approach and the tail channel geometry.
d) Storage characteristics or the reservoir geometry.
e) Rules for operation of the spillway gates.
f) Actual functioning of the spillway including mechanical and
human failures.
3.0.1 The acceptability of resulting performance in a flood would then
be decided by:
a) The highest water level reached in the flood studies, that is, in
particular:
1) Free board available at this level,
2) Clearances of gates available at this level,
3) Upstream submergence corresponding to this level, and
4) Structural safety considerations.
b) The largest outflow during this flood situation and in particular:
1) behaviour of the spillway, energy dissipation arrangement and
downstream channel for this outflow, and
2) acceptability of the outflow from the consideration of down-
stream damage in the valley.
3.1 Inflow Design Flood
3.1.1 Corresponding to the primary and additional purposes of the
spillway enumerated in 0.3, various inflow design floods may be
considered, namely:
a) Inflow design flood for the safety of the dam — It is the flood for
which, when used with standard specifications of other factors as
mentioned in subsequent clauses, the performance of the dam
should be safe against overtopping, structural failure and the
spillway and its energy dissipation arrangements, if provided for
a lower flood, should function reasonably well.
5
IS : 11223 - 1985
b) Inflow design flood for efficient operation of energy dissipation
works — It is a flood which may be lower than the inflow design
flood for the safety of the dam. When this flood is used with
standard specifications or other factors affecting the perfor-
mance, the energy dissipation arrangements are expected to work
most efficiently. No damage/breaches in the breaching section,
fuse plug, etc, are contemplated during this flood.
c) Inflow design flood for checking acceptability of extent of
upstream submergence.
d) Inflow design flood for checking acceptability of extent of down-
stream damage in the valley.
3.1.2 The dams may be classified according to size by using the static
head at FRL (from FRL to the minimum tail water level) and the gross
storage behind the dam as given below. The overall size classification
for the dam would be the greater of that indicated by either of the
following two parameters:
Classification Gross Storage Static Head at FRL

Small Between 0.5 and 10 million m3
Between 7.5 m and 12 m.
Intermediate Between 10 and 60 million m3 Between 12 m and 30 m.
Large Greater than 60 million m3 Greater than 30 m.
3.1.3 The inflow design flood for safety of the dam would be as follows:
Size as Determined in 3.1.2 Inflow Design Flood for Safety of Dam

Small 100 year flood
Intermediate SPF
Large PMF
Floods of larger or smaller magnitude may be used if the hazard

involved in the eventuality of a failure is particularly high or low. The
relevant parameters to be considered in judging the hazard in addition
to the size would be:
i) distance to and location of the human habitations on the down-
stream after considering the likely future developments.
ii) maximum hydraulic capacity of the downstream channel at a
level at which catastrophic damage is not expected.
For more important projects dam break studies may be done as an
aid to the judgement in deciding whether PMF needs to be used.
Where the studies or judgement indicate an imminent danger to
6
IS : 11223 - 1985
present or future human settlements, the PMF should be used. Any
departure from the general criteria as above on account of larger or
smaller hazard should be clearly brought out and recorded.
3.1.4 Inflow design flood for efficient operation of energy dissipation
work — For some dams, inflow design flood for the safety of the dam
may not undermine the dam foundation and endanger its safety. Also
for some dams, breaching sections or auxillary spillways may be
provided such that the breach of this breaching section or operation of
the auxillary spillway also may not undermine the dam foundation
and endanger its safety and in addition these may not lead to
uncontrolled widening of the breach or loss of life. Under these
conditions the energy dissipation arrangements for the main spillway
may be designed for best efficiency for a smaller inflow flood than the
inflow design flood for the safety of the dam.
3.1.5 For the two types of inflow design floods ( see 3.1.3 and 3.1.4 ) for
intermediate and large dams the design situation would consist of the
flood followed or preceded by a 25 year flood, if two large floods have
occurred in close succession in the region in the past. The period
between the floods, or between the two storms if the bloods are
generated through storm rainfall, may be reasonably small and may
be decided after the analysis of the past data.
The duration of the standard project or maximum probable storm to
be considered depends on the storm characteristics of the region, basin
characteristics and characteristics of the proposed engineering work.
For attaining the highest possible peak discharge, the rainfall period
should not be less than the base period of the unit hydrograph where a
considerable reduction in the peak through the dam is envisaged, the
volume of the flood in the routed portion becomes important, and
longer duration rainfall would have to be considered.
Where a ‘T’ year flood is to be used through probability analysis, any
value between and including the expected value of the flood, as
indicated by the analysis to be 95 percent upper confidence band value,
may be used depending on the importance of the structure, length of
data, etc.
3.2 Initial Level and Outflow — For routing of the inflow design
floods ( see 3.1.3 and 3.1.4 ) following conditions shall be used:
a) The initial level, when the flood impinges, would be the top of
conservation pool level. For ungated spillways this would corres-
pond to the spillway crest or a little above this [ see 3.2 (c) ]. For
reservoirs not having a permanent flood control pool this will
correspond to top of gate level. Where by rule-curve operation, a
part of the conservation capacity is proposed to be used as a joint
use capacity towards flood control also, the top of conservation
level will be used and not the rule-curve level. For projects having
7
IS : 11223 - 1985
permanent flood control pool, the actual initial level may be in
between the top of conservation pool and top of flood pool
depending on the flow sequences before the flood. A sequence of
25 year and design flood should be adopted. Where such sequence
is used, it would be admissible to use the top of conservation pool
as the initial level. However, where the sequence is not used, the
initial level may correspond to the level at which 50 percent of the
permanent flood control storage is occupied.
b) For some projects, it may be possible to pre-deplete the reservoir
by using a flood forecast. However, this pre-depletion by using
forecasts need not be considered in the initial level determination
for the present purpose.
c) The initial outflow from the reservoir should correspond to the
initial inflow so that the steady pool is the initial condition. For
ungated spillways, this outflow may require a consideration of an
initial level little above the spillway crest. For flood control
reservoirs, where 50 percent initial filling of the flood pool is
assumed, the initial outflow would correspond to the operation
schedule for flood control purposes and may be governed by
downstream constraints.
3.3 Hydraulic Characteristics of the Spillway — Outflow from
outlets. provided for conservation used need not be considered in deciding
discharging capacity. Care should be taken to adopt appropriate
elevation-outflow curve for the spillway. For hydraulic characteristics of
high ogee spillways, reference may be made to IS : 6934-1973*.
NOTE — For ungated waste weirs, common on small projects, sufficient slope to
maintain critical flow at spillway crest may not be available on the downstream.
3.4 Reservoir Geometry — The elevation area capacity
characteristics as expected after 100 years of sedimentation ( see draft
Indian Standard Methods for determination of life of reservoirs, under
preparation ) may be used in the routing of the design floods.
3.5 Rules of Operation — It is necessary that the rules of the gate
operation as used in flood routing should be similar to those that can
be used in practice.
3.5.1 If surcharging operation, involving maintenance of a steady pool
above the full reservoir level is contemplated, thus using up the
controlled surcharge storage of the total surcharge pool, this should be
reflected in flood routing.
3.5.2 Whether or not flood control is a stated purpose, rules for
operation under normal floods may initially provide a restriction on
the outflow or on its rate of change. Only at a later stage of a larger
flood, the flood would be recognized as a large one, and emergency
*Recommendations for hydraulic design of high ogee overflow spillways.
8
IS : 11223 - 1985
schedule permitting unrestricted outflow may come into force. These
possibilities should be reflected in the computations of reservoir
simulation under both the design floods ( see 3.1.3 and 3.1.4 ).
3.6 Mechanical and Human Failures
3.6.1 For gated spillways, the contingency of at least 10 percent of the
gates with a minimum of one gate being inoperative may be considered
as an emergency condition (like earthquake) for both types of design
floods ( see 3.1.3 and 3.1.4 ), for safety of the dam and for design of
energy dissipation works.
3.6.2 Human failures in the operation of a high capacity spillway may
cause a downstream flood larger than the inflow flood and may
endanger downstream interest. Although it is preferable to restrict the
outflow capacity, if possible, to reduce this possibility, explicit
consideration of such situations is not necessary ( see also 5.2.1 ).
4. CHECKING ACCEPTABILITY OF THE PERFORMANCE
4.0 With the two design floods ( see 3.1.3 and 3.1.4 ), four design
conditions would result:
Design Condition I : Under inflow design flood for safety of dams

and with inoperative gates as in 3.6.1.
Design Condition II : Under inflow design good for safety of dams
and with all gates operative.
Design Condition III : Under inflow design flood for energy
dissipation works and with inoperative gates
as in 3.6.1.
Design Condition IV : Under inflow design flood for energy
dissipation works and with all gates operative.
4.1 Free-Board and Clearances — The free-board as specified in

relevant Indian Standards ( see IS : 6512-1984* and IS : 10635-1983† )
should be available at FRL as also at MWL which would correspond to
Design Condition II.
4.1.1 A reduced free-board may be acceptable under Design Condition I
assumed as an emergency condition (like earthquake). Provide
minimum of 1 m height above maximum water level to top of dam in
case of masonry dams.
4.1.2 Similarly, normal clearance from and clearance in the energy
dissipation structure should be available for Design Condition II and
lower acceptable clearances for Design Condition I.
*Criteria for design and solid gravity dams ( first revision ).
†Guidelines for freeboard requirements in embankment dams.
9
IS : 11223 - 1985
4.2 Upstream Submergence Consideration — This depends on
local condition, type of property and effects of its submergence. Except
for very important structures upstream like power houses, mines, etc,
for which levels corresponding to SPF or PMF may be used; smaller
design floods and levels attained under these may suffice. In general a
25-year flood for land acquisition and 50-year flood for built up
property acquisition may be adopted.
4.3 Downstream Submergence Consideration — This depends on
local conditions, the type of property and elects of its submergence.
Except for very important facilities like power houses, for which
outflows obtained under condition II or of that order may be relevant.
Normally the discharge relevant to check the acceptability of
downstream submergence condition may be smaller than those for
power houses at or near the toe of the dam. Normally damage due to
physical flooding may not be allowed for Design Condition II, but
disruption of operation may be allowed.
5. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
5.1 Breaching Sections — If a suitable site is available in a separate
saddle, a breaching section may be provided. The top level of the earth
dam provided in the saddle should be kept lower than the top level of
the main dam so that the earth dam in the saddle gets breached due to
overtopping in the event of high water level. This would relieve the
pressure on the main dam. It should be seen that no habitation or
valuable property exists downstream of the saddle and the damage
caused by way of the breach is minimum.
5.2 Although the primary purpose of the spillway as stated in 0.3, that
is to eliminate or reduce the artificial hazard due to failure of dam
forms the main scope of the standard other purposes as mentioned
in 0.4 also require careful considerations.
5.2.1 It seems preferable to provide at least a small surcharge storage
so that the maximum water level reached even under the design floods
with all gates functioning is higher than the full reservoir level (or the
maximum controlled water level in case surcharging is planned). This
would allow a moderation of the high floods so that the hydrologic
effects of the reservoir in reducing valley storage and travel times are
countered. Such a margin would also give a slight flexibility in gate
operation and reduce the effects of human failures.
5.2.2 Where flood control downstream of the dam is proposed to be
achieved, it is necessary to have a rigorous study based on simulation
of the reservoir under a number of floods.
5.2.3 Techno-economic studies for sizing of spillway vis-a-vis sizing of
surcharge capacity need to be done for all important dams.
10
Bureau of Indian Standards
BIS is a statutory institution established under the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 1986 to promote
harmonious development of the activities of standardization, marking and quality certification of
goods and attending to connected matters in the country.
Copyright
BIS has the copyright of all its publications. No part of these publications may be reproduced in any
form without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use, in the course
of implementing the standard, of necessary details, such as symbols and sizes, type or grade
designations. Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director (Publications), BIS.
Review of Indian Standards
Amendments are issued to standards as the need arises on the basis of comments. Standards are also
reviewed periodically; a standard along with amendments is reaffirmed when such review indicates
that no changes are needed; if the review indicates that changes are needed, it is taken up for
revision. Users of Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest
amendments or edition by referring to the latest issue of ‘BIS Catalogue’ and ‘Standards : Monthly
Additions’.
This Indian Standard has been developed by Technical Committee : BDC 54 and amended by RVD 10
Amendments Issued Since Publication

Amend No. Date of Issue
Amd. No. 1 December 1990
Amd. No. 2 September 1991

Headquarters:
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110002. Telegrams: Manaksanstha
Telephones: 323 01 31, 323 33 75, 323 94 02 (Common to all offices)
Regional Offices: Telephone
Central : Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg  323 76 17

NEW DELHI 110002  323 38 41
Eastern : 1/14 C. I. T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Kankurgachi  337 84 99, 337 85 61


KOLKATA 700054  337 86 26, 337 91 20
Northern : SCO 335-336, Sector 34-A, CHANDIGARH 160022  60 38 43

 60 20 25
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, CHENNAI 600113  235 02 16, 235 04 42

 235 15 19, 235 23 15
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri (East)  832 92 95, 832 78 58

MUMBAI 400093  832 78 91, 832 78 92
Branches : AHMEDABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. COIMBATORE.
FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR. LUCKNOW.
NAGPUR. NALAGARH. PATNA. PUNE. RAJKOT. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
VISHAKHAPATNAM
( Reaffirmed 2004 )
IS : 11485- 1985
Indian Standard
CRITERIA FOR
HYDRAULIC DESIGN OF SLUICES IN
CONCRETE AND MASONRY DAMS
Chairman Rcpresen t ing

SRRI J. F. MISTRY Irrigation Department, Government of Gujarat,
~Gandhinagar
Members
DR A. S. CRAWLA University of Roorkee ( WRDTC ), Roorkee
CHIEF ENGINEER ( DAM DESIGN ) Irrigation Department, Government of Uttar
Pradesh, Lucknow
SHRI LAX~I NARAYAN ( Alternate )
CAIEF ENGINEER, CD0 Irrigation Department, Government of Andhra
Pradesh, Hyderabad
SUPERINTENDINGENGINEER
( DAMS ) ( Alternate )
CHIEF ENGINEER AND DII~EGTOR Maharashtra EngineeringResearch Institute, Nasik
SHRI K. A. GRAMPUROHIT ( Alternate )
CHIEZ ENGINEER ( PWD ) Irrigation Department, Government of Karnataka,
Mysore
SWERINTENDIN~ ENGINEER
ESIGNS) ( Alternate )
CHIiFD ENGINEER/R-• UM- Irrigation & Power Research Institute, Punjab,
DIRECTOR Amritsar
CHIEF ENGINEER, THEIN DAM Irrigation Department, Government of Punjab,
DESIGN Chandigarh
DII~ECTOR ( SPILLWAYS &
POWER PLANT ) ( Alternate )
CHIEF ENQIN~ER & DIRECTOR, Irrigation Department, Government of Tamil Nadu,
INSTITUTE OF HYDRAULICS & Madras
HYDROLOOY POONDI
DEPUTY DIRECTOR ( HYDRAULICS ) ( Alternate)
SHRI M. L. Dns Irrigation and Power Department, Government of
Orissa. Bhubaneswar
SHRI B. DASS Irrigation and Waterways Directorate, Government
of West Bengal, Calcutta
SHRI R. M. K~ATSURIA ( Alternate )
( Continued on page 2
@ Cqyright 1986
INDIAN STANDARDS INSTITUTION
This publication is protected under the Indiun Copyright Act ( XIV of 1957 j and
I publisher shall be deemed to be an infringement of copyright under the said Act.
IS:11485-1985
( Continues from page 1 )
DIRECTOR(CMDD-I) Central Water Commission, New Delhi
New Delhi j
SRRI K. K. FRAMJI Consulting Engineering Services ( India ) Pvt Ltd,
New Delhi
DR JAQDISH NARAIN Institution of Engineers ( India ), Calcutta
SHRI S. P. JAIN Bhakra Beas Management Board, Nangal Township
SRRI J. C. BASUR ( Alternate )
Snnr D. G. KADKADE Jaiprakash Associated Pvt Ltd, New Delhi
SRRI H. K. KHOSLA Irrigation Department, Government of Haryana,
-Chandigarh
SRRI M. L. GUPTA ( Alternate )
SHRI M. U. PURO~IT Irrigation Department, Government of Gujarat,
Gandhinagar
SHRI D. M. SAVU~~ The Hindustan Construction Co Ltd, Bombay
SUPERINTENDINO ENO~NEER Irrigation Department, Government of Maharashtra,
(MD) Bombay
SHRI V. N. PENDSE ( Alternate )
KUMARI PRATIMA NAIDU ( Alternate )
SHRI C. D. TRATTE Gujarat Engineering Research Institute, Vadodara
SHIZI B. K. RAO ( Alternate )
DR R. S. VARSHNEY Irrigation Department, Government of Uttar Pradesh,
Lucknow
SHRI G. RAMAN, Director General, IS1 ( Ex-ojicio Member )
Director ( Civ Engg )
Secretary
SHRI K. K. SHARMA
Joint Director ( Civ Engg ), IS1
IS:11485- 1985
Indian Standard
CRITERIA FOR
HYDRAULIC DESIGN OF SLUICES IN
CONCRETE AND MASONRY DAMS
0. FOREWORD
0.1This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards
Institution on 20 November 1985, after the draft finalized by the
~approved by the Civil Engineering Division Council.
0.2 Sluices are provided in the body of the dam to release regulated
supplies of water for a variety of purposes which are briefly listed below:
4 River diverson;
b) Irrigation;
c>Generation of hydro-electric power;
4 Water supply for municipal or industrial uses;
4 To pass the flood discharge in conjunction with the spillway;
f) Flood control regulation to release water temporarily stored in

flood control storage space or to evacuate the storage in anticipa-
tion of flood inflows;
d Depletion of the reservoir in order to facilitate inspection of the

reservoir rim and the upstream face of the dam for carrying out
remedial measures, if necessary;
h) To furnish necessary flows for satisfying prior right uses down-

stream; and
j> For maintenance of a live stream for abatement of stream

polation, preservation of aquatic life, etc.
0.3 The flow through a sluice may be either pressure flow or free flow
along its entire length or a combination of pressure flow in part length
and free flow in the remainder part.
0.4 In the formulation of this standard due weightage has been given to
International co-ordination among standards and practices prevailing in
IS:11485-1985
different countries in addition to relating it to the practices in the field

in this country. This has been met by deriving assistance from the
following publication:
EM-1 110-2-1602 Hydraulic design of reservoir outlet works, U.S.
Army ,Corps of Engineers.
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard lays down the criteria for hydraulic design of sluices
in concrete and masonry dams.
1.2 It does not cover the hydraulic design of openings for penstocks.
2. TYPES OF SLUICES
2.1 Sluices may be classified depending upon their purpose, their

hydraulic operation or their alignment. The first two types have been
described in 0.2 and 0.3. Based upon their alignment, sluices may be
classified as under.
2.1.1 Straight Barrel Sluice - The barrel of this sluice is kept nearly
horizontal between the entry and exit transitions ( see Fig. la). This
sluice has the advantage of having minimum length due to which lesser
friction losses take place.
2.1.1.1 Horizontal sluices are generally used under the following

conditions:
a) When the sluices are drowned at the exit; and

b) When they have to be located at or near the river bed level, for
example, in construction sluices for river diversion.
2.1.1.2 The width of the sluice barrel is generally kept uniform

throughout the length except in the entry transaction.
2.1.1.3 If the sluice is designed for pressure flow conditions then the
top profile of the sluice may be given a slight constriction in accordance
with 3.4.1. On the other hand, if free flow conditions prevail then no
such constriction is required.
2.1.2 Trajectory Type Sluice - The barrel of this sluice is generally

kept horizontal downstream of the entry transition up to the service gate
to facilitate resting of the latter. Beyond the service gate the bottom of
the sluice conforms to the parabolic path of the trajectory and meets the
downstream face of the dam section tangentially ( see Fig. 1 ).
4
IS : 11485- 1985
OoWNSrREAM FACE
OF SPILLWAY/NON-OVERFLOW
RGENCV GATE
IA Straight Barrel Sluice
UPSTREAM FACE
OF DAM
1B Trajectory Type Sluice
FIG. 1 TYPE OF SLUICE
2.1.2.1 The equation of the bottom profile after the service gate
shall be:.
x2 = k.H.y
where
k= coefficient ( A value of about 4 is generally used depend-
ing on the distance avaiIable to accommodate this curve
in the reach between the service gate and the downstream
face of the spillway/non-overflow section ).
H= head at the centre line of the gate opening.
x,y = co-ordinates of any point on the profik ( see Fig. lb ).
5
IS : 11485 - 1985
In case the trajectory profile defined by the above ~equation would

not permit meeting the downstream face tangentially, the adjustment of
pro& may be effected alternatively by introducing a small tilt in the
co-ordinate axes through a small transition zone just downstream of
service gate.
2.1.2.2 The width of the sluice is kept uniform throughout the length
except in the entry transition.
2.1.2.3 The height of the sluice is gradually reduced from down-

stream of the service gate to the exit in order to ensure pressure flow in
the sluce. The constriction shall be in accordance with 3.4.1.
3. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
3.1 Fixation of Size and Number of Sluices - The size and number
of sluices required to pass the desired discharge at a predetermined
reservoir elevation may be found based on the type of flow required to
be maintained in the sluice, that is, either pressure flow or free flow or a
combination of both. The sluice dimensions shall be so proportioned as
to provide a minimum of two number of sluices but simultaneously to
permit inspection and repair of the same.
3.1.1 Pressure Flow in the Sluice - For pressure flow conditions, the
following basic relation may be used:
HT = hL + hv
where
HT = total head needed to overcome various head losses to
produce discharge;
hL = the cumulative losses of the system in terms of velocity
head; and
hv == velocity head at the sluice exit.
For a free discharging sluice Hr shall be measured from the reservoir

water surface to the centre of the sluice at the exit. I~f the outflowing
jet is supported on a downstream floor the head shall be measured to the
point of greatest contraction and if the sluice is submerged at the exit
then the head shall be measured to the tail water level. The losses shall
consist of trashrock losses, entrance losses, friction losses, gate or valve
losses, bend losses, expansion and contraction losses. They may be ex-
pressed in terms of velocity head. The above equation may be re-written
in a simplified form as follows:
LIZ
HT = XL.---
2g
IS : 11485- 1985
2g HT
Then Q = al 7
J L
where
KL = constant, which is obtained after considering all the

losses in the system;
V- velocity in the portion of the sluice where the cross
sectional area is al;
al = cross sectional area of the sluice, where the velocity is V;
g = acceleration due to gravity; and

Q = ~i~~~,g,essa~v~~rpe~~v~~i~~gh the sluice at a predeter-
.
3.1.2 Frte Flow ( Open Channel Flow > in the Sluice
3.1.2.1 When open channel flow is controlled by regulating gates,

the following relation shall be used.
Q = --&/G C.L. ( HI 312 - Hi 313)
where
Q= discharge to be passed through the sluice;
g= acceleration due to gravity;

L= width of the sluice;
&Hz = heads ( including the velocity of approach ) up to the
bottom and top of the gate, respectively; and
C= coefficient of discharge ( see Table 1 ).
TABLE 1 COEFFICIENT OF DISCHARGE, C, FOR CONDUIT ENTRANCES

( Chzuu 3.1.2.1 )
PARTICULARS COEBFICIENT OF DISCHARGE, C

c___--__--_*.--_-_-_--_-1-‘-7
Maximum Minimum Average
Gate in thin wall-unsuppressed Il.70 0.60 O-63

contraction
Gate in thin wall-bottom and 0.81 0.68 0.70
sides suppressed
Gate in thin wall-corners 0’95 0.71 0.82
rounded
7
IS:11485 - 1985
3.1.2.2 When there is high rail water either due to canal water
supply level or downstream ituences in the streambed, the regulating
gate~opening may be either partly or entirely submerged. For the
unsubmerged part of the gate opening the discharge shall be calculated
according to 3.1.2.1. However, for the submerged part of the gate open-
ing discharge shall be calculated by the following relation:
Q= C.A. 1/ 2gH
where
Q = discharge through submerged portion of the gate open-
ing,
A = area of the submerged portion of the sluice,
H = difference between upstream and downstrem water levels,
and
C = coefficient of discharge for submerged orifice or tube

flow. ( Its value generally varies between 0.62 to 0.81).
3.1.3 For calculating the size of the sluice and plotting the water
surface profile maximum losses should be considered. However,
minimum losses shall be considered for the design of the energy dissipa-
tion arrangements for the flow through sluices.
3.2 Shape of Sluices - Generally rectangular gates are preferred.

Therefore, the shape of sluices is also normally kept rectangular. Generally
the height of the sluice is kept as 1.5 times the width. However, circular
shapes may also be provided when small diameter openings ( less than
one metre ) are required to be regulated by valves.
3.3 Entry Transitions - The efficient functioning of a sluice depends
to a great extent on the design of its entry transitions. TO obtain the
best inlet efficiency, the shape of the entrance should simulate that of a
jet discharging into air. A bell mouth entrance which conforms to or
slightly encroaches upon the free jet profile will provide the best entrance
shape. Elliptical entrances have been found to be suitable.
3.3.1 For a rectangular or square sluice the entrance transition may

be defined by the following equation
X2
_I __
02 + ( o.&q5 = l
where D is the vertical height of the sluice ( downstream of the entrance

curve ) for top and bottom curves and the horizontal width of the sluice
( downstream of the entrance curve ) for the side curves.
8
1s : 11485- 1985
3.3.2 For _a rectangular entrance with bottom placed even with

upstream floor, the side curves at the entrance may be defined by the
above equation. However, the top contraction curve may be given by
the following equation:
X2 YZ
02 + (0.67 D )2 = '
where D is the vertical height of the sluice downstream of the entrance
transition.
3.3.3 For a circular entrance the entry transition is given by the

following equation:
YZ
( O*5x; )Z + (0’15D)z = 1
where D is the diameter of the sluice downstream of the entrance transi-
tion.
3.4 Exit of the Sluice - The exit of the sluice shall be tangential to
either the downstream face of the spillway/non-overflow section or the
bucket or it may be upturned ( see Fig. 2 ).
3.4.1 In order to ensure the pressure flow conditions throughout the

length of the sluice and to avoid negative pressures the section of the
sluice should be constricted at the exit so as to give reduced cross-
sectional area commensurate with the increase in the velocity of flow. A
constriction of 10 to 15 percent in ilow area is generally found adequate
by effecting constriction in the roof profile only.
3.4.2 When the exit of the sluices is not drowned, the top profile of the
sluices is given a small turn of about 1.0 to 1.5 metres normal to the
downstream face of the spillway/non-overflow section. This helps in the
aeration of the sluice ( see Fig. 2 ).
3.4.3 In case of an upturned exit, the shape and dimensions of the

profile may be best worked out on the basis of the model studies. It has
to be used with caution in spillway/non-overflow sections because the
flow from the sluice may damage the energy dissipation arrangements of
the spillway or the downstream face of the spillway/non-overflow section,
if it falls over them. Alternatively, a jet disperser of suitable shape,
based on model studies may be provided.
3.4.4 In case the sluices are located in a spillway section, then no

separate energy dissipation arrangements are necessary. However, if
they are provided in a non-overflow section, then separate energy
dissrpation arrangements may have to be provided.
9
IS : 11485- 1985
TANGENTIAL TO
SPILLWAY PROFILE
i7
SLUlCE ___f
UPTURNED
SLUICE
__~ _
-\
\
FIG. 2 TYPESOF SLUICE EXIT

10
IS : 11485 - 1985
3.4.5 In case the spillway and sluice run together then either sluice
eyebrow deflectors Mary be provided on the exit of the sluice or aeration
be provided at the exit end.
3.5 Control Devices - The flow through sluices is controlled by either
gates or valves. Generally, two sets ~of gates, that is, emergency and
service gates are provided. In case of construction sluices, the flow is
generally uncontrolled and only stoplogs are provided for the eventual
plugging of the sluices. Where the construction sluices are required to
be closed under flowing water, provision of emergency gates may be
considered.
3.5.1 The control ( service ) gates shall be located as far upstream as
possible. The operation and servicing may be done from operation
galleries/chambers in the dam (see Fig. 3 ). In order to repair the
gates without emptying the reservoir should they become inoperative, the
usual practice is to install a guard or emergency gate further upstream in
the sluices. These emergency gates may be placed either at the entrance
or inside the sluice and operated from galleries.
1
UPSTREAM -AIR VENT
FACE OF SLUICE
/
OAM -., OPERATION
CHAMBER
GATE
NOTE - The above dimensions are suggestive only. These may be changed to
meet local requirements.
FIG. 3 A TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT WITH GATES OPERATION FROM
OPERATION CHAMBER ( DETAILS OF GATES AND HOBTS NOT SHOWN )
11
IS : 11485- 1985
3.5.2 Sometimes when the sluice have to be located at high levels near
the crest in the spillway section, where it is not possible to provide a
gallery for gates operation, the sluices may also be located in thick
spillway piers in which the gates are operated from the top of pier ( see
Fig. 4 ).
~SPILCWAY PER
SiEC-flGklAL PLAN AA
FIG. 4 TYPICAL DETAILS OF SLUICE LOCATED IN THICK SPILLWAY PIER
3.5.3 In case of high heads ( more than 30 m ) gate controls may also
be located near the downstream end of the sluice to minimize possibilities
of cavitation.
3.5.4 For better slot hydraulics, the gate slots should be as small as
practicable and adequately streamlined.
12
IS : 11485- 1985
3.6 Air Vents - Air vents of suitable size should be provided down-
stream of the control gates to supply air and thereby avoid or minimize
cavitation damages. The air demand for calculating the size of air vent
may be calculated from the following formulae:
i) For hydraulic jump formation in the conduit
fi = 0.006 6 ( FI, - 1 )l*J
ii) For spray flow
p = 0.20 F,,
iii) For free flow

p = 0.09 Fl,
where
volume flow rate of air
p = air-demand ratio
- volume flow rate of water
Fl, = Froude number at Vena contracta

= cc 1/ g he
VlC - Velocity of flow at the vena contracta
dl, = Depth of flow at the vena contracta
g = Acceleration due to gravity.
The size of air vents as determined above assume that the maximum
air demand occurs at a gate opening of 80 percent fully open and the
maximum air velocity in the vent does not exceed 50 m/s. Air vent
passages should use generous bend radi and gradual transitions to avoid
losses and particularly excessive noise. The air vent intakes should be
so located that they are inaccessible to the public and should be protected
by grills. The intake entrance average velocity should not exceed 10 m/s.
The air vent exit portal should be designed to ensure spread of air across
the full width of the conduit. The air vent should terminate into a
plenum located in the conduit roof and immediately downstream of the
gate. The plenum should extend across the full width of the conduit and
should be vaned so that the air flow is evenly distributed.
3.6.1 The size of the air vent should be such that the pressure drop
downstream of the gate does not normally exceed 2 m.
3.6.2 Hydraulic jump formation in the sluice should normally be
avoided. When unavoidable, sufficient clearance shall be provided
above the jump profile to avoid choked jump conditions.
3.6.3 Normally a sluice located in a spillway section should not

operate simultaneously with the spillway. However, if it is obligatory
13
IS : 11485 - 1985
to run the sluice in conjunction with the spillway, proper aeration should
be ensured at the exit either by running the sluice partially full or by
providing a suitable air-vent at the exit of the sluice.
3.6.4 Sometimes a steel liner may also be provided in the sluices near
the gates to avoid cavitation damages. In case of control being located
at the exit end, the entire length of sluice shall be provided with steel
liner.
3.7 Made1 Studies - Hydraulic model studies are desirable to test the
efficacy of the hydraulic design of the sluice and to verify the air-
demand. They should be done for the pre-determined minimum
reservoir elevation at which the sluice is designed to pass the required
discharge and also for higher reservoir elevations under the gate open-
ing necessary to pass the same discharge.
14
IS : 11527 - 1985
(Reaffirmed 2004)
Edition 1.1
(1988-09)
Indian Standard
CRITERIA FOR STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF
ENERGY DISSIPATORS FOR SPILLWAYS
(Incorporating Amendment No. 1)
UDC 627.838.04
© BIS 2005

MANAK BHAVAN , 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG
NEW DELHI 110002
Price Group 7
IS : 11527 - 1985
Indian Standard
SHRI J. F. MISTRY Irrigation Department, Government of Gujarat,
Gandhinagar
Members
SHRI R. K. AGGARWAL Irrigation Department, Government of Uttar
Pradesh, Lucknow
SHRI AMAR SINGH RAJPUT ( Alternate )
DR A. S. CHAWLA University of Roorkee (WRDTC), Roorkee
Pradesh, Hyderabad
(DAMS) ( Alternate )
CHIEF ENGINEER AND DIRECTOR Maharashtra Engineering Research Institute,
Nashik
CHIEF ENGINEER (PWD) Irrigation Department, Government of
Karnataka, Mysore
SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER (DESIGNS) ( Alternate )
CHIEF ENGINEER/R-cum-DIRECTOR Irrigation & Power Research Institute, Punjab,
Chandigarh
CHIEF ENGINEER, THEIN DAM DESIGN Irrigation Department, Government of Punjab,
Chandigarh
DIRECTOR (SPILLWAYS & POWER PLANT) ( Alternate )
SHRI M. L. DAS Irrigation & Power Department, Government of
SHRI B. DASS Irrigation & Waterways Directorate, Government
SHRI R. M. KHATSURIA ( Alternate )
DIRECTOR (CMDD-I) Central Water Commission, New Delhi
New Delhi
SHRI N. C. DUGGAL The Concrete Association of India, Bombay
SHRI J. N. SUKHADWALLA ( Alternate )
© BIS 2005
This publication is protected under the Indian Copyright Act (XIV of 1957) and
IS : 11527 - 1985
( Continued from page 1 )
SHRI K. K. FRAMJI Consulting Engineering Services (India) Pvt Ltd,
New Delhi
DR JAGDISH NARAIN Institution of Engineers (India), Calcutta
SHRI S. P. JAIN Bhakra Beas Management Board, Nangal
Township
SHRI J. C. BASUR ( Alternate )
SHRI H. K. KHOSLA Irrigation Department, Government of Haryana,
Chandigarh
Gandhinagar
REPRESENTATIVE Irrigation Department, Government of Tamil
Nadu, Madras
SHRI D. M. SAVUR The Hindustan Construction Co Ltd, Bombay
SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER (MD) Irrigation Department, Government of
Maharashtra, Bombay
SHRI V. N. PENDSE ( Alternate I )
KUMARI PRATIMA NAIDU ( Alternate II )
SHRI C. D. THATTE Gujarat Engineering Research Institute, Vadodara
DR R. S. VARSHNEY Irrigation Department, Government of Uttar
Pradesh, Lucknow
SHRI G. RAMAN, Director General, ISI ( Ex-officio Member )
Director (Civ Engg)
Secretary
SHRI K. K. SHARMA
Joint Director (Civ Engg), ISI
Adhoc Panel for Cirteria for Structural Design of Energy Dissipators

for Spillways, BDC 54 AP
SHRI V. G. LAGWANKAR Irrigation Department, Government of Mahara-
shtra, Bombay
SHRI V. N. PENDSE Irrigation Department, Government of Mahara-
shtra, Bombay
2
IS : 11527 - 1985
Indian Standard
0. F O R E W O R D
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards
approved by the Civil Engineering Division Council.
0.2 The design of downstream protection works or energy dissipators
below hydraulic structures occupies a vital place in the design and
construction dams, weirs and barrages. The problem of designing
energy dissipators is essentially of reducing high velocity flow to a
velocity low enough to minimize erosion of natural river bed. This
reduction in velocity may be accomplished by any, or a combination of
the following, depending upon the head, discharge intensity, tail water
conditions and the type of bed rock or the bed material:
a) Hydraulic jump type stilling basins:
1) Horizontal apron type; and
2) Sloping apron type;
b) Jet diffusion and free jet stilling basins:
1) Jet diffusion basins;
2) Free jet stilling basins;
3) Hump stilling basins; and
4) Impact stilling basins;
c) Bucket type dissipators:
1) Solid and slotted roller buckets; and
2) Trajectory buckets (ski jump, flip, etc);
d) Interacting jets and other special type of stilling basins.
0.3 In India, hydraulic jump type stilling basins and bucket type
energy dissipators are generally used for dissipation of energy
depending on condition of downstream tail water. Indian Standards
have already been issued for criteria for hydraulic design of these two
types of energy dissipators as under:
IS : 4997-1968 Criteria for design of hydraulic jump type stilling
basins with horizontal and sloping apron
3
IS : 11527 - 1985
IS : 7365-1974 Criteria for hydraulic design of bucket type energy

dissipators
0.4 This edition 1.1 incorporates Amendment No. 1 (September 1988).
Side bar indicates modification of the text as the result of
incorporation of the amendment.
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard lays down criteria for structural design of various
components of hydraulic jump type stilling basins and bucket type
energy dissipators below spillways and outlet works founded on rock.
2. NOTATIONS
2.1 For the purpose of this standard, the following notations shall have
the meaning indicated against each and as shown in Fig. 1 :
AL = Anchor depth
Ast = Area of steel
a = Area of bar
b = Width of tooth
D1 = Depth of flow at the beginning of the jump measured perpen-
dicular to the floor
D2 = Depth conjugate (sequent) to D1 for horizontal apron
D3 = D2 + floor slab thickness
d = Effective depth
da = Diameter of anchor hole
db = Diameter of bar
dt = Depth of bucket at invert elevation
Ft = Tensile yield strength of steel with factor of safety 1.2
Fb1 = Permissible bond stress between steel and grout
4
IS : 11527 - 1985
FIG. 1 DEFINITION SKETCH
Fb2 = Permissible bond stress between ground and rock

g = Acceleration due to gravity
H = Head of water
hb = Height of basin block
L = Length of anchor
n = Number of anchors per m2
q = Discharge intensity
R = Radius of bucket
Sb = Spacing between basin blocks
5
IS : 11527 - 1985
Tw = Tail water depth

tb = Thickness of stilling basin floor
tw = Width of bucket lip
Uh = Uplift head = Tw + dt
V = Velocity of flow
W = Density of water
Wc = Density of concrete
Wr = Density of rock
W3 = Width of basin block
α = Ratio of bucket thickness at invert elevation to radius of
d
bucket = -----t
R
β = Ratio of uplift head Uh to radius of bucket
= Angle between vertical and any radial line within exit angle
for bucket
θe = Exit angle of the bucket
θi = Inlet angle of the bucket
σst = Permissible tensile stress of steel
3. TERMINOLOGY
3.0 For the purpose of this standard, the following definitions shall
apply.
3.1 Hydraulic Jump Type Stilling Basin — A stilling basin in
which energy is dissipated by hydraulic jump principle.
3.2 Length of Stilling Basin — Dimension of the basin in the
direction of flow.
3.3 Width of Stilling Basin — Dimension of the basin perpendicular
to the direction of main flow.
3.4 Chute Blocks — Blocks provided at the entrance of the stilling
basin to stabilize the formation of hydraulic jump, to increased
effective depth, to break up flow into a number of water jets, to create
turbulence and to lift the jets off the floor to reduce basin length.
6
IS : 11527 - 1985
3.5 Basin Blocks or Baffle Blocks — Obstructions set in the path of
high velocity water, such as piers, on the apron of an overflow dam,
weir or drop and to dissipate energy thereby preventing scour
downstream to control the position of hydraulic jump.
3.6 End Sill — A vertical, stepped sloped or dentated wall constructed
at the downstream end of a stilling basin. It may be rectangular,
trapezoidal, Hornsby, Schoklits, Smetana or Rehbock type.
3.7 End Weir — Sharp or broad crested weir constructed at the end of
stilling basin floor to maintain adequate tail water level for all
discharge.
3.8 Key Wall — Small solid wall downstream of end weir penetrating
in foundation to prevent retrogression.
3.9 Solid Roller Bucket Dissipator — A bucket type energy
dissipator which consists of a bucket like apron with a concave profile
of considerable radius and a lip which deflects the high velocity flow
away from the stream bed and upward forming elliptical hydraulic
rollers, namely submerged rollers in the bucket, and ground rollers
downstream of the bucket. Energy dissipation is accomplished by the
interaction of the submerged roller in the bucket and the high
turbulence created on the water surface above and below the bucket.
Suitable when the tail water depth is moderately in excess of that
required for the formation of a hydraulic jump.
3.10 Slotted Roller Bucket — A bucket type energy dissipator in
which the lip wall is made up of alternate teeth and slots and below
which a sloping apron is provided. This construction of the bucket
materially reduces the intensity of surface boil and ground rollers.
3.11 Trajectory Bucket — A type of energy dissipator, employed in
cases where the tail water depth is less than that required for the
formation of hydraulic jump, by throwing water away from the toe of
the dam in the form of projectile into the air.
4. STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF STILLING BASIN FLOOR
4.1 General — The basin floor elevation is generally decided on basis
of foundation conditions and the length of the basin is decided on basis
of hydraulic considerations in accordance with IS : 4997-1968* and
breadth depends on number of openings and piers on spillway crest.
4.2 Design Forces — The basin floor slab is subjected to hydrostatic
uplift, pounding and vibrations from hydrodynamic forces in the
hydraulic jump. On a yielding foundation, it may suffer differential
*Criteria for design of hydraulic jump type stilling basins with horizontal and sloping
apron.
7
IS : 11527 - 1985
settlement, therefore the basin floor slab shall be designed for the
stresses induced due to above forces.
4.3 Floor Slab Anchorages — Following two extreme conditions may
prevail and critical of the two conditions shall be considered for design.
4.3.1 Case I — Stilling basin operating during spillway design flood as
shown in Fig. 2. Water surface over slab at hydraulic jump profile for
design discharge, that is spillway operating at MWL.
FIG. 2 CASE I SHOWING UPLIFT FORCES

4.3.2 Case II — Reservoir at FRL with gates closed when basin is
empty ( see Fig. 3 ).
NOTE — Case I is normally critical and same is considered for basin floor design. The
design of anchors may also be checked for Case II.
4.3.3 In view of drainage arrangements provided below the basin floor,

it may be adequate to design floor slab with uplift force equal to 0.5
( D2 + tb ) × W. Depth of water in stilling basin will fluctuate from D1
to D2 as per jump profile. Provision of effective drainage system below
stilling basin floor is necessary.
4.3.4 The number of anchors required in the upstream portion of apron
shall be designed for unbalanced uplift equal to
[ 0.5 ( D 2 × W + tb × w ) – ( D 1 × w + Wc × t b ) ]
No. of anchors ( n ) [ 0.5 ( D 2 × W + t b × W ) – ( D 1 × W + Wc t b ) ]

required per m2 = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a × Ft
8
IS : 11527 - 1985
FIG. 3 CASE II SHOWING UPLIFT FORCES
The number of bars will be rounded to next higher integer.
1
Spacing of anchors = ---
n
Net upward force

Actual force in each anchor = ------------------------------------------------
No. of bars
[ 0.5 ( D 2 × W + t b W ) – ( D 1 × W + Wc t b ) ]
= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
n
Actual force in each anchor

Required bond length = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
π × d b × F b1
or
Actual stress in each anchor
Required bond length = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
π × d a × F b2
The greater of the two should be adopted as anchor depth. The value
for permissible bond stress will vary for different site conditions and
proportion of grout. In absence of data assume following values for
1 : 2 grout proportion.
9
IS : 11527 - 1985
where
Fb1 = permissible bond stress between steel and grout
= 6 kg/cm2
Fb2 = permissible bond stress between grout and rock
= 4 kg/cm2
(Bond length shall be checked for bond between steel and
grout and also for bond between rock and grout).
db = diameter of bar.
da = diameter of anchor hole.
4.3.5 Notwithstanding results of above calculations, minimum 3.0 m
long anchors shall be provided and dia of bar shall not be less than 25
mm. The diameter of hole into which anchors are placed and grouted
shall be not less than 1.5 times diameter of anchor bar designed. The
maximum spacing of anchor bars shall be 3 m centre to centre
staggered in plan.
4.3.6 Check for Dislodging of Rock Mass Anchored Against Uplift
Pressure — Length of anchors shall be sufficient to engage a conical
mass of rock with a vortex angle of 45° the submerged weight of which
will withstand the net upward force ( see Fig. 4 ).
FIG. 4 DETAILS OF ANCHOR AND GROUT HOLE
10
IS : 11527 - 1985
Total uplift pressure on plane ‘ZZ’ per unit areas shown in Fig. 4
D2 + tb
= W  ------------------
-+L
 2 
Total uplift pressure per unit area = Weight of slab + weight of rock
D2 + tb
W  ------------------
- + L  = Wc × tb + Wr L

2
0.5 W ( D 2 + t b ) – W c × t b
Therefore L = ------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
( Wr – W )
4.4 Basin Floor Slab Thickness — The thickness of floor slab
depends on the foundation conditions and magnitude of uplift forces. A
slab of about 600 mm thickness is the minimum recommended. Actual
slab thickness needed shall be determined by analysing hydrostatic
uplift and differential foundation movement.
4.4.1 Floor Slab Reinforcement — In thick slabs on rock foundations
normally covered with tail water, structural reinforcement is not
necessary except possibly in the baffles. Uplift on a slab should be
taken care of by adequate anchors. The slab is divided into
independent approximately square panels by contraction joints
parallel and perpendicular to channel or basin centre line to avoid
serious shrinkage and temperature cracking with the use of nominal
reinforcement which does not extend across the joints. Size of panel
should be large enough to resist destorting hydrodynamic forces, at the
same time the quantity of concrete in a panel may be manageable to be
completed by available machinery in one single stretch. Panels should
be cast in alternate bays with construction joints.
4.4.2 The independent panels of slab are reinforced with small amount
of steel to prevent harmful cracking resulting from shrinkage and
temperature stresses not relieved by contraction joints and on yielding
foundations to avoid possible cracking from differential settlement.
Usually, a slab on unyielding foundation is reinforced in the top face
only because bond between the concrete and rock at the bottom is
relied on to distribute shrinkage cracks and to minimize bending
stresses in the anchored slab for the assumed uplift head. The
minimum amount of reinforcement for independent panels on
unyielding rocks is 20 mm bars at 300 mm centre-to-centre both
ways. Additional reinforcement shall be provided for unfavourable
foundation condition or for high hydrostatic uplift pressure.
4.4.3 On relatively yielding rock foundations, the independent floor
panels are subject to possible differential movement of adjacent blocks
11
IS : 11527 - 1985
and a key at each transverse contraction joint (extending into foundation
under the joint attached to the slab downstream and supporting the slab
upstream from the joint) may be required to prevent the downstream
side of a joint from being raised above the upstream side as water at high
velocity striking such a projection would increase the hydrostatic
pressure in the joint and hence the uplift under the slab. The higher the
velocity the more serious will be the condition resulting from such
relative movement. The keys also increase resistance to possible
movement and serve as seepage cutoffs down-stream from transverse
drains. For details of key 7.2.3 of IS : 5186-1969* may be referred.
4.4.4 Concrete and Reinforcement Cover — The concrete of M-15 grade
up to 40 m (crest-apron level) and concrete of M-20 grade above 40 m
fall shall be provided. Chute floor and stilling basin slab shall have
minimum 100 mm cover for reinforcement.
4.5 Basin Blocks or Baffle Blocks (Structural Provisions)
4.5.1 General — Location and optimum shape of baffle blocks shall be
decided on the basis of IS : 4997-1968†. The dimensions of the basin
blocks are shown in Fig. 5. The purpose of the block is to dissipate
energy and thereby to reduce the length of basin.
FIG. 5 BASIN BLOCK

*Criteria for design of chute and side channel spillways.
†Criteria for design of hydraulic jump type stilling basins with horizontal and sloping
apron.
12
IS : 11527 - 1985
hb = height of basin block,

Sb = spacing between the blocks,
Wb = width of block, and
D2 = conjugate depth.
4.5.2 Forces on Basin Blocks — Dynamic force against the upstream

face of the baffle blocks is approximately that of a jet impinging upon a
plane normal to the direction of flow.
Force P acting at hb/2 = 2WA ( D1 + hv1 )
where
W = unit weight of water,
A = area of upstream face of block, and
( D1 + hv1 ) = specific energy of the flow entering the basin.
4.5.2.1 Negative pressure on the back face of the blocks will further
increase the total load. However, this may be neglected if above equation
is used. Baffle block is to be designed as cantilever as shown in Fig. 6.
FIG. 6 FORCES ON BASIN BLOCK
4.5.3 Reinforcement — The reinforcement shall be calculated by the

following formula and placement of the reinforcement is shown in
Fig. 7 and 8.
M -
Area of steel Ast = -------------------
σ st .j. d.
13
IS : 11527 - 1985
FIG. 7 VERTICAL SECTION SHOWING GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

OF REINFORCEMENT
FIG. 8 PLAN AT BOTTOM OF BLOCK

where
M = moment due to force P (defined in 4.5.2 ),
h
= P × -----b- ,
2
σst = permissible tensile stress of steel, and
d = depth of block.
NOTE 1 — The baffle block is tied into the floor slab by reinforcing steel in it.
NOTE 2 — All reinforcing steel in a baffle block is placed minimum 150 mm from the
exposed surface because of the possible erosive and cavitation action of the high
velocity currents.
14
IS : 11527 - 1985
4.6 Chute Blocks — Nominal reinforcement of about 20 mm at 300
c/c both ways may be provided on all exposed faces duly anchored in
apron concrete.
5. SPILLWAY BUCKET REINFORCEMENT
5.1 Solid Roller Bucket — ( See Fig. 9 and 10 ).
FIG. 9 TYPICAL SECTION OF A BUCKET

5.1.1 Forces and Moments — Horizontal force on the bucket is due to
change in momentum and is given by the following formulae:
Total horizontal force on the lip ( F ) = WbV

------------- ( 1 – cos θ e )
g
F × R ( 1 – cos θ e )
Moment of the horizontal force about plane A-A,M = ------------------------------------------------
-
2
Effective depth d of bucket for resisting moment ( M )
2 2
d = R + ( R sin θ e + t w ) – R – effective cover
5.2 Reinforcement — Area of the steel Ast to resist moment M is

M -
given by Ast = -------------------
σ st .j.d.
15
IS : 11527 - 1985
FIG. 10 FORCES ON THE BUCKET DUE TO MOVING WATER

Provide minimum steel (along flow) 20 mm at 300 c/c
Provide distribution steel = 20 percent of main steel. Minimum 16 mm
at 300 c/c
(Refer Fig. 9).
5.3 Anchorage of Spillway Bucket — ( See Fig. 11 ).
Assuming 50 percent of the uplift force
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (Provision of effective drainage
Net upward force/unit area = F u system for bucket is essential)
1 1
 --- ( sin 2 θ + sin2 θ ) + --- ( θ + θ ) 
4 e i 2 e i
F u = R 0.5 βW – Wc α – W c  1 – -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 ( sin θ e + sin θ i ) 
Anchorage steel/unit area = Fu/Ft
R 0.5 Wβ – W c α –
A st = ------
Ft
1 1
 --- ( sin 2 θ + sin2 θ ) + --- ( θ + θ ) 
4 e i 2 e i
W c  1 – -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16
IS : 11527 - 1985
FIG. 11 UPLIFT AND BODY FORCES ON THE BUCKET

A st 1
Number of anchors per m2, n = -------
- and spacing of anchors = ---.
a n
5.3.1 Length of Anchors — The length of anchor bars is governed by
the bond strength and density of rock, the criteria being that the
stresses on horizonal plane passing through the bottom end of anchor
bars should not be more than permissible tensile stress in the rock
(this is usually taken as zero except in hard sound rocks). A cone of
rock having vertex angle of 45° is assumed to be bonded to anchor bar.
As the anchors are usually provided at close spacing (0.75 m to 2.5 m
c/c), the cones of bonded rock will be overlapping ( see Fig. 12 ). It is,
therefore, possible to consider the entire rock mass up to bottom end of
anchors as countering the uplift forces on the plane Z — Z, without
introducing significant errors.
5.3.1.1 Considering the equilibrium of vertical forces on plane Z — Z,
we have net upward force at the base of bucket/unit area + additional
uplift head ( for depth L ) bounded by planes AA and ZZ.
17
IS : 11527 - 1985
FIG. 12 ANCHOR BARS FOR COUNTERING UPLIFT

If L is the length of anchors below bucket foundation (that is,
vertical distance between planes AA and ZZ).
On substitution, we get,
1 1
 --- ( sin 2 θ + sin2 θ ) + --- ( θ + θ ) 
4 e i 2 e i
R 0.5 W β – W c α – W c ×  1 – -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ W.L. = Wr L
where density of rock ( Wr ) is taken same as that of concrete ( Wc ).
Re-arranging and substituting we have
A st F t
L = ------------------
-
Wr – W
The above equation has been derived on the basis that no tension is
permissible in the foundation rock. However, in sound and hard rocks,
some tension can be allowed in rock to reduce anchor length.
18
IS : 11527 - 1985
If σr is the permissible tension in rock, then it can be seen that the
above equation gets modified as
A st F t – σ r
L = ----------------------------
-
Wr – W
5.3.2 Check for Bond Length — Length of anchor bars obtained from
considerations of the preceding clause should be checked for bond
failure as explained in 4.3.4 and 4.3.5. The anchors are grouted in holes
drilled by standard drill bits. In addition to bond between bar and
grout, bond between the grout and rock should also be checked which,
in most cases, is the weakest link. The usual practice is to assume a
bond strength of 4 kg/cm2 between the grout and rock contract surface.
6. SLOTTED ROLLER BUCKET STRUCTURAL PROVISION
6.1 General
6.1.1 Dimensions of the roller bucket can be worked out on the basis of
IS : 7365-1975*. Definition sketch is shown in Fig. 1. For anchor
design 5.3 will be applicable. Provision of effective drainage system
below the bucket is essential.
6.1.2 A vertical contraction joint perpendicular to the flow in the bucket
is proposed at the invert elevation of the bucket and another vertical joint
is given at junction of 8° and 16° aprons as shown in Fig. 20. Generally
one panel consists of two teeth, one full slot and two half slots with
transverse joints in between panels as shown in Fig. 13. With
modifications different panel arrangements can also be adopted.
6.1.3 Discharge/m = q = Q/L m3/s/m
where
Q = total design discharge at MWL;
L = length of bucket spillway;
V = 2 g H m/s;
H = fall of water (head) from MWL to bucket invert.
6.2 Design of Reinforcement for Bucket Tooth — (Figure 14
shows definition sketch of bucket tooth.)
6.2.1 Horizontal force on tooth above plane ‘AB’ is shown in Fig. 14.
F 1 = W.q.V.
------------------- ( cos φ – cos θ e ) × b ( approx )
g
*Criteria for hydraulic design of bucket type energy dissipators ( under revision ).
19
IS : 11527 - 1985
The tooth has to be designed as a cantilever (vertical) fixed at
bottom AB and b = width of bucket tooth at downstream end.
Bending moment M = F 1 × h --- where h = height of tooth as shown in
Fig. 14. 2
FIG. 13 PLAN SHOWING PANEL WITH TWO TEETH
FIG. 14 DEFINITION SKETCH OF BUCKET TOOTH
20
IS : 11527 - 1985
M -
6.2.2 Area of steel ( Ast ) = -------------------
σ st .j.d.
where
d = effective depth = ( R cos φ ) 2 + ( R sin θ e + 0.05 R ) 2 – R – cover

a)Main steel (to be provided along curve), and
b)Distribution steel = 20 percent of main steel (to be provided in
portion below plane AB in Fig. 14).
NOTE 1 — Check that minimum reinforcement is 20 mm , 7 numbers per tooth.
NOTE 2 — Cover in radial direction should be minimum 80 mm.
6.2.3 Design of Links for Tooth — Provide 20 mm link
reinforcement at 300 mm c/c around tooth in the direction
perpendicular to flow. Distribution steel for links shall be provided on
three side faces of tooth and shall be 20 mm at 300 mm c/c.
6.3 Design of Reinforcement for 8° Apron — Provide nominal
reinforcement as under:
a) Along flow (main steel) = 20 mm at 300 mm c/c, and
b) Perpendicular to flow (distribution steel) = 16 mm at 300 mm c/c.
6.4 Design of Reinforcement for 16° Apron — Horizontal force on
16° apron
W.q.V
F 2 = -------------------2- ( cos 8° — cos 16° )
g
where
b1 V
V 2 = ------------
b2
b1 = width of slot at entry
b2 = width of slot at exit
The horizontal force on apron is due to change in direction as above
h2
and it acts at ------ above apron level ( h2 = size of 16° apron ).
2
h2
Bending moment = F 2 × ------
2
B.M. - = A
Area of steel = -------------------- st
σ st .j.d 2
21
IS : 11527 - 1985
22
FIG. 15 REINFORCEMENT DETAILS FOR BUCKET, TOOTH AND APRON

IS : 11527 - 1985
where
d2 = effective depth for 16° apron = h2 cos 16° — cover
NOTE — Minimum steel shall be provided as mentioned in 6.3.
6.5 Sample calculations are given in Appendix A.
APPENDIX A
( Clause 6.5 )
SAMPLE CALCULATIONS FOR SLOTTED ROLLER BUCKET
1) Exit angle θe = 45° 5) Radius of bucket = 9.0 m

2) Length of bucket = 237.0 m 6) Invert level of bucket = R.L. 403.50 m
3) Discharge θ at MWL 7) Junction of 8° and 16° apron
= 14 501 cumecs = R.L. 404.37 m
4) Width of tooth at d/s end 8) MWL = R. L. 434.800 m
= 1.125 m
14 501
Discharge q = ------------------- = 61.185 cumecs
237
Say q = 62 cumecs/m
according to 6.1.3.
V= 2g H
= 2 × 9.81 × 31.30 = 24.781 m/s

where H = Fall of water (head) from MWL to bucket invert
(434.800 — 403.50) = 31.30 m
A-1. DESIGN OF REINFORCEMENT FOR BUCKET TOOTH
Horizontal force on tooth above plane AB
W.q.V
F 1 = ----------------- ( cos φ – cos 45 ° ) × b
g
23
IS : 11527 - 1985
according to 6.2.1
Radius – ( junction of 8° and 16° apron – invert level )
where cos = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Radius
9 – ( 404.37 – 403.5 )
= ----------------------------------------------------------
9
∴ = 25.4°
1 000 × 62 × 24.78
∴ F1 = ---------------------------------------------------- × 0.196 2 × 1.125
9.81
F1 = 34 568.1 kg
Horizontal (water) Force = F1
h
acting at a distance --- from bottom.
2
h = 1.765 m (height of tooth)
h
B.M. = F1 × --- (6.2.1)
2
= 30 506.35 kgm
Effective depth d = ( R cos φ )2 + ( R sin θ e + 0.05 R ) 2 — R — cover

∴ d = 152 cm
B.M.
Area of steel Ast = -------------------- ( see 6.2.2 )
σ st .j.d.
30 506.35 × 100 2
= ---------------------------------------------------- cm
1 150 × 0.84 × 152
= 20.78 cm2
Provide 20 mm bars, 7 numbers per tooth.
Distribution steel 20 percent of main steel = 4.4 cm2
Provide 12 mm bars at the rate of 250 mm c/c below plane AB.
Design of Links — Provide 20 mm link reinforcement at 300 mm
c/c around tooth in the direction perpendicular to flow. Distribution
steel for links shall be provided on three side faces of tooth and shall be
20 mm at 300 mm c/c.
24
IS : 11527 - 1985
A-2. DESIGN OF REINFORCEMENT FOR 8° APRON
Provide nominal reinforcement as under:
a) Along flow = 20 mm 300 mm c/c.
b) Perpendicular to flow = 16 mm at 300 mm c/c.
A-3. DESIGN OF REINFORCEMENT FOR 16° APRON
Horizontal force on 16° apron
W.q.V
F 2 = -------------------2- ( cos 8° – cos 16° )
g
according to 6.4.
where
b1 V 0.838 × 24.78
V 2 = ------------ = ------------------------------------- = 46.145 m/s
b2 0.450
∴ F2 = 8 458 kg
h
B.M. = F2 × -----2-
2
where h2 is rise of 16° apron = 1.3 m
1.3
∴ B.M. = 8 458 × --------
2
= 5 498 kg.m
B.M.
Ast = --------------------- ( see 6.4 )
σ st j.d 2
where d2 = ( h2 cos 16° — cover ) = 1.25 — 0.1 = 1.15 m
549 800 2
∴ A st = ---------------------------------------------------- = 4.95 cm
1 150 × 0.84 × 115
Min Steel provided — a) Along flow = 20 mm at 300 mm c/c
b) Perpendicular to flow = 16 mm at 300 mm
c/c.
25
INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS (SI UNITS)
Base Units
QUANTITY UNIT SYMBOL

Length metre m
Mass kilogram kg
Time second s
Electric current ampere A
Thermodynamic kelvin K
temperature
Luminous intensity candela cd
Amount of substance mole mol
Supplementary Units
Plane angle radian rad
Solid angle steradian sr
Derived Units
QUANTITY UNIT SYMBOL DEFINITION
Force newton N N = 1 kg.m/s2
Energy joule J 1 J = 1 N.m
Power watt W 1 W = 1 J/s
Flux weber Wb 1 Wb = 1 V.s
Flux density tesla T 1 T = 1 Wb/m2
Frequency hertz Hz 1 Hz = 1 c/s (s–1)
Electric conductance siemens S 1 S = 1 A/V
Electromotive force volt V 1 V = 1 W/A
Pressure, stress pascal Pa 1 Pa = 1 N/m2
Copyright
form without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use, in the course
of implementing the standard, of necessary details, such as symbols and sizes, type or grade
designations. Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director (Publications), BIS.
reviewed periodically; a standard along with amendments is reaffirmed when such review indicates
that no changes are needed; if the review indicates that changes are needed, it is taken up for
revision. Users of Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest
amendments or edition by referring to the latest issue of ‘BIS Catalogue’ and ‘Standards : Monthly
Additions’.
This Indian Standard has been developed by Technical Committee : BDC 54

Amend No. Date of Issue
Amd. No. 1 September 1988

Headquarters:
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110002. Telegrams: Manaksanstha
Telephones: 323 01 31, 323 33 75, 323 94 02 (Common to all offices)
Central : Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg  323 76 17

NEW DELHI 110002  323 38 41
Eastern : 1/14 C. I. T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Kankurgachi  337 84 99, 337 85 61


KOLKATA 700054  337 86 26, 337 91 20
Northern : SCO 335-336, Sector 34-A, CHANDIGARH 160022  60 38 43

 60 20 25
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, CHENNAI 600113  235 02 16, 235 04 42

 235 15 19, 235 23 15
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri (East)  832 92 95, 832 78 58

MUMBAI 400093  832 78 91, 832 78 92
Branches : AHMEDABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. COIMBATORE.
FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR. LUCKNOW.
NAGPUR. NALAGARH. PATNA. PUNE. RAJKOT. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
VISHAKHAPATNAM
( Reaffirmed 1998 )
1S :11570-1985
Indian Standard
CRITERIAFOR
HYDRAULIC DESIGN OF IRRIGATION
INTAKE STRUCTURES
Intake Structures Sectional Committee, BDC 55
SHRI K. MADHAVAN Central Water Commission, New Delhi; and
Institution of Engineers, New Delhi
Membe m
SHRI S. CHAKRABARTI Common India Limited, Bombay
——.—..... .- . .--._.._._ -. -
SHRI S. R. MUNIPALLI ( Alternate )
/.
CHIEF ENGINEER-I ( IRRIGATION ) Institute of Hydraulics Hydrology, Poondi
AND DPLECTOR
ASSISTANT DIRECTOR-I (HYDRAULICS ) ( Alternate )
CHIEF ENGINEER(THEIN DAM Irrigation Works, Government of Punjab,
DESIGN) Chandigarh
DIRECTOR (TRP) ( Alternate )
SHRI J. D’CRUZ Delhi Water Supply Undertaking, New Delhi
SHRXS. A. SWAMY ( Alternate )
DIRECTOR (HCD)-I Central Water Commission, New Delhi .
“DEPUTY DIRECTOR ( PH-I ) ( Alternate)
DIRECTOR Central Water and Power Research Station, ,
Pune
SHRI V. K. KULKARNI ( Alternate )
MANAGING DIRECTOR Tamil Nadu Public Works Engineering
Corporation Ltd, Madras
SHRI MOHENDJR SINGH Irrigation Department, Government of Uttar
Pradesh, Lucknow
DR A. V. NATARAJAN Central Inland Fisheries Research Institute,
Barraojoire
SHR1 A. B. MUKHERJEE ( Alternate )
SHRI”T. C. PAUL Irrigation and Power Research Institute,
Amritsar
SHRI N. RAMASWAMY Irrigation Department, Government of Gujarat
Gandhinagar
SHRI B. J. SHAH ( Alternate )
@ Copyright 1986
This publication is protected under the Indian CopyrightAct ( XIV of
1957 ) and
publisher shall be deemed to be an Infringement of copyright under the said Act.
—
—.”,,..>— —----- - — .--—. - - -’ 1’ ,’ ‘ ,\
,.
-,
.
IS:11570 -1985
( Continuedfrom page 1 )
SECRETARY Centr;l$oard of Irrigation and Power, New
JOINT SECRETARY(Alternate )
DR H. R. SHARMA Central Electricity Authority, New Delhi
SUPERINTENDINGENGINEER Irrigation Department, Government of Maha-
rashtra. Nasik
SHRI N . VISVANATHAN National Hidroelectric Power Corporation
Limited, New Delhi
SHRI G. RAMAN, Director General, 1% (&-officio Member)
Director (Civ Engg)
Secretary
SHRI P. SATYANARAYANA
Assistant Director (Civ Engg), IS1
2
IS : 11570- 1985
Indian Standard
CRITERIA FOR
HYDRAULIC DESIGN OF IRRIGATION
INTAKE STRUCTURES
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution
on 6 December 1985, after the draft finalized by the Intake Structures
Sectional Committee had been approved by the Civil Engineering
Division Council.
0.2 An intake is provided in an irrigation development to allow water
into a channel or tunnel under controlled conditions. The intake design
shall be such as to:
a) give minimum hydraulic losses,
b) provide smooth entry into the water conductor system, and
c) prevent/minimize ice, floating trash and coarse sediment entering
the tunnel or channel.
0.3 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this
standard is complied with, the final value, observed or calculated, express-
ing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with the IS : 2-1960”. The number of significant places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this
standard.
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard lays down the criteria for hydraulic design of irrigation
intake structures. Typical layouts of intake structures are also covered
in this standard.
2. TYPES AND CHOICE OF INTAKES
2.1 The position and location of an intake generally depend upon the
type of intake and may be broadly classified as under:
a) Run-of the river type intakes, and
b) Reservoir type intakes.
2.2 Run-of the River Type Intake
2.2.1 Run-of the river type intakes are those which draw water from
the fresh continuous river inflows without any appreciable storage
upstream of the diversion structure. A typical sketch of intake to meet
*Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised).

3
IS : 11570- 1985
special characteristics, such as steep slopes, high peaks and short duration
flood flows and high sediment loads, is shown in Fig. 1.
.RIGHf BANK CANAL
r
RIGHT BANK
HEAD WORKS
FLOW
FT BANK HEAD WORKS
SLUICE FLOW
SLUICE GATE
CREST OF DIVERSION
GUIDE WALL
1B Modified Design of Head Works

FIG. 1 RUN-OF RIVER TYPE INTAKE
4
I$ : 11570- 1985
2.2.1.1 Intakes adjacent to diversion weir/barrage - In a run of the

river type development without any diurnal pondage, an intake of irriga-
tion water conductor system is placed upstream of diversion dam or
barrage. A typical layout is shown inFig. 2.
FLUSHING CANAL
DESlLTlNG SLUICE
X
t
IRRI%ATION CANAL
v. STILLING BASIN AND ENERGY

DISSIPATION ARRANGEMENT
SECTION XX
FIG. 2 TYPICAL CANAL INTAKE
2.2.1.2 Drop type intake - A diversion structure, consisting of a

trench weir and trashrack structure over it, is constructed across moun-
tain streams to entrap the entire minimum discharges of the river. The
trench may be either in the river bed or in the weir (raised above the
river bed) as per typical layout shown in Fig. 3 and Fig. 4.
2.3 Reservoir Type Intake
2.3.1 Reservoir type intake is provided where discharges for irrigation

are drawn from storage built up for this purpose. Depending on the
head, this is further categorized as under:
a) Low head (up to 15 m),

b) Medium head (15 to 30 m), and
4 High head (above 30 m).
5
y-OPENING HANDLE FOR SINGLE FLUSHING GATE
GATE GROOVE
ATE CONTROL PLATFORM
N S L
/--------
N S L
____--_------ -----------5.
FLUSHING
-/
CONDUIT
3B Sectional Elevation
FIG. 3 DROPTYPEIRRIGATIONINTAKETRENCHIN RIVER BED
ENCH WEIR (TRASH RACK CURTAIN WALLS
NOT SHOWNI m
..
SLOPE 3:1 =
2
UIS RIVER DIS RIVER 7
BED BED
%
zi
GATE GROOVE
FLUSHING SLUICE
EMBANKMENT
4A General
FIG. 4 DROP TYPE IRRIGATION INTAKE ( TRENCH IN THE WEIR ) -:Contd
OPERATING PLAlrUKh(
STOP LOG GATE
A /-BREAST WALI ’
HEAD REGULATOR GATE
~-CEMENT
CEMENT CONCRETE LEAN CONCRETE
1:4:8 (300mm) CONCRETE l:4%
(300 mm)
4B L-Section Through Intake
TONE PITCHING
coNCRETE E
..
CEMENT CONCRETE z
I 1:4:8 I 3
0
4C L-Section Through Flushing Duct I
FIG. 4 DROP TYPE IRRIGATION INTAKE ( TRENCH IN THE WEIR ) G

E
IS:11570-1985
2.3.1.1 Intake in concrete or masonry dams - In the case of concrete

or masonry dams irrigation intake structure can be located either at the
toe when operating head is low or in the body of the dam itself when
operating head is medium or high. Typical layouts are shown in Fig.
5A, 5B and 5C.
2.3.1.2 Intake in earthen dams - When the reservoir is formed by
an earthern dam, the irrigation tunnel is laid below it or in the abutment.
The intake structure for such situations will be a sloping intake or tower
type of intake. Typical layouts for sloping and tower type intakes are
shown in Fig. 6A, 6B and 6C respectively. As far as possible, reinforced
cement concrete pressurized system should be avoided in the body of the
earth dam. Measures like provision of steel liners and suitable drainage
downstream of core, provisions of joints for differential settlements when
not founded on rock should be considered in case pressure conduits are
provided under earth dams.
‘lop: “ARIES FROM 1.5 :,

- tn ,..
i) APPROACH GEOMETRY
5A Semicircular Type Intake Structure - Contd
10
IS : 11570- 1985
BELL MOUTH
‘BOTTOM LINE
SEWCIRCULAR FROM RECT.

TRASH RACK AR SECTION
ii) ELEVATION
PIERS
iii) PLAN
5A Semicircular Type Intake Structure
FIG. 5 RESERVOIR TYPE IRRIGATION INTAKE STRUCTURESIN

CONCRETE/MASONRY DAMS - Contd
11
AXIS OF $ OF GATE GALLERY
JET FLOW GATE
9
AIR VENT
+ I
LGATE SLOT LCONDUlf
5B
APRON
;r)
Typical
BELLMOUTH
Installation in a Concrete/Masonry Dams - ContiJ

FIG. 5 RESERVOIRTYPE IRRIGATION INTAKE STRUCTURESIN
CONCRETE/MASONRYDAMS
1 MASONRY
EMERGENCY AND SERVICE

I- INTAKE WELL I DAM
GATE
AIR VENi PIPE
CONDUIT
TRASH RACK
0: MAXIMUM BETWEEN
D1 AND D2
INTAKE WALLA
5C Typical Installation in a koncrete/Masonry Dams

FIG. 5 RESERVOIRTYPE IRRIGATION INTAKE STRUCTURESIN
CONCRETE/MASONRY DAMS
‘i OF MAIN INTAKE SHAFT
r1RAS.H RACK
VALVE CHAMBER
MAIN INTAKE FOR T
FINAL STAGE OPER
TRASH
LOW LEVEL INTAKE L SQUARE TRANSITION L MS CONDUIT

FOR INITIAL STAGE SECTION I LOCATION OF CIRCULAR
OPERATION (MAIN PLUG1
INTAKE PLUGGED)
Frc.6A TYPICAL INSTALLATION IN AN EARTH DAM - SLOPINGINTAKE

IS :11570- 1985
TRASH
RACK.
0.8 01 I rTRA8H RACK
BELL MOUTH J
TUNNE 1
‘kTRAlGH1 LELBOW
LENGJH
FIG. 6B TYPICAL INSTALLATION IN AN EARTH DAM

TOWER TYPE INTAKE( TYPE I )
AIR VENT
PIPE
-ST AUNC HIM6

‘WING WALL EARTH DAM
. RING
I
/CONDUIT
WALL
r
L INTAKE WALL
D = Maximum Between D. and &

FIG. 6C TYPICAL INSTALLATIONIN AN EARTH DAM
TOWER TYPE INTAKE ( TYPE II )
15
IS : 11570- 1985
2.3.1.3 Intake in reservoir independent of dam - In case of a high-

head installation; irrigation tunnel taking off from a storage reservoir,
the intake is located at a distance from the dam. The intake structure of
such a layout will be either tower type semicircular, circular, rectangular
or inclined.
3. LAYOUT OF INTAKE STRUCTURE

3.1 Main components of an irrigation intake structure are listed below:
a) Trashrack and supporting structures;
b) Anti-vortex devices;
c) Bell-mouth entrance with transition and rectangular to circular
opening; and
d) Gate slot enclosures with air vents.
3.1.1 The efficient and economic design of an intake to serve the
functions set out in 0.2 will depend upon the conditions prevailing in
each development. In 5.3.3 and 5.3.5 few formulae have been suggested
which may be modified to suit any special condition. Hydraulic model
studies may be necessary under special conditions.
3.2 The main types of layouts are given below.
3.2.1 Canal Intake - In low-head deve!opment, the intake admits
water into diversion/irrigation canal. Sediment excluder or trap is an
essential component of this type of intake. The invert at inlet is
generally raised to form a sill to prevent the entry of coarse fraction of-
bedload into the canal. A skimmer wall to prevent the floating material
and trashrack to check entry of submerged heavy bodies, such as tree
trunks, are provided at the entrance. Stilling basin and energy dissipation
devices on the downstream of intake, as shown in Fig. 2, are also
required. In the case of trench provided either in the river bed or in the
weir, desilting basin is located in the canal and the sediment entrapped is
removed either manually or by flushing sluices. In some situations
desilting tunnels may also be provided upstream of intake (see
IS : 6531-1972* and IS : 9761-19817).
3.2.2 Semicircular Type of Intake Structure - In this layout, the
structure supporting the rack is formed in a semicircle in plan in front of
the tunnel opening so that no parts of rack fall within a radius of 1’143 B
froni face of opening, where B is the width of opening of tunnel. The
main features of semicircular intake structure are:
a) Semicircular trashrack structure;
b) Bell-mouth entrance to tunnel;
*Criteria for design of canal head regulators.

tcriteria for hydraulic design of hydropower intakes.
16
IS : 11570- 1985
c) Gate slot enclosures with air vent (Typical details are shown in
Fig. 5A, 5B and 5C >; and
d) Transition from rectangular to circular conduit.
3.2.3 Sloping Intake - Sloping intake is provided in an earthen dam
as shown in Fig. 6A. Trashrack for the intake (made by mild steel
rectangular bars) is provided at the entrance. The top and sides at the
entrance are provided with bell-mouth.
3.2.4 Vertical Intake - Vertical intake is essentially a circular vertical
shaft. The structure above it supporting the trashrack is either tower
type or hemispherical cage. The main features of this layout are:
a> Hemispherical or tower type rack supporting structure;
b) Circular bell-mouth to shaft;
4 Vertical intake shaft; and
4 Right-angled bend at the base of the shaft or an elbow to join
the tunnel.
In case of tower type intake structure, flow is regulated either by a
single cylinderical gate or by a number of gates in the tower or %y a
separate gate in the gate shaft. In case of hemispherical intake structure,
the control gate is provided in the tunnel portion only. A typical design
of hemispherical vertical intake structure is shown in Fig. 6A.
4. CONDITIONS FOR LOCATION AND LAYOUT OF INTAKE

STRUCTURE
4.1 Factors influencing the choice of location and layout of intake
structure are:
a) Type ~of development that is run-of river scheme or storage
reservoir_;
b) Location and type of dam/weir;
c) Type of water conveyance system that is tunnel or canal; and
d) Topographical features of area.
4.2 The conditions under which the various typical layouts of intake as
classified in 3.2.1 to 3.2.4 are adopted, are given below.
4.2.1 Canal Intake - This type of layout is adopted when:
a) reservoir is of small capacity formed by a weir or barrage;
b) intake is to function under low heads; and
c) the topography and geology permit straight reaches suitable for
such type of intake.
17
IS:11570-1985
42.2 Semicircular Type of Intake Structure

This type of layout is adopted when:
a) a reservoir is formed by a concrete or masonry dam and outlet
tunnel is laid in the body of the dam;
b) the topography and geology permit to have almost vertical face
at tunnel inlet portal; and
c) the minimum water depth above the centre line of intake is more
than 0’8 of the entrance height.
42.3 Sloping Type of Intake Structure
a) the reservoir is formed by an earthen dam and tunnel is laid
below it; and
b) the intake is subjected to low-head variations like in run-of the
river type.
42.4 Vertical Type of Intake Structure
a) the intake is located at a distance from upstream face of the dam;
b) the reservoir is formed by an earthern dam and outlet tunnel is
laid below it; and
c) the intake is subjected to large head variations, resulting in
complete submergence of structure.
5. HYDRAULIC DESIGN OF COMPONENTS OF INTAKE

5.1 Centre Line of Intake
5.1.1 Centre line of intake shall be located well below the minimum
draw down level to prevent formation of vortices. Suitable arrange-
ments, such as cross walls, floating grid may be provided if necessary to
prevent/minimize, vortices. Cover of water over the roof of the intake
for the prevention of the formation of air entraining vortices both at
vertical or horizontal pipe intake may be computed for the purpose of
preliminary design from the set of curves given in Fig. 7 A and 7B
by trial method ( see Appendix A >. For important works the design
may be checked by model studies.
5.2 Trashrack Structure
5.2.1 At entrance to canal or tunnel, where trash may create serious
problem in irrigation system, a trashrack structure shall be provided in
front of the enterance to the tunnel to prevent the entry of any trash.
18
VOTEX FREE
LVERTICAL
IYTAKE
DISCHARGE = Q
He= EFFECTIVE HEAD
= RES. LEVEL -LOSSES
7A Co-efficient of Discharge vs Unit Circulation
FIG. 7 DIAGRAMS F~RDETERMINING OPTIMUMSUBMERGENCE - Contd

IS : 11570- 1985
’ 5.2.2 The trashrack structure shall be designed in accordance with

IS : 1138%1985* and IS : 9761-1981t.
5.3 BelLMouth Opening and Transition - A typical sketch is shown in
Fig. 8. In non-pressurized system the gate should be provided outside
the bell-mouth end.
5.3.1 Shape nnd Size of Opening - Entrance to the irrigation tunnel
shall be designed to produce an acceleration similar to that found in a
jet issuing from a sharp edged orifice. The surface shall be formed to
natural contraction curve and the tunnel assumed to the size of orifice
jet at its maximum contraction.
5.3.2 The normal contraction with coefficient of contraction C, as 0’6
shall be used in high-head inhtaliations and Ce as 0’7 for low-head
installations in order to reduce the height of opening. Coefficients of
discharge and loss coefficients for typical entrances for conduits are
given in Table 1.
OF TUNNEL
8A Elevation
FIG. 8 BELL-MOUTH DETAILS OF RECTANGULAR OPENING 1 Contd
*Recommendations for design of trashracks for intakes.

TCriteria for hydraulic design of hydropower intakes.
21
IS : 11570 - 1985
-*--_=I
a2’ %f
8B Plan
FIG. 8 BELL-MOUTH DETAILS OF RECTANGULAR OPENING
TABLE 1 COEFFICIENT OF DISCHARGE AND LOSS COEFFICIENTS FOR

CONDUIT ENTRANCES
COEFFICIENT Loss COEFFICIENT
A ---Y
&axi- Mini- Aver? Maxi- Mini- Aver-
mum mum age mum mum age
a) Gate in thin wall unsuppressed 0.70 0.60 0.63 1.80 l-00 l-50
contraction
b) Gate in thin wall-bottom and 0.81 0.68 0.70 1.20 0.50 1.00
sides suppressed
cl Gate in thin wall-corners 0.95 0.71 0.82 1 .oo 0.10 0.50
rounded
d) Square-cornered entrances 0’85 0.77 0.82 070 0.40 0.50
e) Slightly rounded entrances 0.92 0.79 0.90 0.60 0.18 0.23
f) Fully rounded entrances 0.96 0.88 0.95 0.27 0.08 0.10
f3) Circular bell-mouth entrances 0.98 0.95 0.98 0.10 0.04 005
h) Square bell-mouth entrances 0.97 0.91 0.93 0.20 0.07 0.16
j) Inward projecting entrances 0’80 0’72 0.75 0.93 0.56 0.80
22
IS : 11570- 1985
5.3.3 Opening Area

Conduit area
Opening area =
ce cos +
where
4 =a2dgle of inclinationof centre line of conduit to horizontal,
Ce = Coefficient of contraction as defined in 53.2.

5.3.4 Entrance Curves for Circular Conduits - For circular conduits,
an elliptical entrance curve obtained from the following equation will
satisfy the streamlining requirements:
where X and Y are coordinates measured parallel to and prependicular to

the conduit centre line respectively, and D is the diameter of the conduit.
53.5 Entrance Curves for Rectangular Conduit
5.3.5.1 Height and width of opening
The height is calculated by the distance above and below the inter-
section of the tunnel centre line with the face of the entrance ( see Fig .8)*.
Centre line to upper edge:
(1’21 tan2+t0’0847)~ + &- 1’10 tan 4

1
Centre line to lower edge:
hz = D
I(
3
h, = hl + h,
+ 0’077 tan 4
>I
5.3.5.2 Shape of the opening - For a rectangular entrance with the
invert at the same elevation as the upstream floor and with curved guide
piers at each side of the entrance openings, both the bottom and side
contraction will be suppressed and a sharper contraction will take place
at the top of the opening. For this condition, the top contraction
curve is defined by the equation:
g2+ (0.sY7ZH,2 =’
where His the vertical height of the conduit downstream from the
entrance shape.
23
IS :11570- 1985
For rectangular or square openings
g+
( **ZD )2 = l
where D is the vertical height of the conduit for defining top and
bottom curves and is the horizontal width of the conduit for defining
side curves.
The above mentioned formulae for rectangular/square conduit are
.applicable when the centre line of the transition and centre line of conduit
are the same.
For higher heads shape of the opening may be decided by model
studies.
5.3.6 Transitions - In order to obtain most economical design of
intake transitions from a rectangular section to a circular conduit, the
vertical walls are flared in the direction of flow. The transition shall be
designed in accordance with the following requirements:
4 Transition or turns shall be made about the centre line of mass
flow;
b) For contraction, the maximum convergent angle should not
exceed that indicated by the relation:
tan a = ru
where
cy = Angle of the conduit wall surfaces with respect to its
centre line,
V
U 2 An arbitrary parameter = d/g-, and
H = Vertical height of the conduit.

The-value of V and Hare the average of the velocilies and dimensions
at the beginning and end of the transition.
1
For expansion tan (Y= 2~
For usual installations, the flare angle should not normally exceed 10”.
c) The area of any section of the transition shall be proportional
to the area of a jet at similar section and modified to provide
the acceleration necessary to turn the water through the angle
that section makes withthe face, and
d) All slots or other necessary departures from the neat outline
shall be outside the transition zone.
24
IS : 11570 - 19855
5.4 Intake Gates and Air Vent

54.1 The intake gate slot shall be enclosed in a structure designed t@
guide the water into the rectangular opening without side contraction.
5.4.2 The upstream edge of the gate slot shall be at least 0’40 &from
the nose, where be is the width of opening.
5.43 Where gates are located in a gate shaft, suitable transition from
circular to rectangular gate slot shall be provided.
5.4.4 Size of Air Vent - An air vent is provided just downstream of
the gate to prevent occurrence of excessive subatmospheric pressure.
The air vent shall be so designed as to admit air with velocity not
exceeding 50 m/s. The area of air vent is given by value of air demand
divided by the maximum permissible velocity. Air demand shall be
computed on the considerations of type of flow occurring downstream of
gates, namely, spray flow, free flow, foamy flow, hydraulic jump forma-
tion with free surface flow or hydraulic jump formation with pipe flow.
The air demand for different flow types in the conduit shall be
computed with the help of the following formulae:
a) For hydraulic jump formation, B = 0’006 6 ( FIG - 1 )le4 where
B is the ratio of volume flow rate of air to that of water, a&
Kc is the Froude number at vena contracta;
b) For Spray flow, P = 0’2 FIG; and
c) For free flow P = 0’09 FIG
where
Q8 = air demand,
Qw = discharge of water, and
FIG = Froude number at vena contracta.
For hydraulic jump formation with channel flow and various types.
of flows mentioned above, Fig. 9 may be used to compute air demand.
5.4.4.1 Prevention of air-blows - The air-blows or return blows
characterised by flow of air-water mixture, more or less in the form of-
a geyser, have been observed at intakes similar to those shown in
Fig. 6A and 6B. Sometimes these blows may be very violent and may
result in blowing of t&e trashrack. fn some cases the trashrack may be
lifted and drawn in the tunnel itself. Return blows &lay be prevented by
the followiflg measures:
a) By providing larger open area of the trashrack;
25
IS:11570 - 1985
b) By providing another air-vent afte; the vertical bend in the

outlet conduit; and
c) By washing away the air pockets frequently by releasing higher
discharge in the tunnel.
5.4.4.2 Head losses in air vent - Head loss in the air vent, specially
in case of an unusually complicated vent layout containing a number of
sharp bends and obstructions, shall be checked to determine whether the
pressure drop exceeds 2 m of water in which case the vent size shall be
increased suitably.
5.5 Approach Apron
5.5.1 The approach apron shall not be placed closer than 30 percent
of the intake height, he, from the lower edge of the intake orifice.
50
LO
30
I8
“a
*
10
5
6
6
3
1
1 2 3 L, s 7 10 20 30 a 50 70 100
(AC/A~)xt00 -
Ac = Area of Flow at the Vena Contracta
AT = Area of the Gutlet Tunnel
FIc = Froude’s Number at Vena Contracta
FIG. 9 AIR DEMAND CURVESFORSPRAY,FREEAND FOAMYFLOW
26
IS : 11570- 1985
6. MISCELLANEOUS ARaANGEMENT
6.1 For intakes provided at high altitude above snow line, necessary
provision for arresting the formation of ice cover on rack bars and gate
shall be made for the free flow. The proposed de-icing arrangements
shall conform to IS : 10021-1981*.
6.2 Floating ice shall be arrested by providing ice booms or concrete
baffle cast intakes.
6.3 Racking Arrangement - Regular raking arrangement shall be
provided for intakes where floating material is expected continuously.
6.4 Sediment Exclusion - In case of run-of-river development sediment
exclusion devices such as de-silting basin or flushing ducts shall be
provided.
6.5 Bypass and air vent arrangement should be provided in the intake
between emergency gate and service gates.
APPENDIX A
( Clause 51.1 )
PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING OPTIMUM SUBMERGENCE

:OR LOCATION OF CENTRE LINE OF INTAKE
In order to ascertain whether at submergence ‘Hs’ of intake pipe of
diameter D = 2~0 vortex will form at the intake or not proceed as
under:
From the design data, the following parameters are known:
a) Effective head - HE,
b) Discharge corresponding to effective head HE - Q, and
c) Submergence of the intake - Hs.
*Guidelines for de-icing system for hydraulic installations.
27
IS : 11570- 1985
c OF INTAKE SHAFT
AKE BENCti
INTAKE
SHAFT
D= 2ro
HE = Effeclive head=Res.‘level-head losses up to control gate
Step I Determine coefficient of discharge, C, from

C = Q/A%'2 gffE
Step II At any ccnvenient distance r from the centre line of the
intake, such that r/D == 3, 4, 5 or 6, compute tangential
velocity, Ve from the correlation:
Hs = 3’45
-- J’er 2
2g ( r0 >
VRr2
Step III Evaluate
Q
Step IV Enter Fig. 7A plot of Ver2/Q . _ verms C, and examine; if this
point lies above the particular curve corresponding to the
adopted value of r/D, no vortex will form. If this point lies
below the curve vortex will form.
.Step V To determine the optimum water cover or submergence repeat
to the above steps till the point corresponding to the computed
values of C and Ver2/Q lies on the particular r/D curve.
For the case of horizontal intake, Fig. 7B may be made use of.
28
( Reaffirmed 2004 )
fS :11772-1986
Indian Standard . .. .
GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF

DRAINAGE ARRANGEMENTS OF ENERGY
DISSIPATORS AND TRAINING WALLS
OF SPILLWAYS
Chairman Re@rsenting
SHRIJ. F. MISTRY Irrigation Department, Government of Gujarat,
Gandhinagar
Members
DR A. S. CEAWLA University of Roorkee ( WRDTC ), Roorkee
CHIEF ENQINEER ( DAM DESIQN ) Irrigation Department, Government of Uttar
Pradesh, Lucknow
SHJU LAXMI NARAIN ( Alternate )
CEIEII EN~INEIUt ( PWD ) Irrigation Department, Government of Karna-
taka, Mysore
SUPZRIN~SSNDINaENQI~P.ER
( DESIGNS ) ( Alt~rnate )
Pradesh, Hyderabad
SUPXRI~TEISDINQ ENQ~NXEE
( DAMS ) ( Alternate)
CRIEB ENQINISER, TnEIN DAM Irrigation Department, Government of Punjab,
DESIGN Chandigarh
DIREc~OR ( SPILLWAYS &
Powmt PLANT ) ( Alternate )
CHIEF ENGINEER & DmIZCrrOR Mab:a:;tra Engineering Research Institute,
SRRI K. A. GRAMPUROHIT ( Alternaie )

CI+IEF ENQINJMIR & DIRECTOR, Irrigation Department, Government of Tamil
INSTITUTE OF HYDRAULICS & Nadu, Madras
HYDROLOQY, POONDI
DEPUTY DIRr3c T0R
( HYDRAULICS) ( Alternate)
CHIEF EN~INEER/R-GUM-DIRECTOR Irrigation & Power Research Institute, Amritsar
( Continuedon /rage 2 )
@) Copyright 1987
This publication is protected under the Indian Copyright Act ( XIV of 1957) and
~...–
(Continuedfrom pagel )
,-– — —....
Members Re@eserting
SERI M. L. DAS Irrigation & Power Department, Government of
Orissa, Bhuhaneshwar
SHRI B. DASS Irrigation&Waterways Directorate, Government
DIREC~OIt Central Water and Power Research Station,
Pune
SHItX R. M. KHATSURIA ( Alternate )
DIREGTOR ( CMDD-I ) Central Water Commission, New Delhi
New Delhi
DR K. K. F~A~JI Consulting Engineering Services ( India) Pvt
Ltd. New Delhi
PROF HARI KRISHNA ( Alternate) ‘
DR JAGDISIi NARAIN Institution of Engineers ( India ), Calcutta
SERI S. P. JAIN Bhakra Beas Management Board, Nangal
Township
SHRI J. C. BASUR ( Alternate)
SERI H. K. KEOSLA Irrigation Department, Government of Haryana,
Chanrligarh
Gandhinagar
SURI M, S. RAMA RAO Karnataka Power Corporation Ltd, Bangalore
SHRI D. M. SAVDR Hindustan Construction Co Ltd, Bombay
SRRI M. V. S. IYrCNC+AR( Alternate )
SUPICMNIWNIJINGEN~INEER ( MD ) Irrigation Department, Government of Maha-
rashtra, Bombay
SHRT V. N. PENDSE ( Alternate I )
KUiWARI PRATINIA NAIDU ( Alternate 11 )
SHI~IC. D. THA~TE Gujarat Engineering Research Institute,
Vadodara
DR R. S. VARSHIiEY Irrigation Department, Government of Uttar
Pradesh, Lucknow
SBRI G. RAiWAN, Director General, 1S1 ( IZ@icio Member)
Secretary
SHRI K. K. SHAREIA
Joint Director ( Civ Engg ), 1S1
2
IS :11772-1986
.-
Indian Standard
GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF
DRAINAGE ARRANGEMENTS OF ENERGY
DISSIPATORS AND TRAINING WALLS
OF SPILLWAYS
O. FOREWORD
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institu-
tion on 31 July 1986, after the draft finalized by the Spillways Including
Energy Dissipators Sectional Committee had been approved by the Civil
Engineering Division Council.
0.2 Energy dissipators for dams involve problems of erosion of foundation

material on their downstream side and occurrence of excess seepage under
them. The complexity of these problems depends upon type, stratification,
permeability, homogeneity and other characteristics of the foundation
material as well as size and physical requirements of the energy dissipators.
0.3 The probable hydrostatic uplift forces, under adverse conditions, on

the energy dissipators partially relieved by their drainage system, shall be
estimated conservatively considering characteristics of their foundations
and drainge systems.
0.4 The critical condition may be channel empty after rapid closure of
gates of a gated spillway or drop in reservoir level to crest of an ungated
spillway with water in foundations at maximum gradient under applicable
reservoir conditions, or water flowing from a spillway under design flood,
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard covers guidelines for drainage aspects of energy dissi-
pators and training walls of spillways.
1.2 Various energy dissipators covered are:
a) Buckets — roller ( solid and slotted, and ski-jump type ), and

b) Stilling basins — sloping and horizontal aprons.
3
IS :11772-1986
3.1.6 Drainage aspects of buck
stilling basins shall be essentially
1.3 Drainge aspects of chutes have been covered in IS : 5186-1969*.
water heads and types of their four
2. TERMINOLOGY 3.1.7 For a properly designed d
2.o For the purpose of this standard, the following definitions shall apply. gramme is normally envisaged f
planned grouting programme may
2.1 Drainage — Safe removal of excess seepage water below an energy foundation, some means shall be p
dissipation structure, or from behind a training wall. percolate through and around the [
may build high hydrostatic pressur
2.2 Uplift Pressure — The upward hydraulic pressure in the pores of a
body ( pore or interstitial pressure ) or on the base of an energy dissipa- 3.1.8 Drainage is provided unc
tor or a training wall. I
reduce uplift pressures. Effective
2.3 Filter — A layer or a combination of layers of graded pervious mate- generally limits uplift pressures to
rials designed and placed in such a manner as’ to provide drainage and yet effectiveness of the drainage systen
I dation material and dependability
prevent the movement of soil particles with seepage water.
3.1.9 Sometimes, under the spef
3. DRAINAGE ASPECTS FOR ENERGY DISSIPATORS nage galleries, sumps, etc, may be
3.1 Uplift Forces, Dynamic Pressures and Drainage of large dams if considered necess~
3.1.1 Due to reservoir upstream of a dam and tail water downstream, 3.2 Drainage Holes and Drains
uplift pressures besides occurring as internal pressures in pores,. cracks and
3.2.1 Common schemes for drai
seams of dam foundations and in the body of the dam also occur under
slabs of the energy dissipators are:
its energy dissipators.
a) Providing vertical formed
3.1.2 The pore spaces in foundation material below the energy dissipa- is the simplest scheme am
tors gets filled with water which exerts pressures in all directions. Such Fig. 1 ).
pressures depend upon head of water in the reservoir and also on tail water
head. Phenomena like micro turbulence due to high velocity flows over /--TOP OF
panelled dissipator or flows or earthquakes may also affect the uplift 1
pressures.
3.1.3 With proper care, uplift pressures on the energy dissipators can .-
————-— .
be minimized by providing weep holes, surface drains, drainage holes in ,.
foundation rock and providing relief wells in pervious foundations.
3.1.4 In case of energy dissipators, weight of concrete floor and ancho-

.’: .’,”
rage to the rock, if provided, shall be designed to withstand uplift and dy-
namic pressures with ample factor of safety to take care of limitations in
accurate evaluation of such pressures.
3.1.5 Liberal allowances shall be made for maximum probable uplift

pressures and quantity of seepage water for foundation material under the
most adverse headwater, tailwater, with or without groundwater conditions * SPACING MAY VARY
for design of drainage systems for the energy dissipators with an ample FROM 2 TO 5m C/c 1-
BOTHWAYS
factor of safety.
*Criteria for design of chute and side channel spillways. F!IG. 1 RELIEF HoI
L..—..—_
..
IS :11772-1986
3.1.6 Drainage aspects of buckets, either roller or ski-jump type and

stilling basins shall be essentially similar but shall be governed by tail
water heads and types of their foundation strata.
3.1.7 For a properly designed dam, a well planned curtain grouting pro-
gramme is normally envisaged for its foundation. Although such well
planned grouting programme may materially reduce seepage through the
foundation, some means shall be provided to intercept water which may
percolate through and around the grout curtain and which, if not removed,
may build high hydrostatic pressures on its energy dissipator.
3.1.8 Drainage is provided under floor slabs of energy dissipators to

reduce uplift pressures. Effective drainage, below the energy dissipators
generally limits uplift pressures to required design limits. The degree of
effectiveness of the drainage systems depends upon characteristics of foun-
dation material and dependability of their effective maintenance.
.-
3.1.9 Sometimes, under the special conditions referred to in 3.4.1, drai-
nage galleries, sumps, etc, may be provided below the energy dissipators
of large dams if considered necessary.
3.2 Drainage Holes and Drains for Energy Dissipators
3.2.1 Common schemes for drainage of foundation material below floor

slabs of the energy dissipators are:
a) Providing vertical formed holes or pipes through floor dabs ( this
is the simplest scheme and may be used for minor works ) ( see
Fig. 1 ).
/-TOP OF DAM
I
I
FRL ,1 1
——
-—— —_———.
,, TRAINING WALL
. .
GL
\\//.,
\\\
A “4
-X SPACING MAY VARY

1- STILLING BASIN -/
FROM 2 TO 5m C/C
BOIHWAYS
FIG. 1 RELIEF HOLES IN TIIE APRON FLOOR
w
IS :11772-1986
b) A grid of half round pipe drains or tile drains along the founda-
3.2.2 Formed holes or pipes fol
tion surface ( may be adequate for low heads ) ( see Fig. 2 ). through the floor slabs. Their spa
directions ( see Fig. 1 ).
. A-
FRL 3.2.3 The grid of half round dr
= = —______
.— —__ cal or inclined drain holes, if prov
————
sal of percolating water from them
of minimum 200 mm diameter, lea
+=-TOP OF END TRAINLNG WALL
collector half round drains or gal
..,, A’ GRID OF HALF ROUND
.. -.,,. !, ’.. downstream ends of the energy di:
... *.. . . . . . . . .. .. PIPE DRAINS .
,’...”.A ,. :D. . .
.. . 3.2.4 Large diameter collector 1
downstream ends of the energy dis
. .
at both their ends shall be connect
either by pressure or by gravity fl
stream face of the spillways and/o
the energy dissipators and/or sides
outlets provided to discharge the ~
DRAINAGE OUTLET shall be provided with non-return
75mm DIAMETER DRAINAGE HOLES —
SPACING l.l AY VARY FROM 3 TO lO m
C/C eOTHVJGYS
FIG. 2 DRAINAGE HOLES DRILLED INTO THE ROCK
c) Drain holes drilled into the foundation rock or relief wells into
pervious foundation material in combination with formed holes
or pipes through floor slabs ( preferable for higher heads and
tight formation ) ( see Fig. 3 ).
d) An elaborate system for large major projects as described in 3.4.
FRL
___ ._—=
–=_= COt4~4N;CT10N
— —.
— — — . \
DRAIN HOLES _
GI
FIG, 4 DRAINAGE C
3.2.5 The grid of half round dr
@150 mm PERFORATED
round drains shall be alternatiw
SEWER PIPE DF/AIN-q/ energy dissipators to lead water in)
provided below the energy dissipat
WELLS~ ing walls. Water is pumped out fr
locations above the maximum tail
Fm. 3 RELIEF WELLS IN PERVIOUS FOUNDATIONS
6
.
IS: 11772-1986
3.2.2 Formed holes or pipes for relief of uplift pressures are provided
through the floor slabs. Their spacing may vary from 2 to 5 m in both
directions ( see Fig. 1 ).
3.2.3 The grid of half round drains shall follow the alignment of verti-
cal or inclined drain holes, if provided, to facilitate collection and dispo-
sal of percolating water from them. The grid of half round drains shall be
of minimum 200 mm diameter, leading water to relatively larger diameter
collector half round drains or galleries/sumps near the upstream and/or
downstream ends of the energy dissipators and[or near the training walls.
3.2.4 Large diameter collector half round drains near upstream andlor
downstream ends of the energy dissipators andlor near the training walls
at both their ends shall be connected to outlets. These drains release water
either by pressure or by gravity flow through outlets provided on down-
stream face of the spillways and/or upstream and/or downstream face of
the energy dissipators and/or sides of the training walls ( see Fig. 4 ). The
outlets provided to discharge the water collected into the half round drains
shall be provided with non-return valves flush with the exit surface.
~EYE BROW
FRL
---
———
—-—.
DETAIL ‘A’
GRID OF @.2SCmm HALF ROUNO
PIPE DRAIN (‘$ 200mm min )
@300mm HALF RCUNO
COLLECTOR PIPES
‘A’
m
DRAIN HOLES 7,
tl
FIG, 4 DRAINAGE OUTLETS IN STILLING BASIN
3.2.5 The grid of half round drains and/or large diameter collector half
round drains shall be alternatively connected with galleries below the
energy dissipators to lead water into sumps or directly into sumps generally
provided below the energy dissipators and/or on backsides of the end train-
ing walls. Water is pumped out from sumps for its disposal from suitable
locations above the maximum tail water level.
m
I
IS: 11772-1986
3.2.6 Each collector drain shall have at least two or preferably more
outlets so that all drains may function satisfactorily even if some outlets
get choked up ( see Fig. 4 ).
3.2.7 The half round drains may either be vitreous clay or plain con-
crete pipes and shall be laid in graded material which acts as filterj or on
sub-grade as recommended in 3.3.1.
‘>
3.2.8 The drain holes are usually NX holes ( 75 mm diameter ), They ,
shall be drilled after completion of the foundation grouting in their vici- HORIZONTAL O
nity, if any, to avoid their clogging.
3.2.9 The vertical drain holes shall be adopted where joints and strati-
fication in foundation rock have complex or dominantly horizontal pattern.
L
60m
The inclined drain holes shall be adopted where joints and stratifications
+
in foundation rock have dominantly inclined pattern. 60m
+
3.2.10 The spacing of drain holes may vary from 3 to 10 m in both 60m
directions and their depth may vary from 20 to 40 percent of tail water
depth when no other supporting data is available. The spacing shall be T
closer for rocks having low permeability.
FIG. 5 TYPIGAL SCHEME t
3.2.11 In case detailed studies about joints and stratification in found-
ation rocks, their permeability and anticipated quantity of seepage from
3.3.3 Different alternative arran!
them have been made, the depth of vertical or inclined drain holes shall
are shown in Fig. 6A., 6B and 6C.
be based on such studies. These holes shall be connected to a grid of half
round drains and/or drains in galleries under the energy dissipators.
3.2.12 The horizontal drain holes shall be preferred where joints and
4
stratification in foundation rock have a dominantly vertical pattern. The / .’, ‘ -.~. -j’.’
~,h,, ,3D
horizontal drain holes shall be drilled into foundation rock from the gal-
?..<+...:..
lery either perpendicular to its alignment or in a fan shape with a gentle
slope towards the gallery for easy disposal of percolating water. The
depth of such holes may be up to 20 rn or more depending on ease of
drilling and subsequent maintenance for their effective functioning ( see
Fig. 5 ).
3.3 Sub-grade and Outlets for Drains
Q
-m=-w--o D
3.z. 1 The sub-grade under half round pipe drains shall consist of porous UNEVEN ROCK SURFACE
concrete pad laid to required grades, where necessary, on foundation rock BELOW STILLING BASIN
to receive half round vitreous clay pipes/plain concrete pipes. OR ENERGY DISSIPATOR
3.3.2 The half round pipes may be directly placed on foundation rock
where feasible. The porous concrete may be used under the half round
pipes for maintaining proper connections among them and maintaining
their levels and grades. 6A Details tor Laying
( Alternatiw
8
IS :11772-1986
—GALLERY(l.5m x2.5m)
‘HORIZONTAL DRAINS7
60m
+* -
60m
+ —.
60m _
FIG. 5 TYPICAL SCHEME SHOWING HORIZONTAL DRAINS
3.3.3 Different alternative arrangements for laying the half round drains
are shown in Fig. 6A., 6B and 6C.
r ./’-.
4
,- A, <.-A..’.
J
.. . .
r MAIN CONCRETE OF
ENERGY DISSIPATOR
+-=1
‘t”!’;7
.*. . ....
,.
HALF ROUND
CONCRETE PIPE
-W @200mm min -
u = POROUS CONCRETE PAO

FOR RECEIVING ORAINAGE
PIPES ON UNEVEN
-. ROCK SURFACE
FILLING WITH GRAVEL OPTIONAL,
NECESSARY IN CASES WHERE THE
DRILL HOLE CANNOT STAND
6A Details tor Laying ot Half Round Pipe Drains

( Alternative Arrangement 1 )
9
1S :11772-1986
@600mm HALF ROUND b) Outlets from downstream

DRAIN PIPES
Fig. 7A ),
m
DRY CONCR
—MAIN CONCRETE
OF ENERGY
FROM ENTERING “- DISSIPATOR
PIPE w . . . . . .. . . . .,, ..., . . .
UNEVEN ROCK SURFACE f$\ POROUS CONCRETEPAO

BELOW ENERGY DISSIPATOR LAIO FOR RECEIVING
DRAINAGE PIPES ON
UNEVEN ROCK SURFACE
6B Detail s for Laying of Half Round Pipe Drains GRID OF HALF

( Alternative Arrangement 2 ) ROUND PIPE DRAIN.
DRAINAGE HOLES
! ‘L -- ‘“ -’-;”’”-’ 4.2””1 Ma
7A Drain Outk
c) Outlets from downstream

Fig. 7B ),
6C Details for Laying of Half Round Pipe Drains

(Alternative Arrangement 3)
NOTE 1 — Half round pipe drains shall be placed directly on rock where
possible.
NOTE 2 — Porous concrete shall be used under pipes where necessary so as to
I
GRIO OF HALF ROt
maintain proper grade and connection of pipe. PIPE ORAINS —
FIG. 6 HALF ROUND PIPE DRAINS
3.3.4 Gravel blankets, wherever provided, shall bewellgraded to prevent

movement of foundation material with flow of seepage water.
ORAINAGE HOLES —
3.3.5 Seepage water collected in drains below energy dissipators may be
disposed of by one or more of the following common methods.
3.3.5.1 Outlets discharging seepage water by gravity: 7B Drain Outlet
a) Outlets through dentated sills for stilling basins ( see Fig. 4 ),
10
.-
IS :11772-1986
b) outlets from downstream face of sill of ski-jump bucket (see

Fig. 7A),
LL
GRID OF HALF ,,-.

ROUNO PIPE ORAIN ,/./
,5.
.;
..* .-- ----—-
m\. YYAX’ v,-,. .
11 II
,1 RAINAGE OUTLET
II
;1
DRAINAGE HOLES- ‘~ ~HALF ROUND
+! COLLECTOR
II :/
II PIPE ORAl N
7A Drain Outlet for Ski-J ump Bucket
c) Outlets from downstream face of sill of slotted roller bucket ( see

Fig. 7B ),
TOP OF TRAINING
GRID OF HALF ROUNO

PIPE DRAINS
,2
>“ _---~
------
7 //A\~ //X\\ / /4. ~
1{ II
II II
II II
DRAINAGE HOLES ~----- ~; HALF ROUNO
COLLECTOR PIPE
DRAIN
7B Drain Outlet for Slotted Roller Bucket
11
lS: 11772- 1986
d) Outlets from downstream face of sill of solid roller bucket (we

Fig. 7C), and
TOP OF TRAINING
WALL
4 T
I
J
J7 HALF ROUND
COLLECTOR
I
HALF ROUNO
\
bRAINAGE ————
i’C Drainage Holes in Solid Roller Bucket
FIG. 7 DRAIN OUTLET FOR BUCKETS
e) Eyebrow outlets from downstream glacis of spillway (me Fig. 4),
3.3.5.2 Outlets discharging seepage water by pumping from sumps

provided below the stilling basins/buckets anchor behind the end training
walls.
3.3.6 A typical scheme illustrating the drainage arrangement of half

round pipes below a stilling basin and behind a training wall, having out-
lets discharging into the stilling basin is shown in Fig. 8A, 8B and 8G.
3.3.7 For large stilling basins or buckets having operating heads higher
than 50 m or velocities greater than 30 m/s, it is not desirable to provide
outlets of drains through the stilling basins/buckets, floor slabs and training
walls discharging into the basins/buckets as their projections may trigger
cavitation. This is also brought out in 3.4.
3.4 Drainage Arrangement for Special Conditions
3.4.1 Under the special conditions involving large reservoir heads andl
or large spillway discharge and/or large tailwater level fluctuations, it may
be desirable to design more elaborate drainage system to minimize uplift
pressures cm the floor of the energy dissipator,
12
.!..-,”-”—— —
1
lS: 11772- 1986
,.
.
1
,.,
II
.,
I
,.
II 1 I c ,, I Ii
F
II
II
11
—
All
u-
—
—4 ——.
I
Iy–---–-— - --- AVM1 lld S—---.—----
-i
1’
+x
13
——
—_.
IS :11772-1986
&
m?il’:
1 GRAVEL
FILTER BETWEEN
OJ
600mm SPLIT
DRAIN PIPE J
SECTION Y
I=m
CJco
1 u 8C :
u-l
FIG. 8 A TYPICAL SCHEME ILLI
BELOW S’
3.4.2 Thorough investigations
allowances for uncertainties are ne
system under the energy dissipator
3.4.3 For ensuring satisfactory h
i
pressures within limits considered
involving special conditions, the
3.4.3.7 shall be considered in addil
accordance with 3.3.5,
3.4.3.1 A drainage gallery (T
I dam galleries ) shall be provided a]
or the bucket. The floor level of
1.5 m below the drains under the e
peripheral gallery which are parall(
ted behind them.
3.4.3.2 Additional intermedi
tion or in transverse direction shal
14 dissipator are too large ( see Fig. S
IS :11772-1986
SURFACE DRAIN TO
COLLECT RUN OFF
GRAVEL – ROCK FILL

FILTER BETWEEN –SLOPE TO GUTTER
ROCKFILL &DRAIN
ASSUMEO ROCK
,., .
SURFACE
150mm ORAl N
300mm SPLlT DRAIN PIPE
‘RA’N ‘“’Es
300mm SPLi T ORAIN PIPE LINE
. .. 150mm DRAINS
.,
‘~~()()mm DRAIN OuTLET(R@f~rfv
8Afld 891
ANCHOR BAR
600mm SPLIT
DRAIN PIPE LINE DRILLED
SECTION Y Y
8C Section Y-Y
FXG. 8 A TYPICAL SCHEME ILLUSTRATING DRAINACE ARRANGEMENTS

BELOW STILLING BASIN
3.4.2 Thorough investigations of foundation conditions and liberal

allowances for uncertainties are necessary for the design of such a drainage
system under the energy dissipator.
3.4.3 For ensuring satisfactory long term performance leading to uplift

pressures within limits considered in the design for energy dissipators
involving special conditions, the recommendations given in 3.4.3.1 to
3.4.3.7 shall be considered in addition to providing the drainage system in
accordance with 3.3.5,
3.4.3.1 A drainage gallery (with the same cross-section as that of the
dam galleries ) shall be provided around full periphery of the stilling basin
or the bucket. The floor level of the drainage gallery shall be about 1 to
1”5 m below the drains under the energy dissipator. The segments of the
peripheral gallery which are parallel to the end training walls may be loca-
ted behind them.
3.4.3.2 Additional intermediate galleries either in longitudinal direc-

tion or in transverse direction shall be provided if dimensions of the energy
dissipator are too large ( see Fig. 9 ).
15
m4-
.
IS :11772-1986
z
=H=Li= ----c
.---—
,,
,1
,1
II
—JL-.
.- .,---- -. Jl____ .-. JL..
,!
,,
,( 1<
,,
,!
1,
i
t’ It 1, ,1
,,
II It
,,
,,
,1
,1
.. Ji___ -
,1
$,
1;
!, ,,
-L
11 11 1, II ,,
II II ,, ,1 ,1 ,,
I
i
* II AVMllldS I
L-
+
4 lNIOr
NO113VU1N03
8-J ,, ‘: . I
‘‘
11
:+
.
1 I
1- H1I1ONQW ~
-1
H1I1ONOH
16
ION
RY
DETAILS OF TOE
9B Longitudinal Section Showing the Drainage Arrangement Behind Training Wall and Below Stilling
Basin with Peripheral Gallery
IS :11772-1986
3.4.3.6 The pumping plant sha

units at each locai ion for disposing
CONCRETE ~ overall factor of safety of at least fou:
PAVING 1
‘UTTER I /;w
3.4.3.7 An independent acces:
below the floor of the energy dissipat
GROUND SURFACE 3i4.4 A broad outline of a typic:

POCKET ORAINS energy dissipator is shown in Fig. 9.
GRID OF ROUN~ - 3.5 Surface Drainage for Energy
CONCRETE PIPES
OF DRAINS LEAOING 3.5.1 Sumps with streamlined prc
MATERIAL FOR
TO GALLERY ANO ;;-.._.==- BACK FILLING walls in low-velocity area in still
SUMP 1: dewatering for inspection and maint
IEFS22’N‘0’”
1’ ANCHOR
3.5.2 Where practicable, drain
standing water and to reduce pump
d=
;: BARS 4. DRAINAGE ASPECTS OF TR
GRID OF HALF-
ROUND PIPE 8ELW ~>-=- --- --- 4.1 General — Training walls oft
STILLING BASIN /
1/ ded with energy dissipators:
DRAINAGE i) Gravity/cantilever walls, a
;L--
GALLERY
,r -- - ‘-
ii) Anchored training walls.
,1
“P- -- --~
1. 4.1.1 Hydrostatic forces may d
--- DRAINAGE GALLERY dissipators due to accumulation ofs
,1 i,
4.1.2 Suitable drainage arrange
!;
,,
l-- DRAINAGE HOLES minimize saturation of backfill m[
on the training walls. They shall b{
9C Section BB
suitable provisions against clogging
NOTE — The drain discharge from under the energy dissipator and behind the
training wall is collected into the gallery and finally into the sump from where it 4.2 Gravity or Cantilever Train
is pumped out.
4.2.1 Drainage behind the rain
FIG. 9 BROAD OUTLINE OF A TYPICAL GALLERY SYSTEM FOR A
either permeable backfill, pockets, f
MAJOR PROJECT blanket, inclined drains, enveloping
graded material.
3.4.3.3 Pipes shall be provided for drilling holes for grouting and
drainage from the galleries, if uplift pressures remain excessive even after 4.2.2 The conveying units to dis
providing arrangements recommended in 3.4.3.1 and 3.4.3.2. the training walls may either bt
vitreous clay or corrugated galvani~
3.4.3.4 Adequate provision of sumps below floors of the galleries for
collecting seepage water, and of shafts for connecting the sumps/galleries holes through the walls may conw
with outlets shall be made for providing access and facility for installation arrangements behind the walls as I
of pipes for pumping out water. front. The longitudinal drains may
it may be disposed of by gravit:
3.4.3.5 Necessary arrangement shall be made for an effective venti- which it may be pumped to points
lation system for peripheral gallery. gravity flOW.
18
1S :11772- i986
3.4.3.6 The pumping —.plant shall be in the form of at least two .pump.
units at each loca;ion for disposing of seepage water. It shall have an
overall factor of safety of at least four in terms of capacity of pumping.
3.4.3.7 An independent access shall be provided for the galleries

below the floor of the %ergy dissipator. -
3,4.4 A broad outline of a typical gallery system suitable for a large

energy dissipator is shown in Fig. 9.
3.5 Surface Drainage for Energy Dissipators
3.5.1 Sumps with streamlined profiles may be provided close to training

walls in low-velocity area in stilling basins/buckets to facilitate their
dewatering for inspection and maintenance.
3.5.2 Where practicable, drain pipes may be provided to dispose of -

standing water and to reduce pumping costs during inspection.
4. DRAINAGE ASPECTS OF TRAINING WALLS

4.1 General — Training walh of the following types are generally provi-
ded with energy dissipators:
i) Gravity/cantilever walls, and
ii) Anchored training walls.
4.1.1 Hydrostatic forces may develop on the training walls of energy

dissipators due to accumulation of seepage water behind them.
4.1.2 Suitable drainage arrangements shall be provided to control or

minimize saturation of backfill material and to reduce hydrostatic forces
on the training walls. They shall be designed with liberal dimensions and
suitable provisions against clogging.
4.2 Gravity or Cantilever Training Walls

4.2.1 Drainage behind the raining walls may be effected by providing
either permeable backfill, pockets, channels in two directions, a continuous
blanket, inclined drains, enveloping drains, etc, using freely draining well-
graded material.
4.2.2 The conveying units to dispose of seepage water from backsides of

the training walls may either be weep holes or longitudinal perforated
vitreous clay or corrugated galvanized steel sheet pipe drains. The weep
holes through the walls may convey the water collected from different
arrangements behind the walls as mentioned in 4.2.3 and discharge it in
front. The longitudinal drains may convey water to the point from where
it may be disposed of by gravity flow or may convey it to sumps from
which it may be pumped to points from where it may be disposed of by
gravity flow.
19
-.
iS :11772-1986 .
4.2.3 The commonly adopted types of drainage arrangements for the

training walls are illustrated in Fig. 10. Where outlets are provided to
discharge into stilling basins/buckets, they may be provided with non-return
valves.
a) A simple system may consist of weep holes through the training!
walls (. see Fig. 10A ). The weep holes may consist of either vitre-
cms clay pi~es/concrete pipes/GI pipes, 100 mm or more in
diameter. Their spacing may vary from 1”5 to 50 m in both
di[ ections. ‘I’his system is suitable for backfills consisting of per-
meable material which drains freely. At the entry to each weep
bolt;, a grill protected by a suitable filter shall be provided to
prevent the weep hole from getting clogged up.
b) For backfill which is not sufficiently permeable, pockets of coarse
material may be placed around the end of each weep hole to faci-
litate drainage ( see Fig. 10B ). A more elaborate arrangement
)
may provide continuous horizontal channel of coarse material,
along inner ends of weep holes supplemented by vertical channels
( 0“3 m x 0“3 m square section) placed midway between the
weep holes, with their lower ends joining the horizontal channel
( seeFig. 10C ). To further increase effectiveness, the entire backside
of a training wall may be covered with 300 mm thick gravel
blanket ( see Fig. 10D ).
c) An inclined drain provided is relatively more effective as it reduces
both earth pressure and seepage ( see Fig. 10E ).
d) For a backfill of expansive soils, an envelope drain may bq provi-

ded ( see Fig. 10F ). This system minimizes changes in moisture m
content in the backfill.
4.2.4 The drainage system behind the training walls shall not create ‘a
short seepage path to the downstream side of the main control section.
4.3 Drainage Arrangements for Special Conditions

4.3.1 For training walls of large stilling basins or buckets having operat-
ing heads higher than 50 m or velocities greater than 30 m/s, outlets of
weep holes shall not be provided projecting on inside face of the training
walls as their projections may trigger cavitation. In such cases, the drain-
age arrangements for training walls may be integrated with the drainage
arrangements of the stilling basins/buckets or the outlets which convey
water to galleries/sumps from where it may be pumped out ( see Fig. 9C ).
a
4.4 Anchored Training Walls
4.4.1 For concrete/masonry anchored training walls, adequate drilled
holes shall be provided in the rock behind them to drain seepage water
and to relieve hydrostatic pressures that may develop due to saturation.
20
–— ——.. -.——
A
@
/
sIN:WJ$O
.
,
== -----
c
t
‘
IMPERvIOUS
MATERIAL
‘e03x0.3mVERTfCAL
cHANNEL MIDWAY
BETWEEN
HOLES
WEEP-
HORIZONTAL
CHANNEL
J!FB,--F
CONTINUOUS
PORTION
BLANKET .:
.:,. .. pERMANENTLY
.. 0.3m THICK r—
;.,.. .J.. . ............. ORAINED
... ;. , -.... ... .,.-,.
.... ----- ,.
GRAVEL ..,’.
“.1, .,.,..::..
BLANKET ,. .....
.-----
-.--.:.., ,:. ....
-_-= ==
--- = ----
EXPANSIVE Sot,.
8ACKFiLL z
..
FIG. 10 TYPICAL BACKFILL DRAINS FOR GRAvlrY TYPE TRAINING WALLS OF ENERGY DISSIPATORS ~
w
z
*
..
IS :11772-1986
4.4.2 Ifthedrain holes are not used, transverse tile ( or equivalent)

drains along the rock profile with headers and outlets shall be ~rovideci
for drainag; of seepage “water and for relief of hydrostatic press&es that
may develop due to saturation, The common arrangements for drainage
of anchored training walls are illustrated in Fig. 11 and 12.
t-
~r----
GRID OF ROUND II
cONCRETE PIPES ~
ll_--
OF DRAINS Ir-.
CONCRETE ANCHORED l—
LEAOING TO
TRAINING WALL IL ---
GALLERY AND ----
I ‘~
SUMP
-.. +/fff7 ---- ‘L --
---- l=
Ii. .b SURFACE ORAIF+ lL _-
c. , .1 I
,. ----
TO COLLECT Ir -
RUN-OFF 11--
b “A I ‘_
* GRID OF SPLIT I ~ =-
b oRAINS BELOW I r=
DRAIN PIPE
DRAINAGE
. . ~3(10mmHALF ROUND
.. 6.,’ --- ---
ORAIN PIPE
--< r-.---l
a.,
ii 1,
!: ~,?
‘150mm HALF ROUND
VERTICAL ORAINS
NOTE — The drain discharge
D training wall is collected into the ga
pumped out.
.b . .’
,, ... FIG. 12 ARRANGEMENTS FOR D
( WITH R
,b.: ; /5.,.
ORAlN HOLES IN ROCK
9300mm DRAIN HOLES

LINE
OR IL LEO –
NOTE 1 — Drain outlet shall be on similar lines as shown in Fig. 8B.

NOTE 2 — As an alternative, when outlets are provided to discharge into
stilling basins/bucket, they may be provided with non-return valves.
FIG. 11 COMMON ARRANGEMENTS FOR DRAINAQE OF ANCHORED

TRAINING TV ALLS
22
.
IS: 11772- i98d
SURFACE DRAIN
b
I
GRID OF ROUND
CONCRETE PIPES
OF DRAINS
“’’’’’-’-c,
LEADING TO 1’
IL ----
GALLERY AND
?35
------- --
Ii
SUMP
‘l-
,-=-- -----
.-
---- ---
ANCHOR BARS
I,1
GRID OF SPLIT IL-.----- ---
DRAINS BELOW Ir
ST{ LLING BASIN7 II
,1
d
R%kEEs=GA
DRAINAGE
GALLERY
I 1
ii i;
LLERY
II
!: f:+-- DRAINAGE HOLES
I NOTE — The drain discharge from under the energy dissipator and behind the
training wall is collected into the gallery and finally into the sump from where it is
pumped out.
FIG. 12 ARRANGE~EN~S FOR DRAINAGE OF ANCHORED TRAINING WALLS

( WITH REFERENCE TO 3.4 )
23
....—_._, .._ .- —-
ffI17ERNA’flCMAL SYSTEM CjF UNITS ( SI U~l’T$)
Base Units
Quantity Unit Symbo

Length met re m.
Mass kilogram kg
Time second s
temperature
Luminous intensity candela cd ... .
Supplementary Units
Quantity Unit Symbol
Plane angle radian fad
Solid angle eterad Ian sr
Derived Units
Quantity Unit Symbol De f7nit ion

Force newton N 1 N = 1 kg.m/sl
Energy joule J 1 J=l N.m
Power watt w 1 W=l J/s
Flux webe r Wb lWb=l V.s
Flux density tesla T 1 T = 1 Wb/m9
Frequency hertz Hz 1 Hz = 1 C/S (S-l)
Electric conductance siemens s 1 S=l A/V
Electromotive force volt v 1 V=l W/A
Pressure, stress pascal Pa 1 Pa= 1 N/ms
( Reaffirmed 2001 )
IS:11973 - 1986
Indian Standard
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR
TREATMENT OF ROCK FOUNDATIONS, CORE
AND ABUTMENT CONTACTS WITH ROCK, FOR
EMBANKMENT DAMS
Foundation and Substructure Sectional Committee, BDC 52

Chairman
SIIRI K. R. DATYE
Rehem Mansion 2
44 Bhagat Singh Road, Colaba, Bombay
ADDITIONAL CHIEF E N o IN E ER Irrigation Department, Government of Uttar Pradesh, Lucknow
( BUIL~INQS )
Smu R. K. MATHUR ( Alternate)
SHRI R. N. BANSAL Irrigation Works, Punjab, Chandigarh
SHRI S. P. GUPTA ( Alternate )
SH~I MAHAVIR RIDASARIA Ferro Concrete Co ( India ) Pvt Ltd, Indore
SIIRI ASHOK BIDASARIA ( Alternate )
SERI S. CIIAKRABARTI Gammon India Limited, Bombay
SHRI D. I. DESAI ( Alternate )
CHIEF ENQINEER ( IP ) AND SPECIAL Irrigation Department, Government of Gujarat, Gandhinagar
SECRETARY TO GOVT OF GUJARAT
SKJPZRIN~ENDINQENQINEER ( Alternate)
CHIEF ENGINEER ( MEDIUM & MINOR Irrigation Department, Government of Andhra Pradesh, Hyderabad
IRRJ~.~T~~N )
DIRECTOR ( Alternate )
CHIEF ENUTNEEK. ( SUPA DAM Irrigation Department Government of Karnataka, Mysore
CONSTRUCTION )
DIRECTOR ( ERDD )-II Central Water Commission, New Delhi
DEPUTY DIRECTOR ( ERDD )-II ( Alternate )
SIIRI A. H. DIVANJI Asia Foundation and Construction Limited, Bombay
SHRI A. N. JANGLE ( Alternate)
KM DJVATIA E. National Hydroelectric Power Corporation Limited, New Delhi
SHRI BR~JENDER SHARMA ( Alternate )
SIIRI A. C. GOYAL Tata Consulting Engineers, Bangalore
SHRI BRIJENDER SUAR~XA ( Alternate )
SIIILI B. K. PANT~AKY Hindustan Construction Co Ltd, Bombay
SRRI D. M. Savun ( Alternate )
SRRI M. R. PUNJA Cemindia Limited, Bombay
SIIRI D. J. KETEAR ( Alternate )
RESEARCH OPFICER Irrigation Department, Government of Maharashtra, Bombay
SHRI DAM~DAR S.AHOO Government of Orissa, Irrigation and Power Department
SHRI C. SUDIIINDRA Central Soil and Materials Research Station, Ministry of Irrigation,
New Delhi
DEPUTY DIRECTOR ( SOIL ) ( Alternate )
SUPERINTENDINU ENQINEER ( BRIDUES Roads Wing, Ministry of Shipping and Transport, New Delhi
AND STANDARDS )
SHRI G. RAMAN, Director General, BIS ( Ex-o#cio Member )
Secretary
SHRI M. SADASIVAM
Assistant Director ( Civ Engg ), BIS
@ Copyright 1987
This publication it protected under the Indian Copyright Act ( XIV of 1957 ) and reproduction in whole or in
part by any means except with written permission of the publisher shall be deemed to be an infringement of
copyright under the said Act.
IS:11973 -1986
Indian Standard
TREATMENT OF ROCK FOUNDATIONS, CORE
AND ABUTMENT CONTACTS WITH ROCK, FOR
EMBANKMENT DAMS
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the emphasized while providing guidelines which would
Indian Standards Institution on 29 August 1986, permit a site engineer to use his discretion without
after the draft finalized by the Foundation and Sub- compromising the overall design requirements.
structures Sectional Committee had been approved
by the Civil Engineering Division Council. 0.3 This standard is to be read with:
IS : 4999-1968 Grouting of pervious soils
0.2 The treatment of foundations and abutments
for embankment dams on rock foundations is an art IS : 5050-1968 Code of practice for design,
of applying the knowledge of local geology and construction and maintenance of relief
certain basic principle covering positive cut off wells
extending to bed rock. It would not be practicable
to prepare a rigid set of rules or stipulate standard IS : 6066-1984 Recommendations for pressure
procedures which would require to be enforced grouting of rock foundations in river valley
without leaving any latitude for the exercise of projects (Jirst revision )
discretion ‘by the site engineer. The aim of these IS : 8411-1977 Guidelines for design of under-
recommendations is to summarize well-known and seepage control measures for earth and
proved principles and to describe commonly used rockfill dams
procedures, equipment and techniques in order to
enable an engineer incharge to draft specifications IS : 11293 ( Part 1 )-1985 Guidelines for the
for a specific case. The need for following an ex- design of grout curtains: Part 1 Earth and
perimental approach and learning through trial is rockfill dams
1. SCOPE
1.1 The scope of this standard is limited to earth
and rockfill dams where the control of seepage is
achieved primarily by a positive cutoff extending to
bed rock so that the core is seated on rock all along
the foundation as well as the flanks and abutments.
The shell or casing zones may however rest on over-
burden.
TRANSITIONS
1.2 Treatment of rock foundation for strengthening
and stahilization of slopes is excluded from this
standard. The scope is limited to treatment requi-
red for control of seepage.
2. ALIGNMENT OF THE DAM
2.1 Excessive skewness of the dam axis with respect
to the valley alignment is to be avoided. Diver-
gence of abutment contours with reference to the
axis of the dam is to be avoided by choice of align-
ment, and the axis of the dam may be adjusted to .
FLOW
avoid divergence of contours with reference to
dam axis. FIG. 1 PLAN OF ROCK CONTACT AT
CENTRALCONTACT AREA
2.2 Despite these adjustments, because of irregula-
rity of rock surface, there may still be areas of core 3. ROCK PROFILE ALONG THE FOUNDA-
contact where the rock contours have an undesirable TION
orientation. Trimming of rock shall then be done 3.1 Rock profiles should be examined both along
to attain a maximum 90” angle with the axis on a the axis and in the transverse direction. The beha-
horizontal plane ( see Fig. 1 ). Such trimming viour of the core material and the cracking hazard
should be accommodated with the core contact and is dependent on the pattern of stresses developed
transitions. from the interaction of the rock and the core
2
IS :11973- 1986
material. In the following paragraph, guidelines are 3.1.5 The hazard of slides in either overburden
furnished stipulating requirement of rock profile materials or rock during excavation for the core,
along the axis and in the transverse direction. The spillway, or shells shall be given careful considera-
consequence of rock geometry in the longitudinal tion in planning and in the layout of the dam.
and transverse directions creating zones of tensile
stress in the core should be examined. These may 4. ROCK PROFILE ACROSS CUT-
require special consideration and adverse conse- OFF TRENCH
quences of such geometries may be mitigated by 4.1 The excavated slope ofthe cut off trench should
filling with concrete in critical area and providing be 1:l or flatter irrespective of the slopes required
supplementary features as filters plastic concrete for stability of excavation. Adequately designed
septums, etc. filter, single or multiple layer, should be provided
3.1.1 Abrupt changes in section, for example, against the downstream face of the cut-off trench.
benches on the abutment slopes, should be avoided The filter should be capable of preventing internal
to minimize the hazard of transverse cracking erosion of core material and satisfy the filter
because of differential settlement between the deep criteria. The consequences of the loosening of the
and shallow portions of the dam. If a site with rock due to construction operations should be
a bench on the abutment is to be developed, examined while establishing filter requirements for
trimming or rounding of the bench should be the downstream rock face.
considered. 4.2 Alternatively, excavated surface through
3.1.2 Necessary trimming or excavation of the weathered rocks may be treated with shotcrete.
abutments should be done very carefully. The line Where loosening of the rock by excavation may
of excavation should be presplit or cushion blasting create open voids, low pressure pack grouting should
used to minimize damage to the rock beyond the be done of the rock contact.
excavation line. Surfaces against which material is 4.3 The minimum width of the core trench should
to be placed commonly are excavated to a slope not be larger than 4 m or 10 percent of head. If it
steeper than 4 horizontal to 1 vertical ( see Fig. 2 ). is not possible to accommodate a cut-off trench of
Flatter s1ope.s or rounding may be necessary, parti- top width detailed as above within the core width,
cularly in upper portions of the abutment. consideration should be given to use the plastic
3.1.3 Changes in slope should be limited to 20” concrete diaphragm in part of the cut-off depth.
and the number of changes in slope should be mini- 5. FOUNDATION PREPARATION
mum. This can be achieved by excavation of rock
or placing concrete against the rock. 5.1 Basically, the surface under the entire core and
under a portion of the upstream filter and down-
3.1.4 Removal of overburden materials under the stream transition zone shall be completely excavated
upstream and downstream shells may not be neces- to such rock as will offer adequate resistance to
sary. Removal of overburden may however be erosion of fines in the core.
required if excessive settlement of the shell sections
would develop under their weight, if overburden All loose or semi-detached blocks of rock should
materials are so weak as to result in slides, or if see- be removed. The quality of rock shall be judged
page passing through the core or through the in terms of the characteristic of core material. Rock
foundation materials cannot be controlled and of ‘Lugeon’ values in percolation test within 10
discharged safely with the overburden in place. ( Ten ) will generally be free of cracks larger than
MAX. CHANGE IN SLOPE 20’

ESTIMATED
EXISTING GROUND
EXCAVATED SURFACE TO BE
SOUND ROCK
VERTICAL AND NEAR
VERTICAL BEDROCK SURFACES
IN SOUND ROCK TO BE
EXCAVATED TO MAXIMUM SLOPE
OF 1/2H TO 1V
ESTIMATED BEDROCK SURFACE
- CONCRETE IN- FILL

ALL OVER BURDEN AND
SLUMPED ROCK TO WHERE DIRECTED
BE EXCAVATED
FIG. 2 TYPICAL CORE ABUTMENT EXCAVATION DETAIL
3
IS:11973 - 1986
0025 mm. Erosion of fines from core materials 5.7 The final rock surface should have smooth
commonly used would not occur through such contours against which soil can be compacted by
cracks. Grouting may be necessary to bring down heavy equipment. Hand compaction is generally
‘Lugeon’ values to above allowable limits in the unsatisfactory and it is advisable to place plastic
contact zonc3. concrete in core contact areas of conduit trenches
and other irregularities transverse to the dam axis
5.2 The amount of care required in treating the for a width at least 0.5 H or preferably 1’0 H.
rock suface is’controlled by the character of the core
material. If the core material is resistant to piping, 5.8 Surface treatment as described may be difficult
especially if it contains considerable coarse material to accomplish on steeply sloping abutments. In this
with adequate proportion of sand, surface treatment case, gunite may be used for filling depressions
is less demanding than if the core material is susce- after the cracks and joints have been cleaned and
ptible to piping; for example, a fine silty sand and sealed. If there is extensive jointing, especially if
very lean clays. In the latter case, extreme care the joints slope upward away from the face,
should be taken and the core material should be adequate sealing of the joints may require construc-
placed only after very careful inspection of ting a concrete slab, which is dowelled to the rock,
the treated surface. For dispersive clays, special and then grouting through the slab.
precauutions, such as protection by filter fabric or
plastic concrete may be required. 5.9 The depth of excavation necessary in weathered
5.3 Blasting should be kept to the minimum rock is difficult to establish during initial design.
practical in order not to open up joints or other- The depth of weathering is usually very irregular,
wise disturb the rock surface, and no blasting being controlled by minor variations in joint spac-
should be done on surfaces that have been grouted ing and rock type. Abrupt changes in elevation
or slush-grouted. of the surface of ‘groutable rock’ probably will be
found. Overhangs, some of large size, should be
5.4 All knobs and overhangs should be removed by anticipated.
barring and wedging or by light blasting. Cracks
and joints that are exposed in these operations 5.10 Usual practice is to select material, preferably
should be’ cleaned ( usually to a depth of not less a plastic soil, for the first lift over the rock
than three times their width at the surface ) using surface. If plastic soils are limited, the most
air and water, picks, or other tools, as necessary, to plastic soil available should be used. Gravel or
remove completely soil or weathered rock which stone exceeding about 50 mm in size should be
would be subject to erosion. Such joints and cracks removed or excluded from the material placed in
should then be filled with grout under a small this first layer over the rock to improve compaction
gravity head, say, of 3 m. Wherever possible, a pipe at the contact. The surface on which the core
should be set to the bottom of the joint or crack and material is placed should be moist but free of
grout pumped in until the joint or crack is comple- standing water, and the material when placed
tely filled. Grout should then be broomed and should be wet of optimum. In dry climates or
brushed across the top of the joint to ensure that the during dry weather, difficulty may be experienced
contact with the core material will be tight and with this first lift becoming excessively dry where it
non-erodible. In the absence of gravity grouting, feathers out on a gentle to moderate slope. In
slush grouting alone may not be effective because such a case the edge of the fill should be sloped
complete filling may not be assured. Grout used slightly downward toward the contact with the
for this purpose should be highly plastic buttery. rock. Against steep rock faces or adjacent to
The maximum size of sand for the slush grout used concrete structures, sloping the fill slightly upward
for filling cracks should not exceed one-third the near the contact is desirable to provide better clear-
width of the crack to be filled. ance and better compaction at the contact.
5.5 Concrete with admixtures of approved quality 6. FOUNDATION CLEAN-UP
and sufficient water to achieve a slump of loo-150
mm may be easily compacted by hand and 6.1 All foundation areas should be dewatered for
used for backfilling of irregularities such as depres- final inspection after clean-up prior to the placement
sed areas, holes and potholes. of core material. The prepared rock surface in
the central contact area should be free of water at
5.6 Small ribs and similar irregularities should be the time when embankment material is placed and
filled with plastic concrete to produce slopes not for foundation treatment measures, such as slush
steeper than about 1:l where the difference in grouting and crack-grouting.
elevation ici a few centimetres to a metre or so.
Surface treatment in this fashion should extend 6.2 Where existence of deep depressions and
upstream to approximately the mid-point of the occurrence of springs complicate the clean up,
upstream filter and downstream at least 0.6 to 0.9 m special provisions should be made to dry up the
beyond the downstream edge of the fine filter. In foundation in preparation for pl.acing embankment
particularly adverse situations, such as where there fill. Gravel filled drains channellizing the water
are joints wider than the coarser particles of the from the springs to central sumps and submersible
filter, surface treatment as described may be pumps or pneumatically operated sump pumps
necessary under the entire transition zone. ( placed inside the sumps ) have been found to be
4
L
IS : 11973- 1966
effective. A cover of polythene should be placed c) To reduce the hydrostatic pressure in the
over the gravel to prevent contamination of the downstream foundation of the dam. The
gravel by the fill material. Stand pipes should be latter is generally a problem only for dams
provided for discharge of water from the sumps. on fairly weak foundations and critical
The top of stand pipes should correspond to the abutment configurations. This is usually
static head. accomplished in conjunction with an
abutment drainage system.
6.3 Where rock is friable and subject to cracking
by exposure and drying, coating of asphalt emul- 8.2 To prevent possible piping of the fine core
sion or slush grout comprising a workable mix of material through the foundation, blanket grouting
cement, sand and bentonite is desirable. is accomplished as determined by the rock condi-
tions. If the core foundation of the dam consists
6.4 To prevent cracks fi,orn developing in surfaces of closely fractured and jointed rock, a blanket
already prepared, all necessary excavation requir- grout pattern is used with holes spaced at 3 m to
ing blasting should be completed before starting 5 m with depths of 6 m to 10 m. If the foundation
grouting and surface treatment and clean up. rock is massive, no blanket grouting is done. Loca-
lised area consisting of faults, fissures, or cracks are
generally grouted upstream of the cutoff and
7. TREATMENT OF ROCK DEFECTS AND sometimes downstream.
DISCONTINUITIES
8.3 If the rock does not respond to cement grouting
7.1 In evaluating and planning for excavation and and post grouting ‘Lugeon’ values remain above 10
seepage control measures, special attention shall be (Ten) locally, the nature and size of cracks should
given to d&continuities such as faults and relief be carefully examined. When the high ‘Lugeon’
(sheet) joints, which may extend for long distance as values are attributable to fine cracks, closely spaced,
nearly plane surfaces. Relief joints may exist cement grouting may not be effective in reducing
naturally or may open during excavation. They are the permeability. In hard inerodible rocks, such
most likely to occur in deep, steep-walled valleys, fine cracks may be permitted. In other cases such
specially in brittle rocks, or where high modulus as gauge zones supplementary measures should be
rock is underlain by low modulus rock. Since they resorted to for prevention of internal erosion ( set
are roughly parallel to the valley wall, they may IS : 6066-1984*).
cause slides during construction. Openings of
several centimetres have been observed. Control 9. DRAINAGE
of seepage through such joints becomes a major 9.1 Galleries or tunnels are sometimes excavated
problem. Installation of concrete cutoffs across into abutments and foundations to provide access
particularly bad joints may be warranted or for drilling drain holes and grout holes into the
extensive grouting may be necessary. Drainage foundation or into the embankment foundation
from such joints shall be provided. contact. Drilling from these tunnels after filling of
the reservoir is subjected to the hazard of uncontro-
7.2 When seams are filled with silt, clay, etc, or in lled ‘blow in’ under high heads. If tunnels are
faults with gauge, it is essential to excavate and provided, the elevations should be judiciously chosen
backfill the seam and gauge zones in the entire so that the hazard of ‘blow in’ can be prevented by
core contact zone. It is advisable to excavate and lowering the reservoir before undertaking the drilling
backfill a further length on the upstream for a operations for corrective grouting or drainage.
distance equal to the reservoir head and backfill it
with concrete. On the downstream side the seams 9.2 Relief wells and drainage trenches are often
should be excavated and backfilled with a well used at downstream toes of dams on pervious over-
designed and adequate filter again for a distance burden to provide relief of seepage pressure and to
equal to the reservoir head. control seepage discharges without permitting
piping. Installation of relief wells and their monitor-
8. GROUTING ing shall be done as per IS : 5050-1968t. When
drain holes are installed in rock containing fines the
8.1 There are three main objectives in the grouting drain should be protected by a filter system as
programme ( see also IS : 6066-1984” ). These are shown in Fig. 3.
as follows: 9.3 On projects where the foundation is such that
seepage could cause migrati n of particles from the
a) To reduce the seepage flow through the
foundation materials, the drainage blanket shall
dam foundation;
be filter graded with respect to the foundation.
b) TO prevent possible piping or washing of Drain pipes may be included in the blanket to
fines from the core into cracks and fissures ensure ample discharge capacity.
in the foundation; and
*Recommendations for pressure grouting of rock founda-
tions in river valley projects (Jirst revision ) .
*Recommendations for pressure grouting of rock founda- TCode of practice for design, construction and maintenance
tions in river valley projects (Jirst revision ). of relief wells.
5
IS : 11973 - 1986
9.4 Itis essential to ensure continuity of filter downstream side of cutoff trench as shown in
system from the drain to the core contact on the Fig. 4.
DOWNSTREAM FACE
OF EMBANKMENT
QL,Omm SLOTTE :D BRASS PIPE

6R PVC WITH FILTER FABRIC
1.5m min
AS REQUIRED.
FIG.3 INSTALLATION
OFHORIZONTALDRAIN IN ABUTMENT OFHIGH
EMBANKMENT DAM
NOTE: CONTINUOUS FILTER SYSTEM FROM CHIMNEY

DRAIN TO DOWN STREAM SLOPE OF CUTOFF
TRENCH FILTER TO BE EXTENDED TO BOTTOM
OF CUTOFF TRENCH.
FIG.4 FILTERSYSTEMFOR CUTOFF TRENCH

Is : 12169 - 1967
(( Reaffirmed
Fkafflrmed 1997)
2002 )
Indian Standard
CRITERIA FOR
DESIGN OF SMALL EMBANKMENT DAMS
( First Reprint FEBRUARY 1999 )
UDC 627.81 : 624.136 : 624.31
0 Copyright 1988
MANAK BHAVAN, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG
NEW DELHI 110002
Gr 5 February 1988
IS : 12169- 1987
lndian Standard
CRITERIA FOR
Dams ( Overflow and Non-Overflow ) Sectional Committee, BDC 53
Chairman Re~rssraling
SH~I V. B. PATEL Irrigation Department, Government of Gujarat,
Gandhinagar
Mombers
SERI R. BALABAMAN 2;:kFa State Electricity Board, Trivandrum
Saar R. K. BEASIN Beas Management Board, Naagal
Township
SHRI J. S. KHURANA ( Alternate )
SHRI H. S. BEAT In personal capacity ( .4%, 599, 10th Cross, Jaya-
nagar, Ban&ore )
SHRI M. V. BRAAXE Tata Consulting Engineers, Bangalore
SHRI R. SIVASANKAR ( Alternate)
SERI B. K. CHADHA Consulting Engineering Services ( India ) Private
Ltd, New Delhi
PROB HARI KRISHNA ( Alternate )
PROWM. c. CAATURVE~I Indian Institute of Technology, New Delhi
CHIEF EN~INEEI~ ( RANJIT SAC+AR Irrigation Department, Government of Punjab,
DAM ) Chandigarh
~DIRECT~~~ ( RANJIT SACJAR
DAY ) ( Alternate)
SHRI C. ETTY D~~<vv~N In personal capacity ( P. 0. Muftada, Triwndrum )
DIRECTOR Central Water & Power Research Station, Pune
SHRI S. L. MOKAS~II ( Alternatr)
DJBECTOR OF DESIGNS Irrigation Pr Waterways Department, Govern-
ment of West Bengal, Calcutta .
DIBECTEO~R;; ,” RDO-I ) Central Water Commission, New Delhi
DIBEC~OR
( E & RDD-I ) (Alternate )
DIRECTOR, INSTITUTE OF HYDXAU- Public Works Department, Government of Tamil
LICE & HYDROLOGY Nadu, Madras
SUPEBXNTENDINQ ENGINEER
( DESIQNS ) ( Alternatu )
Soar M. V. S. IYENQAU Hindustan Construction Company Ltd, Bombay
@ Cq@ight 1988
This publication is protected under the Is&a Co$yright Act ( XIV of 1957 ) and
pttblirher shall be, deemed to ba xtt infringement of copyright under the raid Act.
IS I 12169- 1987
( Confinuedjrom page 1 )
Members Rejresenting
OBFICER-ON-S PE c I A L D u T Y, Irrigation Department, Government of Andhra
APERL Pradesh, Hyderabad
SUPERINTENDINC~ EN~INEBB
( DAMS ) ( CD0 ) ( Alferaufe )
SHn1 M. U. PUI‘OHIT Irrigation Department, Government of Gujarat,
Gandhinagar
SERI P. M. SONI ( Alferpote )
S-1 RAM IQBAL SINQH Irrigation Department, Government of Uttar
-Pradesh, Lucknow
SHRI BISEAIU LAL JATANA ( Alternate )
Saab M. S. REDDY Central Water Commission, New Delhi
REFRE~ENTATIVE Institution of Engineers ( India ), Calcutta
SECRETARY Central Board of Irrigation & Power, New Delhi
DIRECTOR ( CIVIL ) ( AIfernate )
S~FERINTENDIN~ EN o I #E a a Irrigation Department, Government of Mahara-
( MD ),CDO shtra, Bombay
SERI K. N. VENPATARAMAN Major, Medium & Minor Irrigation Department,
Government of Madhya Pradesh, Bbopal
SHRI 0. N. THAPER (Afternate )
SIXRI G. RAMAN, Director General, BIS ( Ex-ofiio Member )
Socretav
SHRI K. K. SEARF~A
Joint Director ( Civ Engg ), BIS
Earth and Rockfill Dams Subcommittee, BDC 53 : 2
CO?WM7
SEBI M. U. PUROltIT Irrigation Department, Government of Gujarat,

Gandhinagar
Members
SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER, CD0
( Alfsrno~e to Shri M. U. Purohit )
S.ns~ N. K. ARORA Bhakra Beas Management Board, Nangal
Township
SHRI K. K. S. BHANDABI ( Allrrnate )
PROF M. C. CHATtJRVEDr Indian Institute of Technology, New Delhi
SEBI R. P. CHOPBA National Projects Construction Corporation Ltd,
New Delhi
SERI K. N. TANEJA ( Alfe~notu )
SEEI K. R. DATPB In personal capacity ( Rehem Mansion No. 2, 44.5.
Bhagot Singh Road, Coloba, Bombay b
~XRsCTOR ( E & RDD-I ) Central Water Commission, New Delhi
DEPUTY DIRECTOR
( E t RDD-I ) ( Allemote )
( Continued on @gs 20 )
2
18:12189- 1987
Indian Standard
CRITERIA FOR
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards
on 24 August 1987, after the draft finalized by the Dams ( Overflow and
Non-overflow ) Sectional Committee had been approved by the Civil
0.2 A fairly large number of small embankment dams are being built all
over the country. These are generally designed locally and central design
facilities are not made use of. In designing; a small embankment dam
many of the provisions specified in IS : 8826-1978* are required to be
modified orrelaxed. It was, therefore, felt that a separate standard should
be prepared for guiding the design of small embankment dams,
standard is complied with, the final value, observed or calculated, expres-
sing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with
IS : 2-1960*. The number of significant places retained in the rounded off
value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard lays down guidelines for design of small embankment
dams.
~2. TERMlNOLOGY
2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the following definitions in addition
to those given in IS : 8826-1978* shall apply.
2.1 Embankment Dam - A dam composed of any type of soil in&d-

ing rock.
2.2 Homogeneous Embankment Dam - An embankment dam com-
posed of single type of material.
*Guidelinesfor design of large earthhod rockfill dams.
thlea for rounding off numericaI valuer ( r&~ed ).
3
IS ‘: 12169- 1987
2.3 Large Dam - A dam exceeding 15 m in height above deepest river

bed level and a dam between 10 and 15 m height provided volume’ of
earthwork exceeds 0.75 million ms and storage exceeds 1 million m* or
the maximum flood discharge exceeds 2 000 cumecs.
2.3.1 Modtjied Homogeneous Embankment Dam - An embankment dam in
which small quantities of pervious material, selected to control the action
of seepage, are carefully placed in an otherwise homogeneous dam ( See
Fig. 1 ).
2.4 Rockfill Dam - An embankment consisting of various sizes of rock
to provide stability and an impervious core of membrane to provide water-
tightness.
2.5 Small Dam - A dam not satisfying the criteria of a large dam
( see 2.3 ).
2.6 Zoned Embmdsment Dam - An embankment dam composed of
zones of different types of soil ( se8 Fig. 2A and 2B ).
3. COMPONENTS OF EMBAICMENT DAM
3.1 An embankment dam generally consists of the following components
( Fig. 2A and 2B ).
a) Cut-off;
b) Core;
c) Casing;
d) Internal drainage system and foundations;
e) Slope protection; and
f ) Surface drainage.
3.2 The following components are provided in special cases:
a) Impervious blanket; and
b) Relief well.
4. PUNCTIONS AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
4.0 The functions and design requirements of the components are descri-
bed in 4.1 to 4.8.
4.1 Clst-off
4.1.1 The cut-off is required for the following functions:
a) To reduce loss of stored water through foundations and abut-
ments; and
b) To prevent subsurface erosion by piping.
4
JLC!?~_ _ _ _ _
1. Selected Earth Fill 5. Sand Filter

2. Impervious Fill 6. Rock Toe
3. Foundation 7. Rubble Pitching
4. Impetirous Sub-Stratum 8. Tee Drain
FIG. 1 OF MODIFIEDHOMOGENEOUS
CROSS-SECTION EARTH DAM
/-y-f- TOP WIDTH
PERVIOUS COVER
OVER-BURDEN
IMPERVIOUS STRATUM
1. Positive Cut-off 6. Inclined and Horizontal Filter

2. Grout Curtain 7. Rock Toe and Toe Drain
3. Central Impervious Core 8. Riprap with Filter
4. Upstream Casing 9. Catch Water Drain
5. Downstream Casing
NOTE - Horizontal filter at intermediate levels are sometimes placed in the upstream casing zone where
casing material is of Impervious nature.
2A Embankment Dam with Central Core and Positive Cut-Off

IS t I?169 - 1987
4.1.2 The type of cut-off should be decided on the basis of detaikd 4.1.3.6 At the abutment co
~geological investigation. It is desirable to provide a positive cut-off. be taken to avoid seepage by out
Where this is not possible, partial cut-off with or without upstream imper- 4.1.4 Necessity of grouting be
vious blanket may be provided. In any case, adequate drainage arrange- the cut-off trench is terminated i
ments may be provided on the downstream which may, inter-alia, include red or having cracks, joints and
relief well. Cut-off may be in the form of trench, sheet piling, cement decided based on percolation tea
bound curation, diaphragm of bentonite, concrete or other impervious than 10 should be grouted so as
materials. about 5. The depth of grouting~
of water at the level from which
4.1.3 ~Recommendations for location and size of cut-off are given
ing below the bed in case of par
in 4.1.3.1 to 4.1.3.6. A drainage cut-off is the most common form of
cost and effectiveness of the grow
cut-off.
through seepage below and beyol
4.1.3.1 The alignment of the cut-off should be fixed in such a way is done, provisions of IS : 4999-l
that its central line should be within the base of the impervious core. having permeability in excess of
grouping with a suitable mate
4.1.3.2 In case of positive cut-off, it should be keyed at least to a 10-s cm/s~and 10-s cm/s may
depth of O-4 m into continuous impervious sub-stratum or inerodible rock to the extent possible. The grou
formation.
than 10-s cm/s will be difficult, (
4.1.3.3 The partial cut-off is specially suited for horizontally strati- 4.2 Core
fied foundations with relatively more pervious layer near top. The depth 4.2.1 The core provides imps
of the partial cut-off in deep pervious alluvium will be governed by: dam. Impervious soils are gener
a) Permeability of substrata; and may be referred to for suitabilit:
recommendations based on IS :
b) Relative economics of depth of excavation governed usually by
compressibility and liquid limit
cost of dewatering versus length of upstream impervious blanket.
ded, if possible, as they are pror
4.1.3.4 The bottom width of the cut-off trench may be fixed taking 4.2.2 The core may be locate
following factors into consideration: The locations will depend main1
a) Provide sufficient working space for compaction equipments; graphy of site, foundation cond
main advantage of a centralmcox
b) Provide sufficient working space to carry-out curtain grouting;
contact between the core and t
and
leakage and piping. On the 0th
c) Provide safety against piping. pressure in -the downstream par
A minimum width of 4.0 m is recommended. A bottom width of 10 safety. It also permits the constr
to 30 percent of hydraulic head may be provided to-satisfy requirement of core. The section with an inclin
piping. This may be suitably increased to satisfy other requirements of volume of random material on t
mechanical equipments and curtain grouting. The side slopes depend 4.2.3 The following practical
upon sub-strata. Side slopes of at least I:1 or ~flatter may be provided in core:
case of overburden, while i:l and 1: 1 may be provided in soft rock and a) Availability of suitable
hard rock respectively. The back fill material for cut-off trench shall have
b) Resistance to piping;
same properties as those specified for impervious core in 4.2.1.
*Recommendations for grouting o
4.1.3.5 The cut-off in the flanks on either side should normally tclaasification and identification
extend up to the top of impervious core.
I. ..-
.
ISr12169-1981
4.1.3.6 At the abutment contacts of the cut-off trench, care should

be takento avoid seepage by outflanking.
4.i.4 Necessity of grouting below the bed of cut-off trench will arise if
the cut-off trench is terminated in rock formation and the rock is weathe-
red or having cracks, joints and crevices. Necessity of grouting may be
decided based on percolation tests. Rock having a lugeon value of more
than 10 should be grouted so as to bring post-grouting lugeon value of
about 5. The depth of grouting does not normally exceed half the head
of water at the level from which grouting is done. The necessity of grout-
ing below the bed in case of partial cut-off trench willbe governed by the
cost and effectiveness of the grout curtain vis-a-vis the value of water loss
through seepage below and beyond the partial cut-off trench If grouting
is done, provisions of IS : 4999-1968* may be followed. Alluvial strata
having permeability in excess of 10-s cm/s shall be treated thoroughly by
grouping with a suitable material. Strata of permeability between
10-s cm/s and 10-s cm/s may be treated to reduce the permeability
to the extent possible. The grouping of strata having permeability less
than 10-s cm/s will be difficult, expensive and time consuming,
4.2 Core
4.2.1 The core provides impermeable barrier within the body of the
dam. Impervious soils are generally suitable for the core. IS : 1498-1970t
may be referred to for suitability of soils for the core. Appendix A gives
recommendations based on IS : 1498-1970t. However, soils having high
compressibility and liquid limit and having organic content may be avoi-
ded, if possible, as they are prone to swelling and formation of cracks.
4.2.2 The core may be located either centrally or inclined upstream.
The locations will depend mainly on the availability of materials, topo-
graphy of site, foundation conditions, diversion considerations, etc. The
main advantage of a central core is that it provides higher pressure at the
contact between the core and the foundation reducing the possibility of
leakage and piping. On the other hand, inclined core reduces the pore
pressure in the downstream part of the dam and thereby increases its
safety. It also permits the construction of downstream casing ahead of the
core. The section with an inclined core allows the use of relatively large
volume of random material on the downstream side.
4.2.3 The following practical considerations govern the thickness of the
core:
a) Availability of suitable impervious material;
*Recommendation3 for grouting of previous soils.

Wkssification and identification of soils for general engineering purposes (first
revision ) .
9
fSr12169-1987
c) Permissible seepage through dam;

d) Availability of other materials for casing, filter, etc; and
e) Minimum width that will permit proper construction.
The minimum top width of the core should be 3 m. Its thickness at
any section shall not be lesser than 30 percent ( preferably not lesser,
than 50 percent ) of maximum head of water acting at that section.
4.2.4 The top level of the core should be fixed at O-5 m above MWL.
4.3 Casing
4.3.1 The function of casing is to impart stability and protect the core.
The relatively pervious materials, which are not subject to cracking on
direct exposure to the atmosphere, are suitable for casing. IS : 1498-19iO*
may be referred to for suitability of soils for casing. Appendix A gives
recommendations based on IS : 1498-1970*.
4.4 Internal Drainage System
4.4.1 Internal drainage system comprises an inclined or vertical filter,
a horizontal filter, a rock toe, a toe drain, etc. For the design of the
components of the internal drainage system IS : 9429-1980t may be
referred to. As far as possible locally available sands, gravels, etc, should
be used.
4.4.2 The design of filter consists of applying the conventional filter
criteria which take into account only the grain size distribution and the
shape of the grains. However, in addition to the grain size, the stability
of the base soil adjacent to a given filter depends on its resistance to drag
forces.
In view of this, when the soil containing 20 percent or more clay is
used as a base soil and has non-dispersive properties, the filter criteria
may not be enforced strictly and the clean sand available locally may be
used irrespective of the gradation. This relaxation should be applied to
dams up to 10 m height only. For dams of height more than l0 m, the
criteria for filters protecting cohesive soil may be relaxed by the designer
depending upon his judgement and experience.
4.4.3 Inclined or vertical filter together with the base filter, if required,
is desirable to be provided especially to protect silty core material. How-
ever, the inclined or vertical filter may be deleted in zoned sections having
pervious downstream shell and clayey cores but a transition filter between
the core and the downstream shell would be necessary in case of dams
where rockfill is used as shell material. In case of dam reaches, where the
head of water is 3 m or less, it may not be necessary to provide blanket or
chimney filters. Adequate toe protection shall, however, be provided.
*Cl~sification and identification of soils for general engineeringpurposes(first
revision ).
+&de of_practicefor drainage system for earth and rockfill dams.
10
16 I 12169 - iJ3
4.4.4 wherever there is silty material to be filled in the cut-off and the
downstream face of the cut-off is sufficiently open to receive soil particles
migrating under high seepage gradients, it is advisable to provide a pro-
tective filter layer along the downstream face of the cut-off trench also.
4.5 Slope Protection
4.5.1 Upstream Slope - The upstream slope protection is ensured by
providing riprap. For design of the riprap, IS : 8237-1985* may be referr-
ed. A minimum of 300 mm thick riprap over 150 mm thick filter layer
may be provided.
4.5.2 Downstream Slope - The downstream slope protection is ensured
by providing riprap or turfing. It is usual practice to protect the down-
stream slope from raincuts by providing suitable turfing on the entire
slope. For details of downstream slope protection, IS : 8237-1985* may be
referred.
4.6 Surface Drainage - For surface drainage of the downstream slope
of the dam, reference may be made to IS : 8237-1985*.
4.7 Impervious Blanket
4.7.1 The horizontal upstream impervious blanket is provided to
increase the path of seepage when full cut-off is not practicable on pervi-
ous foundations. The impervious blanket may be provided either with or
without partial cut-off. Impervious blanket shall be connected to core of
the dam as shown in Fig. 2B.
4.7.2 The material used for impervious blanket should have far less
permeability than the foundation soil. To avoid formation of cracks, the
material should not be highly plastic. Reference may be made to
IS : 1498-1970t for suitability of soils for blanket. Appendix A gives reco-
mmendations based on 1S : 1498-1970t. A 300 mm thick layer of random
material over the blanket is recommended to prevent cracking due to
exposure to atmosphere.
4.7.3 The impervious blanket may be designed in accordance with
IS : 8414-1977x. As a general guideline, impervious blanket with a mini-
munrthickness of 1.0 m and a minimum length of 5 times the maximum
water head measured from upstream toe of the core may be provided.
4.8 Relief Wells - If relief wells are provided, they should meet the
requirements of IS : 5050-19688.
*Code of practice for protection of slope for reservoir embankments (first rcoiziea ).
tClassification and identification of soils for general engineering purpose (/ir~t
rwisian 1.
IGuidelines for design of under-seepage~control measure for earth-rockfill dams.
@ode of practice for design, construction and maintenance of relief wells.
11
is t 12i69 - is87
5. BASIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
5.1 The basic requirements for design of embankment dam are to ensure:
a) safety against overtopping,
b) stability, and
c) safety against internal erosion.
5.1.1 Overtopping - Sufficient spillway capacity should, be provided to
prevent overtopping of embankment during and after construction. The
freeboard should be sufficient to prevent overtopping by waves and should
take into account the settlement of the embankment and foundation. Free
board for wave run up on slope shall be provided in accordance with the
provisions contained in IS : 10635-1983*.
5.1.2 Stability Analysis
5.1.2.1 The slopes of the embankment shall be stable under all load-
ing conditions. They should also be flat enough so as not to impose
excessive stresses on foundation.
5.1.2.2 For small dams stability analysis may not be necessary provi-
ded a good foundation is available and the designer with his experience
can decide adequate side slopes. However, where weak foundation condi-
tions viz. fissured clay, expensive soils, shales, over consolidated highly
plastic clays, soft clays dispersive soils, etc, are met within the substratum
in the dam-seat, extensive investigations of the foundation soil and borrow
area soil are required to be carried out and the design of the embankment
dam carried out in accordance with IS : 7894-1975t.
5.1.2.3 The design of small embankment dam sections may be divi-
ded into the following three categories based upon the height of the
embankment in its deepest portion.
a) Embankments where the height is below and up to 5 m;
b) Embankments where the height is more than 5.0 m and up to
10 m; and
c) Embankments where the height is above 10 m and up to 15 m.
For small dams under category (a) and (b) above the stability
analysis may not be necessary. General guidelines of the sections and the
recommended slopes are given in Table 1 for guidance of the designer.
The average properties considered for different soils are given in Table 2.
However, the designer with his experience and judgement may decide the
1P1_1
‘Guidelines fnr free board requirements in embankment dams.
tc~d~ of practice for stability analysis of earth dams.
-12
1s I 12169 - 1987
adequate side slopes where special technical or economic considerations

may have to be taken in to account. Stability analysis mav be carried out
in accordance with IS : 7894-1975* based upon the detailed foundation
and borrow area investigation and laboratory testing if the soil strata
below the dam seat consist ol weak foundation as given in 5.1.2 2 and/or
the height of embankment is more than 10 m.
6. SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

6.0 In addition to basic design requirements given in 5, the following
special design requirements, should also be satisfied for embankment
dams.
6.1 Control of Cracking - Cracking of impervious zone results in the
failure.of an embankment dam by erosion, piping, breaching, etc. Due
consideration to cracking phenomenon shall, therefore, be given in the
design of embankment dam. For classification of cracks and their impor-
tance, 6.1.1 to 6.1.3 of IS : 8826-19787 may be referred.
6.1.1 Measures for Control of Cracking - Following measures are recom-
mended for control of cracking:
a) Use of plastic clay core and rolling the core material at slightly
more than optimum moisture content. In case of less plastic clay,
2 to 5 percent bentonite of 200 to 300 liquid limit may be mixf d
to increase the plasticity.
b) Use of wider core to reduce the possibility of transverse or hori-
zontal cracks extending through it.
c) Careful selection of fill materials to reduce the differential move-
ment. To restrict the rock611 in lightly loaded outer casings and
to use well graded materials in the inner casings on either side of
the core.
d) Wide transition zones of properly graded filters of adequate width
for handling drainage, if cracks develop.
e) Special treatment, such as preloading, presaturation, removal
of weak material, etc, to the foundation and abutment, if
warranted.
f ) Delaying placement of core material in the crack region till most
of the settlement takes ~place.
g) Arching the dam horizontally between steep abutments.
h) Flattening the downstream slopes to increase slope stability in the
event of saturation from crack leakage.
j ) Cutting back the steep abutment slopes.
--
*Code of practice for stability analysis of earth dams.
tGuideliner for design of large earth and rockfill dams.
13
IS I 12169 - 1367
6.2 Stability at Junctions - Junctions of embankment dam with

foundation abutments, masonry structures, like overflow and non-overflow
dams and outlets need special attention with reference to one or all of the
following criteria:
4 Good bond between embankment dam and foundation;
b) Adequate creep length at the contact plane;
Cl Protection of embankment dam slope against scouring action;
and
d) Easy movement of traffic.
6.2.1 Junction with Foundation - Embankment dam may be founded on
soil overburden or rock. For foundation on soils or non-rocky strata, vege-
tation like bushes, grass roots, trees, etc, should be completely removed.’
After removal of these materials, the foundation surface should be moist-
ened to the required extent and adequately rolled before placing embank-
ment material. For rocky foundation, the surface should be cleaned of all
loose fragments including semi-detached and overhanging surface blocks
of rocks. Proper bond should be established belween the embankment and
the rock surface prepared.
6.2.2 jknctions with Abutments - The rocky abutments should be suitably

shaped and preapred in order to get good contact between the impervious
core of the embankment and the rock over-hangs, if any, should be
removed. Vertical surfaces should be excavated to form slopes, not steeper
than O-25 H to 1 V. A wider impervious zone and thicker transitions
should be provided, at the abutment contacts to increase the length of
path of seepage and to protect against erosion.
6.2.2.1 The bond between rocky or non-rocky abutment should be

established as in 6.2.1. In addition, sufficient creep length should be
provided between impervious section of the dam and the abutment, so as
to provide safety against piping. The creep length should be not less than
4 times the hydraulic head.
6.2.3 Junction with Non-overjow Dam -Junction of non-overflow masonry
concrete dam with embankment dam is provided by a better not steeper
than O-5 H to 1 V to the end face of the non-overflow block coming in
contact with the impervious core. A wider impervious zone and thicker
transitions shall be provided at the abutment contacts to increase the
length of path of seepage and to protect against erosion. Sometimes these
contact layers are mixed with 2 to 5 percent bentonite with liquid limit of
200 to 300 to cause expansion and hence to have tight joints. Sometimes
the junction of earth dam with non-ovetiow dam is provided with earth
retaining walls perpendicular Dr skew at the junction of non-overflow dam
I4
!S : 12169- 1!M7
TABLE 1 GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR EMBANKMENT SECTIONS

( Claucr 5.1.2.3 )
DESCRIPTION WEWiT upro5m HEIGHT ABOVE 5 m AND UP TO 10 m HEI~HT~A~B;;~~L~ AND

I%
i) Type of section Homogeneous section/Modified Zoned section/Modified hemoge- Zoned section/Modified homoge-
homogeneous section neouo section/Homogeneous neous mction/Homogeneou:
section section
r---_-*-_--~ c----~__-__--7
ii) S&u8 Upstream Downstream _Upsham Down&ram Upstream Downrtrtam
a) Coarse gtained soil Not suitable Not suitable Not suitable for core
(GW, GP, SW, SP) Suitable for casing zone
b) Coarse grained soil Section to be decided baaed upon

(GC, GM, SC, SM) the stability analysis in accord-
ance with IS : 7894-1975
c) Fine grained soil ‘Jg y (y) y do
(CL, ML, CI, MI) :
d) Fine gtained soil (;I (7) y, y, (W W do
(CH, MH) : : 3’75 : 1
‘y5’y;
iii) Hurting zone Not required - May be provided Necessary
a) Top width - 3m 3m
b) Top level 0’5 m above MWL 0.5 m above MWL
iv) Rock toe height Not necessary up to 3 m. Above Necessary Necessary

3 m height, 1 m height of rock H/5, where H is the height H/5, where H is the height of
toe may be provided of embankment embankment
v) Berma Not necessary Not necesmry The berm may be provided aa

per design. The minimum berm
width shall be 3 m. The berm
may be provided also on the
downstream alope for facilities
during maintenance.
it3: 12169- 1987
TABLE 2 AVERAGE PROPERTIES FOR DIFFERENT TYPES OF SOILS

( Cfuusa 5.1.2.3)
ENQINEERXNQ AVERAGE PROPERTIES OF SOIL SOIL CONIJTANT;~~~;~RECOXMENDED

Ns,“. CLASSI-
FICATION OF
c------------
MDD OMC
h,-_--,_--._---~
Cohesion Tan 4 c___---------)
$OlL ( .wd kg/ ma percent kg/m’ MDD OMC Cohesion Tan 4
IS : 1498-1970.) kg/m’ percent kg/m8
9 CC > I 840 < 15 NA >0’60

ii) GM > 1 830 < 15 NA >w67 .
iii) SM 1830 f 16 15*04 500 f 500 0’58 f 0’07 1 800 15 1 100 0.60
iv) SC 1840 f 16 15 f 0’4 1 100 f 600 0’6 f 0’07
v) ML 1 650 f 16 19 & 0’7 900 f NA 0.62 f 0’04
vi) CL 1 730 f 16 17 f 0’03 1 200 f 200 0.54 f 0’04 1 650 19 900 0.55
vii) CH 1 510 f 32 25 & 1.2 I 300 f 600 0.35 f 0’09
viii) MH 1310 f 64 36 & 3’2 2 000 1 900 o-47 f 0’05 1300 35 1300 0’35
*Classification and identification of soils for general engineering purposes (first reuision ).
16
fS : 12169 - 1987
with the overflow dam. Such retaining walls shorten the Jength of non-
overflow dam ( transition length ) but they themselves add to the cost.
The alignment of the dam and the junction may sometimes have to be
modified to suit smooth transition of road on top of dam from non-overflow
section to embankment dam section.
6.2.4 Junction with Outlets - Proper bond should be provided between

the earthwork and the outlet walls. Staunching rings should be provided
along the outlet conduits in the impervious zone, at intervals, so as to
increase the path of percolation along the contact. Backfilling of the
trench for the outlet conduit should be done with concrete up to the top
of rock surface and the portion of the trench above the rock level should
be refilled with impervious material compacted with moisture contact
about 2 percent more than optimum. The shape of conduit coming in
contact with earthwork shall be given a side better of 0.25 H to 1 V to
provide a bttter contact with the earthwork. Sharp corners at the top
should be avoided. Special care should be taken to ensure tight contacts
between the trench fact and the backfill.
7. SELECTION OF DAM SECTION
7.1 No single type of core-section of embankment dam is suited for all site
conditions. The adoption of the particular type of embankment section
depends upon the following factors:
a) Availability of the suitable local material in sufficint quantity
within reasonable range;
b) Foundation conditions and cut-off requirements;
c) Types of construction plant, earth moving, compaction and other
equipment;
d) Diversion considerations and construction schedule;
e) Climatic conditions in relation to placement, moisture content
control, subsequent moisture content change, etc; and
f ) Safety with respect to stability and seepage.
7.2 Zoning - If only one type of suitable material is readily available

nearby, a homogeneous section is generally preferred. If the material
available is impervious or semi-pervious, a small quantity of pervious
material is required as casing for protection against cracking. On the other
hand, if it is pervious, a thin impervious memberane is required so as to
form a water barrier.
17
18 : 12169. 1981
7.2.1 A zoned dam is, however, preferred where different types ofsoils
are available from borrow area. It also facilitates the me of compulsory
excavation from foundation, approach channel, tail channel, etc. The
zoned embankment dam is generally composed of an impervious core
bounded by transitions and/or outer casing of pervious material. In zoned
embankment dam, the weaker materials are often utilized most econmi-
tally in the form of random zones. Maximum utilization of the material
available from compulsory excavation should be aimed at. Random zones
are-generally provided below minimum draw down level on upstream side
and on downstream of inclined filter. When upstream casing zone is of
relatively impervious mater ial, horizontal filters at suitable intervals, say
5 to 6 m, may be provided to limit the drawdown pore pressures for dams
of height more than 10 m. ( See Note below Fig. 2A ).
7.2.2 The zoning of embankment dam as planned in the design may

have to be altered or modrlied during execution stage in view of the
following:
a) The materials estimated are not available according to require-
ment;
b) Different types of material encountered which could not be ascer-
tained during investigations;
c) Construction difficulties;
d) Construction schedule; and
e) New foundation features.
7.3 Top Width -: The width of the dam at the crest should be fixed
according to the working space required at the top. No dam should have
crest width of less than 4.5 m.
18 t 12169 - 1987
APPENDIX A
( Clauses 4.2.1, 4.3.1 and 4.7.2 )
SUITABILITY OF SOIL FOR CONSTRUCTION OF DAMS
Relative Homogeneous <oned Dam Impervious

Suitability Dykes t-------Y--_-_--~ Blanket
Impervious Pervious
Core Casing
Very suitable GC GC SW, GW GC
Suitable CL, CI CL, CI GM CL, CI
Fairly suitable SP, SM GM, GC SP, GP CH, SM
CH SM, SC, CH SC, GC
Poor - ML, MI, MH - -
Net suitable - OL, 01, OH - -

Pt.
MOTE - Refer to IS : 1498-1970 ‘Classification and identification of soils for
general engineering purposes (Jirsl rmision) ‘.
19
IS:12169-1987
Members Reficsanting
DIRECTOR (DAM) (RA~JIT Irrigation Department, Government of Punjab,
SA~AR DAM ) Cbandigarh
SEEI Y. B. MATEUR ( Alferaa!~)
DR M. C. GOEL Water Resources Development and Training
Centre, University of Roorkee, Roorkee
SHRI V. K. JAIN Irrigation Department, Government of Uttar
Pradesh, Lucknow
SHRI BIKRAX BALDEVRAJ ( Alterants )
SHRI D. G. KADKADE Jaiprakash Associated Private Ltd, New Delhi
SHRI T. K. NATARAJAN Cent;iIoad Research Institute ( CSIR ), New
~~-EI;~-Lo~-SPE~~IAL DUTY, Irrigation Department, Government of Andhra

Pradesh, Hyderabad
SVPERINTENDIN~ ENGINEER
( DAMS ) ( CD0 ) ( Aknnfa )
SHRI BRIJENDRAKUMAR SHARMA Natira g$o-Electric Power Corporation Ltd,
SIJPEBINTENDING ENOINEER,DAM IrrigaFion Department, Government of Bihar,

CONSTRUCTION ZONE Patna
SUPERINTENDING E N G I N E IER Irrigation Department, Government of Mahara-
( EARTH DAM ), CD0 shtra, Bombay
EXECUTIVEENQINEER( EA~TEI
DAM ), CD0 ( Ahmatc )
20
Manak Bhavan. 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg. NEW DELHI 119002

Telephones: 323 0131. 323 3375. 323 9402
Fax : 91 113234062, 91 113239399 91 113239382
Telegrams : Manaksanstha
(Common to all Offfces)
Centra! Laborqtoty: Telephone
Plot No. 2Oi9, Site IV. Sahibabad Industrial Area, SAHIBABAD 201010 8770032
Regional Offices:
Central : Manak Bhavan. 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, NEW DELHI 110002 323 76 17
‘Eastern : 1114 CIT Scheme VII M, V.I.P. Road, Maniktola, CALCUTTA700054 337 66 62
Northern : SC0 335336. Sector 34-A, CHANDIGARH 160022 60 38 43
Southern : C.I.T. Campus, IV Cross Road, CHENNAI 600113 235 23 15
tWestern : Manakalaya. E9 Behind Mar01 Telephone Exchange, Andheri (East), 832 92 95
MUMBAI 400093
Branch Otfices:
‘Pushpak’, Nurmohamed Shaikh Marg, Khanpur, AHMEDABAD 360001 550 13 48
SPeenya Industrial Area, 1st Stage, Bangalore - Tumkur Road, 839 49 55
BANGALORE 560058
Gangotri Complex, 5th Floor, Bhadbhada Road, T. T Nagar. BHOPAL 462003 55 40 21
Plot No. 62-63, Unit VI, Ganga Nagar, BHUBANESHWAR 751001 40 36 27
Kalaikathir Buildings, 670 Avinashi Road, COIMBATORE 641037 21 01 41
Plot No. 43, Sector 16 A, Mathura Road, FARIDABAD 121001 8-28 88 01
Savitri Complex, 116 G. T. Road, GHAZIABAD 201001 8-71 19 96
5315 Ward No. 29, R. G. Barua Road, 5th By-lane, GUWAHATI 781003 5411 37
5-8-58C, L. N. Gupta Marg, Nampally Station Road, HYDERABAD 500001 20 10 83
E-52, Chitaranjan Marg, C-Scheme, JAIPUR 302001 37 29 25
117/418 B. Sarvodaya Nagar, KANPUR 208005 21 68 76
Seth Bhawan, 2nd Floor, Behind Leela Cinema, Naval Kishore Road, 23 89 23
LUCKNOW 226001
Patliputra Industrial Estate, PATNA 800013 26 23 05
T. C. No. 1411421, University P. 0. Palayam, 6 21 17
THIRUVANANTHAPURAM 695034
NIT Building, Second Floor, Gokulpat Market, NAGPUR 440010 52 51 71
Institution of Engineers ( India ) Building, 1332 Shivaji Nager, PUNE 411005 32 36 35
‘Sales Office is at 5 Chowringhee Approach, P. 0. Princep Street,

CALC~Ul-fA 700072 27 10 85
tSales Office is at Novelty Chambers, Grant Road, MUMBAI 400007 309 65 28
*Sales Office is at ‘F’ Block, Unity Building, Narashimaraja Square, 222 ?9 71
BANGALORE 560002
Printed at New India Prlntlng Press, Khurja. India

.- ..—,, .-
AMENDMENT NO.1 OCTOBER 2008

TO
IS 12169:1987 CRITERIA FOR DESIGN OF
SMALL EMBANKMENT DAMS
(Page 9, clause 4.1.4) – Substitute ‘IS 4999 : 1991*’ for ‘1S 4999 :
1968*’.
(Page 9, footnote marked *) — Substitute the following for the existing

footnote:
‘Recommendations for grouping of previous soils (@ revision).’
(Page 11, clause 4.8) – Substitute ‘IS 5050:1992$’ for ‘IS 5050:1968$’.
(Page 11, footnote marked $) – Substitute the following for the existing
footnote:
‘Code of practice for design, construction and maintenance of relief wells (jirst revision),’
(Page 12, clause 5.1.1) – Substitute ‘IS 10635: 1993*’ Jor ‘1S 10635:
1983*’.
(Page 12, footnote marked *) — Substitute the following for the existing
footncte:
‘I%x,bcmrdrequirements in embankment dams — Guidelines (jh-strevision).’
(Page 18, clause 7.2.1) — Insert the following sentence at the end:
‘After assessment of gee-technical parameters of flyash and based on techno-

economic considerations, flyash conforming to IS 3812 : 1981 may be used in
the random zones on downstream of inclined filter in a zoned dam.’
(WRD 9)
ReprographyUnit, BLS,New Delhi, India

( Reaffirmed 2002 )
IS : 12182- 1987
Indian Standard
GUIDELINES .FOR
DETERMINATION OF EFFECTS OF
SEDIMENTATION IN PLANNING AND
PERFORMANCE OF RESERVOIRS
Reservoirs Sectional Committee, BDC 48
SHRIN.K.SARMA Central Water Commission, New Delhi
Members
SHRI B.K. BANERJ~E Damodar Valley Corporation, Dhanbad
CHIEF ENGINEER Irrigation and Power Department, Government of
Andhra Pradesh, Hyderabad
SUPERINTENDING EHGINXER ( Alternate )
CHIEF ENGINEER Irrigation Department, Government of Punjab,
Chandigarh
DIRECTOR,TUNNEL& SPILL-
WAY ( Alternate)
DIRECTOR Geological Survey of India, Calcutta
SHI~I K. N. SRIVASTAVA ( Alternate )
DIRECTOR Public Works Department, Government of Madhya
Pradesh, Bhopal
SUPERINTENDINQ ENGINISFII
( DFZHGNS ) ( Ahmate)
Drnwxore Irrigation and Waterways Department, Government
of West Bengal. Calcutta
Public Works Department, Government of
Karnataka, Bangalore
CHIEF RESIMRCH OFFICEI~ ( Alternate )
DIRECTOR (HYDIIOLOGY-SOCTII ) Central Watrr Commission. Xew Delhi
DEPUTY DIREC~OR(HY~RO-
LOGY-S• UTR ) ( Alternate )
DIRECTOR ( RESF,IIV 01n Central Water Commission, New Delhi
SEDIMENTATION)
DEPUTY D~RIXTOR (RESBR-
vOlR SEDIMENTATION
DIRECTORATE ) ( Altunafc )
JOIN,~ COMMISSIONER ( SOIL Ministry of Agriculture & Irrigation ( Department
CONSERVATION) of Agriculture ): New Delhi

This publication is protected under the Indian Copyight Act ( XIV of 1957 ) and
nublishcr shall be deemed to be an infringement of copyright under the said Act.
IS : 12182- 1987
( Continued frompage1 )
SHRI SUREGHCHANDER GUPTA Irrigation Department, Government of Uttar
Pradesh, Lucknow
SHRI S~RINDER KUMAR GUPTA ( Alternate )
SHRI K. R. MERNDII~ATTA In personal capacity ( N-13. Tara Apartments,
Govindpuri E&n, Kalkaji, New Delhi )
SECRETARY Central Board of Irrigation & Power, New Delhi
DIRECTOR ( C ) ( Alternate )
SUPERINTXNDINGENGINEER Bhakra Beas Management Board, Chandigarh
EXECUTIVE ENGINEER ( Alternate )
SUPERIXTENIXNG ENGINEER Irrigation Departmrnt, Government of Maharashtra,
Bombay
EXECUTIVE;:ENGINEER ( Alternntc )
SHRI C. D. THATTE Irrigation Department, Government of Gujarat,
Gandhinagar
SHRI M. K. PUROHIT ( Alfernate )
SHRI B. N. TRIPATRY Irrigation & Power Department, Government of
SHRI D. S. UPADBYAY India Meteorological Department, New Delhi
SHRI K. MUKREI~~EE ( Altcrnafe )
DR G. N. YOGANARASIMHAN Water Resources Development Training Gentre,
Roorkee
DR V. C. CHAUPE ( Alleraale )
SHRI G. RAMAN, Director General, BIS ( Ex-o#cio Member )
SHRI HYMANT KUMAR

Deputy Director ( Civ Engg ), BIS
-IS : 12182 - 1987
Indian Standard
GUIDELINES FOR
DETERMINATION OF EFFECTS OF
SEDIMENTATION IN PLANNING AND
PERFORMANCE OF RESERVOIRS
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Bureau of Indian
Standards on 29 September 1987, after the draft finalized by the
Reservoirs Sectional Committee had been approved by the Civil
0.2 The storage reservoirs built across rivers or streams lose their
capacity on account of deposition of sediment. This deposition of sedi-
ment which takes place progressively in time reduces the active capacity
of the reservoir which in turn affects the regulating capability of the
reservoir to provide the outputs of water through passage of time.
Accumulation of sediment at or near the dam may interfere with the
future functioning of water intakes and hence affects decisions regarding
location and height of various outlets. It may also result in greater
inflow of sediment into the canals/water conveyance systems provided
at the reservoir. Problems of rise in flood levels in the head reaches
and unsightly deposition of sediment from recreation point of view may
also crop up in course of time.
0.2.1 Water resources systems operate over a long period of time and
are subject to ever increasing demand for water for various purposes.
Besides, long term changes in terms of technology and production
functions are also encountered. Man-made changes taking place in the c
river basin and consequent changes in hydrologic regime controlling the
water inputsover long term periods are also encountered and have to
be provided for ( All these factors are to be considered and taken into
account while assessing performance of any reservoir project ). In this
context, sedimentation of reservoirs is to be viewed as an additional
factor which has to be considered and its effects studied and evaluated
on the reservoir performance.
0.3 In the formulationof this standard, due weightage has been given to
the practices prevailing in the field in this country,. , T,his.has.bee.n met
by deriving assistance from Chapter II and,111 of CR1 & P Technical
Report number 19.
IS:12182- 1987
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard lays down guidelines for determining the various
effects of sedimentation on the performance of reservoir projects in order
to make suitable allowances in the design of such projects at the time of
initial planning.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the definitions given in I’S : 44 ‘0
( Part 6 )-1983* and the following shall apply.
2.1 Dead Storage - Storage of reservoir not susceptible to release by

means of the in-built sluices/outlets.
2.2 Economic Life - If at any point of time, the benefits likely to

accrue in further operation of the reservoir compare unfavourably
under the relevant economic criteria with the future costs involved in
operating and maintaining the-system, but excluding any element to
cover the past costs incurred, the reservoir shall be said to have reached
the end of the economic life.
2.3 Feasible Service Time - For a specified purpose, the period or

notional period for which the reservoir provided or is/was expected to
provide a part of planned benefit in respect of storage in the reservoir
being impaired by sedimentation. Customarily, it is estimated as the
time after which the new zero elevation of the reservoir would equal the
sill of the outlet relevant for the purpose.
2.4 Full Service Time - For a specified purpose, the period or
notional period for which the reservoir provided or is/was expected to
provide, a part of the full planned benefit inspite of sedimentation.
2.5 New Zero Elevation - Thelevel up to which all the available

capacity of the reservoir was or is expected to be lost due to progressive
sedimentation of the reservoir up to the specified time.
NOTE-New zero elevation is a time related concept and as sedimentation
progresses, the new zero elevation may rise. Thus specified time should be any i
length of time such as full service time, feasible service time, etc.
3. PROBLEMS ASSOCIATED WITH SEDIMENTATION OF

RESERVOIR
3.1 Following are the main effects of sedimentation on the reservoir:
a) The reduction of the active storage capacity which may reduce

the capability of the reservoir to deliver the benefits which could
have been delivered by the reservoir but for sedimentation. The
*Glossary of term? relating to river valley projects: Part 6 Reservoirs (Jirst w&ion ).
4
IS : 12182- 1987
progressive recluction of the active storage capacity may reflect

on the outputs f:,orn the reservoir in folloiving ways:
1) It may reduce the dump or secondary output. However,

where detnanc’s have not grown as expected, this effect may not
be felt. In years of exceptional good run or secondary off, there
may be no reduction of dump output<.
2) It may reduce availability of firm water in marginal years by
increase in both the number and quantum of failures. How-
ever, in very bad years where no spills would have occurred
even otherwise, the number and quantum of failures may
remain unaffected by reduction in active storage capacity.
Some reduction of benefits from the existing reservoir projects
as a result of sedimentation of active storage capacities is
inevitable. However, efforts may be made to make the best
use of remaining storage capacity as described, in 5.
b) Sedimentation at or near the dam face may tend to block the outlet
causing difficulties in operation of the gates. Sedimentation up to
intake of the outlet may induce more sediment to be carried
through the conservation outlets, thus causing problems of
sedimentation of canals, machinery parts, etc. Elevation to
which sediment will accumulate at the dam in a given period
of time affects the design elevation of outlets for water with-
drawals, namely, the sill level of canal’s taking off from
reservoir and power penstock sills. Location of these outlets is,
however, also dependent on other considerations like command
areas to be covered and minimum head required for functioning
of turbines. In cases where outlet elevations are controlled by
above considerations, the effect of sediment accumulation may
pose no prob!em. Sedimentation may cause operational
difficulties by tending to jam the intake gates of the outlet when
new zero elevation reaches above the gate sill. The problem is
more serious for gates which are not frequently operated, and
for situations where early floods occur when reservoir is low
deposit sediment near the intake. However, in frequently
operated gates, a local deep approach channel may develop and
allow withdrawal of water. However, in such cases, difficulties
caused by passage of sediment in irrigation canals, power
houses, etc, may become serious.
4 Sediment accumulation at the dam-face may increase the loading

on the masonryiconcrete dam structure beyond what has been
provided for.
4 Sedimentation in upper portion of the reservoir may change the

back water profile from what it would have been put for
sedimentation. The increase in flood levels upstrram of the
IS : 12182 - 1987
reservoir may cause additional submergence, formation of

marshy lands, etc.
e) The river regime at the entry to the reservoir may get affected
due to sediment deposits. Delta formation and braided river
pattern may result and this may be unsightly. Tree growth in
the delta lends increase evapotranspiration.
f 1 The operation constraints for a reservoir may necessitate certain

minimum reservoir level and filling generally starts at around
same level or range of levels. Over a period of years, large
deposits of sediment may be built up in the reservoir. The
depth of sediment upstream and downstream of this location is
small, resulting in a sort of hump in the reservoir bed. This
hump acts as a natural barrier to the flow of sediment closer to
the dam. The deleterious effect of this hump formation is the
early reduction of live storage capacity.
g) The process of sedimentation in reservoirs may also increase the
turbidity of water resulting in the environment problems like
deterioration of water quality and reduction of visibility in the
reservoir water for fish survival.
4. STUDY OF EFFECTS OF RESERVOIR SEDIMENTATION
4.1 The study normally comprises of the following:

a) Performance assessment with varying rate of sedimentation, and
b) Likely effects of sedimentation at dam face.
In special cases where effects of sedimentation on backwater levels
are likely to be significant, backwater studies would be useful. Similarly,
special studies to bring out delta formation regime changes may be of
interest.
4.2 Performance Assessment ( Simulation ) Studies with

Varying Rate of Sedimentation
4.2.1 The following steps are involved for simulation studies:

a) Selection of annual sediment yields into the reservoir or the
average annual sediment yield, and of trap efficiency expected;
b) Distribution of sediment within the reservoir to obtain a sediment
elevation and capacity curve at any appropriate time;
c) Simulation stutlies with varying rate of sedimentation; and
d) Assessment of effect of sec:imentation,
IS : 12182- 1987
4.2.2 Sediment Yield Assessment
4.2.2.1 Estimation of sediment yield from the catchment area above

the reservoir is usually made using river sediment observation data or
more commonly from the experience of sedimentation cf existing
reservoirs with similar characteristics. On adopting the first procedure,
it is usually necessary ( though often not complied within practice ) to
evolve proper sediment water discharge rating curve and combine it with
flow duration ( or stage duration curve ) based on uniformly spaced
daily or shorter time units in case of smaller river basins. Where observ-
ed stage/flow data is available for only shorter periods, these have to
be suitably extended w~ith the help of longer data on rainfall to eliminate,
as far as possible, the sampling errors due to shortness of records. The
sediment discharge rating curves may also be prepared from hydraulic
considerations using sediment load formulae, that is, modified Einstein’s
procedure but this has not yet become popular. It is also necessary to
account for the bed load which may not have been measured. While
bed load measurement is preferable; when it is not possible, it is often
estimated as a percentage generally ranging from 5 to 20 percent of the
suspended load. However, practical means of measuring bed load of
sediment needs to be undertaken particularly in cases where high bed
loads are anticipated. To assess the volume of sediment that would
deposit in the reservoir, it is further necessary to make estimates of
average trap efficiency for the reservoir in question and the likely unit
weight of sediment deposits, time averaged over the period selected.
The trap efficiency would depend mainly on the capacity inflow ratio
but would also vary with location of controlling outlets and reservoir
operating procedures. Computation of reservoir trap efficiency may be
made using the trap efficiency curves such as those developed by Rune
and by Churchill. An illustration of these computations and curves is
given in Appendix A.
4.2.2.2 The density of deposited sediment would vary with the

composition of the deposits, the location of the deposit within the
reservoir, the flocculation characteristics of clay and water, and the age
of the deposit. For coarse material ( 0’062 5 mm and above ), variation
of density with location and age may be unimportant. For silt and clay,
this may be significant. Normally, a time and space average density
of these fractions, applicable for the period under study is required for
finding the overall volume of deposits. For this purpose, the trapped
sediment for the period under study would have to be classified in
fractions by corrections in inflow estimates of the fractions by trap
efficiency. Most of the sediment removed from the reservoir should be
from the silt and clay fraction. In some special cases, local estimates
of densities at a point in the reservoir may be required instead of
average density over the reservoir.
7
IS:12182 -1987
4.2.2.3 The reservoir surveys give valuable additional information

regarding the rate of sediment accumulation. This information may
be of guidance in deciding the annual sediment inflow ‘Bnd deposition
for the problem of catchment. However, as given in 4.2.2.4, informa-
tion obtained through capacity re-survey of reservoirs would have little
use unless it is accurate enough. While transferring the rates observed
in adjacent reservoir( s ), considerations for differences in the sediment
production or trapping characteristics of the cases involved have to be
kept in view.
4.2.2.4 Estimates of annual sediment yield/sedimentation rate
assessed from past data are further required to be suitably interpreted
and where necessary, the unit rates which would apply to the future
period are computed by analysing data for trends or by making subjec-
tive adjustments for the likely future changes. Where the contributing
drainage area is likely to be reduced by upstream future storages, only
such of the projects as are under construction or which have the same
priority of being taken up and completed as the project in question are
considered for assessing the total sediment yield. Sediment observation
data ( see IS : 18QO-1968* ) is necessary if the yield is being assessed
from hydrometric data. If observational methods are inadequate, the
possibility of large errors should be considered. For drawing conclusions
from reservoir re-surveys, it is important that reduction of al least 10
percent or more has been observed in the capacities of the two successive
surveys; if this is not done, inaccuracies in the successive surveys will
distort the estimation of the capacity reduction between the surveys. If
the loss of capacity is small, useful conclusions may not be forthcoming,
and in such cases, river sediment measurements with its large observa-
tional errors may still provide a better estimate. It is essential to make
a proper assessment of sediment yield for reservoir under study taking
relevant factors into account. Any adhoc adoption of a sediment yield
rate, from experience not fully analysed, may lead to large errors. The
range recommended in 3.2.3 of IS : 6518-19727 may at best be used for
rough reconnaissance level studies [ see IS : 5477 ( Part 2 )-1969t 1.
4.2.3 Distribution of Sediment Volume - Once an assessment of expected
volume of total sediment deposition for the required time period has
been made, the revised elevation area capacity curves of the reservoir
are prepared by using empirical area reduction methods.
4.2.4 Simulation Studies with Varying Rate of Sediment - The following
are the two ways in which the effect of sedimentation may be considered
in the simulation:
a) The first method considers the progressive reduction of capacity
every year or for blocks of a few years, and as the simulation
*Methods for measurement of suspended sediment in open channels.
tCode of practice for control of sediment in reservoirs.
SMethods for fixing the capacities of reservoirs: Part 2 Dead storage.
8
IS: 12182 - 1987
progresses, uses the newly updated curve. This method would

be more appropriate in bringing out the progressive effects on
the reservoir; however, it requires that the simulation be carried
out for a long period up to which the benefits of the project are
required to be monitored through the simulation.
The second method lumps the progressive effect of sedimentation
up to an appropriate time horizon up to which no reduction in
firm target benefits is contemplated ( full service time ) and
considers situation as at the end of that period throughout the
simulation. Thus, though the performance as given by this
method is the one that considers the effect of sedimentation up to
that period ( full service time ), the progressive reduction of the
dump or secondary benefits within that period should not be
brought out in this method. The main advantages of this
method are:
1) It is relatively simple, and
2) It does not. require that the period of simulation should
correspond to the full service time.
4.2.5 Assessment of Efict of Sedimentation on Outputs - The comparison
of the sedimentation studies would bring out the effect of sedimentation,
as a vector of the differential performance, as time progresses if method
given in 4.2.4(a) is followed. If the method given in 4.2.4(b) is
followed, it would bring out the change in the range and distribution of
the performances over the time period considered. If the stndies are for
planning purposes, changes in the project features, and necessary
progressive adjustment in targetted outputs beyond the full service time
would become apparent and the studies may be repeated after modifying
the planning decisions.
5, PERFORMANCE ASSESSMENT FOR STORAGE RESERVOIR
5.1 General - The performance of reservoir project under varying

hydrologic inputs to meet varying demands is required to be assessed.
Although analytical probability based methods are available to some
extent,~simulation of the reservoir system is the standard method. The
method is also known as the working tables, sequential rouling, perfor-
mance assessment studies, etc. In this method, the water balance of the
reservoirs and of other specific locations of water use and constraints in
the systems are considered. All inflows to and outflows from the
reservoirs are worked out to decide the changed storage during the
period. In simulation studies, the inflows to be used may be either
historical inflow series, adjusted for future upstream water use changes
or a synthetically generated series so adjusted. Whichever approach is
9
IS : 12182 - 1987
used, it shall be used uniformly for assessment of alternate scenarios in

regard to sedimentation [ see IS : 5477 ( Part 3 )-1969* 1.
NOW - A synthetic generation of hydrologic series is a technique which involves
mathematical modelling of the statistical properties of historical series and the
activation of the model to generate alternate equally likely sequences.
5.1.1 h set of practicable and pre-determined operation policies is

essential, to such studies; so is the idea of a firm demand which the
reservoir shall meet, as long as possible, within the policy and physical
limitations. For this purpose, firm irrigation and power and other
demands which the reservoir should meet are to be pre-determined.
Demands over and above firm demands are considered as secondary or
dump demands, meeting of which, although beneficial is not obligatory.
5.1.2 The acceptability of performance as seen in the simulation is

decided by checking if the firm demands have been met with the
desired reliability: that is, whether these meet the acceptability criteria.
In case, these are not met or the performance is better than required,
it is customary to change the assumptions and conduct simulation study
again in the planning phase of the project. In general for irrigation
and hvdro power projects, it is customary to adopt the following accept-
ability criteria:
a) Any year or water year in which the firm demands are not met
fully in each time period separately is labelled as a failure year.
b) The ratio of f‘iilure years to the total years of simulation is
determined. For irrigation and hydra-power, the ratio shall
not exceed 0.25 and 0’1 respectively. The evaluation of per-
formance may also be made through economic analysis consider-
ing the series of benefits from year to year during the period~of
simulation.
5.2 Time Units and Period of Simulation
5.2.1 In general, for within the year projects, a monthly simulation is

sufficient for assessing conservational benefits. Shorter period simulation
is required for assessing benefits of flood control and secondary power.
Units longer than one month may be used for carry over projects. The
period of simulation has to be long enough to containdifferent hydro-
logic situations which are experienced ( set also 5.1 ).
5.3 Inflows and Demands - The water inflows in the desired time
units may be based on the historical data as observed, historical as
estimated from hydrologic observations of related phenomenon, or
synthetic hydrologic data. The last method has the advantage that it
does not make any assumption about the actual flows repeating
-I
‘Methods for fixing the capacities of reservoirs: l’art 9 Live storage.
10
IS : 12182 4987
themselves. In all cases, observed trends in hydrologic data may be

projected in the future operational period. Similarly, the effect of the man-
made future upstream development may be incorporated, either in the
form of time dependent changes, or in the form of scenario studies,
with a pseudo stationary approach with different levkls of development.
Pattern of firm demand is decided on the basis of assessment of future
energy requirement. Seasonal requirements may or may not be built
in the demands. The growth of demands after construction may also
be considered.
6. STANDARD PROCEDURES FOR PLANNING

6.1 Procedures for New Storages - A rough assessment of
seriousness of the problem is necessary to classify the reservoir sediment-
ation problem as insignificant, significant or serious. Assessment of
reservoir sedimentation problem, in a particular case, may be made by
comparing the expected average annual volume of sediment deposition
with the gross capacity of the reservoir. If ratio is more than 0.5 per-
cent per year, the prob!em is usually said to be serious and special care
is required in estimating the sediment yields from the catchment. If it
is less than 0.1 percent per year, the problem of siltation may be insigni-
ficant and changes in r-escrvoir capacity ran be neglected for studies of
reservoir performance. For cases falling between these two limits, the
sedimentation problem i? considered significant and requires further
studies.
6.1.1 The following studies are required if the problem is insignificant:
a) No simulation studies with sediment condition is necessary.
b) The feasible service time for the project may be decided.
Sediment distribution studies to ensure that the new zero-eleva-
tion does not exceed the dead storage level may be made.
6.1.2 The following studies are required if the problem is significant
but not serious:
a) Both the full service time and feasible service time for the
reservoir may be decided.
b) Simulation studies for conditions expected at the end of full
service time may be made by procedure explained in 4.2.4(a)
to ensure that firm outputs with required dependability are
obtained. The studies used also assess non-dependable secondary
outputs, if relevant, available at the end of this period. Studies
without sedimentation, with the same firm outputs should bring
out the additional potential secondary outputs which may be
available in the beginning, and this informatian may be used, if
required, in the economic analysis, using a linear decrease of
these additional benefits over thp fuH service time.
IS : 12W2 - 1987
cl No simulation studies beyond full service time are essential.

4 Studies as described in 6.1.1 for feasible service time are essential.
6.1.3 The following studies are required if sedimentation problem is

serious:
a) / All studies as described in 6.1.2 would be required.

b) The secondary benefits available in the initial years should be
more in such cases. If these are being utilised, for a proper
assessment of the charge of these, a simulation at half of full
service time should be required.
c) In these cases, the drop of benefits after the full service time may
be sharper. To bring out these effects, a simulation of the
project at the end of the feasible service time is required to be
done.
d) Considering (a), (b), and (c) together, it may be worthwhile to
resort to the more realistic method, given in 4.2.4(a) in simulation
for cases where the problem is serious. For this purpose, it
should be sufficient to consider sediment trapped in every lo-
year block, and to use the expected sedimental elevation area
capacity curve at the end of each IO-years block, for simulation
of that block.
7. PROCEDURE FOR EXISTING PROJECTS
4 Assess the present elevation area curve either by reservoir

re-surveys or by projecting from the earlier survey data, using
the estimates of sediment yield and its distribution.
b) Decide the target firm level of the outputs. To start with, this
may be based on the earlier planning or on existing situation.
cl Simulate the reservoir by the method described in 4.2.4(a). It
should suffice if lo-yearly block is considered and expected
sedimented elevation area capacity curve at the end of each IO-
years block is considered for smlulation of that block. L
d) Screen the performance to see if the frequency of failures, after
proper smoothening tends to cross from an acceptable frequency
to an unacceptable frequency ( .ree 3.1 ). If this is happening,
estimate the time of switchover from an acceptable frequency of
failures to an unacceptable frequency. This represents the end
of the full service time, thus giving an estimate of the residual
full service time. If the total full service time ( lapsed period
plus remaining period ) is more or less equal to the prescribed
full service time in the criteria, this would show that the actual
sedimentation has no effect on the project.
I
12
IS : 12182- 1987
e) For period beyond the full service time, it should be necessary

to determine the policy changes in operation which may include
measures discussed in 7.1 and 7.2.
7.1 In hydro-electric projects, the slow reduction in the total energy

generation as a result of partialloss o-f active capacity may be adjusted
in the system by reducing the load factor without losing the peaking
benefits. It is also important to note here that even if the reservoirs for
such projects were to be silted up completely, the head available in the
reservoir would give a permanent benefit.
7.2 In the case of irrigation projects, the reduction in availability of

water may be adjusted to some extent by changing the crop pattern and/
or the dependability criteria.
7.3 The simulation shall have to be repeated with these changes. If it

is necessary to bring out the overall effect of sedimentation, or the effect
0f sedimentation due to change in the estimate of sediment load from
the,earlier planning, it should be necessary to recompute steps given in
7 (a) to (e) for either the no sedimentation case or for the earlier
assumption of sediment rate. The time series of the differences in per-
formance should bring out the differential effect.
7.4 If at any time, the new zero elevation is crossing the sill levels of
an outlet of a primary purpose, this should signify the end of the
feasible service period unless with new engineering measures ( see 7.2 )
or due to natural development of an approach channel this may be
extended.
8. LIFE OF RESERVOIR AND DESIGN CRITERIA
8.1 General - The reservoir exists for a long time and the period of
its operation should normally check large technological and socio-
economic changes. The planning assumptions about the exact socio-
economic output are, therefore, likely to be changed during operation,
and similarly, the exact implication of socio-economic differences in the
output due to sedimentation are difficult to assess. The ever increasing
demands due to both increase of population and increases in per capita
needs are of a larger magnitude than the reductions in outputs, if any,
of existing reservoirs. Thus effects of sedimentation, obsolensence,
structural deterioration, etc, of reservoirs may require adjustments in
future developmental plans and not simply replacement projects to bring
back the lost potential. On a regional or national scale, it is the suffici-
ency of the total economic outputs, and not outputs of a particular
project which is relevant. However, from local considerations, the
reduction of outputs of reservoir like irrigation and flood control may
cause a much greater degree of distress to the population which has got
used to better socio-economic conditions because of the reservoir.
13
IS : 12182 - 1987
8.2 Life of Reservoir - Life strictly is a term which may be used for
system having two functional states ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’. Systems showing
gradual degradation of performance and mot showing any sudden non-
functional stage have no specific life period. Reservoirs fall in the later
category.
8.2.1 The term ‘life of reservoir’ as loosely used denotes the period
$ri;g which who+ or a specified fraction Of its total or active capacity
. In calculatmg this life, the progressive changes in trap efficiency
towards the end of the period were commonly not considered. In ~some
of the projects, it was assumed that all sedimentation would occur only
in the dead storage pocket and the number of years in which the pocket
should be filled under this assumption was also sometimes termed as the
life of reservoir. This concept was in fact used to decide the minimum
size of the pocket. Under this concept, no effect of sedimentation should
be felt in the live storage of the reservoir. It has subsequently been
established that the silt occupies the space in the live storage of reservoir
as well as the dead storage.
8.2.2 It shall not be possible to express the life of the reservoir as a

specific period. The concerned life related terms such as economic life,
feasible service time and full service time are defined in 2.2 to 2.4.
8.2.3 If the operation of the reservoir becomes impossible due to any

structural defects, foundation defects, accidental damages, etc, this
situation should also signify the end of the feasible service time. Before
the expiry of this feasible service time, it may be possible to make large
changes in the reservoir ( for example, cew higher level outlets, structural
strengthening, etc ) or other measures, if it is economically feasible to do
so. If these studies are done, the feasible service time may be extended.
8.2.3.1 Economic life - By definition, the economic life cannot be

more than the feasible service time. In general, for reservoir projects
with gravity irrigation, operation and maintenance costs are so small
compared to benefits even from much reduced capacity that economic
life should be determined by the feasible sedimentation problem; no
check should bc required. i
9. DESIGN CRITERIA FOR NEW PROJECTS
9.1 General Design Criteria - The design criteria given in 9.1.1

to 9.1.3 are recommended.
9.1.1 Ir+ztion Projects - Full service time shall not bk less than 50
years after the start of operation. Feasible service time shall not be less
than 100 years after the start of operation. For reservoirs with serious
sedimentation problem where extension of feasible service time to over-
come social distress is perhaps feasible, the period may be suitably
14
IS : 12182- 1987
reduced, provided detailed studies as detailed therein are done, and

also provided that rigorous economic analysis up to the feasible service
time and with changing stream of benefits is made.
9.1.2 Far hydro-power projects expected to supply power to a
community, in isolation the feasible and full service time shall be the
same as for the irrigation projects.
9.1.3 For hydro-power projects supplying power to a grid, full service
time shall not be less than 25 years. Feasible service time shall not be
less than 70 years. For reservoirs with serious sedimentation problem
where extension of feasible service time to overcome social distress is
perhaps feasible_, the periods may be suitably reduced, provided detailed
studies as detatled therein are done, and also provided that rigorous
economic analysis up to the feasible service time and with changing
stream of benefits is made.
f0. CONSIDERATION OF EFFECTS OF SOIL CONSERVATIOlY

PROGRAMME
10.1 Soil conservation may lead to reduction of sediment. This
programme, apart from benefiting downstream reservoir, could have
large beneficial effects on production of the protected area. However,
because of the different areas benefitted, socio-economic implication, etc,
these programmes normally are not included in the economic analysis of
the reservoir project. Therefore, any change in trend of sediment yield,
attributable to such programmes, may not be considered in assessment
of performance of the reservoir. If economic feasibility of the soil
conservation programme is to be established, any properly established
reduction of yield, and its effect on the reservoir benefits may be consi-
dered in that analysis.
10.2 Normally at the project planning stage, the sediment load calcula-
tions used in the sedimentation studies are as per the land use existing
then. If adverse human actions come into operation in the catchment,
it may result into a higher sediment load than the one assumed in the
project planning. This should be reflected in the project.
15
IS : 12182 - 1987
APPENDI-X A
( Chusc 4.2.2.1 )
TYPICAL EXAMPLE TO CALCULATE TRAP EFFICIENCY
A-l. GENERAL
A-l.1 Trap efficiency of a reservoir, over a period is the ratio of the
total deposited sediment to the total sediment inflow. Gunnar Brune
analysed data from 44 reservoirs with catchment areas varying from
small to very large and presented a median curve together with lower
and upper envelope curves which is shown in Fig. 1. Using data from
Tennisse Valley Authority, M.A. Churchil developed a relationship
between the percentage of incoming sediment and the sedimentation
index of the reservoir and presented a curve which is shown in Fig. ‘2.
ENVELOPE CURVE FOR NORMAL

PONDED RESERVOIRS
MEDIAN CURVE FOR NORMAL
PONDED RESERVOIRS
CAPACITY INFLOW RAT!0 (YEARS)

FIG. 1 BRUNE’SCURVE
A-1.2 Description of Terms in Bane’s Curve

a) Capacity - Reservoir capacity at FRL
b) Injow - Average annual inflow in volumetric units.
16
IS:12182 - 1987
A-1.3 Description of Terms in Churchill’s Curve
a) Cajxzcity - Reservoir capacity at the mean operating pool

elevation for the period considered.
b) Znj7ow - Average inflow rate during the study period.
c) Period of - Capacity divided by inflow rate.
Retention
d) Length - Reservoir length at mean operation pool level.
e) Velocity - Mean velocity obtained by dividing the-inflow by
average cross-sectional area. The average cross-
sectional area is computed by dividing capacity by
length.
f) Sedimenta- - Periods of retention divided by the velocity.
tion Index
A-2. EXAMPLE
A-2.1 Reservoir Data
a) Full reservoir level

(FRL) = 400 m
b) Mean operating pool elevation = 399 m
c) Capacity at FRL, Cl = 55.1 x 106 m3
d) Capacity at mean operating pool elevation, C, = 51.5 X 106 m3
e) Average inflow, Z, over the study period of 10 years, in volume-
tric Units
= 1 380.06 x 106 ma/year
f) Length of reservoir, L, at the mean~operating level
= 19 312.13 m
A-2.2 Brune’s Method
Capacity inflow ratio

c
Cl/Z= -i-~~~oG-
= 0’039 9 year.
Trap efficiency corresponding to above ratio C/I as read from

median curve of Fig. 1 for normally ponded reservoir
= 75 percent
A-2.3 Churchil’s Method
Average inflow ratio = 1 380’06 ms/year

43.76 ms/sec
18
IS:12182-1987
51.5 x 106m3
Retention period F = 43.76 m3,sec
= 1.176 9 x 106 set

G
A ( Average cross-sectional area ) = r
51’5 x 10Sm3 = 2 666.7 m2
= 1 9312.13 m-
Velocity = -i
43’76 ma/set
== 0,016 41 m/set
= 2 666.7 rn2
period of retention
Sedimentation index - velocity
1.1769 x 106 set
=
0.016 41 m/set
= 7.1718 x 107 secsjm
Percentage of incoming sediment passing through as read from

Fig. 2 corresponding to above sedimentation index = 15 percent.
Trap efficiency = 100 - 15 = 85 percent.
INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS ( SI UNITS)
Bue units
QUANTITY UNIT SYMROL
Length metre m
Mass kilogram kg
Time second s
temperature
Luminous intensity candela cd
Supplementary Units
Plane angle radian rad

Solid angle sr
Derived Units
QUANTITY UNIT SYMBOL DEFIRITION
Force newton N 1 N = 1 kg.m/s*

Energy joule J 1 J- lN.m
Power watt W 1 W = 1 J/s
Flux weber Wb 1 Wb = 1 V.s
Flux density tesla T 1 T = 1 Wb/m*
Frequency hertz HZ 1 Hz = 1 c/s (s-1)
Electric conductance siemens s 1 S = 1 A/V
Electromotive force volt V 1 V = lW/A
Pressure, stress pascal Pa I Pa = 1 N/m’
RF1-@ai?aitk
w G1-Ff-tm+i
Indian Standard
PROVISION OF WATER-STOPS AT TRANSVERSE
CONTRACTION JOINTS IN MASONRY AND
CONCRETE DAMS — CODE OF PRACTICE
(First Revision)
ICS 23.040.45; 93.160
0 BIS 2001

NEW DELHI 110002
December 2001 Price Group 3

Dams and Reservoirs Sectional Committee, WRD 9
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard (First Revision) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized
by the Dams and Reservoirs Sectional Committee had been approved by the Water Resources Division Council.
The opening of the contraction joints provides passages through the dam which unless sealed, would permit the
leakage of water from the reservoir to the downstream face. To stop this leakage, water-stops should be installed
in the joints adjacent to the upstream face.
Advancement in the specifications and the manufacture of material have resulted in the acceptance of polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) as suitable material for joint seal. The material can be manufactured for a number of shapes
and sizes suiting to the specific requirement. In view of this, the matter regarding the replacement of copper
water-stop and asphalt water-stop by PVC water-stops has been under consideration for quite some time.
Experience in India and abroad has suggested that asphalt water-stops become defunct for want of adequate
heating arrangement and as a result, it has been felt that the same should be replaced by PVC water-stops.
Copper water-stops can accommodate only a small lateral movement. Experience in the Pacific North West of
United States has shown that the sheet-type copper water-stop is very vulnerable to failure especially in high
navigation lock. In Indian condition, project authorities have reported difficulties in properly brazing the
copper sheets and also its missing from the structure during construction. Accordingly, it has been felt that the
copper water-stop should be replaced by PVC water-stops. This standard was first published in 1987. [n this
revision of the standard use of only PVC water-stops have been recommended and provision of other materials
have been deleted.
There is no 1S0 standard on the subject. This standard has been prepared based on the data received from
indigenous manufacturers’ and also taking into consideration the pactices prevalent in the field in India.
The composition of the Committee responsible for the formulation of this standard is given in Annex A.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied withl the final value,
observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with
1S 2: 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised)’. The number of significant places retained in
the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
Is 12200:2001
Indian Standard
PROVISION OF WATER-STOPS AT TRANSVERSE
CONTRACTION JOINTS IN MASONRY AND
CONCRETE DAMS — CODE OF PRACTICE
/- . -.. ,
(First lYevMon)
1 SCOPE that when the material is compounded, it shall meet
the requirements given in IS 15058:2001.
This standard deals with the provision of PVC water-
stops across ungrouted transverse contraction joints 3.2 Shape and Dimensions
in masonry and concrete dams.
The typical shape and dimensions of PVC water-
2 REFERENCES stops are given in Fig. 1. However, the section of
PVC water-stop will vary d~pending on head and site
The Indian Standards given below contain provisions
requirements.
which through reference in this text, constitute
provisions of this standard. At the time of publication, 4 INSTALLATION OF WATER-STOPS
the editions indicated were valid. All standards are
subject to revision, and parties to agreements based 4.1 In the case of masonry dams, the surface adjacent
on this standard are encouraged to investigate the to the blockouts (shown by dotted lines in Fig. 2)
possibility of applying the most recent editions of shall be irregular and the joints in the masonry shall
the standards. be raked out when mortar is green, with some stones
protruding beyond dotted lines regularly in both
IS No. Title directions. No such blockouts shall be provided in
290:1961 Specification for coal-tar black paint concrete dams where concreting on either side of the
456:2000 Code of practice for plain and rein- water-stops is done along with the concreting of the
forced concrete Vourth revision) rest of the block.
15058:2001 PVC water-stops at transverse con- 4.2 The blockout may be concreted in lifis not more
traction joints for use in masonry and than 1.5 m. Minimum grade of concrete to be used in
concrete dams — Specification the blockout shall be M 20 (see IS 456).
3 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) WATER- 4.3 The blockout of one block maybe concreted first
STOPS and the joint face given a coat of coahar black paint
3.1 Material conforming to IS 290 and then only the blockout of
the second block should be concreted so as to have a
The water-stop should be fabricated from a plastic clear contraction joint.
compound, the basic resin of which shall be polyvinyl
chloride. The compound shall contain additional 4.4 Typical details of water-stop arrangement (at
resins, plasticizers, inhibitors or other materials such contraction joints between two monoliths of a dam)
All dimensionsin millimetms.

FIG, 1 TYPICALCROSS-SECTION OFPVC WATER-STOP
1
1s 12200:2001
I ~
FOR MASOf#RY DA-MONLY.NO SUCH
BLOCKOUT IS REQUIRED FOR
CONCRETE DAM-
I
———— —. -——— -——-
t nl
CONCRETE
BLOCKOUT
(1850X6001 ●
FLO& %
CONTRACTION I
JOINT I
VC WATER-STOP
U/S FACE OF I TO GALLERY
DAM FLOOR DRAIN
L
-— ..- —— -- ——-— ~—-
1
————4
1850( MINIMUM)
A
Vv v
All dimensions in millimetres.

FIG.2 SECTIONALPLANAT CONTRACTION
JOINTS
near the top of a non-overflow section are shown in 4.5 PVC water-stops shall be provided around
Fig. 3, near the crest of a gated overflow section in galleries/adits at the contraction joint between two
Fig. 4, near the bottom of the dam in Fig, 5 and monoliths of a dam as shown in Fig. 7. In case of
ungated overflow section in Fig. 6. masonry dam, the thickness of concrete cover may
be 400 mm.
1 250 X 250 STEEL PLATE

TOP OF DAM
7
7
/
I OUTLINEOF THE BLOCKOUTS
FOR —-
,— .-— MASONRY DAM ~
—-— ---- — 1————
#
-. I
150mln
t
h iI
1000min
I 11 I
I
~ P.V.C WATER-STOP
—-
-L
MWL
/
I
I
- i
— C#I200 TRAP DRAIN
I
it=
_600— .250
-’l H--l
All dimensions h millimetres
FIG. 3 TYPICALWATER-STOPDETAILSNEAR THEToP OFNON-OVERFLOW

SECTION
OFDAM
2
Is 12200:2001
rSEE DETAIL B
II flSEE DETAIL A
PVC ‘WATER-STOP (TO BE SUITABLY JOINED TO

! THE GATE SILL BEAM)
E S!LL BEAM
DETAIL h’
] ~PVC WATER-STOP ~
AXIS OF
“ f%+’ I PIPE
U/S FACE OF
..
DE TAIL B
Alldimensions in millimetres.
FIG. 4 TYPICALWATER-STOPDETAILSNEAR THECRESTOFGATEDOVERFLOWSECTION
4.6 Water-stops rolls should be stored in a suitable 5 JOINTING

environment to avoid its damage due to adverse PVC water-stops shall be jointed in straight reaches
weather conditions. only by an experienced trained personnel using a
4.7 During installation, the exposed portion of water- suitable device in consultation with the engineer-in-
steps should be protected against adverse weather charge and the manufacturer.
conditions.
3
Is 12200:2001
--.+. 251A -300+300
>“ —
+
I
I
: I
0 I
% I
w
v
~
~
3
L
LOPE 1:50
0200 STEEL PIPE
CONNECTED TO
FOUNDATION
GALLERYDRAIN
----
/ ‘Ff200 TRAP DRAIN
*
PVC.
/ P.V.C. WATEft6TOP
WATER- I
STOP J
/ I
I
I
I
I
I
I
150 I
7
/ ACCEPTABLE DAM
4;0 FOUNDATION ELEVATION
‘~)’ J= //f
h-lmo—----+i

FIG. 5 TYPICALWATER-STOPDETAILSNEAR BOTTOMOFDAM
AXIS OF DAM PVC WATER-STOPS SHALL BE SUITABLY JOINED

TO THE ISMB 200 600 LONG(300 ON EACH SIDE
)\ OF CONTRACTIOd JOINT?
I
1
700X 500X700 SLOCKOUT
cP12,4 Nos.
300 LONG J-BOLTS - ~
1=— +700
600 - “- -
H-t PVC WATER-STOP
\
FIG. 6 WATER-STOPDETAILSFORUNGATEDOVERFLOWSECTION
. $<
Is 12200:2001
PVC WATER-STOP ~ ,
Soo
/
t
4 500 500
GALLERY/ADtT
,., . ,. ,
Soo

FIG. 7 PVC WATER-STOP
AROUND
GALL~RYIADIT
AT CONTRACTION
JOINT
., .,. ..>.
5
.!
A
!.,
.. ...—
Is 12200:2001
ANNEX A <
.
..-’-
(Foreword)
COMMITTEE COMPOSITION
Dams and Reservoirs Sectional Committee, WRD 9
Organization Representative(s)
Central Water Commission, New Delhi DRB. K. MrrrAL(Chairman)
Bhakra Beas Management Board, Chandigarh CmEFErwsrw@3FMxswDAM)
DrREcroR (DESIGN)B&B DESIGN DrRECrORATE (Alternate)
(
Central Board otlrigation & Power,New Delhi M-au s. P. KAusHrsH

SrauT. S. MuRnrv(Allerrrate)
CentraFSoil& Material Research Station, New Delhi Dawcmrr
SmrrA. K. DwivAN(AIteiw@
Central Water &Power Research Station, Pune SHSJ R. M. KHATSrJRSA
SmuP. B. DEOrmrKM(Alternate)
Central Water Commission, New Delhi fhJxTOR (CMDD-NW&S)
DrRECTOR km?Rvow OPErrAnoNDrRECJTJRAm (~kernate)
Consulting Engineering Services (I) Pvt Ltd,New Delhi SHRJM. K. NARASIMHANA
Sm S. S. NARANG(Alternate)
Geological Survey ofindia, Lucknow SHRIG. K. K.MSTHA

SmuR. N. SmwH(Alferrrale)
Narmada & Water Resources Department, Government of Gujarat, CHEFENGINEER (MEoruM& MJNOR) ANDADDLSECRETARY
Gandhinagar SUPSRJNTSNDING ENGINEER(CDG) (Alternafe)
Indian InstituteofTechnology, New Delhi HEAD OFTHECrvrL ENGMHUNGDEPARmmr
IrrigationDepartment, Government of Andhra Pradesh, Hyderabad CHIEFENGINEER (1&CAD)
SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER(DAMS)(Affernate)
Irrigation & Waterways Directorate, Governmentof West BengaF,Kolkata SHRIA. DASGUPTA

.%SRIH. P. CsrArowmrm(Alternate)
Irrigation Department, Government of Uttar Pradesh, Roorkee CHEFENGINESR (DAMDs.mmr)

summrmmw ErwmwER (DAMDEMNCtRcrx1)(Alternate)
Irrigation Department, Government of Punjab, Chandigrrrb CrrrEF
ENGINEER
(RSDD)
DIRE~ORDAMS(RSDD) (A]ternafe)
Irrigation Department, Government of MaharrrshtrzNasik SUPSRJtmr-mnwENGITWER(MD)
EXECOTNEEN@NEER(MD-4) (Alternate)
Irrigation Department, Government of Haryan&Chandigarh CHJIT (PRomr3s)
ENGJNESR
DtREmR (EwnmmG ) (Afternde)
Water Resources Department Government of Madhya Pradesh,Bhopal SHNA. K. RJSHJ

DJRECTOR (DAMS)(Alfernate)
Jaiprakash Industries Ltd, New Delhi SriruD. G. KADKAOS
SHJUNARENDRA SrNGH(Alternate)
Kamataka Power Corporation Limited, Bangalore SW P.R. MALTS KAIuUNA
SHJOS. M.CHEBBI (Alterrraie)
Kerala State Electricity Board, Thiruvananthapuram SHJU GEORGE CJ-I-AN
Gammon India, Mumbai Sm M. S. BISAJUA

SHRIR. D. VARANGAONKAR (Alternate)
National Hydroelectric PowerCorporation LtrFjFaridabad SrrsrK.S. NAGARAJA
North Eastern F+ctric Power Corporation Ltd,New Delhi SHRIUTPAL BORA
National Institute of Hydrology, Roorkee DRS. M. SETH
DRP. K. MAHAPATRA (Alternafe)
Public Works Department,Government ofTamil Nadu, Chennai Emrwfs+mclsrm
CHIEFENGJNESR (Afterrrate)
Tehri Hydro Development Corporation,Noida SHRIL. K. BANSAL
BIS Dkectorate General StrRJS. S. Sma, Director& Head (WRD)
~epresending Director General (Et-oficio)]
Member-Skcretary
SmuR. S. JUNEJA
Joint Director (WRD), BIS
6
. . . .. ... .. .. . . ., ..... . . . . . ,, .. .... ...... ... . “,
harmonious development of the activities of standardization, marking and quality certification of goods
and attending to connected matters in the country.
Copyright
BIS has the copyright of all its publications. No part of these publications may be reproduced in any form
without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use, in the course of
implementing the standard, of necessary details, such as symbols and sizes, type or grade designations.
Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director (Publications), BIS.
Amendments are issued to standards as the need arises on the basis of comments. Standards are also reviewed
periodically; a standard along with amendments is reaffirmed when such review indicates that no changes are
needed; if the review indicates that changes are needed, it is taken up for revision. Users of Indian Standards
should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest amendments or edition by referring to the latest issue of
‘BIS Catalogue’ and ‘Standards: Monthly Additions’.
This Indian Standard has been developed from Doc : No. WfUl 9 (283).
Amend No. Date of Issue Text Affected
Headquarters :
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110002 TeIegrams : Manaksanstha
Telephones :3230131, 3233375, 3239402 (Common to all oftices)
Regional Offices : Telephone
Central : Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg 3237617

NEW DELHI 110002 { 3233841
Eastern : 1/14 C.I.T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Kankurgachi 3378499, 3378561
KOLKATA 700054 { 3378626, 33791 20
Northern : SCO 335-336, Sector 34-A, CHANDIGARH 160022 603843

{ 602025
Southern : C.I.T. Campus, IV Cross Road, CHENNAI 600113 2541216,2541442
{ 2542519,2541315
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri (East) 8329295, 8327858

MUMBAI 400093 { 8327891, 8327892
Branches : AH MEDABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. COIMBATORE.

FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHAT1. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR.
LUCKNOW. NAGPUR. NALAGARH. PATNA. PUNE. RAJKOT. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
Printed at Prabhat Offset Press, New Delhi-2

IS 12720:1993
STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF SPILLWAY

TRAINING WALLS AND DIVIDE
WALLS - CRITERIA
( First Revision )
UDC 626’83’034‘94 : 624’04
0 BIS 1994

NEW DELHI 110002
May 1993
Price Group 3
Spillways Including Energy Dissipators Sectional Committee, RVD 10
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard ( First Revision) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the
draft finalized by the Spillways
_...
Including
_ ..
Energy Dissipators Sectional Committee had been
approved by River Valley l_)lvtston COU~CII.
The provision of downstream training wall is made to guide the flow from the spillway into the
downstream channel and to retain the draft earth envelope in some cases. Upstream training walls
are sometimes provided to retain earth dam faces where wrap around is not provided or partially
provided and to guide the flow tnwards the spillway. The structural design of the training walls
and divide walls therefore assumes importance.
Divide walls are provided to separate bays having different type of energy dissipation arrangement
or to separate bays having the same type of energy dissipation arrangement but with different
parameters/levels, etc, kept from geological/other considerations or to allow for unsymmetrical
operation of spillway gates in order to minimize cross/return flows, eddies, etc. Also divide walls
are provided to separate out the power house, silt excluders, etc, located adjacent to the spillway.
Sometimes low or submerged divide walls are also provided to effect economy.
Walls of approach channels, spillway glacis and energy dissipators may be masonry/concrete
gravity, reinforced concrete cantilever or relatively thin concrete anchored walls/lining placed
against steep rock surfaces anchored to the rock by steel dowel bars grouted into drill holes in the
rock. Where the strata above foundation at the ends/sides of the spillway consists of earth or
poor rock, the walls should be masonry/concrete gravity walls. Where suitable rock is available
from the general ground level, the side walls may be in the form of a thin concrete lining.
Sometimes combination of gravity section and concrete lining walls are used. In some special
cases where the channels or stilling basins are narrow, it may be economical to design the walls
and the channel or basin floor as an integral reinforced concrete U-frame.
This standard was first published in 1989. This revision has been undertaken to incorporate the
latest practices being followed in the field. The important change effected in this rebision are as
follows:
a) Modifications in design loading conditions, computation of forces and stability criteria,

b) Reference to IS 11772 : 1986 ‘Guidelines for design of drainage arrangements of energy
dissipators and training walls of spillways’ has been given for drainage arrangement of
training and divide walls,
c) Formula for estimation of hydro-dynamic pressure has been changed to SI units,
d) Reference to IS 456 : 1978 ‘Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (third
revisiorr)' has been given for design of stem and base slab of divide walls, and
e) The cr,rnputat ion of stresses and design of anchorages based on one of the method has been
covered in A special publication SP 5.5 : 1993 ‘Design aid for anchorages for spillway piers,
training walls and divide walls’.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard, is complied with,
the final value, observed or calculated expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded
off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding of numerical values ( revised)'. l-he number
of signifcant places rctallled in the rounded of value should be the same as that of the specified
value in this standard.
IS 12720: 1993
Indian Standard
TRAINING WALLS AND DIVIDE
WALLS -CRITERIA
(First Revision )
1 SCOPE concrete of required thickness is laid parallel to this
slope. The concrete should be anchored adcyuatcly
This standard lays down the criteria for structural
into the rock by dowel bars grouted in holes drilled
design of upstream and downstream training walls
into the rock. A careful investigation of the rock
and divide walls.
should be made before designing the anchorage
system. The anchorage and the concrete should be
2 KEI’XKIINCES
able to withstand the probable hydrostatic head in the
2.1 The following Indian Standards arc necessary rock or residual hydrostatic head if adequate- drain
adjuncts to this standard: holes are provided therein (see Fig. 1 ).
IS No. Title 3.1.3 Combination of Grmity nnd Anclrorcd Wtrlls

456 : 197X Code of practice for plain and III cases where parlly ovcrburdrn and partly rock
reinforced concrete ( third fares are met with, the section of the wall should bc
revision ) a concrete anchored wall in the lower rock faces
1893 : 1984 Criteria for carthquakc resistant portion and gravity wall above in the over burden
design of structures ( fmr~h portion. This type ofcombinatiolt would Ix>~c~or~mttic~;~l
revision ) in such cases ( see Fig. 2 ).
6512: 1984 Criteria for design of solid gravity
dams ( fir.vtrevision ) 3.1.4 Cflnti:L’l~crlCormterfort Wtrlls
7365 : 1985 Criteria for hydraulic design of
bucket type energy dissipators Cantilcvcr/counterfort walls may also be provided as
( first rcGsion ) training walls depending upon the height of the \vall.
11722 : lOH6 Guidelines for dcsigu of drainage
arrangements of energy dissipators 3.2 Divide Walls
and training walls of spillways The divide walls are normally provided in lint with the
crest piers so as to have nlininlum disiurbancc in the
3 IRAINING AND DIVIDE WAIJS
Ilow.Asfaraspossiblc,thcwallsshould beconstructcd
3.1 ‘I’rilining Walls in reinforced cen~nt concrctr so that src,!ion is thin
and offers minimum ot>strurtion to the I’low. The
3.1 .l Grfwity W(llls divide wall riced 1101be takcu too high but nl;ly bc kept
slightly above the nlaximunl tail wale: Icvcl in the
Gravity walls for spillway approach channel and
energy dissipator when clcnr SC]XlriltiOll O!‘lhc flows is
cncrgy dissipators generally have backfill or dam
required. Sometimes submerged walls arc :!lso provided
embankment fill against thr hack side. For approach
which provide R clear scparatirm 01 flows at lowrr
walls not retaining a dam embankment, previous backfill
discharges aud would hr submrrgcd al higher
with drainage may he economical and dcsirablc to
discharges. Howcvcr, thecxicnt ofsuhmcr~c’t~cc ol’thc
rcducc loading under empty or drawdowu conditions,
wall should bc dccidcd by carrying out the model
but the draiuagc system should not crcatc a short
studies. The Icngth of the divide wall should normally
seepage palh to the downstreaul side of the coulrol
t)c kept up to the downhtrcam end of the. cncrgy
section. The top width of the training wall should IN:
dissipator or as may be required haqed on thr n~odrl
kept 1.5 111,nlininlunl with the arrangcruetrt of’ steps
bludics.
and railings to SC~VCas walkway during inspection.
I:or thr dowmstrcanI walls of spillway glacis alld
cncrgy disbipatorb, 1‘1-cc drainage backfill with
lougitudinal pc~forated pipe drains at the base 011
backfill xidc ofthc wall are ad\~antageous to rcducc the
lmssurc ou llic wall, if sllitahlc outfall is ;ivailablc in 4 L)ESI(;N Ol~‘I‘RAINIIV(; WAI.I,S
the downstream.
4.1 l’orces
The following forces should bc conridcrrd III tt~(,
For ronrrete anchored walls the rock ib cxravatcd to
design of training wail+,:
a stable slope, nor~nally 01’0.5 (H) to 1 (V) orotherwise
depending upon the geology of ~hr site and then a) Dead load;
1
IS 12720: 1993
r WATER DRAIN
TEMPERATURE
REINFORCEMENT
BOTH WAYS -\
.--STABLE SLOPE
TAILWATER ELEVATION
_---,-
@ 100 DRAIN
PIPE -. __-. GROUTED ANCHORS
--l- SOUND AND FRESH

_-----
ENERGY DISSIPATOR
FLOOR
@ 75 DRAIN HOLE
Rcscrvoir and tail waler pressure and hydro- 4.2 Design Loading Conditions
dynamic toad due IO flow, wherever atq~licabtc;
4.2.1 Inall cases loadings sctccted Ihrdesign ol’watts
Uptilt pressure; for spillway apt>roach rhanncl and cncrgy
EMhquakr force; dissitmtors should include the IIWSI scvcrc load
combinations anticipated. Typical loading conditions
Earth tmssurc; a11d
lo bc used fhr the upstrcanl and 0~ downstrcanl
Live load or surcharge due to carIhmoviIlg lllils<)tl~ or concrrtc training walls have been dcsctibcd
machinery and other equitmcnt. in 4.2.2 and 4.2.3. The design loading conditions Ihr
111r anchored walls have been dcscribcd in 4.2.1.1.
Hydraulic model studies are gcmralty necrssary lhr
EARTH EMBANKMENT- cstinialing ltie total waler tmssurc due lo sl;ilic~ and
1
hydro-dynamic loads (tmxsurc lluc.luations and/or
ccldrit’ugal aclion, elc) and lhrir associaltd l’rcqucnc-its
w the training walls and divide watts.
0.6m THtCK GRADED

4.2.1.I The anchored walls should bc dcsigncd for lhc
6100 WEEP HOLE
FILTER/APPR0PHIATt suddcll drawdowu condition considering (a) w;tIcr
S’A,(;i;ERED- prcssurc on rock side corrrstmtldi~~g to Illil~illlul~l
Iaitwatrr clcvation, atld (1,) water ut> IO nlilliutunl Iilit
waler Icvcl on river side, unlcx\ the rock behind ihc
wall is driiilizd by an adcquiilc syhkm ol’dr;lili hole
MASONRY GRAVITY
cxlcnding dccpcr 11lilll anchorage xysletll iri which
WALL --
----- c:ISt’ il Imp bc dcsigicd considcrilig ]XtrliilI drain;igC
ANCHORED WALL/ CffCCt and ~IllClI~~~ilgCS providrd (or batarlccd tjrcssurc.
CONCRtTE LlYiNG ~-
( SW Fig. I ). The ti~undalion Icvct, 111;rlis, hollo~~l 01‘
Itlc iiIl~~tlOtX~t] Walk. should Ix tmn*idcsd 111’IO I tic Ic\flcl
oblained f101n rhc criteria given in IS 7.1~5 : IvXS ot
I~scd ot1 tuodcl studic~.
1S 12720 : 1993
4.2.2.2 Severe loading condition forces which may be far in excess of the normal hydraulic
loading. These hydro-dynamic forces exerted on training wall
Loading as in 4.2.2.1 above but with earthquake effect. would have considerably wide band of frequency. It should he
ensured that the natural frequency of training wall is not in the
neighbourhood of the predominant frequency of the force
4.2.2.3 Sudden dra wdown condition exerted to avoid resonance ( see 5.3.2 ).
a) Earthfill/embankme~~t submerged up to the 2 Passive pressures from the submerged backfill may be
full reservoir level. considered in this condition which may, however, he limited to
the hydrostatic and hydro-dynamic loads.
b) Minimum drawdown level on the reservoir
side, and 4.3 Computation of Forces
c) Corresponding full uplift pressure.
4.3.1 Dead Load
4.2.2.4 Spillway functioning loading condition
The dead load to bc considered comprises of the
a) Water in the reservoir up to maximum water weight of the masonry and/or concrete plus the weight
level, of the backfill. For the preliminary design the unit
weight of concrete and masonry may be taken as
b) The backfill submerged up to the same level,
23.50 kN/m3 and 22.55 kN/nI respectively. The
and
weight of backfill should be according to type of the
c) Corresponding full uplift pressure. backfill resting over the wall slopes and the conditions
of the backfill such as moist, saturated or submerged
4.2.3 Downstream Training Wall depending upon water level on backfill side. The
unit weight of water should be taken as 9.81 kN/m3
4.2.3.1 Normal loading condition ( see IS 6512 : 1984 ).
a) No water on the river side, 4.3.2 Reservoir and Tail Water Pressure and Hydro
b) The backfill submerged up to 50 percent and Dynamic Load Due to Flow Wherever Applicable
33 percent of maximum tailwaler elevation in
cast of earth backfill and the rubble backfill 4.3.2.1 Reservoir and tailwater load
rcsprctivcly (drains effective), and
Forthe upstream trainingwall 1ineardistributionof the
c) Full uplift varying uniformly from correspond- static water pressure acting normal to the face of wall
ing water head in the backfill side to zero on should be considered. For the downstream training
the river side. wall, the larger of the hydrostatic and the hydro-
dynamic loads, including centrifugal force whcrc
4.2.3.2 Severe loading condition applicable, should be considcrcd.
Loading as in 4.2.3.1 but with earthquake effect.
4.3.2.2 Water pressure in still water
4.2.3.3 Sudden drawdown condition (wherever The intensity of prcssurc in still or slowly moving
applicable) water varies dircctiy with the depth. This pressure is
a>Backfill submerged up to maximum tailwater expressed as:
level, p=vh
b) Water up to minimum tail water level on river
side (drains clogged), and The total horizontal force on a unit Jcngth of a vertical
wall will be:
cl Full uplift varying unil’ormly from head
maximum tailwater in the backfill side to P = l/2 v h2, and
minimum tail water on the river side.
the moment will bc:
4.2.3.4 Spillway fiutctionhg loading condition
M = l/o v h’
a) Backfill submerged up to maximum ~ailwater
Icvcl, whcrc
b) The hydrostatic and hydro-dynamic loads due 1’ = unit wright of water in kN/m’, and
to the flow in the energy dissipator. In cast of
11 = depth ol‘walcr in ni.
flip buckets, the hydrostatic load should also
include centrifugal force in addition to depth
of water ‘d,‘, and
c> Full uplift varying unil‘urmly litrm head
(maximum tailwatcr) in the backfill to the In a stream flowing down a steeply inclined slope,
depth (cl,) OII 111rriver side. lhc prcssurc pattern is modified from 111~ SI;II;~.
condition. VJ‘hcwater which is supportrd on ;I spillway
NO’l‘l:S
slope has a ntgJigiblc shcaring value. Thrreforc, ttlc
I Due lo intcnsc turbulcncr ol Ilow in Ihc energy dissipator, !hr Jloor supports only the normal ‘component of the
ensuing lurhulencr and surges may produce hydra-dynamic weight of Ihr watrr and this Jlroduccs the prcssurcs
3
IS 12720: 1993
on the floor and on the side walls. The over- hydrostaticpressureatthesectiollunderconsideration.

turning force at the floor and on the base of the side The total horizontal force on the unit length of the wall
wall for a unit length measured along the glacis is due to centrifugal pressure will be:
expressed as:
F = l/2 Y hZ cos ci P = If2 PC d,
and the overturning moment as: and moment

M = l/6 v h’ cos ci
MP = l/6 PC d,2
where
4.3.2.5 Hydro-dynamic forces
v = unit weight of water,
h = depth of water normal to the floor, and The hydro-dynamic forces to bc considered arc given
in 5.3.2.
u = floor angle with horizontal in degree.
4.3.3 Uplift Pressure
However, for calculaling reinforcement steel in
vertical direction, the bending moment per unit The uplift pressure should be assumed to act ovrr
horizontal leng$h should be taken as M/cos2 u and 100 percent of the base area. The uplift should bc
shear force per unit horizontal length as F/cos u. assumed to vary uniformly along the base width of the
wall. It may be safe to assume that uplift pressures arc
4.3.2.4 Water pressure in IZ @kctrd strrenm
not affected by an earthquake.
If a flowing stream is deflected by a curving vane,
such as a vertical curve in a 17ip bucket at the bottom 4.3.4 Earthquake Forces
of a spillway, the water pressure is increased by
centrifugal force. This increase in pressure may be The earthquake forces should be considered iti
evaluats by: accordance with IS 1893 : 1984.
v d, VZa 4.3.5 Earth Pressrtrc

PC =
gr The earth pressure should be considered in
where accordance with IS 1893 : 1984.
PC = increase in pressure, 4.4 Stability Criteria for I +streani and hwnstream

Training Walls
v = unit weight of water,
d, = depth of flow entering bucket, 4.4.1 The maximum foundation pressure should not
exceed fhe safe bearing capacity of Ihe foundation
v, = actual velocity of flow enlcring bucket, rock.
r = radius of bucket, and
4.4.2 The compressive strength ofconcrcie/nlast,t~rl~
g = acceleration ddc to gravity. should he in accordance with IS 6512 : IV84.
The maximum and minimum ocntril’ugal prcbsurc ina 4.4.3 No tensile stress should bc permilted in thl,
bucket occur at the lowest and highrht points of the normal loading condition. Nonlinal lensilr strcssc:,
buc.kct rrspcctivcly. The approximate bucket pressure may, howcvcr, be permitted in other loading condi!ion:,
and thr maximum side wall pressures arc obtained by and Olrir permissible values should IIOI cxc~d ~hc,
adding Ihr computed centrifugal Pressure to Ihc values given in Table 1.
IS 12720 : 1993
4.44 Criteria for Design Against Sliding 5.3.2 Estimntion of Hydro-Dynamic Pressures
The factor of safety against sliding may be calculated For estimation of hydro-dynamic pressures on account
according to IS 6512 : 1984 on the basis of partial of turbulence and surges, model studies are essential.
factor of safety in respect of friction (F$) and partial However, till these forces arc ascertained from model
factor of safety in respect of cohesion (Fc) as given tests criteria given below may be followed for estimation
below. The factor of safety against sliding should not of the forces for preliminary design in case a stilling
be less than 1.0. basin arrangement is provided:
Loading condition F$ Fc Assume depth of water on mc side of wall

equivalent to maximum depth (H) occurring
Normal 1.5 3.6 after the hydraulic jump has taken place;
Severe 1.2 2.4 b) Assume a rectangular water pressure
Sudden drawdown 1.0 1.2 distribution due to water load on the llow side
of the wall;
Spillway functioning 1.0 1.2
c>Assume no water load on the other side, if it
4.4.5 The reinforcement for cantilevrr/cQunt~o~ walls can be dewatered for inspection of suitable
should he designed according to IS 456 : 1978. coffer dam, etc;
5 L)ESIGN OP IIIVIL)E WALLS 4 Assunlc Wcstcr guards’ Parabola to further

account for the hydro-dynamic effects ot
surges using an acceleration factor of 0.15 g
5.1 I;orces
( see Fig. 3 ). In a seismic arca, earthquake
loads may govern over surge loads; and
The following forces should be considcrcd in the
design of divide walls:
e) Proportionthedivide wallsuch that the natural
Dead Load, period of vibration of the wall is lrss Ihan
0.2 s.
Water prcssurc including hydro-dynamic
prcssurc,
Uplift pressure, and
Earthquake I’OKT.
5.2 Design I,wding Conditions
5.2.1 The divide walls should 1~ designed for the

following loading ~orlditions. H = height al‘thc wall ill III,
b = ha~cwidthot’thc gravity wall or thickncs\

5.2.1.1 U,l.s~rlrlni,lric.crl spillwry qwwlion co~~tlilion
ol’thc raiililcvcr Will1 in ItI, and
a> The hydrostatic end hydra-dymmic loads due

F = f;lc-tor which ih il J‘u1ictioii IIf g~c.~liictry.
to the unsynmlctric flow iu the cncrgy
dissipator. In 111~ casr UP llip buck& Ihr
hydrohIaIic load should alw include ~entrilbpal
li)rcc in xdditio11 to depth crl’watcr, and
tJ) Corrcspondilig full uplift.
5.2.1.2 5.4 Stability (‘riteria for I)ivicle Wall
a 1 W;itcr Ll[) 10 illiiliillunl tilil waler I<~\‘CI011 0llC

The divide hall should tx doignrd IO withstand th
xidc,
ovcrlurning nioiiicnts for the: condilioiis K:i\fcrl it1 5.2
131 No water on the other sidtt assunlins it to t)c Tht I11;IsillluIlI li,ud;lIiotl prcssurc should Ilot (“ICX*C(
dcwatrred, the saf<’ bcarirlg c.;lpa(,iIy (11’IIIC I’rltllldiltiol1 rc1c.h.
c> Corrcspolidiiig full iiplili, and
d) Ei~rthqt1;~kc I’orccs.
5.3.1 The dead loild, ul)lil’I prcscurc and carthquakc

forces should hc c;llculaIcd as givca in 4.3.
IS 12720 : 1993
MAXIMUM WATER
L WESTEP GUARD’S
PARABOLA
unit weight of waler in kN/nl’.
carlhquakr toundalion Glmtinn period ins.

horixmal accelerafion cocllicicn~ (lo be taken as 0.15 for &sign calculatiou),
lolai horimutal walrr pressure with a rectangular distribufion in kN/ln.

additional waler prcssurc in kN/nl, and
Factor in kN/m’.
h
Standnrd Mark
The use of the Standard Mark is govern-4 by the provisions of the Bureau of hdian
Standmds ACI, 1986 and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The Standard Mark on
products covered by an Indian Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced
to comply with the requirements of that standard under a well defined system of inspection,
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised by BIS and operated by the
producer. Standard marked products are also continuouslY checked by BIS for conformity
to that srandnrd as a ful~ther safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the
USC of the Standard Mark may be granted to manufacturers or producers may be obtained
from the Bureau of Indian Standards.
BJS is a statutory institution established under the Bureau qf Indian Standards Act, 1986 to promote
Copyright
BIS has the copyright of all its publications. No part of these publications may be reproduced in
any form without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use, in the
course of implementing the standard, of necessary details, such as symbols and sizes, type or grade
designations. Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director ( Publications ), BIS.
reviewed periodically; a standard along with amendments is reaffirmed when such review indicates that no
changes are needed; if the review indicates that changes are needed, it is taken up for revision. Users of
Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest amendments or edition by
referring to the latest issue of ‘BJS Handbook’ and ‘Standards Monthly Additions’. Comments on this
Jndian Standard may be sent to BJS giving the following reference:
Dot : No. RVD 10 (94 )
Amendments Isrued Since Publication
Headquarters:
Manak Bhavan. 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110002

Telephones : 331 01 31, 331 13 75 Telegrams : Manaksanstha
( Common to all Offices )
Central : Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg 331 01 31

NEW DELHI 110002 I 331 13 75
Eastern : l/J4 C. T. T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Maniktola 37 84 99, 37 85 61

CALCUTTA 700054 I 37 86 26, 31 86 62
Northern : SC0 445-446, Sector 35-C, CHANDIGARH 160036 53 38 43, 53 16 40

{ 53 23 84
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, MADRAS 600 J J 3 235 02 16, 235 04 42
-I235 15 19. 235 23 15
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC!, Marol, Andheri ( East ) 632 92 95, 632 78 58
BOMBAY 400093 { 632 78 91, 632 78 92
Branches : AHMADARAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. COJMBATORE.

FARIDABAD. GJJAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR.
LUCKNOW. PATNA. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
Printed at I’rintrade. New L>clhi. India

’ IS 12131: 1989
Indian Standard ( Reaffirmed 2004 )
HYDRAULIC DESIGN OF IMPACT TYPE ENERGY

DISSIPATORS - RECOMMENDATIONS :
UDC 627-838
:624-04
@J BIS 1991

MANAK BHAVAN, 9 BAHADLJR SHAH ZAFAR MARG
NEW DELHI 110002
May 1991 Price Group 6

: . 1
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards on 23 June 1989, after the
draft finalized by the Spillways Including Energy Dissipators Sectional Committee had been approved
by the River Valley Projects Division Council.
Energy dissipators are used to dissipate excess kinetic energy possessed by flowing water. This energy
or velocity head is acquired by the water where the velocity is high, such as in a chute or drop and
energy dissipators are incorporated into the design of these structures. An effective energy dissipator
must be able to retard the flow of fast moving water without damage to the structure or to the channel
below the structure.
Impact type energy dissipators direct the water into an obstruction that diverts the flow in all
directions and in this manner dissipates the energy in the flow. In some structures the flow plunges
into a pool of wate t where the energy is diffused. BatHed outlets, baffled aprons, check-drops and
vertical stilling wells are examples of impact type energy dissipators ( se.~Fig. 1 ).
The impact type energy dissipator is considered to be more efficient than the conventional hydraulic
jump type. Generally, the use of an impact type energy dissipator results in a smaller and more
economical structure,
Two most widely used impact type energy dissipators are baffled apron drops and baffled outlets which
are covered in this standard. The baffled apron drops are used in canals or waste way channels
to provide dissipation of energy at drops in grade. It can also be used for small spillways where
foundation conditions are not favourable for providing a conventional energy dissipator. Baffled
outlets are suited to pipe outlets ( flowing full or part ) or open channel outlets letting down
discharge into a canal or a small water course.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the
final value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of test or analysis, shall be rounded off in
accordance with IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised )‘. The number of
significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in
this standard.
IS 12731: 1989
Indian Standard
HYDRAULIC DESIGN OF,IMPACTTYPE ENERGY

DISSIPATORS - RECOMMENDATIONS
1 SCOPE 2.9 Side Walls ( for BaiIled Apron Drops )
1.1 This standard covers rccommcndations on hydrau- Walls on both the sides of the baffled apron drop to
lic design of balncd apron drop and baffled outlet type contain the Ilow.
cncrgy dissipators.
2.10 Stilling Basin
2 TERMINOLOGY A short length of paved portion at the exit course of an
2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the following outlet structure or below a spillway, chute, or drop, in
definitions shall apply. Examples of various impact which major part of the energy of flowing water is
type energy dissipators arc given in Fig. 1. dissipated and water is discharged into the down-
stream channel in such a manner as to prevent damage
2.1 Baffle to the structure or dangerous scour of bed or banks of
A cross wall, set of vanes or blocks or similar dcvicc channel.
placed across the llow to cvcnly spread the Ilow in a11
directions, cffcct more uniform distribution ofvclocity 2.11 Wing Walls ( for Baffkd Apron Drops )
and dissipate cncrgy. Walls constructed at the foot of the drop, in continu-
ation of the side walls and normal to the direction of the
2.2 Depth of Entrance Flow tlow. to dccrcasc percolation and to retain the back fill
a) For the bafllcd apron drops, il is the actual along the slope.
depth of flow at the cntrancc section.
b) For the baffled outlets. the depth of cntrancc 3 SYMBOLS
flow shall bc taken as the square root of the
3.1 The symbols used in the standard are given below:
cross-sectional area of the cntrancc flow
irrespcctivc of the actual shape of the arca.
A = Cross-scctlonaiaroa of the entrance flow
2.3 End Sill c, = Depth of cut-off at the end of the chute
d = Pipe diameter
A vertical, srcppcd, sloped or dcntatcd wall con-
d, = Depth of Flow at the entrance
structcd at the downs&cam end of the stilling basin.
d, = Critical depth = ( q2/g )‘lJ
2.4 End Walls ( for Baffled Outlets ) d, = Depth of llow in the upstream channel
Walls of the stilling baiin on both the sides, flared out I?= = Energy of the flow over the entrance sill
at 45” to the direction of the flow. ES” = Energy of the flow in the upstream
channel
2.5 Entrance Section e = Hcightofthecnd wallat thccndsillof the
Top horizontal portion at the beginning of the bal’flcd stilling basin
apron drop. e, = Height of the end sill
F, = Froudc number of ihe entrance liow as
2.6 Entrance Sill
defined in 5.7
A sill placed at the end of the cntrancc section to the
chute tocnsurc subcritical Ilow in the cntrancc section. f = Dimension of the fillets of the baffle
g = Accclcration due to gravity ( usually
2.7 Froude Number g = 9.81 m/s2)
Froudc number of the cntrancc Ilow Ibr the baflcd II = Height of the end walls in the portion of
outlet. length I, of the stilling basin ( for baffled
outlet )
2.8 Riprap = &ightof the bafflc block ( for the baffled
Protection to the cmbankmcnt material against erosion apron drop )
due to wave action, velocity of flow, rain wash, wind II* = lfcighl of the sitlc walls ( for the bnfllcd
xlion, clc, provldcti by plxing i\ prolcclion loycr 01 apron drop ) mcasurcd normal to the
rock fr:p~cnls. chute slope
-
IS 12731: 1989
t1, = Height of the side walls mcasurcd vcrti- 4.2 Gcncralizcd design procedure is suggested in this
tally standard for dctcrmining the principal dimensions of
hn = Net head to bc dissipated the baffled apron drops for a unit discharge (discharge
hs = Height of the cntrancc sill per unit width of the chute) not exceeding 30 m3/s per
i = Total number of layers of filter below mstrc and the approach velocity less than the critical
.
riprap velocity based on the unit design discharge. In case
L = Total length of stilling basin whcrc approach velocity exceeds critical velocity in-
I1 = Length of the stilling basin up to the corporation of entrance sill to make it subcritical shall
baffle bc done as given in 4.3.2.
1, = Length of the stilling basin downstream
of the baffle up to the end sill 4.3 Design Criteria
P = Projection at the top of the divide walls The principal fcaturcs of hydraulic design of baffled
inside the basin, over the portion of apron drop consist of dctcrmining the size and dimcn-
length 1, sions in rcspcct of:
Discharge ‘a)width of the chute and entrance section,
Unit discharge b) dimension and spacing of baffle blocks, and
Dimension of the inner web of the baffle c) heights of side walls and wing walls.
Thickness of web of the baffle
Thickness of flange of the baffle 4.3.1 The width W of the chute and the width of the
Velocity of flow cntcring the basin . cntrancc’ section shall be the same and detcrmincd
Velocity of flow over the end sill such that the unit discharge does not exceed
Bottom velocity of flow downstream of 30 m3/s per mctre width. The depth of the entrance
the stilling basin flow d, shall bc such that the avcragc entrance velocity
'. v, = Critical vclocily of flow is slower than the critical velocity V c :
v, = Mean velocity
whcrc V c = (gq)1/3
V" = Velocity of fIow in the upstream channel
w= Width of the chute ( for bafllcd apron The lcngtb of the cntrancc section shall be atlcast equal
drop) . to 2 d,.
= Width of the stilling basin ( for bafllcd 4.3.2 If for a given clcvation of the inlet floor, the
0u1lc1 )
l
approach velocity is grcatcr than V,, subcritical flow
x = Height of thccnd sill over the bed of the ( and hcncc the entrance velocity slower than V,) can
discharge channel downsticam of the still- bc cnsurcd in the entrance section by providing an
ing basin
entrance sill of height tS at the end of the entrance
4 HYDRAULIC DESIGN OF BAFFLED APRON section. The rcquircd hclghl of the sill above the inlet
floor shall bc worked out from the energy balance
DROPS TYPE ENERGY DISSII’A’I’ORS
bctwccn the inlet and the upstream channel :
4.1 Basically, the baffled apron or chute consists of a Thus
sloping apron, usually on a 2 : 1 or flatter slope, with ES” = E= + hi + hs or
multiple rows of baffle blocks equally spaced along the hS = EsU- ESc - hl
chute as shown in Fig. 2. The flow passes over, around
and bctwccn the baffle blocks and appears to slow whcrc
down succcssivcly at each bafllc block. The ability
or the bafllcd apron drop to accommodate a widely
lluctuating tail water clcvation makes it cspccially
suitable as an cncrgy dissipator at the end of a canal
or waste way. The length of the baffled apron dots not
affect the cfficicncy of the structure. It is cffcctivc in
dissipating excess cncrgy for drops ol’ any magniludc
but it nlaj~ bccQmc uneconomical for lnrgc Ilows with
the cncrgy of the flow in theupstream ctianncl and
g-cot depths, due to the wide section and numerous the cncrgy of the Ilow over the sill, rcspcctivcly.
blocks rccluircd. Whcrc ‘an cxccss of, trash, trees or
v2 v2
weeds accompany the Ilow. t&y may bccomc lodged -A-. - -!!-
hi = 0.5
in the bafllc blocks restricting the flow. Removal 01 2g 28
this material is somctimcs difficult.
2
IS 12731 : 1989
and thus ml The stability of the structure shall be checked

against uplift ( assuming a sudden cessation
h, =du -d/1.5 of the flow ) and sliding ( assuming removal
of the earth material downstream by erosion ).
The provision and details ofcut-offs at the
Altcrnativcly, IaScan bc worked out considering it as a upstream and downstream ends shall accord-
weir tocnsuresubcritical flow in thcapproach channel. ingly be delermined. .
4.3.3 The dimensions and spacing of the baffle 4 The preliminary design worked out as above
blocks along the chute as well as height of the side shall beconfirmed by hydraulic model studies
walls shall bc dctcrmincd as follows: for satisfactory performance.
a) Set the longitudinal slope of the chute floor
4.4 Sample Computation .
and side walls al 2 : 1 or llaucr.
A sample computation given in Annex A may prove
b) The height of baffle 11 shall bc 0.8 d,, whcrc
d, is critical depth.
helpful in designing a baffled apron drop.
cl Set the first row of baffle blocks which is in the 5 HYDRAULIC DESIGN OF BAFFLED OUTLETS
form of a scrrarcd horizontal broad crcstcd TYPE ENERGY DISSIPATORS
weir, immcdiatcly starling from the sill, as
5.1 The stilling basin for the baffled outlet is contained
shown in Fig. 2. The configuration ol’ the short
in a small box like structure, which requires no specific
and long sections is important and the long
Lail water for successful performance. Generalized
section, cvcn though notof full width, shall be
design procedure is suggested in lhis standard for
placed next to the side walls.
’ dctcrmining Lhebasin size and critical dimensions for
d) Place the second row of the baffle blocks at a a range of cntrancc velocity up to 15 m/s and Froude
distance 4 If measured along the slope from number from 1 to 9.
the sill.
5.2 Energy ‘dissipation in the stilling basin is initiated
6 Place the subscqucnt rows of the baffle blocks by flow striking the vertical hanging baffle and being
at 2 t/ interval, but not grcatcr than 2 mctrcs.
iurncd upstream by the horizontal portion of the baffle
f) Dcterminc the dimensions of the baffle and by Ihc floor which leads to formation of vertical
blocks, the spacing bctwecn the baffle blocks cddics and turbulence. The structur6,>herefoce, re-
and spacing bctwccn the two rows of the quircs no specific tail water for energy dissipeon.
baffle blocks as well as the height of the side
walls and wing walls, as shown in Fig. 2. 5.3 In addition to the dissipation of the energy; the
stilling basin, the bed and banks of the canal or the
6) Alternate rows of bafllc blocks should bc slag- waler cobrsc have to be protcaed against erosion, by
gercd so that each block is downstream from
providing riprap.
a space in the adjacent row.
h) Adjust the width of thcchutc W or the width 5.4 This type of stiliing basin is subjected to large
and spacing of the baffles so that convcnicnt dynamic forces and turbulcncc which must be consid-
baffle block widths can bc used. crcd in the structural design. The structure shall be
made sulficicntly stable to resist sliding against the
j) A minimum of lhrcc rows of baffle blocks ( in
impact load on the baffle. The entire structure shall
addition to Ihe cnlrancc weir ) shall bc used.
resist sevcrc vibrations inherent in this type of device,
The baffled apron shall bc cxtcndcd so ihat
and the individual structural members shall be
the lop of atlcast one row of baffle blocks will
suflicicndy strong to withstand the large dynamic loads.
bc bclow.thc bottom grade of the outlet chan-
ncl as shown in Fig. 2. 5.5 When a structure is required to be designed for
k) In addition to the dissipation of the cncrgy of vclocilics or Froude numbers exceeding those
th$ flow, adcquatc protcclion in the form of spccificd in 5.1. or lo wilhstand unusual hydraulic
gravel or riprap of suitable size shall bc conditions, model studies for the spccific’case under
provided on each side of the structure from consideration shall be conducted.
the top of the slope to the downsucam wing-
wall cxtcnding lavxally a dismcc cqual LO
5.6 Design Criteria
the wall height. RockKill al the bottom OCthe
The principal fcaturc of hydraulic design of impact
apron may not lx ncccssary. lypc cncrgy dissipator consist of dctcrmining the
3
IS 12731 : 1989
following pilJlITlClCfS : 5.9.3 The notches shown in Fig. 3 are provided to aid
a) Thcorctical maximum cntrancc velocity and in cleaning out the basin after prolonged non-use of the
Froudc number of the cnlrancc flow; structure. If cleaning action is not considered neces-
b) The apron clcvation, sary, the size of the notches may be reduced or
c) Si/& of the stilling basin and appurtenant struc- climinatcd all togcthcr.
tures; and
5.9.4 The invert of the entrance pipe shall be kept at
d) Riprap and filter downstream of the basin.
the clcvation as shown in Fig. 3, in line with the
5.7 Entrance Velocity and Froude Number bottom of the baffle, regardless of the size of pipe. If
Dctcrminc the net maximum head hn to bc the cnlrancc pipe slopes downward, the outlet end of
dissipated, as the diffcrcncc bctwccn the the pipe shall bc turned horizontal, or the invert shall
maximum upstream water lcvcl and ccntrc bc filled to form a horiyantal surface for atleast one
lint of the pipe al the stilling basin or the pipe diamctcr upslrcam from the portal. For slopes 150
invert ofthc open channel at the stilling basin or greater, the horizontal length of pipe shall be atleast
( as the cast may bc ), accounting for the fric- thrice the diamctcr.
tional and other losses in the system.
5.9.5 If the pipe flows partially full, it shall be vented
b) Entrance velocity may bc compuicd by the
at the upstream end. The diameter of the vent shall be
formula
atlcasl one-sixth the diameter of the pipe.
v, = m
cl Cross-sectional arca of”the flow at the cn- 5.9.6 If the flow cntcrs the basin through a rectangular
lrancc may bc computed from the lotal dis- open channel, its invert shall be decided in the same
charge Q and the cnuancc velocity V,, from way as that for a pipe. Its width shall bc less than the
the formula basin width. The channel walls shall bc as high as the
basin width and the invert shall be horizontal for a
A +
1 minimum of three channel widths upstream from the
d) Depth of cntrancc flow may be calculated basin.
from the formula
d, =K 5.10 Riprap and Filter Downstream of the Basin
c) Froudc number of the cntrancc flow may bc

dctcrmincd from the formula To prcvcnt damage of the bed and banks of the canal
Fl = vJm-- or water course by the erosive action of the flow
passing over the end sill of the stilling basin, riprap is
5.8 Apron Elevation
usually placed on the bed and banks of the downstream
Unlike the aprons for the hydraulic jump type stilling
channel. Scvcral factors affect the stone siy& required
basins, thcrc is no special rcquircmcntol the apron
to resist the forces which tend LO movcriprap. In terms
clcvation in rcliltiOn lo lhc lail waler clcvalion, for Ihc
of llow Icaving a stilling basin, these factors are vcloc-
impact lypc cncrgy dissipal()r. Tail waler as high as
ity, flow direction, turbulcnccand waves. The purpose
(e,+ 7‘/2) (Fig. 3) will improve lhc pcrli)rmancc
of this section is to give the design cnginccr a
by reducing exit vclocitics, providing smoother waler
guidclinc to dctcrminc the size of riprap to bc used
surface and reducing tcndcncy towards erosion.
downstream of the stilling basin and to dctcrminc the
Howcvcr, cxccssivc tail waler lcvcl causing some llow
type of liltcr or bedding material placed below the
to pass over the bal’lk should bc avoidctl, as fnr as
riprap.
possible.
5.10.2 curve giving the minimum stone
A tentative
5.9 Size of the Stilling bin and Appurtenant
diamctcr of bottom velocity Vb is shown
as a function
Structures
in Fig. 5. The bottom velocity, Vb at which the flow
59.1 Wid~hofhasin (W) shall bcdctcrmincd with lhc strikes the riprap may bc best asccrtaincd from model
help of Fig. 4A, ulilising the values of d, and I;, as cal- studies. Howcvcr, for the purpose of preliminary
culalcd from 5.7. design, the bottom vclocily may bc calculated as given
in 5.10.X
59.2 The other rclcvam dimensions of the stilling
basin and appurtcnanl structures LOthe basin wldLh 1Y 5.10.3 For the compuicd values of entrance velocity
shall bc rclatcrl in accordance with Fig. 3. The V, and Froudc number I;,, calculate the velocity over
dimensions I, and lP arc the suggc~~~l minimum the end sill V2, usmg Fig. 4B. If the bed of the dis-
lhickncss for the hangmg bafllc and arc not rc’latctt IO charge channel downstream of the basin is at the same
the hydraulic pcrformancc of the structure. clcvation as the top ol the end sill, bollom velocity V,
4
l--
I
IS 12731:1989
will be the same as the velocity over the cn(t sill Vz.
If, however, the bcd of the discharge channel is at a dl~ first layer
distance X below the top of the cn(i sill as shown in = = 5
Fig. 3, an approxirnalc cslimalc of lhc bouom velocity ~, subgrade
Vb can bc obtained by multiplying the mean velocity
in the downstream (Vm = q / diffcrcncc bctwccn the
TWL and bed of the discharge channel) by a d~Ofirst layer
turbulence correction factor appropriate to the flow = =5t060
conditions. In thepresent case, this factor may bc taken d~Osubgrade
as 1.4.
5.10.9 The mtio in the equation given in 5.10.8
5.10.4 The required stone (iiamcxcr may bc [ictcrmincd
depends on the shape and gradation of-the grains as
from Fig. 5. More than 60 pcrccnt of the riprap
mixture shall consist of stones which have length, given below :
width and thickness dimensions as nearly alike as
lvfaterial Ratio
practicable, and bc of the size indicated by the curve
in Fig. 5, or larger and shall not bc flat slabs.
Homogeneous round grains (gravel) 5 : IO
5.10.5 Besides the size and weight of the individual
stones, other factors that alfcct satislautory perform- Homogeneous angular grains 10: 30
ance of a protective riprap arc the type of filter rnatcrial ( broken gravel, rubble)
placed beneath the riprap, the thickness of each layer
Well graded grains 12: 60
and its possible pcrm~ability to water and sand. A
typical example of filter construction is shown in 5.10.10 If it is uneconomical to compose a special
Fig. 5 which may bc used as a guideline. mixture and locally available material is to be used for
5.10.6 To prevent a filter Iaycr from lifting by water the filter, the sieve curves for the subgrade and filter
entering thcchanncl through bcd or banks, the pcrnlca- material Iaycrs should run about parallel forthe small
-bility to water of the construction as~ whole and of diamclcr grains.
each separate layer shall bc greater than that of the 5.1.0.11 The following thickness for the filter layers
underlying material. To maintain a sufficient per- shall bc regarded as a minimum for a filter construc-
meability to water, the following condition shall bc tion mitdc in dry condition.
satisfic@.
ikfaterial Ratio
~15 (i th layer)
d,, first Iaycr
dl~ ( i_ 1 Ill Iaycr) = =5t040 Sand, fine gravel 0.05 m to 0.10 m
d15 subgmdc
Gravel 0.10 m to 0.20 m
5.10.7 Depending upon the shape and gradation of the
grains, roughly the following ratios be used : Stones 1.5 to 2 times the
largest stone dia.
Lfalcrial Ratio
With filter constructed under water, these ~icknesse~
Homogeneous round grains (gravel) 5:10 have to bc increased considerably.
Homogeneous angular grains 6:20 S.1O.12 In case, the concrete blocks or slabs are to be
(broken gravel, rubble) used in place of riprap, the openings between them
shall not be greater than 0.5 times d8~ of the under-
Well gra(icd grains 12:40 lying material,
To prevent the filter from clogging it is advisable that 5.10.13 At structure-to-filter and filter-to-unpro-
d~ of a layer bc larger than 0.75 mm. tcctcd channel joints, the thickness of the filter shall be
~- increased as shown in F@ 5.
5.10.8 A riprap protection may fail bccausc waves or
ground water flowing into the charmcl remove material 5.10.14 The protective riprap shall be laid at least one
from beneath the riprap. To prevent the loss of fine basin wide downstream of the stilling basin.
material from an undcrl ying fiItcr material or sub- 5.10.15 Sample Computation
gradc, the following rcquircmcnts with regard to A sample calculation given in Annex B may prove
imperviousness to sand shall bc met: helpful in designing a baffled outlet.
5
IS 12731 : 1989
ANNEXA
(Ckzuse4.4)
DESIGN OF RAFFLED APRON DROP
(Sample Calculations)
A-l DATA Portion adjacent to side walls = 0.5 tt
Q = 200 m3/s ( design discharge ) = 1.05 m
Adopt
W = 15 m ( chute width )
Width and spacing of the full = 4m
d, = 4.2 m (entrance flow depth) width block
Part width blocks near the side = 1.5m
Slope of the chute = 2.5 : 1 wall
Longer section = 2.6Om
Elevation of the entrance floor ’ = cl. 51.00 m
Shorter section = 1.3m
Elevation of the downstream = cl. 36.OOm &d%equent Rows
channel
A-2 COMPUTATIONS Distance from the first row = 4H
=4 x2.1
200 = 8.4 m
Unit discharge q = 15 = 13.33 m3/s/m
(Icss than
30 mYs/m) Baffle block width = 4m
Critical vclocily V, =w
Baffle block height = H = 0.8 dc
= VT07 m,s = 2,lm
Spacing between the blocks = 4m
Actual cntrancc velocity
4 13.33
v, =d=-pj- = 3.17 m/s Spacing between the subsequent =2H
1 * rows of the baffle blocks = 4.2 m
which is less than critical velocity I-leight of the side walls H,

Hcncc the cntrancc arrangcmcnt is
pcrmissiblc and cntrancc sill is not llw = 3H =3x2.1 =6.3m
ncccssary. Length of the cnuancc
section =2d, = 8.2 ( Min ) Wing Walls
Dimensions of the Baf!le Blocks YV - Hw ( fi)

II, =
cos 0 S
First Row
where s is the slope of the chute expressed as s : 1
H=0.8dc =0.8x (horizontal : vertical)
Here s = 2.5, HW= 6.3
3 13.33 x 13.33
= 0.8 x \I = 2.lm 6.3 JizF
9.81 II, = = 6.785 m say 6.8
2.5
Wjdth of the individual block of = I .5/l Length of the wing walls = 1.5 x H, = 10.177 say
scrratcd weir = 3.15m 10.20 m
Longer section of the scrratcd = 1.25 II Cut off at the end of the chute, C,
weir = 2.625 m For flow depth exceeding 2 m, adopt C, = 1.0 m
Shorter section of the scrratcd = 5/8 It Fig. 6 shows the general arrangement of the
weir = 1.312 m baffled apron drop designed above.
6
IS 12731: 1989
ANNEX B
(Clause 510.15)
DESIGN OF BAFFLED OUTLET

(Sample Calculations)
B-l DATA Hcncc, W = 7.5 x. 0.737 = 5.52 m;

adopt W = 5.50 m
Maximum upstream water lcvcl = cl. 97.60 m
Calculate other relevant dimensions of the still-
Maximum tail water lcvcl = cl. 86.40 m ing basin from Fig. 3.
Design discharge ’ = 8 m’/s Since the roof of the pipe is higher than the
tail water elevation, the pipe will flow partially.
Pipe diameter = 1.20 m Hcncc the pipe should have a vent diameter of
atlcast y = 200 mm
Centre lint elevation of pipe = cl. 86.00 m
Apron lcvcl of the stilling basin
Average ground lcvcl = cl. 85.40 m
=TwL- e, + 7‘
=0.6Om ( 2 )
Head loss in the pipe system
Since
B-2 COMPUTATION
e, X-z--= 5.50 0.917m say0.90m
6 6
NCLhead hn = (97.60-86.00) - 0.60
= ll.Om and
Entrance velocity V, 42 g x 11.00 7’~ JK =3~z2&j3m~y2.Jom
8 8 -
= 14.7 m/s
Cross sectional area = A =Q/V, = 8 Apron lcvcl = 86.40 - O-90 + T

14.7 ( )
of flow at cntrancc
= 0.544 mz = el. 84.50 m
Top of end sill = cl. 84.50 + e, = e1.84.50 + 0.90
Depth of cntrancc Bow = cl .85.40 m.
,=d, =fl= /=4 = 0.737m v,
Enter Fig. 4B with F, = 5.47 to get - = 0.15
Froudc number of the entrance flow vi
Thcrcforc, velocity of flow over end sill V,

= 0.15 x vr
V, = 2.2 m/s = V,
Since the entrance velocity and Froudc
number arc within the range spccificd in 5.1, Enter Fig. 5 with Vb = 2.2 m/s
an impact type cncrgy dissipator will bc
suilablc in this cast. Stone diamctcr of the riprap required = 350 mm
W The riprap pro&lion should bc extended at least
USCFig. 4A with F, = 5.47 to find 7
I one basin width, that is, 5.5 m downstream of
= 7.5 the stilling basin.
IS 12731:1989
GATE
*
I 1
Uls w L
.- --— --
— — D/s w.
7’( ------ -
——.
~------ .-~...,.-..’,..a. -.
-;
.-..
1A Typical Check Drop for a Canal 16 Baftled Outlet for a Canal
---1 U/S W L (d 15&2.L!n)
BAFFLE BLOCKS 1300~225mm AT

- [,20..
-------- --- 1 bx
STEPS 1065.x 152.5mm “ ‘–- u ..
*
lC Baffled Chute with Stilling Basin ( for a Lower Jhelum Outfall Structure, India )
u/S WL (cl IS.f.gm) PERFORATED

BAFFLE el. 28.5S.0/S WJ
\ -—— —-
ID Perforated Bathed Stilling Basin for a Canal Fall Stilling Basin ( Cambay Brartch of Mahi Canal, India )
BAFFLE BLOCKS
— :
. T
m p
-—.
In
I
J
PLAN ‘SLEEVE VALVE
IE Baflled Apron Drops for Canals and Small Spillways IF Vertical Sleeve Valve Stilling Well
FIG. 1 VARIOUSIMPACTTYPEENERGYDISSIPATORS
8
IS 12731: 1989
ENTRA
SIDE
1 -%CTfON ‘V
Bh
A A
Y I-JU
I III
Y
uu
‘7 ENTRANCE
SECTION
Dll
llll CID nn
-
*- Min.2d,
I I
rm r-m
I’
nn l-m111
SlOE WALL lt WING WALL

e--J
--I
FIG. 2 BAFFLED APRON DROP ( GENERAL ARRANGEMENT )
9
IS 12731: 1989
STILLING BASINS
I- 4
r END WALL
I__
t
--L5O
X
Ii =3/L w
L = b&W
4 = t/2 W
12 = 5/e w
c tl/2W
et = l/6 w
P = I/zW
T = 3/6W
PLAN tb. tpgi50-200mm
f .‘75 -150mm
I
‘ EN0 SILL
SECTION -X X SECTION-Y Y
DOWNSTREAM ELEVATION
FIG. 3 BAFFLED OUTLET - TYPICAL DETAILS
10
IS 12731: 1989
2 3 L 6
F, - FROUDE NUMBER
4A
0 1 2 3 L 5 6 7 8 3
F,= FROUDE NUMBER

48
FIG. 4 BAFFLEDOUTLKT- DHGN CURVES
11
IS 12731: 1989
1000
500
FINE GRAVEL
/\ *\
100
t 50 EXAMPLE OF FILTER CONSTRUCTDN

:
: rRIpRAp
w
I
9 10
0
z 5
2
u-l PROTECTEO-+----UNPROTECTED
1 INCREASE IN FILTER THICKNESS AT

THE JOINTS OF PROTECTED AND
UNPROTECTED PORTIONS
0.2
0.1 0.5 1.0
BOTTOM VELOCITY, m/s -
FIG. 5 BAFFLEDOUTLET ( DETAILSOF RIPRAP PROTECTION:)
u
SEC A-A
WINGWALLS’------ -----z \R,PRAp ON UlJl

1 Ct’lO SIDE SLOPE 1.5 l-m
1
SEC B-B t
PART PLAN
FIG. 6 GENERALARRANGEMENTSOF BAFFLEDAPRON DROPS
12
&adard Mark
The use of the Standard Mark is governed by the provisions of the Bumzu of Indian~andards
Act, 1986 and the Rulca and Regulations made thereunder. The Standard Mark on products
covered by an Indian Standard conveys tbe assurance that they have been produced to comply
with the requirements of that standard under a well defined system of inspection, testing and
quality control which is devised and supervised by BIS and operated by the producer. Standard
marked products are also continuously checked by BIS for conformity to that standard as a
further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the Standard Mark
may be granted to manufacturers or producers may be obtained from the Bureau of
Indian Standards.
_
&arena of India88 Standarda
BIS b a statutory iartitution established under the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 1986 to promote
and attending to connected matter8 in the country.
Copyright
BIS ha8 the copyright of all its publications. No part of these publication8 may be reproduced in any form
without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This doe8 not preclude the free use, in the course of
implementing the standard, of necessary details, such a8 symbol8 and sizes, type or grade designationr.
Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director ( Publication8 ), BIS.
Revision of Indian Standards
Indian Standards are reviewed periodically and revised, when necessary and amendments, if any, are
issued from time to time. User8 of Indian Standard8 should ascertain that they are in possession of the
latest amendment8 or edition. Comment8 on thii Indian Standard may be 8ent to BIS giving the
following reference:
Dot: No. RVD 10 ( 3212)
Amendmenta larued Since Publication
Amend No. Date of Issue Text AfIected
Headquarter8 :
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah &far Marg, New Delhi 110002 Telegram8 : Manak8anatha
Telephone8 : 331 01 31, 331 13 75 ( Oommon to all Office8 )
Regional Office8 : Telephone

NEW DELHI 110002 331 13 75
EPltern : l/14 C. I. T. Scheme VII Y, V. I. P. Road, Maniktola 87 86 62

CALCUTTA 700054
Northern : SC0 445-446, Sector 35-C, CHANDIGARH 160036 53 36 43
Southern : 0. I. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, MADRAS 600113 235 02 16
We8tern : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri ( Ea8t ) 632 92 95

BOMBAY-400093 .
Branches : AHMADABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAK.

COIMBATORE. FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD, GUWAHATI.
HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR. PATNA. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
-.
--^.
Printed at Ner India Printing Press. Khuria. India
‘.
.,, IS 12966 ( Part 1 ) : 1992
( Reaffirmed 2002 )
CODEOFPRACTICBFORGALLERIBSAND
OTHEROPENINGSINDAMS
PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
UDC 627’824’7
0 BIS 1992

NEW DELHI 110002
April 1992 Price Groog’ 2

Dams ( Overflow and Non-overflow ) Sectional Co&&tee, RVD 9
FOREWORD
This standard ( Part 1 > was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized
by Dams ( Overflow and Non-overflow > Sectional Committee had been approved by the River
Valley Division Council.
A large number of galleries and other openings are provided in all gravity dams for different
purposes.
Other openings include all types of sluices, penstock openings, shafts, adits and chambers, stair/lift
wells, drainage holes, air vents, conduits, formed drains, porous concrete drains, etc.
The structural design of such galleries and other opening provided in gravity dams is covered in
IS 12S66 ( Part 2 ) : 1990 ‘Code of practice for galleries and other openings in dams : Part 2
Structural design’.
final value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off
in accordance with IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised)‘. The number
of significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified
‘*
4..
4
IS 12966( Part 1 ) : 1992
Indian Standard
CODEOFPRACTICEFORGALLERIESAND
OTHEROPENINGSINDAMS
PART
1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 SCOPE 3.5 Drainage Gallery
1.1 This standard (Part 1 > covers the general This is a supplementary gallery sometimes
requirements for which galleries and other provided downstream at about 2/3rd the base
openings are provided in gravity dams. width from the upstream face for the purpose of
draining the downstream portion of the founda-
2 REFERENCES tion.
2.1 Thefollowing Indian Standards are necessary 3.6 Gate Gallery

adjuncts to this standard:
Gallery, made in a dam to provide access to
IS No. Title and room for, the mechanical and eltctricaI
equipment required for the operation of gates in
10135 : 1985 Code of practice for drainage outlet conduits, penstocks, etc.
system for gravity dams,
their foundations and abut- 3.7 Inspection Gallery
ments (first revision )
Gallery made in a dam to provide access to the
11485 : 1985 Criteria for hydraulic design interior mass of the dam in order to inspect the
of sluices in concrete and structure and study the structural behaviour of
masonry dams the dam after completion. Foundation, drainage
gate and grouting galleries also serve as
3 TERMINOLOGY inspection galleries.
3.0 For the purpose of this standard the 4 PURPOSE
following definitions shall apply.
4.1 The need for galleries varies from dam to
3.1 Gallery dam. Some of the common purpose for which
galleries are provided are as follows:
The gallery is an opening within dam which
provides access into or through the dam. a) To provide drainage way for water seeping
through the upstream face of the dam and
from the foundations;
3.2 Adit
b) To provide space for drilling holes and
A horizontal gallery connecting the gallery grouting the foundation in order to
system in the dam with downstream face or provide a grout curtain;
features outside the dam such as power house or
gate house. Also called ‘Access Gallery’ or 4 To provide access to the interior of the
‘Entrance Gallery’. dam for observing its behaviour after
completion;
3.3 Chamber 4 To provide access to chambers like hoist
chamber, pump chamber, pump weI&
When a gallery is enlarged to permit installation instrument niches, etc;
of equipment, it is called a chamber, e.g. hoist
chamber, gate chamber, etc.
4 Visitors gallery to provide access routes
for visitors.
3.4 Foundation Gallery 4.2 In addition to galleries other openings are
also provided in dams for different purposes.
It is a gallery which generally extends over the
length of the dam near the rock profile 5 LOCATION AND SIZE OF COMMON
conforming in elevation to the transverse profile GALLERiES AND OPENINGS
of the canyon; in plan, it is near and parallel to
the axis of the dam. From this gallery, holes 5.1 Foundation Gallery
are drilled and grouted for the main grout
curtain and drainage holes are drilled for draining This gallery should be provided in the body of
water seeping through the foundation in order the dam where height of the dam above normal
to provide relief in uplift pressures. foundation level is more than IO m ( measured
1
I!3 12966 ( Part 1) ; 1992
up to to crest level in case of overflow portion 5.3 Qte Galleries and Chambers
of the dam ). For lesser heads, its necessity
should be left to the discretion of the designer. Their size should depend lupon the size of the
The purpose of this gallery is defined in 3.4, gates, etc. However IS 11485 ; 1985 may also
4.1( a ) & 4.1(b). The miqimum size of b.e referred to for their sizing.
gallery should be 1.5 m X 2’25 m, however a
5.4 Instrumentation Gallery
larger size of 2’0 m X 2’5 m can be provided to
acccmmcdate drilling equipment. The general The number and location of such galleries
details of this gallery are given in IS 10135 : 1985. should depend upon the extent of instrumen-
It should bz located at a distarce of 3’0 metres tation provided in a dam. These galleries should
or 5 percent of the reservoir head ( measured generally be aligned perpendicular to the dam
from ERL to the foundation level ) from the axis in plan. The size is generally 1’5Om X 2’25m
upstream face of the dam, whichever is greater ( rectanguIar )with minor modification necesstry
ard ccnsistent with any other requ,irement. for instruments like plumb-line, etc.
There should be minimum 1’5 metre concrete
cover between the flooi of the gallery and the 5.5 Sump Well
foundation grade. Scmetimes, depending upon They should be provided in the deepest location,
the fcundaticn grade profile aqd other considera- Their rumber and size should depend upon the
tions like the height of the dam from foundation quantity of water Seeping through the founda-
grac’e up to Ihe spillway crest in respect of over- tions acd body of the dam. The seepage wa!er
flow section, gallery dicpositicn in other blocks, collected in upstream inspection galleries
etc, a fcucdatjor gallery may have to be lccated provided at higher levels shculd, as far as
in a trench ( see Fig. 1 ). A minimum concrete possible be drained-off towards the downstream
cover of about 2’0 metros is generaliy prcvided side by gravity through adits/any other suitable
in the trench. arrangements. Sump well may also be located
outside the dam. In this case, sump pit provision
5.1.1 Cottnsrream Crcincge Gcllery and a cast iron pipe of 6C0 mm diameter will
In high dams ( greater than 100 m ), a supple- have to be provided from sump pit to sump well.
mentary dlainsge gallery is scmtimes provided A pump house may be housed above the sump
at about 2/3rd the base \n(idth from the upstream well. This is convenient to avoid flooding of
face fcr drainirg the do\nnstream portion of the water in the gallery in case pumps get failed due
foundation, if the tail water levels are high. The to Fewer failure or some other cause.
size of this gallery should, usually be 2.0 m X
2’5 m. 5.6 Pump Chamber
Pumps of suitable capacity should be provided
5.2 Inspection Galleries at Higher Levels Above to pump-off the water collected in the sump well.
Foundation Gallery As far as possible, the pumps should be located
in a chamber adjacent to an inspection gallery
f-!n inaF:ction @alIely should be prcvidcd stove above the foundation gallery so that in the con-
tie fcurdation gallery so as to be shout tipgency of the foundation gallery getting flood-
7% Eetrrs telcw Ihe spillway crest ccnsistent ed, the pump-chamber remains approachable
with structural ccnsidcration in ca:e of overflow ( see Fig. 2 ).
fccticns lavirg a height of about 25 metres or
nore n;czlurtd frcm the spiIlw;y crest to tke 5.7 Elevator Tower and Shaft
fcul c’aticn grz.de co as to facilitate cIe:nirg/
rcamil;g cf tke fcrmed/l:orcus ccucrete drains Elevator towers shculd generally be provided at
in ihe bcdy of the dzm ( fte Fig. 2 ). Generally the end of spillway Fortion in the NOF blocks
ictelmcdiate insyecticn gaI]erirs shculd be to provide access to the galleries from top of the
prcvidcd at evely 30 xetres intervals (ref dsm. Grnerally, only a lift well should be
Fig. 3). ?he size cf these pslltries chculd provided for which a size of 3 m X ? m should
gcnelally be 1’5 m X 2.25 m ( rcctzngular ). normally suffice. Sometimes, a Stan--well may
( 1500 X 2 250 min FOUNDATION GALLERY
r ACCEPTABLE FOUNDATION GRADE
FIG. 1 FOUNDATION GALLERY IN TRENCH
2
TS 12966 ( Part 1 ) : 1992
SPILLWAY PIER
INSPECTION GALLE
(~S00X225Omm
FORMED DFWN
DELIVERY PIPE (EXIT ABOVE UPpER NAPPQ
OPENING FOR SUCTION PIPES
~ouN!JAnON GALLEA
(1WOX225Qmm I+)
FIG. 2 LOCATIONOFFOUNDATIONAND INSPECTIONGALLBRIESIN OVER FLOW SECTION
also be provided either separately or around the conditions, a gallery can be either horizontal or
lift well, if considered necessary. The size of on a slope. In the later case, steps with tread
elevator tower should accordingly be modified to 250 mm and riser 200 mm may be provided.
include a stair-case. Generally, 25 steps should be provided in one
flight. Hand railing along stairs should also be
5.8 Ventilation Shaft/Pipes provided. It should normally be ensured that the
steps do not cross the contraction joints between
Generally, 300 mm diameter ventilation pipes/
the two adjacent dam monoliths. Generally
holes should be provided in every alternate dam
minimum horizontallengthofabout 1’0-1’5 metres
blocks from the galleries for ventilation. How-
should be kept in the gallery adjacent to the
ever, where adits are not provided, ventilation
contraction joints before it is stepped.
shafts ( about 1 m diameter ) may be provided, +
one each near either end of the gallery to 6.2 All galleries should have gutters to carry
maintain a draft of air. However in case of away seepage water which gets collected into the
lengthy dams, intermediate ventilation shafts gallery. On horizontal runs, the depth of the
may also be provided. gutter may vary from 225 mm to 375 mm to
provide a drainage slope. A slope not flatter
5.9 Formed Drain than 1 in 1000 should be provided for drainage.
These drains should be located as per IS 10135 : 6.3 Ramps can also be provided up to 10” angles
1985. They are spaced at approximately 3m with the horizontal. However, for slopes more
centres along the axis of the dam. The size of than 10” and up to 15” special non-slip surfaces
the drains is about 200 mm diameter. The lower should be necessary. Hand rails should also be
ends of the drains extend to the gallery, or are provided on ramps.
connected to the downstream face near the fillet
through a horizontal drain pipe or header system 6.4 In case of very steep abutments where it is
if there are no galleries. The tops of the drains not possible to follow the canyon shape by the
(in OF section ) are located about 1 m below sloping galleries ( with steps ) vertical shafts of
the crest level. In NOF section, the tops are about 2’0-2’5 m diameter with spiral staircase
located at road level ( see Fig. 2 and 3 ). ( metallic ) may be provided to connect galleries
at two levels.
6 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS ABOUT
GALLERIES 6.5 Adits to galleries should be provided for
approaching them from downstream side of the
6.1 General NOF dam at suitable elevation above the tail
Depending upon the rock profile and other water level.
3
IS 12966 ( Part 1) :1992
M. w. L
FRL
INSPECllON GALLERY
(15CQX2250mm)
FORMED DRAINS
Fra. 3 LOCATION OF INTERMEDIATEINSPKTION GALLERY IN NON-OVERFLOW SECTION
6.6 Other requirements like shock proof, lighting wall of the galleries to be attended to.
throughout galleries and adit, grilled door near
adit entrance to prevent nuisance of birds like 6.7 Where separate instrumentation galleries are
bats, fool-proof surface drainage near adit not provided in the dams of low height, provision
entrance to prevent accidental rusting of rain may be made for accelograph inverted plump
water by landslide, chocking of catch water bobs, etc, by leaving suitable space ( say 5 m ) in
drains, etc, and marking R.D. figures on the the foundation gallery itself.
4
Standard Mark
The use of the Standard Mark is governed by the provisions of the Bureau of Indian
Standards Act, 1986 and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The Standard Mark on
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised by BIS and operated by the pro-
ducer. Standard marked products are also continuously checked by BIS for conformity to
that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use
of the Standard Mark may be granted to manufacturers or producers may be obtained from
the Bureau of Indian Standards.
‘..,
BIS is a statutory institution established under the Bareau of Indian Standards Act, 1986 to promote
Copyright
any form without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use, in
the course of implementing the standard, of necessary details, such as symbols and sizes, type or
grade designations. Enquiries relating to copyrlght be addressed to the Director ( Publications ), BIS.
Indian Standards are reviewed periodically and revised, when necessary and amendments, if any,
are issued from time to lime. Users of Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in
possession of the latest amendments or edition. Comments on this Indian Standard may be sent
to BIS giving the following reference :
Dot : No. RVD 9 ( 4340 )
Amendments Issued Since Poblication

Headquarters :
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110002

Telephones : 331 01 31, 331 13 75 Telegrams : Manaksanstha

NEW DELHI 110002 331 13 75
Eastern : l/14 C1.T. Scheme VII M, V.I.P. Road, Maniktola

CALCUTTA 700054 37 86 62
Southern : C.I.T. Campus, IV Cross Road, MADRAS 600113 235 0216
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri ( East )

BOMBAY 400093 6 32 92 95
Branches : AHMADABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR.

COIMBATORE. FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI.
HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR. LUCKNOW. PATNA.
THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
Printed at Swataatra Bharat Press, Delhi, India

IS 12966 (Part 2) : 1990
( Reaffirmed 2002 )
Indian Standard
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR GALLERIES
AND OTHER OPENINGS IN DAMS
PART 2 STRUCTURAL DESIGN
UDC 627’8’068 : 624’04
0 BIS 1991

NEW DELHI 110002 .
February I99 1 Price Group 4

Dams ( Overflow and Non-overflow ) Sectional Committee, RVD 9
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards on 22 February 1990, after
the draft finalized by the Dams ( Overflow and Non-overflow ) Sectional Committee had been
approved by the River Valley Division Council.
A large number of galleries and other openings are provided in practically all modern high dams.
The galleries are required for access, grouting, inspection, drainage and for the operation of gates.
Other major openings include sluices, temporary diversion conduits, river outlets and penstock
openings. In addition there are openings for stairwells, shafts, air vents; drainage holes etc.
To enable the designing of gallery it is necessary to determine the general stress field to which the
opening is subjected and subsequently to analyse the local alteration in it due to the particular shape
of the opening.
In this standard only small openings such as foundation gallery, inspection gallery, adit to gallery
etc have been considered. The openings such as sluices, penstocks and other similar openings
have been excluded from this standard.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with the
final value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in
accordance with IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding of numerical values ( revised )‘. The number of
significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value
in this standard.
IS 12966 ( Part 2 ) : 1990
Indian Standard
CODEOFPRACTICEFORGALLERIES
ANDOTHEROPENINGSINDAMS
PART 2 STRUCTURAL DESIGN
1 SCOPE the most significant stresses in the structure under

consideration.
1.1 This standard lays down method of determining
reinforcement around openings in solid gravity dams 3.4 Diversion Conduit
constructed either in concrete or in masonry, and are
applicable to openings which can be analysed as two A conduit used for the temporary diversion of water
dimensional problems. from the reservoir.
1.2 The design of openings which are large in com- 3.5 Drainage Hole
parison with the size of the dam is not considered in
this standard. If d is the maximum cross-sectional di- Openings for ensuring proper drainage of the structure.
mension of the gallery of the opening, it is considered
large when either of the following is complied with : 3.6 Gate Gallery
a) d 2 6m,or
Gallery, made in a dam, to provide access to and room
b) concrete or masonry cover any where around it is for, the mechanical equipment required for the opera-
less than d. tion of gates in outlet conduits or powerpenstocks, etc.
2 REFERENCES 3.7 Penstock Opening
2.1 The following Indian Standards are necessary Openings for pipes which convey water from intake to
adjunct to this standard: turbine in hydroelectric schemes.
IS No. Title 3.8 Plumbline Shaft
456 : 1978 Code of practice for plain and rein- A shaft located in a dam in order to make observations
forced concrete ( third revision ) of the deflection of the dam with respect to the base.
457 : 1957 Code of practice for general con- 3.9 Reservoir Empty Condition
struction of plain and reinforced
concrete for dams and other massive The condition in which no water load is assumed to be
structures present on upstream side of the dam.
4410 Glossary of terms relating to river
3.10 Reservoir Full Condition
( Part 8) : 1968 valley projects: Part 8 Dams and
dam sections The condition in which the water level is at F.R.L. on
6512: 1984 Criteria for design of solid gravity upstream side of the dam.
dams ( first revision )
3.11 Stair Well
8605 : 1977 Code of practice for construction of
masonry in dams A vertical opening provided in the body of the dam to
accommodate staircase.
3 TERMINOLOGY
3.12 Total Tension
3.0 For the purpose of this code, the following defini-
tions shall apply. Integral of the tensile stress normal to the section from
3.1 Air Vent the boundary, of zero tensile stress.
An opening provided for the entry/escape of air. 3.13 Transverse Gallery
3.2 Boundary Stress A gallery in the direction perpendicular to that of

longitudinal axis of the dam.
The normal stress on a plane perpendicular to a free
boundary. 3.14 Uniaxial Stress Field
3.3 Critical Load If a thin plate is loaded by forces applied ai the

boundary only in one direction a state of uniaxial stress
A loading condition which will produce maximum or field is said to exist.
IS 12966 ( Part 2 ) : 1990
4 SYMBOLS 6.2 The analysis has to be conducted in two stages:
4.1 For the purpose of this code and unless otherwise a) Determination of overall stress field in the centre
defined in the text, the following letter symbols shall of openings, aud
have the meaning indicated against each: b) Detailed determination of the stress distribution
around openings and determination of total
A, = Cross-sectional area of steel in tension tension therefrom.
a = Semi-major axis of elliptic openings 6.3 Overall Stress Field
b = Semi-minor axis of elliptic opening
The stress field at the center line of the opening is
F = Total tensile force across the section determined by one of the following methods.
A = Height of rectangular opening
6.3.1 Approximate Analytical Method
B = Width of rectangular opening
= “Gravity Method of Analysis”, which assumes linear
r Radius of circle distribution of vertical stresses on horizontal planes, is
r,O = Polar co-ordinates generally used. The method provides a two-dimen-
9,0e = Radial and tangential normal stresses in sional solution and idealizes the dam as composed of
polar co-ordinates a number of vertical elements, each of which carries its
load to the foundation without any transfer of the load
7, = Shear stress in polar co-ordinates to adjacent vertical elements. The shear stress distribu-
CT
x = Normal stress on vertical plane tion is parabolic and horizontal stress distribution is
CT, = Normal stress on horizontal plane cubic. This method is used to determine, for each
loading combination ( see IS 65 12 : 1984 ), the normal
0,“. Q = Normal stress on horizontal plane at the stresses on horizontal and vertical planes. The details
upstream/downstream face of the dam (cal- of the method are given in Annex A.
culated by stability analysis at the level of
consideration ) 6.4 Stress Distribution Around Openings
7*u ZZ Shear stress on xy plane at the upstream Distribution of stress field due to opening is generally
face of dam determined by one of the following methods.
‘Iti = Shear stress on xy plane at the downstream
face of dam 6.4.1 Theory of Elasticity
P, = Pressure (water + silt, if any )at the u/s face Where a closed form analytical solution is available it
of dam at the level of consideration may be used for analysis.
Pd = Pressure (water + silt, if any)at the d/s face
of dam at the level of consideration 6.4.1.1 Circular openings
T = Total base width of the dam at the level of For a circular hole of radius ‘rO’ in an infinite plate
consideration subjected to uniform uniaxial stress ( p ) in the vertical
X = Distance of centre of gallery from toe direction, using polar co-ordinates ( r, 8 ), the stress
coefficients are given by :
cp = Total horizontal force at the level of con-
sideration
cw = Total vertical force at the level of con-
sidemtion
CM = Total moment about c.g. of the Section of
the base of dam i.e. middle of the Section ; = $+)-;(l+ F) cos28
assuming the dam base as 1 m wide strip.
5 MATERIALS
5.1 Concrete
Plain and reinforced concrete shall conform to where 8 = angle from the crown as shown in Fig. 2. At
IS 456 : 1978. Mass concrete shall conform to a distance of ( \/3 - 1) r from the crown the tensile
IS 457 : 1957, stress reduces to zero and then charges to compressive.
If the distance is approximately assumed as O-5rOand
5.2 Masonry stress distribution taken as linear, total tension at top
Stone masonry shall conform to IS 8605 : 1977. and bottom works out to approximately 025 pro for
which reinforcement shall be provided in the absence
6 BASIS OF DESIGN of more detailed analysis,
6.1 Openings in structure develop a discontinuity in Along the contour the normal stress coefficient is
the stress field and may develop zones of tensile stress given by:
and high compressive stress and in general weaken the (33
structure. Reinforcement, has, therefore, to be pro- - = (1 - 2 cos 20)
vided in many cases. P
IS 12966 ( Part 2 ) : 1990
RESERVOIR
WATER LEVEL v _
t-z-- =: = =A_ -----_ == 3
-_--__ _fT--L---
1 I
1A VERTICAL CROSS SECTION
ml Poxz-l+
=YX Y MOMENTS
19 HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTION
FIG.1 FOR THE FORCESACHNGON THE DAM SECTION

SIGN CONVENTION
6.4.1.2 Elliptic openings 6.4.2 Stress Coefficients

For elliptic opening with major and minor axes 2a and Stress coefficient for rectangular openings of various
2b, in a plate, subjected to uniform uniaxial stress field width and height ratio, for normal stress perpendicular
(p) tangential stress coefficient along the contour is to the centre line of opening, due to uniform stress
given by: fields parallel to or perpendicular to the line, can be
obtained from the curves given in Fig, 3 and 4.
(J, sin28 + 2Ksin20 - Kz cos2c)
-_= where K = a
P sin26 + Kz cos20 b 6.4.3 Photoelastic Method
For 8 = 0, 5 = 1 and for 8 = ’ For more complex forms and load conditions photo-
P elastic method is preferred. Numerous applications of
photoelastic method have been made in the design of
various types of openings required in Civil, Mechani-
cal and Aeronautical structures. Using photoelastic
method extensive work has been done to obtain stress
distribution around openings of various shapes such
as square, :ectangular with semi-circular roof and
rectangular.
The data is available for the following cases :
1. Openings in uniform uniaxial compressive stress
field.
2. Openings in uniform bi-axial stress field.
3. Square openings close to a free boundary.
6.4.4 Finite Element Method

c
FIG. 2 STRESSES
INCIRCULAR
OPENINGI
DUETO Finite element method has been used for obta:ning
UNIFORM
UNIAXIAL
STRESS elastic-plastic analysis of openings. This method is
3
IS 12966 (Part 2) : 1990
particularly useful in investigation of the behaviour of c>Concrete is assumed to behave as a linear and
openings in non-linear range and to study the propaga- elastic material. Tension upto the values permitted .
tion of cracks near the openings. in IS 6512 : 1984 may be allowed. Gallery rein-
forcement is required if tension exceeds these per-
missible values; and
4 Total tensile force is taken by steel reinforcement.
9 PERMISSIBLE STRESSES
9.1 The permissible stresses for reinforcement shall
be taken in accordance with the relevant standards.
I
10 DESIGN OF REINFORCEMENT
10.1 The following design procedure will apply to
both concrete and masonry dams. In case of masonry
dams, a portion around an opening which is rein-
forced is .constructed in concrete. The thickness of
concrete around vertical openings like air vents is
generally 300 mm. For other opening, the thickness
varies from 750 mm to 1 500 mm. The design proce-
dure will be identical with that for a concrete dam; the
assumption is that the masonry and concrete behave as
one mass.
10.2 The procedure for the design of reinforcement
will be as follows:
D/A
a) Locate the centre of the opening on a cross-section
of the dam;
NOTE - For design purposes the normal stress on rhe centerline
parallel to the stress field direction may be considered to be indc- b) Determine prevalent stress field in the dam sec-
pendent of B. For ox 7 0 the tensile area = 0’149 A. (T” is the tion at that location in the absence of the opening
normal stress perpendicular to Y-axis. D is the distance from the ( SEC6.3 )
boundary of the opening along the Y-axis.
FIG. 3 CURVE FOR STRESSCOEFFKIEWS FOR F&TAN- c) Determine the stress distribution along the plane
GULAR OPENING DUE ro UNFORM STRESS FIELD considered for design subjected to uniform stress
PERPENDICULAR TO THE LINE UNDER CONSIDERATION field arrived at in (b) above ( see 6.4 );
d) Compute the total tensile force across the plane
7 LOADING CONDITIONS
considered for design ( see 10.3 );
7.1 Critical Loads e) Compute area of steel reinforcement required
( see 10.4 );
The important loads that are to be considered for the
determination of overall stress field are dead load, f) Details of the reinforcement ( see 10.5 ).
reservoir and tail-water loads, earthquake forces, uplift
pressure, earth and silt pressure, ice-pressure, wind 10.3 Computation of Total Tension
pressure and wave pressure. Designs should be based
The total tension is determined by integrating the area
on the most adverse combination of probable load under tension along a particular section.
conditions and include those loads having a reasonable
probability of simultaneously occurrence. The gallarics 10.4 Computation of Area of Steel Reinforcement
and other openings in gravity dams shall be designed
for the load combination listed in IS 65 12 : 1984, Load After obtaining the total tension for section under
combination B, C, E, F and G, shall, however, be consideration for the opening, for the critical loading
analysed without uplift. condition, the area of steel is calculated by dividing the
total tension (F ) by allowable stress (o,,) that is
7.2 Typical planes considered for analysis - For some
simplified cases critical loads and sections are indi-
cated in Table 1.
8 ASSUMPTIONS IN DESIGN
10.5 Detailing of Reinforcement
8.1 Following assumptions have been made in carry-
ing out the design: Typical reinforcement details are shown in Fig. 5.
The reinforcement bars must be straight as far as possi-
a) The minimum distance of the boundary from the ble and enchored in a zone of compressive stress. The
face of opening is two and half the width of the bars will generally be put up horiiontally above the
opening; roof of the gallery and vertically on the sides. Diagonal
b) The problem is treated as plane stress problem; bars are necessary at the corners. The spacing of bars
4
IS 12966 ( Part 2 ) : 1990
100 t
04 O-6 O-6 1-O l-2 1-L l-6 l-6 2.0 2-2 2.4
0/A
NOTE - am is the normal stress perpen&cular to Y-axis. D is the distance from the boundary of the opening along the Y-axis.
FIG. 4 CURVE
FORSTRESS
COEFFICIENTS
FORRECTANGULAR DUE TOUNIFORM
OPENING TO
STRESSFIELDPARALLEL
THELINEUNDERCONSIDERATION
Table 1 Critical Loads and Sections
Type of Critical LoadingConditionfor Opening Planes

Openings Locatedat Considered for
Analysis
/ \
u/s Third Middle Third d/s Third
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Longitudinal Reservoir Reservoir empty Reservoir full Vertical section perpen
empty or full dicular to the longitu-
dinal axis of dam
Vertical Reservoir full Reservoir full do Horizontal section

through the opening
Transverse Reservoir Reservoir empty do Vertical section parallel

empty or full to longitudinal axis of
dam
-.%.A-.-.- -_-_
IS 12966 ( Part 2 ) : 1990
generally should not be less than 15 cm centre to centre between these openings should be more than two times
and not greater than 30 cm. The minimum clear cover the width of opening. The average compression on the
shall be 15 cm for the reinforcement. The minimum unbroken portions of a horizontal section containing
diameter of reinforcement bars shall be 16 mm for these openings is equal to the total force on this
main reinforcement and 12 mm for distribution. Other section, divided by the net area. The distribution of this
details of reinforcement must follow IS 456 : 1978. stress is unknown. A safe design should result if the
average compression does not exceed the allowable
10.6 Relaxation in Design Criteria compressive stress and if reinforcement is provided as
for a single opening.
Any change in the reinforcement around galleries as
computed by the procedure indicated in 10.2 above 11.2.1 If the clear space between two openings is less
can be made if indicated otherwise through the stud- than twice the width of openings, the horizontal rein-
ies carried out by finite element and/or photoelastic forcement shall be made continuous. Such close spac-
methods. ing should be avoided as far as possible. For high dams,
with high working compressive stresses the widest
11 SPECIAL CASES practicable spacing of openings should be adopted.
11.1 Opening Close to Surface
11.3 Three-Dimensional Openings, Intersections,
In some cases, openings may have to be provided close etc
to the face of the dam or near the face of a block. In
such cases, the results obtained for normal openings At the intersection of two or more openings, the state
discussed above are not applicable. Photoelastic method of stress is three-dimensional and the two dimensional
or finite element method should be used to obtain procedure described above is not applicable. For a
stress fields in such cases. detailed analysis, three-dimensional investigations
should be carried out. However, for gallery intersec-.
11.2 Multiple Openings tion, it should be generally adequate to double the
main reinforcement provided at top and bottom on all
It is frequently necessary to provide a number of the sides of intersection for a distance equal to the
separate outlets through a dam. In a series of such width of the gallery. A typical arrangement at gallery
openings in a single horizontal plane, the clear spacing intersection is illustrated in Fig. 6.
/
aa
sk
FIG. 5 TYPICAL
REINFORCEMENT
PLACEMENT
POSITION
AROUND
A RECTANGULAR
GALLERY
.
IS 12966 ( Part 2 ) : 1990
04
FOR REINFORCEMENT
DETAIL SEE FIG. X-X
D-D
LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT OF MAIN

A
II 14 I II GALLERY
r-l
r MAIN REINFORCEMENT
X-GALLERY
OF
T B
I
B L LONGITUDINAL REINFORCE MEN1
1 OF X-GALLERY
L X-GALLERY
IIr II I I+ I
- LONGITUDINAL GALLERY
II Il.1 II
L MAIN REINFORCEMENT 9
OF MAIN GALLERY
DETAIL X-X
NOTE - Double
tbemain reinforcement at top and bottom of gallery in the zone abed, B is width of gallery.
FE. 6 TYPICAL
F~EI~ORCEMENT
PLACEMENT
POSITION
FORT JUN~IONFORF~EC~ANGULAR
GALLERIES
7
IS 12966 ( Part 2 ) : 1990
ANNEX A
(Clause 6.3.1)
APPROXIMATE ANALYTICAL METHOD
4
1
The overall stress field ox and oY in the dam Section
along a line passing through the centre of opening for XYU +- 'xyd
T2
various conditions as stipulated is IS -65 12 : 1984 is
calculated as under: 6 a 4 a
- -cp_- d, __ _Txyd
T2 ay T a y a” T ay
i) Normal Stress (3Y
6
1
oy = a + bx a5
_= -
XY* +- 'xyd
aY T3
where, a = Oy.3
6 3 a
+- + - T2 -ay 'xyd
b = Oyli- Oyd T3 ay T2 ay xyU
T
ii) Shear Stress 7xy, 5yx Where,
‘5 =7 = a, + b,x + c,x2 aT
YX - = tan@” + tan+,
whersy
ay
‘1 = 'Sxyd
b, = -$ 3+ + zxyu + 2'xyd ,” = - (P, -P,)

>
3 a
c1 = 2. q + TsxY”
+ ltxyd = tan@” (ro* -
-T >
zXYU = - (oyll- P,) tan@,
a a
‘5 =
@yd - pd>tanod
vd ay ‘vd = tan+, ( -oyd - ro*) + ’ tan@d$d- Pd)
ay ay
iii) Normal Stress ox
a
(T= = a2 + b,x + czx2 + d,x3 = rc +k, tan$y+k2tan$d + :ZP
2
where,
= aI tan+d +Pd
a
a2
ay % = r, + k3 tanQU+ k, tan@, -- : CP
b, = b, tan ed + -
aa, 2
ay k, = 4 p,- G2ZW -F3 CM

.l ab
C2
= cl tan f$, + - ___!
2 ay 12
k, =;2ZW-+pd-- CM
i ac T3
d2=---r
3 ay
aa ab ac k, =-$iN+~2L’W-+,
The terms 1 ,$- --A are calculatedBs below:
ay ay JY
k, = -+I4 -f ZW +;p,
NOTE -- Refer Fig. 1 for reference .
* To be omitted if no tail wata

Standard Mark
producer. Standard marked products are also continuously checked by BIS for conformity
to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the
use of the Standard Mark may be granted to manufacturers or producers may be obtained
Copyright
any form without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use, in the
designations. Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director (Publications ). BIS.
Indian Standards are reviewed periodically and revised, when necessary and amendments, if any, are
issued from time to time. Users of Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in possession of
the latest amendments or edition. Comments on this Indian Standard may be sent to BIS giving the
Dot : No. RVD 9 ( 2764)
Headquarters:

Telephones : 331 01 31. 331 13 75 Telegrams : Manaksanstha
Central : Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg ( 331 01

1375
31
NEW DELHI 110002
Eastern : l/l4 C. I. T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Maniktola 37 86 62

CALCUTTA 700054
Southern : C. I. T. Campus. IV Cross Road, MADRAS 600113 41 29 16
Western : RiIanakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol. Andheri ( East ) 6 32 92 95

BOMBAY 400093
Branches : AHMADABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHIJBANESHWAR. COIMBATORE.

FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR
PATNA. SRINAGAR. ,THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
Printed at Printrade, New Delhi, India

-- _.
IS 13195: 1991
( Reaffirmed 2004 )
Indian Standard
PRELIMINARYDESIGN,OPERATIONAND
MAINTENANCEOFPROTECTION WORKS
DOWNSTREAMOFSPILLWAYS-GUIDELINES
U DC 627’83 1’064’2
@ BIS 1991

NEW DELHI 110002
December 199 1 Price Group 5

FOREWORD
This Indian Standard was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized by
the Spillways Including Energy Dissipators Sectional Committee had been approved by River
Valley Division Council.
protection works are necessary on downstream side of spillway so as to guard against expected or
observed scour occurring in the immediate downstream vicinity of the spillway.
At present specific methods are not avr)ilable and such works are being done based on experience.
As such works have been adopted In many projects therefore an attempt has been made to
formulate these guidelines based on these projects. Nine case studies* have been given ia this
standard ( see Annexes A to J ) which are for general guidance and information only.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with the
final value, observed or calculated, expressing. the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off
in accordance with IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised )‘. The number
of significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified
*Greater details supported by figure for any of the case study be obtained from Central Water and Power
Research Station, Pune.
IS 13195 : 1991
Indiun Standard
I PRELIMINARYDESIGN,OPERATIONAND
MAINTENANCEOFPROTECTIONWORKS
DOWNSTREAMOFSPILLWAYS-GUIDELINES
1 SCOPE a concrete apron on such a recovery slope also
for protection.
This standard lays down guidelines for
preliminary design, operation and maintenance 4.3 Concrete Blocks or Concrete Filling on
of protection works downstream of spillways. River Bed Downstream of Energy Dissipator
Concrete blocks or concrete fillings are
2 REFERENCES sometimes provided on the river bed downstream
The following Indian Standards are necessary of energy dissipators to safeguard against
.adjuncts to this standard: excessive scour and prevent further scour.
4.4 Protective Pitchings on Natural or Artificial
IS No. Title Banks Downstream of Spillways
4th:; Part 9 ) : Glossary of terms relating Protective pitchings of stone rip rap, masonry or
to river valley projects : concrete blocks are provided on natural river
Part 9 Spillways and syphons banks or artificially constructed embankments
(first revision ) of diversion channels, power house tail race
7365 : 1985 Criteria for hydraulic design channels or guide banks, for protecting them
of bucket type energy against high velocity flows or waves.
dissipators ( first revision )
4.5 Figure 1 shows different types of protection
12720 : 1989 Criteria for structural design works downstream of a typical spillway project.
of spillway training walls ( also refer IS 7365 : 1985 ). -
and divide walls
5 PRELIMINARY DESIGN
.3 TERMINOLOGY CONSIDERATIONS FOR PROTECTION
~WORKS
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions
given in IS 4410 ( Part 9 ) : 1982 shall apply. 5.1 No definite and fast criterion can be fixed
for the design of protection works such as those
4 TYPES OF PROTECTION WORKS mentioned in 4.1 to 4.4 above. The recent
DOWNSTREAM OF SPILLWAYS design practices are based on past experience
from the structures constructed and in opera-
4.0 The following types of protection works
tion. In view of this, only broad guidelines are
downstream of the spillways have been covered.
given for general design.
4.1 Training Walls at the Flanks of the
5.2 Training Walls
:Spillways
5.2.1 The design of a training wall ( also refer
Training walls extended beyond the endsill of IS 12720 : 1989 ) involves determination of :
the stilling basins or buckets generally serve to
guide the flow into the river channel, protect a) alignment,
the wrap-rounds of the adjacent earth dams, b) length,
river banks or power house bays and tail race c) top level,
channels. To this extent, the training walls are
-considered to be downstream protection works. d) pressure distribution, and
e) foundation level.
.4,2 Protective Aprons Downstream of Bocket 5.2.1.1 The alignment and length are governed
Lips or Endstills of Stilling Basins by the purpose for which the training walls is
Protective aprons of concrete laid on fresh rock to be provided. For instance, a training wall
or acceptable strata immediately downstream of intended to protect the earth dam wrap-round
bucket lips or endsill of stilling basin, protect on the flank of a spillway direct or return may
the energy dissipator against undermining due be alleged as to cover the portion exposed to
to excessive scour during or after construction the high velocity flow. Similarly, the alignment
of the spillways. A suitable concrete key is of a training wall for protecting the power
normally provided, at the downstream end of house bay or power house tail race channel may
the apron. Where the normal river bed level is be governed by the configuration of the bay or
higher than the endsill and a recovery slope is tail race channel alignment. In the case of
, provided, it sometimes becomes necessary to lay spillways with ski-jump bucket, when the
PROTECTION WITH CONCRETE BLOCK
FIIJJNG OR OTHER TREATMENT
RIGHT TR. WALL
FIG. 1 DIFFERENTTYPESOF PROTECTION

WORKSDOWNSTREAMOF A TYPICAL SPILLWAYPROJECT
training walls are extended beyond the bucket profile or some portion of it, could be decided
lip, recession or flaring away from the flow after considering such factors as the nature of
could be advantageous as their heights could be rock forming the foundation, frequency and
reduced because of isolation from the ski-jump duration of floods, initial cost of construction
umbrella. This arrangement also facilitates and future maintenance cost, etc. When model
better aeration of the ski-jump jet. studies have not been carried out the anticipated
ultimate scour can be predicted as given in
5.2.1.2 Since the training walls are seldom IS 7365 : -1985.
designed to be submersible, their top levels have
to be above the highest water level expected 5.3 Protective Aprons
after allowing for the adequate free board
considering the air entrainment and bulking of 5.3.1 Protective aprons of cancrete laid on fresh
Bow. rock immediately downstream of the bucket
lips or endsills of the stilling-basins serve two
5.2.1.3 The foundation levels of the training purposes, namely :
walls should be based on the scour profiles
obtained from the hydraulic model studies. a) During construction stages of the
Whether the foundation levels should extend spillways, flows of large discharge
up to the full depths indicated by the scour intensity and lower heads pass down the
2
IS 13195: 1991
spillways resulting in cascading action to prevent further scouring, has been attempted
over the bucket lip or endsill. This in some cases. The details of such protection
situation causes deep scour at the toe of including size of blocks, method of dumping,
the lip or endsill and undermines their filter requirement, etc, have to be decided on
foundations. Concrete apron laid just the merits of the individual case.
downstream of the lip or endsill prevents
such scour and protects the foundation, 5.5 Protective Pitchings
and
5.5.1 Natural river banks or artificially con-
Even after the completion of the spillway,
b) structed slopes of the embankments, guide
in the case where the bucket lip or end banks, etc, subjected to flow velocities and waves
sill of the stilling basin is substantially require some form of protection to retain their
higher than the general channel bed level, shape and prevent their erosion or dislodgement.
and the~channel bed is erodible, low initial Such protection is usually in the form of pitch-
flows may have a tendency to cascade ing, which can be either flat stone or needle rip
over the lips or endsills. As such, pro- rap, masonry lining or concrete lining. The type
vision of concrete aprons guards against of the pitching to be provided and other details
deep scour just at the toe. Even in long would depend on several factors such as magni-
run, when scour has stabilized in the tude of velocities or wave height to be with-
downstream region, the concrete apron stood, slope of the bank, properties of the
continues to protect the toe foundations. material such as angle of repose, chemical com-
It also serves as. a signal to indicate the position, etc, and the extent of surface to be
state of scour in the immediate down- protected. The type of the pitching to be
stream vicinity of a structure and allows provided may also be governed by the availabi-
necessary remedial measures to be taken. lity of pitching material. As -for example,
concrete lining might be preferred to stone
53.2 While no definite criteria for the design masonry pitching because of non-availability of
of such aprons are available at present, the large size stones, in a particular situation. The
following guidelines should be followed: stone pitching can be with wire net caging also,
depending on the site requirements. The design
5.3.2.1 The apron should be laid on fresh rock velocity or wave height should be determined
.or acceptable strata. _
from hydraulic model studies.
5.3.2.2 It should be about 15 to 20 metres long 5.5.2 The following guidelines may be followed
and be laid continuously fron one end of the while designing the protective pitching.
spillway up to the other end. Its thickness is
generally of the order of 0’6 to 1’5 metres. In 5.5.2.1 The bank or the surface to be protected
case where model studies have done, the apron should have, as far as possible, straight aligu-
lengths and depth can be arrived at based upon ment or smoothest possible curves as against
the results emerging from the model studies, highly curved or tortous alignment. This would
particularly for the parametric studies conducted ensure better performance of the pitching.
.on the model from different out flow, and
combination of operations where two or more 5.5.2.2 The slope of the bank to be pitched
types of energy dissipators arrangements should be flatter than the angle of repose of the
coexist. material forming the bank, otherwise the
material retained at a steeper slope would exert
.5.3.2.3 The apron should be properly anchored outward force on the pitching to disrupt it.
into the base rock and should be provided with For very large heights, intermediate berms may
a key at the end, which should be suitably keyed also be provided.
into the base rock.
5.5.2.3 When the pitching is in the form of
5.3.2.4 When the fresh rock level or acceptable layers of hand placed or dumped dry stones, the
strata varies in elevation from one end to the weight and size of individual stone should be
other end ofthe spillway, the apron level could determined from the following relationships,
.also vary accordingly. However, in such cases, due to Isbash.
the apron be placed at least 1 to 1.5 metres ?t V’ YW3 yp
below the bucket lip or endsill top, and not WC50 = (0
6a~;(2d3(~~ - Ywj3
higher than this limit ( also refer IS 7365 :
1985 ).
(2)
5.4 Concrete Blocks or Concrete Filling
where
5.4.1 When excessive scour on the downstream W&O= weight of the stone in kg, with
.of energy dissipator has already taken place and 50 percent material containing stones
there is a risk of such scour progressing towards of weight WSOor less
upstream endangering the safety of the structure,
V = velocity of flow, m/s
filling the rock joints and cavities in the scour
hole with concrete; providing grouted anchors yw = specific weight of water, 1 000 kg/m3
3
IS 13195 : 1991
YP = specific weight of pitching material, V = velocity of flow

kglm3 g = gravitational constant
C = 0’86 for high turbulence level flows S = slope of the bank expressed as S
( stilling basins, etc ) ( Horizontal > : 1 Vertical
= 1’2 for low turbulence level flows
( river closures, etc ) 4 Knowing the volume of the panel and
thickness of the lining, the linear dimen-
& = equivalent spherical diameter of stone sions ( i.e. size ) of the panel could be
having the same weight as W,O worked out. This size may be proportion-
5.5.2.4 If the embankment is subjected to waves ed to the overall size of the area to be
in addition to flow velocity, the weight of the pitched.
stone should also be checked from the following
relationship due to Iribarren. 5.5.2.8 The toe of the pitching should be keyed
down firmly into the bed rock. The depth of
K * P keying would depend upon the quality of bed
w = ( p cos a - sin a )a * 8~ 1 _
(3) rock and the overburden. Where bed rock is
--
6W
CH8) not available at all or available at very large
where depth, the pitching should continue into the
ground, along the same slope, adequately below
K = constant whose value is 0’43 the expected depth of scour, which should be
P = constant with a value of 2’38 determined from the model studies.
6P = density of pitching material
5.5.2.9 For all types of pitching, adequate
H = wave height drainage to relieve the uplift pressure below the
u = angle of slope of embankment pitching, by way of weep holes, filters, etc,
6W = density of water
should be provided, as per the relevant Indian
Standards Specifications.
5.5.2.5 The larger of the two values of Was
calculated from equations (1) and (3) should be 5.6 In several cases, the spillways are located in
adopted. saddles away from the main river channels.
The flow passed down the spillway is then led
5.5.2.6 For high velocities, when the weight to the main river through an excavated channel
required of the individual stone is too large, wire called the tail channel. For reason of economy,
net tied crates of several stones, of the required the tail channels are excavated only for their
weight and size could be used. In such a case, part width under the assumption that it will form
the least dimension of the smallest stone used its required section by erosion in due course of
should be about two times the opening in the time. For this reason, permanent protection
wire net. measures are deferred initially until the prototype
behaviour of the tail channel is known during
5.5.2.7 When the weight required is extremely
subsequent periods. While in most cases, this
large, so that it could not be met with from
approach is successful, in some cases, the tail
stones or stone-crates, continuous lining of the
channels have behaved unexpectedly leading to
surface by masonry or concrete could be resort-
unforeseen damages.
ed to. For such linings, there are two important
factors to be decided, the size of the individual 6 ASPECTS OF OPERATION AND
panel ( to be cast as a monolith ) and the MAINTENANCE
thickness of the lining. The following procedure
should be adopted: 6.1 The spillway or outlets should not be
a) Using the appropriate relationships operated in contravention to the assumptions
( see 5.5.2.3 and 5.5.2.4 > decide the made in the design of various protection works.
weight of the panel required~against the 6.2 The performance of the protection works
velocity of the flow. should be observed during floods for the general
b) Using appropriate value of the specific flow conditions. Important parameters such as
weight of the pitching material TP, ( stone water levels, velocities, wave wash, erosion, etc,
masonry or concrete >, calculate volume should be measured at all relevant locations and
of the panel. the records maintained.
c) Calculate the thickness of the lining using 6.3 All the maintenance procedures as applicable
the formulae to the ci-vil engineering hydraulic construction
V* works also apply to the protection works
d-:
where
.2g
J 1 + s=
S
(4) described above and should be followed.
6.4 The behaviour of the protection works
d -3 thickness of the lining normally remaining under water should be
watched by special dewatering operations, at-
rw = specific weight of water least once after three spill years and repairs
?P = specific weight of the pitching required, if any, should be executed well in
material time.
c
IS 13195: 1991
ANNEX A
( Foreword )
CASE STUDY ON THE BEHAVIOUR OF THE RIGHT TRAINING WALLS DOWNSTREAM

OF SKI-JUMP BUCKETS, OF UKAI AND GANDHISAGAR DAM SPILLWAYS
A 1 While the results of model studies can be A-3 In the case of right training wall of Ukai
directly applied to finalize the design of training dam spillway, the foundation levels were based
walls on the flanks of the spillways, in respect of on the assumption by the project authorities:that
alignment, length, top levels, etc, decision in the depth of scour in the prototype may reach,
respect of foundation levels often pose a pro- at the most, up to about 50 percent of the
blem. Model studies generally indicates deep depth indicated by the model. While the main
scour along the training walls and because of the foundation levels were taken to the hard and
impracticability of taking foundation- to such fresh rock levels, continuous concrete key wall
depths, the training walls are usually founded below the main foundation was taken down to
on fresh and hard rock, keying or anchoring 50 percent scour profile. It is striking to note
adequately into the rock. A possibility of that undermining occurred only in this reach,
undermining, in due course of time, is not endangering the stability of the inherently weak
altogether ruled out, but a judicious operation part of the wall. The damaged portion has since
of spillway especially not operating the spans/ been filled by a concrete pedestal.
sluices adjacent to the training walls often A-4 The problem of determining the foundation
delays it. levels of training wall, thus appears to be of
taking a calculated risk. The decision often
A-2 The right training wall at Gandhisagar reduces either in providing foundation against
Spillway separates the spillway and the power- an anticipated depth of scour ( and thus high
house. The wall constructed in masonry was initial cost ) or keeping it to the available rock
founded on hard and fresh rock at a uniform level and remedial measures as and when
level of el. 339’85 m, although the deepest scour required in future ( thus recurring maintenance
indicated by the model was at el. 326’1 m. expenditure ).
ANNEX B
( Foreword )
CASE STUDY ON THE PROTECTIVE APRONS DOWNSTREAM OF THE SKI-JUMP

BUCKETS OF UKAI, SALAL AND SRISAILAM DAM SPILLWAYS
B-l Since the ski-jump buckets are intended to of the spillway ( leaving some portion without
deflect the high velocity jet away from the concrete capping >, the damage is two folds;
structure and restrict the scour to the zone of deep scour occurs on the unprotected portion
impact of the jet, possibility of scour working endangering the foundation of the main struc-
back upwards is remote. However, for the ture and the apron already laid also gets dis-
partly completed spillways with low heads the lodged due to such scour. The cases of Salal
throw of the trajectory would be relatively and Srisailam dam spillways serve as ideal
shorter and scour may occur very near the examples.
bucket lip. Even for the fully completed spill-
ways, operation of a few spans or undersluices B-3 In 1982 construction stage of Salal dam
in isolation would cause the flow to be spread spillway, the height of fall from the lowest
laterally with the impingement near the bucket block of the spillway up to the downstream rock
lip. Such a condition caused deep scour and level was about 17 metres. The effective head
undermining at the bucket lip of Hirakud spill- was 25 metres. During the construction season,
way. Deep scour near the bucket lip also concrete apron was proposed to be provided
occurred on the Gandhisagar spillway. In the over the jointed dolomite rock for the entire
case of Ukai dam spillway, the possibility of length of the spillway. However, due to in-
deeper scour near the bucket lip was visualized sufficient time, only part central length could be
during the model studies and was taken care of fully covered, where as at other place, the apron
in the prototype by provision of a 15 metre long concrete had begun to be laid from its down-
concrete apron laid on fresh rock parallel to the stream end and left uncompleted.
bucket lip. The apron has remained intact and
B-4 During the floods of 1982, the maximum
served its purpose. intensity of discharge over the partially com-
B-2 When such aprons are not laid on fresh pleted spillway was around 47 cumecs/metre.
rock or are not provided along the entire length The zones where the b:d rock was covered with
5
IS 13195: 1991
concrete apron duly anchored to the bed rock, undermining. By April 1985, depth of scour
no scour took place. Scour occurred only at below blocks 11 to 13 reached from 9 m to
places, where the rock could not be covered with 22 m below the protective apron. Cavities of
~concrete apron. At certain places, the unrein- undermining below the apron were also present
forced concrete apron remained overhanging at a depth of 6 to 9 m.
up to about 3 metres over the undercut.
B-8 The protection work consisted of providing
B-5 Srisailam dam spillway across river Krishna, an underwater massive concrete block touching
was constructed during 1977-83. It is a 137 m the apron and filling the eroded cavities below
high concrete dam, with 12 spans of 18’3 m x the apron. The water level at downstream toe
16’8 m. The river bed is composed of quartzites varied from the top of existing apron to about ,
and shales. In the immediate downstream 1’5 m below it.
vicinity of the spillway, there were horizontal
B-9 The scheme involved forming 4 cells with
shear zones 0’2 m to 0’9 m thick, where the
steel cylinder walls and filling concrete in each
quartzites are crushed and sheared.
cell followed by concrete capping. Heavy
B-G During the monsoons of 1977 to 1980, the concrete blocks ( approximate 1 metre cube )
construction stage flood passed over the partially were placed downstream of the cylinder watls
constructed spillway bays, spilling over ? bays to further protect the rock from the water jump
Which were at different levels having a maximum damage.
difference of level of 23 m. The difference in
level between the lip of the ski-jump bucket and B-10 Since the construction of the above
downstream rock was about 44 m. protection works, the spillway was completed to
final levels and crest gates have also been instal-
B-7 Shorter throw of the water spilling over the led. Hydraulic model studies were conducted
bucket lip, as a cascading flow caused deep to evolve an operation of the spillway in such
scour in the immediate vicinity of the bucket a way that the throw of the trajectory fall
lip. During subsequent floods, the scour holes further away from the to-e of the dam. This
were concreted and leveled as protective aprons together with the protective measures already
in some part of the spillway. Such aprons were implemented is expected to prevent further
however, subjected to repeated damage and erosion at the toe of the dam.
ANNEX C
( IioF~lW’d )
CASE STUDY ON PROTECTION DOWNSTREAM OF_MANDIRA DAM SPILLWAY

WITH CONCRETE CUBES
C-l The Mandira dam spillway consists of the entire length of the spillway and extending
11 spans, 15’24 m wide X 6’1 m high separated to about 33 m beyond the bucket. These blocks
by 2’74 m thick piers, across river Sankh in were meant to form a flexible protection to
Orissa State. The spillway is designed to pass the bed.
a maximum discharge of 8 495 ms/s. To lead
the discharge to the main river, a tail channel of C-3 It was observed during the subsequent
about 183 m length was excavated. Due to floods, that the protection was not fully effective
peculiar nature of foundation conditions (highly as due to action of flow, issuing from the ski-
jointed carbonaceous phylites ) and the schedule jump bucket, the bed material between the
of construction programme, the spillway profile blocks was removed leading to uneven settlement
adopted for construction was in two steps, of blocks to depths varying from 1 to 5 metres.
incorporating a short slopping apron 12’2 m This measure of protection had been adopted as
lower than the crest followed by a weir with an urgent measure without model studies.
uniform radius ski-jump bucket at the toe.
C-2 During the year 1958 to 1962, discharge C-4 Later, the model studies were undertaken to
varying from 680 m3/s to 4 700 mVs passed down suggest the bes_t form of protection. The
the spillway. The tail channel development recommendations made on the basis of the
took place with considerable scour in the bed model studies including placing of a concrete
immediately downstream of the spillway. The mat, of 0’46 m thickness, enclosing the concrete
deepest scour level reached was el. 184’7 m at cubes to a length of about 15 metres and
15’2 m from the bucket. The sheet piles below grouting the interstices between the blocks. The
the endsill of the bucket were also exposed. To surface of such mat was to slope gently away
protect the bucket foundation ( approximate el. from the bucket. The blocks already placed
187’5 m ) and the exposed sheet piles, a concrete beyond the concrete mat were allowed to
sloping ramp was placed adjacent to the sheet remain. The question of extending the concrete
piles. In addition, concrete cubical blocks of mat further downstream was kept open till
1% m size constructed in situ were placed along further prototype experience became available.
6
IS 13195 : 1991
ANNEX D
( Foreword )
CASE STUDY ON PROTECTION DOWNSTREAM OF UKAI DAM SPILLWAY
AD-1 The Ukai dam spillway, across river Tapi, needed immediate protection.
consists of 22 spans, 15’55 m X 14.71 m each,
separated by 3’96 m thick piers. The crest is at D-5 The protection provided before the
el. 91’13 m, the FRL being el. 105’16 m. monsoon of 1981 consisted of:
The energy dissipator comprises a ski-jump
i> Filling the crevices up to 75 mm width
bucket at a uniform level of el. 51’82 m and lip with rich cement mortar 1 : 3 after
level of el. 58’22 m. The 15 m wide protective cleaning. Grouting and compaction of
apron downstream of the bucket lip has been cement mortar was done as deep as
provided at different levels to cover the rock possible.
profile. The bed rock downstream of- the
bucket comprise massive basalts, porphyritic ii) Sealing the big hollows and cavities in
trap and amygdaloidal trap. the exposed rock surfaces with masonry
and with rich cement mortar 1 : 3.
D-2 The hydraulic model studies indicated for
the design flow, deep scour holes reaching el. iii) Guaniting treatment to the exposed rock
27 m in the trajectory impact area, about 100 m joints in the ski-jump area.
from the bucket lip. It was recommended that
all the spillway gates may be operated equally iv) Extension of apron near the right side
and simultaneously, as far as possible. training wall to cover the scoured area.
D-3 During 1973 to 1979; discharge varying v) Covering with mass concrete 1 : 1’5 : 3
from 220 m3/s to 7 533 ma/s passed down the with anchor bars 25 mm to 28 mm
~spillway. The gates were however operated in diameter over the right side gullies I and
a manner which was contrary to the require- II, which were considered to be the most
ment of equal and simultaneous operation of all vulnerable points, where the scour was
gates, with the result that discharge much lower seen approaching towards the spillway.
than the design discharge resulted in very high
vi) Concrete filling with anchor rods in other
intensity of discharge with very low tail water areas of deep scours.
levels. This condition, in addition to causing
deep scour in the impact zone, also induced
return flows which caused damage to the found- D-6 The above measures are expected to arrest
ations of training walls and concrete aprons. further scour in the downstream area. In addi-
tion, a revised pattern of operation of crest
D-4 The entire downstream area was dewatered gates was evolved whereby return flows could
in 1981 for inspections and repairs. It was be minimized. This pattern involves equal and
seen that the deepest scour level had gone below simultaneous opening of 17 central gates with
the level indicated from the model studies using gates 1 and 2 on left, 10 in the centre and 21
fully erodible bed material. There were at least and 22 on the right side to be opened slighlty
five areas in the downstream region, which so as to arrest the return flow.
ANNEX E
( Foreword )
CASE STUDY ON PROTECTION DOWNSTREAM OF KADANA DAM SPILLWAY
E-l The Kadana dam spillway, across river metamorphosed rocks comprise phyllites, mica
Mahi, consists of 21 spans, 15’55 m wide schists and quartzites.
X 14’03 each, separated by 3’96 m thick piers.
The energy dissipator at the toe is in the form E-2 The spillway was completed in 1977 and
of solid roller bucket. The three central spans experienced floods of magnitude varying from
9-10-11, have the roller bucket with the invert 4 045 m3/s to 17 730 m3/s up to 1982. The
higher by 3’05 m than the adjacent spans due discharge of 17 730 m3/s, in 1981 was passed
to foundation problems. These spans have been through 10 spans which resulted in specific
separated by two intermediate low height divide discharge of 114 mZ/s as against design value
walls. A protective concrete apron of approx of 120 mz/s. On the other hand, tail water depth
15 m width was provided throughout the of 22.6 m as against design value of 26’9 m
length of the spillway. The highly folded and was available, which resulted in imperfect
7
IS 13195 : 1991
energy dissipation and excessive scour. When exposed by about 1 m due to undermining at
the downstream scour pool was dewatered for the apron end.
inspection in 1984, a deep scour hole, of about
15 m depth, was found at a distance of E-3 The small scour pits were filled with M-20
about 30 m from the bucket lip, in front of concrete with 20 percent plum including
span No. 19. In addition, some scour holes necessary anchoring with 25 mm dia bars at
were observed near the end of the low divide 1’5 m centres. The damaged portion of the
wall and downstream of the aprons of sapan 12 apron front of span 19 was filled up similarly
to 16. The apron key in front of span 19 was with concrete and the apron was extended by
about 11’3 m.
ANNEX F
( Foreword )
CASE STUDY ON PROTECTION DOWNSTREAM OF DHAROI DAM SPILLWAY
F-l The Dharoi dam spillway, across river observed that the bueket surface was eroded
Sabarmati, consists of 12 spans, 14’9 m wide to depths varying from 2 mm to 260 mm.
X 10’67 m each, separated by 3’66 m thick There was erosion near the bucket lip of spans
The spillway is designed to pass a 1-2 and all along the left training wall. The
g%num outflow of 15 439 ms/s, at FRL el. launching apron at the end of the left training
189’59 m. The spillway crest is at el. 178’96 m. wall had been washed out, endangering the
The energy dissipation arrangements at the toe safety of the earth dam behind it. Higher rock
consists of solid roller bucket at invert el. out crops along the right flank of the spillway
149’05 m for the three left spans and at el. also appeared to cause unsatisfactory flow
147’52 m for the remaining nine spans. The conditions.
average ground level el. 158’5 m downstream of
the spillway being substantially higher than the F-4 The following protective measures were
bucket level, a 15 m wide excavated ( unprotec- provided :
ted ) plateform at el. 150’0 m was provided just
downstream of the bucket lip and was jointed i) The eroded bucket surfaces was repaired
to the ground level by a recovery slope 3 : 1. with epoxy coat and epoxy mortar 1 : 7.
F-2 The spillway was completed in 1976 and ii) Seventy four drainage holes provided in
the radial gates were installed in 1978. Various the bucket were air cleaned.
floods with discharges varying from 990 ma/s
to 1 470 m*/s passed down the spillway iii) Higher rock out crop on the left flank,
between 1976 and 1980. The gates were at levels varying from el. 155 m to el.
operated for the first time in 1980. For the low 164 m was dressed down to a uniform
outflows, 6 central gates were opened for 0’3 m level of el. 155 m.
opening. For higher discharges, all the gates
were opened to full height ( 9 m ), one by one iv) The portion downstream of the bucket lip
for testing purposes. Such a operation resulted of spans 1-2 and along the left training
in unsatisfactory flow conditions leading to wall was provided with a 10 m wide
flow -concentration at some place and return concrete apron ( 1 : 1’5 : 3 ) founded on
flows at the other. hard rock at el. 150’0m.
F-3 The downstream portion was dewatered for v) The left training wall was extended by
the first time in 1982 for inspection. It was 27 m to cover the earth dam toe.
ANNEX G
( Foreword )
CASE STIJDY ON PROTECTION OF THE LEFT BANK DOWNSTREAM OF

MAHI BAJAJ SAGAR DAM SPILLWAY
G-1 The Mahi Bajaj Sagar Dam Spillway, 280’75 m and MWL el. 281’50 m. A ski-jump
across river Mahi in Rajasthan consists of 16 bucket with a radius of 15 m and 40” lip angle
spans, 15 m x 12’5 m each separated by 3’5 m, has been provided at the toe with its invert at el.
each separated by 3’5 m and 5’5 m thick piers. 227’0 m. The design maximum discharge is
The crest level is at el. 268’5 m, with FRL el. 24 000 m”/s.
8
IS 13195: 1991
G-2 The river bank on the right side is formed G-4 Various alternative methods of protective
of exposed rock. However, on the left side, pitching were considered. Provision of con-
a road leading to the earth dam has been crete lining was adopted in view of high
provided at el. 247’5 m and therefore, an velocity as well as non-availability of large size
artificial embankment has been constructed to stones at the dam site. The size of the indi-
slopes varying from 1’75 : 1 to 2 : 1. This vidual concrete panel was worked out as
embankment has been connected to the low 3’5 m X 3’5 m X 1 m thick, laid on suitable
level submersible bridge located about 350 m filter and provided with weep holes for drainage.
downstream of the axis. The toe of the pitching was taken at el.
G-3 Hydraulic model studies for different dis- 225’0 m, except for the initial 80 metre length
charges indicated that the left hank would be where the scour levels indicated from the model
subjected to velocities of the order of 7 m/s. studies were as deep as el. 220’0 m. In this
The deepest scour level reached el. 220 m over reach, a 4.5 m wide concrete apron was pro-
an initial length of about 80 m protection to the vided at el. 225’0 m with its cut-off taken down
left bank. to el. 220’0 m.
ANNEX H
( Foreword )
CASE STUDY ON PROTOTYPE BEHAVIOUR OF TAIL CHANNEL

DOWNSTREAM OF ANER DAM SPILLWAY
H-l The Aner dam spillway consists of 10 would be natural erosion of the tail channel bed
spans, 12’0 m X 6’5 m each separated by 2’75 m and banks during floods. The bed levels were
thick piers, on a saddle, across river Aner in approximately higher by 2 metres than the
Maharastra. The Spillway crest is at el. 209’8 m design bed levels. This was done mainly to
with the FRL at el. 216’4 m and HFL at el. save cost of excavation ( believed to he Rs 45
218’4 m. The energy dissipation arrangement lakhs or so ) which hopefully was to be done by
consists of 44 metre long hydraulic jump type the nature itself.
stilling basin at el. 199’0 m. The spillway has
been designed for maximum outflow of 4 318 H-4 During the floods of 1981, a maximum
mp/s. discharge of 3 777 ma/s ( about 87% of design
discharge ) passed down the spillway. The
H-2 The spillway has been constructed in expected erosion of the tail channel did not
saddle away from the main river, The flow take place and as a result, the tail water levels
passing down the s illway is led to the main actually obtained were found to be higher by
river through a 1 2 6p 0 metre long excavated tail about 2 metres. The higher tail water levels
channel. The width of the tail channel of 144’75 coupled with the non-existence of flood em-
metre at the end of the stilling basin is gradually bankments and inadequate heights of the guide
reduced to 60 metres at its confluence with the walls led to flooding on both the sides of the
main river. The bed level of the tail channel tail channel and breach of the left bank main
drops from el. 204 m to el. 182 m. The design canal.
bed slopes are 1 in 75 and 1 in 30. It was
assumed in the design that with the above H-5 The following remedial fmeasures were
configurations of the tail channel the maximum taken up by the project authorities :
tail water level at the stilling basin exit would
be el. 209’90 m. Accordingly, both the guide 9 Construction of the left side flood em-
walls of the spillway were kept at el. 210’5 m. bankment, leaving adequate free board
The design also provided for the construction over the expected tail water levels. The
of flood embankments in continuation of the material required for the construction of
guide walls, to avoid flooding on the low lying this embankment is quarried from the
areas on both the sides of the tail channel and excavation of the tail channel as far as
particularly the left bank canal. possible,
H-3 During actual construction, the flood ii) Raising of the left side guide wall by
embankments were, however, not constructed. 1’5 m, and
Also the required levels and gradients of the tail
channel by excavating the rock out crops were iii) Rate of erosion to be watched carefully
not provided under the assumption that there every season.
9
is 13195 : 199;’
. -
,dNNEX J
CASE STUDY ON PRihOTYPE BEHAVIOh OF’ TAIt CHANNEL

DOWhSTREAM OF WATiAK DAM SPILLWAY-
, .’
J-l The Watrak dam spillway consists of 96 vicinity of ch. 570. Since such large scale
spans, :12’5 m ,X 8’25 each, separated by 2’75 m erosion had .occurred even sfor [as small a dis-
thick piers, on asaddle, across river Watrak in charge as 6% of the design discharge, it was
Gujarat. The Spillway crest is at el. ,I28’0 m decided to provide protection to the.bed of the
with the FRL at el. 136’25 m and HFL at el. tail channel so as to prevent the erosion travell-
139’69 m. The energy dissipation ,arrangement ing upwards the spillway. Accordingly L metre
consists of 64 metre long hydraulic jump type thick apron of M-20 concrete with two keys,
stilling basin : at el. 1.15’85 m. The spillway has one at the upstream and one at the downstream
been designed for a maximum outflow of 5 667 was designed to be provided between ch. 416
ma/s. and ch. 449. The profile of the apron was fixed
according to the scour profile.
J-2 The spillway has been constructed in saddle
on the right of the river, due to poor founda- J-4 This work could be started only in July
tion conditions in the main river. The flow 1984. When part of the work was in progress,
from, the spiNway is led to the main river another flood of about 7.36 ma passed down I the
through 1 260 metre long excavated tail channel. spillway in August 1984. / During this flood,
The width of the tail channel of 88’7 metre at further erosion of tail channel had taken place
the end of the stilling basin is reduced to 45 and the erosion apeared .to move upstream.
metres at’ its confluence with the main river. Due to this, it became infeasiable to construct
The bed level : of the channel drops from el. the protective apron at its .originally:planaed
I20;8 m!at the beginning to el. 108;3 m at the location ( ch. 416 to ch. 449 ): The revised
confluence. The tail channel runs along the location was decided to be between ch, 370 and
rock formation containing alternate bands of ch. 402, according to’ the scour profile existing
quartzite aud phylite. there. The upstream key at el. 100.m and the
,,!!“ . y
downstream key would be at el. 100 m.
J-3 The spillway and the .tail ch.annel were c j
subjected to flow, first time. during the monsoon J-5 In addition ,to the above protective
on’ 1983, for a maximum. discharge of about apron, a key below t,he end sill of the stilling
368. m8/s,- as against design, discharge of 5 667 basin, going down up to el. 97’.0 m has also been
ma/s.. IHeavy erosion took place in the tail provided to guard against any scour occurring
Ghannell from .ch. ,370 downstream, with the in the immediate downstream vicinity of the
depth of erosion reaching about 7 metres in the spillway.
10
I
Standard Mark
I
Stnndards Act, 1986 and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The Standard Mark on
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised by BIS and operated by the pro-
ducer. Standard marked products are also continuously checked by BIS for confurmity to
that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use
of the Standard Mark may be granted to manufacturers or producers may bc obtained from
the Bureau of Irdian Standards.
i
( Reaffirmed 2003 )
lndiun Standard
STRUCTURALDESTGNOFSPILLWAY
PIER AND CREST-CRITERIA
UDC 627-83-066
@ BLS 1992
RUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

MANAK BHAVAN, 9 BAHADUK SHAH ZAFAR MARG
NEW DELHT 1102
December 1992
Price Group 3
Spillways Including Energy Dissipaters Sectional Committee, RVD 10
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized by
Spillways Including Energy t Dissipaters Sectional Committee had been approved by the River Valley
Division Council.
Spillway piers are erected over the crest profile and are provided to divide the spillway into number of
bays so as to control the flow over the spillway by installing gates between two piers. Piers are also used
to support the bridge over the spillway for the movement of gantry crane and normal traffic.
This standard is prepared to guide the designers, for the structural design of spillway pier and crest,
based on the practices being followed in this country.
final values, observed or calculated, expressing the results of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in
accordance with IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised)‘. The number of signi-
ficant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in
this standard.
IS 13551 : WE
Indian Standard
PIER AND CREST - CRITERIA
.lSCOPE XV) Longitudinal static water pressure on the
pier
This standard lays down criteria for structural XVI) Force due to wa ter current
design of spillway pier and crest.
NOTE -Effect of wind and earthquake forces
2 REFERENCES should not be considered simultaneously.
The following Indian Standards are necessary Out of the sixteen forces mentioned above forces.
adjuncts to this standard: at Sl No. (i), (ii), (iii), (lx), (xii) and (xiv) have
IS No. Title significant effect on design of pier while others
have insignificant effect. The effect of the forces
456 : 1978 Code of practice for plain and other than these, on the design of pier may be
reinforced concrete ( third accounted for on percentage basis.
revision )
I 893 : 1984 Criteria for earthquake resistant 3.2 Design Loading Condition
design of structures (fourth
revision )
The pier should be designed for the most critical
loading combination. When one of the spillway
6512 : 1984 Criteria for design of solid gravity gate is open and the adjacent is closed, the
dams transverse horizontal force on the pier will be
,I2720 : 1992 Criteria for structural design of maximum. Thereforr+.the forces should be cal-
spillway training and divide walls culated for this condrtton. Longitudinal horizon-
(first revision ) tal forces would be maximum when both the
gates adjacent to the pier are in closed position
SP 5s : 1993 Design aid for anchorages for
( however, this condition generally would not
spillway structures ( under print )
be critical ).
3 SPILLWAY PIER
3.3 Computation of Forces
3.1 Forces
3.3.1 Self Weight of Pier
;zarus forces to be resisted by pier are given
This should be calculated based on the actua!
geometry of the pier.
3 Self weight of pier
ii) Weight of spillway bridge on the pier 3.3.2 Weight of Spillway Bridge on the Pier
iii) Uplift pressure on the piers
This load is transferred to the pier through the
iv) Weight of hoisting equrpment on the pier bearings and should be calculated accordingly.
v) Upward water pressure on gates Vertical load ‘P’ per unit length should be cal-
vi) Weight of gate to be resisted by pier culated by dividing the load as calculated above
vii) Reaction due to live load on the bridge by the length of pier ‘L’ ( see Fig. 1 ). To
including impact account for the vertical loads due to other
viii) Crane loads, if provided insignificant forces, the vertical load per unit
length as calculated above should be increased
ix) Transverse water pressure on the pier by 10 percent, in case it is not otherwise possi-
X) Force due to braking effect of vehicles ble to calculate.
xi) Frictional resistance at the bearing of the 3.3.3 Tmnsverse Water Pressure on the Pier
road bridge
xii) Pin reaction in transverse direction due to Water pressure on the shaded portion as shown
water pressure on radial gate with inclined in Fig. I should be calculated which will act at
arms l/3 height above the imaginary horizontal line
drawn through the crest of the spillway. The
xiii) Wind load prcssurc from the gate open side may be igno-
.xiv) Earthquake ( including hydrodynamic red. However, in case it is required to consider
forces ) the same, it should be based on model studies.
1
IS 13551: 1992
3.3.4 Pin Reaction in Transverse Direction due to Uplift pressure per unit length for zones 1 and 2
Water Pressure on Radial Gate with Inclined Arms may be calculated by dividing the total uplift
force in the zones under consideration by their
This is calculated for the condition when one
respective lengths.
gate is closed and the adjacent gate is open.
This horizontal component of load (PT) in trans- 3.3.6 Earthquake
verse direction at trunnion due to water pressure
on the gate is given below: Earthquake forces ( including hydrodynamic
forces ) should be calculated according to
P, = -J$ L tan 0 IS 1893 : 1984.
where 3.4 Design of Spillway Intermediate Pier
w = unit weight of water
3.4.1 The entire pier should be divided into
la - height of gate three zones ( see Fig. 2 ).
L = width of gate
0 = angle of inclination of arm with the Zone I - Bending moment per unit length
pier M,, is as given below:
3.3.5 Uplift Pressure on the Pie) M,
For planes below spillway crest level, the uplift M1= n_tB
pressure may be calculated according to 4.4.4. where, M,, is moment due to the transver.;e
water pressure about the imaginary horizontal
For planes above spillway crest level, the uplift
line drawn through the crest of the spillway, and
pressure may be calculated as given below:
A and B are shown in Fig. 2. To account for the
4 When the tail water level is below the spill- moments due to other insignificant forces, the
way crest level -’ Uplift pressure equal to moment per unit length calculated above should
the hydrostatic head over the plane under be increased by 20 percent in case it is not
consideration may be taken to be acting otherwise possible to calculate.
uniformly over the full width of the pier
up to a distance A ( see Fig. 1 ) and reduc- Zone 2 - Bending moment per unit length
ing to zero at the intersection of the plane A[*,, is given below:
with the upper nappe profile.
M, = MT + 0.35 Ml
b) When the tail water level is above the spill-
where
way crest level - Uplift pressure equal to
the hydrostatic head over the plane under P.r x .---
_. OT
consideration may be taken to be acting MT =
L1
uniformly over the full width of the pier
up to a distance A ( see Fig. 1 > and reduc- where, PT is horizontal component of loads Jt
ing to the head corresponding to the tail the trunnion due to water pressure tit the gate
water level at the downstream end of the ( as calculated in 3.3.4 ). OT and L, are shown
pier. in Fig. 1.
AREA ON WHICH WATER PRESSURE
ACTS FROM GATE CLOSED SIDE
ZONE 3
SHORTEST DISTANCE
OF TRUNION FRqbi
FIG. 1 WATER PRESSURB FIG. 2 ZONBS OF PIER

ACTING ON PIER
2
IS 13551: l!m
Zone 3 -. In this zone, there are no major 4 SPILLWAY CREST

forces, therefore minimum reinforcement of
25 mm diameter @ 30 cm c,‘c may be provided. 4.1 General
However, minimum reinforcement should not be On account of the geometry of spillway cre:,t
less than either 25 percent of the reinforcement profile, tensile stresses are developed in the crest
in Zone 1 or 50 percent of the reinforcement in because of the loads acting over it. Reinforcc-
Zone 2. Maximum reinforcement obtained out ment needs to be provided to take care of these
of the above three conditions should be provi- tensile stresses. The minimum thickness of
ded. structural concrete provided for spillway_erest
is l-5 m, measured normally. However this has
3.4.2 The pier reinforcement should be designed to be suitably increased to accommodate the
according to IS 456 : 1978, assuming the pier as anchorage below the piers.
an eccentric column for the vertical and hori-
zontal loads as calculated in 3.3 and bending 4.2 Forces
moments as calculated in 3.4.1. The stress in
steel and concrete should be ensured to be in Various forces to be resisted by the cresf are .!>
permissible limits ( see Fig. 3 for typical rein- given below:
forcement detail ). The permissible stress in
steel reinforcement may be t.aken as 80 percent 0 Self weight of pier and the spillway crert;
of the value specified in TS 456 : 1978. ii) Weight of water over the crest and tail-
water, where applicable;
3.4.2.1 Anchorage iii) Horizontal water pressure;
The tensile stresses are also developed below the iv) Uplift pressure;
pier and, therefore, horizontal as well as vertical v) Earthquake forces ( including hydrociyn;a-
anchorages are required to be provided. The mic forces );
details of design of anchorage are given in
IS 12720 : 1992 and design aid for anchorages in vi) Earth and silt pressure, if any;
SP 55 : 1993.
vii) Ice pressure;
3.5 Spillway Ead Pier viii) Wave pressure; and

ix) Thermal loads.
Under normal cases, a major portion of the end
pier may be resting against the non-overflow 4.3 Design Loading Condition
dam adjacent to the spillway. Therefore, only a
nominal reinforcement on the spillway face of The spillway crest should be designed fJr ~he
the pier may be provided, which should not be tensile stresses set up near the crest due to loads
less than 25 mm diameter @ 30 cm c/c, The acting over it as mentioned in 4.2. For the
reinforcement for the portion of the pier which purpose of design the critical tensile stres,,
is not resting against the non-overflow dam should be calculated for the worst loading
should be designed according to 3.3 and 3.4 combination as given in 4.1 of IS 6.512 : 1984.
( see Fig. 4 and 5 for typical reinforcement However, these should bc calculated for the
details ). following three regions as shown in Fig. 6.
a 1 Considering block RS a whole for se,tion
3.6 As a guideline the following thickness/width XX and below.
of piers are recommended for different size of
gates: b) Region near the pier ( At Scctiorl E-1,
that is above section XX as chr\~n in
Sizes ofRadial Gate T1~icknes.s~
Width Fig. 6 ).
( Width x Height ) qf Pier
c> Region away from the pier ( At Scctic-:I
12 m x 5m 2.5 n-i YY, that is above section XX as ihow;
2.75 m in Fig. 6 >,
12 m x 6.5 m
12 in x 8.0 m 3*0 m 4.4 Computation of Forces
I5 m x I 2 111 3.50 III
9. I5 Ill x 64 111 2-5 m
14.95 ni x 10 GS m 3.50 m
This should be calculated for the appropr~at.:
lS*55 m x 14m 4.0 m areas ( see Fig. 6 ) dependingupon the clc?,:tl I(*,$,
18,s III x J6.75 m 4.75 m at which stability is being checked.
3
WP OF P
fiik OlSTRIBWTORS 1171
/-
MAIN DAR’? -
SPILLWAY Gl HORIZONTAL ANCHORAGE
VERTICAL ANCHORA ‘JE
REST PRO!=11
CONST:‘!IIITION JOINT
SECTION THROUGH PIER AA
FIG. 3 RBINPORCBMBNT DETAILS FOR INTBRMB~IATI3PIER
SPILLWAY SIDE --
*-I - NONOVER
SIDE
FLOW
Lit--
TCP OF P NOMINAL
REINFORCEMENT d
DISTRIBUTORS -I-
NONOWf?RFCo’fl
MAIt4 BARS - - -
HORIZONTAL ANCHORAGE
CREST PROFILE
’
HORIZONTAL
ANCHORAGE
I
CO~TRnCrur;rl
JOINT
SECTION THROUGH END PIER AA

SHOWI NG REINFORCEMENT ON SPICDVAY SIDE:
FIG. 4 TYPICAL RBINFORCBMENT DBTAILS FOR END PIERS
4
IS 13551: 1992
-- NONQVER FLOW SIDE L SPILLWAY SIOE ---tc
11
TOP OF DAM
TOP OF PIER
DISTRIBUTORs
I-7
HORUONUl ANCHORAGE
CONSWUc :llON
JOINT
r D/S FACE OF
I_ _~ _~ I~VER FLOWI ; v^ (
SECTION THROUGH END PIER BB

SHOWING REINFORCEMENT ON NOF SIDE
FIG. 5 TYPZCALRBINFORCGMENTDETAILS FOR END PIERSTOWARDS NON-OVERFLOW SIDE
DAM AXIS
I---
RAOIAL GATE
TYPICAL CREST
REINFORCEMENT
REGlOfi AWAY
FROM PIER --
a is the width at section Y Y where stability is being checked.

Fxc. 6 LOAD DI~PBRSIONOF THE WEIGHT OF PIBR ON SPILLWAY STRUCTURE
4.42 Weight of the Water Over the Crest and crest. 1C the design head is less than the head
Tdrafer Level corresponding to MWL, negative pressures ovel
the spillway crest which are likely to develop
Fur spillway discharging condition, the weight may be considered suitably either based on
of water over the crest should be ignored in the model studies or on earlier experience for similar
stabihty calculations for tail water levels below COnditions.
5
Is13551:1992
4.4.3Horizorttal Water Pressure 4.5 Reinforcement

The horizontal water pressure acting above
spillway crest elevation in respect of gat;d 4.5.1Spillway crest reinforcement should be
spillway over the gates should be taken to be calculated in respect of the tensile stress as cal-
transferred to the pier at an appropriate eleva- culated in 4.3. The crest reinforcement should
tion depending on the type of gates used. For be provided only if the tensile stresses exceed
region away from the pier in respect of sections the allowable tensile stresses specified in 5.13.2.3
above XX (see Fig. 6 ) this force should not be of JS 6512 : 1984.
considered.
4.5.2 The area of steel reinforcement should bc
4.4.4 Uplift Pressure
calculated in accordance with IS 456 : 1978. The
Uplift pressures should be considered to be permissible tensile stress in steel reinforcemenr
acting over the spillway section only and not may be taken as 80 percent of the value specified
in the pier portion. For spillway discharging in IS 4.56 : 1978.
conditions and tail water levels, below the
section at which stability is being checked, the
effect of the sheet of water flowing over the 4.5.3 The reinforcement should be provided up 11)
spillway for uplift calculations may be ignored. an elevation below which tensile stresses arc
For tailwater levels above the section consi- within permissible limits ( see 4.5.1 ). The deve-
dered, uplift at the downstream end and the lopmcnt length below this elevation, however, hc
weight of water above crest should be suitably provided according to 1s 456:: 1978.
considered ( see Fig. 6 ).
45.4 Distribution reinforcement equal tc) WL
4.4.5 The other forces mentioned in 4.2 ( v ) to less than 20 y0 of the main reinforcement should
( ix ) should be computed as given in TS 65 12 : be provided. .Kowever, it should not be 1~~sth:?jl
1984. I6 mm diameter @ 25 cm c/c.
I I i. ;
/ I
Standard Mark I
products covered by 8x1 Indian Standard conveys the assurance that they have been
produced to comply with the requirements of that standard under a well defined system of
inspection, testing and quality control which is devised and supervised by BIS and operated
by the producer. Standard marked products are also continuously checked by BIS for con-
formity to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence
for the use of the Standard Mark may be granted to manufacturers or producers may be
obtained from the Bureau of Indian Standards.
BLS is a statutory institution established under the Bureuu of Indian Standards Act, 1986 to promote
Copyright
form without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use, in the course of
Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director ( Publications ), BIS.
Indian Standaras are reviewed periodically and revised, when necessary and amendments, if any, are
issued from time to time. Users of Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in possession of the
latest amendments or edition, Comments on this Indian Standard may be sent to BIS givmg the
Dot : No RVD 10 ( 4592 )
Amend No. Date of lssue Text Affected
Headquarters:
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110002 Telegrams : Manaksanstha
Telephones : 331 01 31, 331 13 75 ( Common to all offices )

NEW DELHI 110002 t 331 13 75
Eastern : 1 14 C. I. T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Maniktola 37 84 99, 37 85 61
c!ALCUTTA 700054 t 37 86 26, 37 86 62
Northern : SC0 445-446, Sector 35-C, CHANDIGARH 160036 53 38 43, 53 16 40
I 53 23 84
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, MADRAS 600113 235 02 16, 235 04 42
{ 235 15 19, 235 23 15
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri ( East ) 632 92 95, 632 78 58
BOMBAY 400093 632 78 91, 632 78 92
Branches : AHMADABAD. ISANGALORE. RHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR.

COIMBATORE. FARTDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYD.El<AI~Al~.
JATPUR. KANPIJR. LUCKNOW. I’ATNA. ‘l-HIRlJVANANTIIAPIJRAM.
Is 14344 : 1996
( Reaffirmed 2001 )
Indian Standard
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTI-ON OF
DIAPHRAGMS FOR UNDER-SEEPAGE
CONTROL - CODE OF PRACTICE
ICS 93.160
0 BIS 1996

MANAK BHAVAN, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAU MARG
NEW DELHI 110002
July 1996 Price Group 8

Foundation and Substructures Sectional Committee, RVD 8
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized by the
Foundation and Substructures Sectional Committee had been approved by the River Valley Division
Council.
Construction of conventional rolled earthfill cut-off benches can be a prohibitively expensive operation
depending on the required depth and the existing natural ground water condition. The recent trend has
been towards application of diaphragm walls in the control of under-seepage.
Diaphragm walls can be constructed by a variety of methods that do not require foundation dewatering
and greatly reduce the amount of excavation from that required for a rolled earthen cut-off.
In theory, all the major types of diaphragm walls can be designed to provide a positive seepage cut-off.
However, there are certain uncertainties in the design and construction of all types of diaphragm walls.
Each application of a diaphragm wall is unique and depends largely on the intended function as on the
foundation conditions, hydraulic gradients~and economic considerations. In this standard the design and
construction aspects of diaphragm walis have been addressed to the situation where the diaphragm wall
is used as a measure for under-seepage control.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised )‘. The number of significant places
retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
IS I4344 : 1996
Indian Standard
DESIGNANDCONSTRUCTIONOF
DIAPHRAGMSFORUNDER-SEEPAGE
CONTROL-CODEOFPRACTICE
1 SCOPE c) The economic value of the water stored,
d) The risk element asinfluenced~by the height
1.1 This standard covers the design and construc-
of dam,
tion of diaphragm walls to be used as positive im-
pervious cut-offs for dams, weirs and barrages as an e) Reservoir volume, and
under-seepage control measure. f,) Potential damage to -downstream areas.
1.2 Diaphragm walls required for other structures 4 NECESSITY OF DIAPHRAGM WALL
are not covered in this standard
4.1 Where construction of positive cut-off trench
2 REFERENCES by conventional open excavation is not feasible on
account of the situations described below, con-
2.1 The Indian Standards given in Annex A are struction of diaphragm wall as an under-seepage
necessary adjuncts to this standard. control measure can solve the problem:
2.2 For the definitions~of various terms used in this a> Excessive depth of the impervious stratum
standard, reference may be made to relevant parts overlain by pervious or heterogeneous
of IS 4410. strata;
b) Construction difficulties, like heavy
3 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR dewatering;
DIAPHRAGM WALL AS AN UNDER-SEEPAGE 4 Instability of side slopes of excavations;
CONTROL MEASURE
d) Paucity of construction materials; and
3.1 Under-seepage control measures for dams, e) Time constraints, etc.
weirs and barrages have two independent func- 4.2 It is, however, imperative to study the cost
tions: factor, water loss that can be tolerated, risk in-
a) To reduce the loss of water by seepage, volved in case of failure of structure, ease in con-
through sub-surface, to an amount com- struction, time factor, and any other inherent issues
patible with the purpose of the project; and for the project, prior to selecting the under-seepage
b) To eliminate the possibility of structural control measure.
failure by piping.
5 TYPES OF DIAPHRAGM WALL
3.2 The quantity of seepage can be reduced ap-
preciably by intercepting the pervious strata by 5.1 Depending on the use of construction
means of diaphragm wall. Bottom of the diaphragm materials there are the following types of
wall should be embedded in continuous impervious diaphragm walls:
stratum. Top of the diaphragm wall should be con- a) Rigid type
nected with an impervious membei of the structure 1) Reinforced cement concrete.
like the impervious core of embankment. b) Flexible type
3.3 Chances of failure of dam by piping increases 1) Plastic concrete,
rapidly with increasing value of hydraulic gradient. 2) Cement bentonite slurry trench, and
Careful selection of the type of diaphragm wall can 3) Earth backfilled slurry trench.
reduce the probability of piping failure to a mini-
5.2 Diaphragm wall, single line or two lines spaced
mum. about 3 to 4 m apart can be provided as per the
3.4 Selection of under-seepage control measures is requirements of water tightness and site conditions.
dependent on the following factors: In the latter case, the alluvium contained between
a) Heterogeneity of sub-surface strata, the two diaphragm walls is also grouted to achieve
b) Uncertainties in foundation characteristics, better water tightness, if warranted.
1
IS 14344: 1996
6 SELECTION OF TYPE OF DIAPHRAGM or cement bentonite diaphragm wall or earth back-

WALL filled slurry trench diaphragm wall.
6.1 Selection of type of diaphragm depends upon 6.3.2 If sub-surface strata consists of gravelly or
a number of factors such as: bouldary deposits with the interstices filled up with
finer soil particles forming a tight matrix of relative-
a) site conditions; ly low permeability, plastic concrete diaphragm is
b) heterogeneity/perviousness of sub-surface
preferable to rigid or cement bentonite slurry
strata;
trench diaphragm.
Cl geological features:
Y Y
d) depth of overburdyn; 7 NECESSARY INFORMATION

e>anticipated stresses and deformations due 7.1 Following information is generally necessary
to embankment construction and reservoir for the design and construction of a diaphragm wall
loading conditions; for under-seepage control:
9 availability of construction materials; and
a) Contoured site plan and detailed drawings
g> techno-economic considerations, etc. of embankment dam/barrage/weir with
properties of soil in various zonks of em-
6.1.1 Guidelines given in this standard are only an
bankment dam, showing FRL, MWL, LWL,
indication of the preferred type of diaphragm wall.
TWL, etc.
The decision of the design engineer backed by as-
sessment of various factors, past experience and his b) Detailed sub-soil investigations along the
own judgement are important in selecting a type of. proposed alignment of diaphragm wall as
diaphragm wall to suit the project requirements. laid down inIS 1892 : 1979 and IS 6955 : 1973
with particular reference to the boul-
6.2 Where the foundation strata consists of bouldary/gravelly formations.
dary deposits, open gravel pockets, zones of talus, Cl Longitudinal section along the proposed
slide areas, contacts of formation of different alignment of diaphragm wall marked with
geological age, fractured zones or similar features, ground levels, sub-surface geological fea-
it is obvious that voids/openings may be larger and tures, type of structure(s) at both ends of
contact with diaphragm wall face may not be con- diaphragm wall and any other pertinent
tinuous. Under such circumstances it is import,ant details.
to see that bending stresses between contact free d) In-sim permeability test data.
lengths are taken care of. Any flexible type of e) Stress-strain curves of embankment and
diaphragm wall which undergoes large deforma- overburden soils obtained in triaxial shear
tions at low stress levels is not suitable. Rigid type test in appropriate test conditions, covering
diaphragm wall is preferable under such condi- full depth of overburden.
tions.
f) Physical, physico-chemical and engineering
properties of the sub-soil and chemical
6.3 If stratum in the foundation is fairly uniform
properties of ground water.
and pervious, the contact of soil particles with the
face of diaphragm wall will be continuous. Ap- g) Modulus of sub-grade reaction of the sub-
plication of rigid diaphragm wall in such strata soil in horizontal direction.
induces higher stress level due to low deformability h) Stage of construction or details of the con-
of the fill material of the diaphragm wall, when struction sequence and construction
pervious strata undergoes strain on load applica- schedule of the embankment dam/barrage/
tion. This causes interface problems between weir.
diaphragm wall faces and surrounding strata which 0 Ground water table, its probable fluctua-
may ultimately result in cracks between soil and tions and subterranean. flow conditions, if
face of diaphragm wall leading to probability of any.
hydraulic fracturing. Under such circumstances the k) Size, weight, capacity and working principle
ideal material for the diaphragm wall would be one of the trenching and concreting machinery
which possesses deformation characteristics com- intended to be used.
patible with the surrounding soil mass. Flexible ml Quality and amount of local materials avail-
type of diaphragm wall is, therefore, preferable in able economically at, or near, the site of
such circumstances. construction for preparing theslurry, plastic
concrete, R.C.C.
6.3.1 Depending on stress-strain behaviour of n) Complete details of auxiliary construction
strata and anticipated stress level upon loading, equipment like lifting cranes, tower cranes,
selection should be made on either plastic concrete
2
IS 14344 : 1996
hauling units, mixing devices, pumping b) imperviousness or water tightness. Water

devices, etc, intended to be used. tightness is mainly adjudged with the value
of permeability (K). If the water is suffi-
8 MATERIALS
ciently expensive to justify a high cost of
8.1 Cement diaphragm~wall then the diaphragm may be
constructed to achieve a permeability of 1,2
Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement con-
or 3 lugeons. If the seepage loss is little or
forming to IS 269 : 1989 or rapid hardening of negligible value, then water tightness up
Portland cement conforming to IS 8041: 1990, blast
to a permeability of 3 lugeons is preferred to
furnace slag cement conforming to IS 455 : 1989 or
prevent piping of the foundation material.
Portland pozzolana cement conforming to IS 1489
Permeability of 3 to 5 may be permitted in
(Part 1) : 1991 or IS 1489 (Part 2) : 1991.
exceptional cases where an inordinately
8.2 Aggregate high expenditure is anticipated for achiev-
ing of reduction of up to 3 lugeons.
The aggregates shall conform to IS 383 : 1970. Well
graded coarse aggregate of 20 mm size shall nor- These considerationswill take care of the intended
mally be used in reinforced concrete diaphragm ~functions of the diaphragm wall as an under-
walls. For plastic concrete diaphragm walls, a seepage control measure.
smaller size of aggregate may be used.
9~1.2 Diaphragm wall is a component of the struc-
8.3 Sand ture for which dimensions are predetermined. The
Well graded sand consisting of 50 percent coarse most important consideration in the design of a
sand shall be used. diaphragm wall is to form an impervious wall
having flexibility to avoid cracking. The potential
8.4 Water for cracking induced by stresses in the diaphragm
Clean water free from deleterious impurities, as wall as construction progresses and during first
specified in IS 456 : 1978, shall be used in preparing filling of the reservoir shall be considered, par-
the concrete mix and for preparation of bentonite ticularly for rigid type oftwall. Stresses are usually
slurry. Water shall be free from salinity when used not a problem unless they cause excessive cracking
with bentonite. which would negate the purpose of the wall. For
flexible type of wall, its imperviousness, defor-
8.5 Admixtures mability compatible with surrounding soil and re-
If required, chemical admixtures in concrete shall quired unconfined compressive strength are the
be used as specified in IS 456 : 1978. governing factors.
8.6 Reinforcement 9.2 Location

Mild steelbars conforming to IS 432 (Part 1) : 1982
9.2.1 The best location for a diaphragm wall within
and cold worked bars conforming to IS 1786 : 1985
a structure is where the loads are reasonably
shall be used.
balanced on both sides of the wall. In case of new
8.7 Bentonite earth/rockfill dam, the axis at top of the dam will be
an ideal location due to more or less symmetrical
Bentonite used shall conform to IS 12584 : 1989. design. At this location bending moments about
8.8 Clay the horizontal axis will be minimum and the
horizontal deformations will also be minimum.
Clay shall conform to IS 1498 : 1970. Clay is
However, for any location of the diaphragm wall,
generally used to reduce consumption of bentonite.
the junction of diaphragm wall with its surround-
Clay is also required to be used in earth-backfilled
ings has to be properly taken care of to avoid piping
slurry trench cut-off walls.
problems through interfaces (see 9.4.2).
9 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
9.1 General 9.2.2 An alternative location of the diaphragm
wall is at the upstream toe of earth dam which
9.1.1 Utmost consideration shall be given, while minimizes the possibility of compressive failure of
designing the diaphragm wall, so as to achieve: the wall due to negative skin friction developed by
a) perfect embedment at both the ends, to settlement of foundation strata under the weight of
avoid/minimize possibilities of cracking embankment. For this location, however, construe-,
both within and surrounding the diaphragm tion of embankment shall be carried out first fol-
wall, and lowed by construction of the diaphragm wall. Top
3
IS 14344 : 1996
of diaphragm wall should be connected with a mm thickness. Minimum panel length shall be
horizontal impervious blanket which shall be limited to 5 m, or single bite of the grab, with one
linked with the upstream toe of impervious core. tremie pipe for ensuring due concreting operations.
9.2.3 Location of diaphragm wall is often in- 9.3.3.1 In case of flexible type of diaphragm wall
fluenced by site conditions. Location shall, there- possibility of seepage through joints gets reduced
fore, be decided after careful study of site to a.greater extent. In such cases panel length of
requirements and localised features. 3 m to 5 m will be convenient. Problems of instability
of sides of trench and handling/circulating the slur-
9.2.4 Locations of the diaphragm wall required for
ry will be minimum with these panel lengths.
the barrage/weir are fixed from design point of view.
These are generally -provided at upstream and 9.3.4 In general diaphragm walls are of thickness
downstream ends of the floor of the barrage/weir. 500 mm, 600 mm, 750 mm and 900 mm. These
However, the junction of the diaphragm wall, other widths have been found to be satisfactory up to a
than rigid type of diaphragm wall, with the con- depth of 50 m. For greater depths thicker walls
crete/masonry work has to be properly thought of. (1 000 mm to 1 500 mm) may be used ensuring
Generally the barrage/weir floor is constructed of trench stability and resistance to hydro-fracturing.
rigid concrete or masonry with concrete cover. The
9.3.5 Depth of the wall will depend on the depth to
junction of rigid concrete in the floor with the
an impervious layer, or a layer that satisfies the
flexible type of diaphragm wall may not be
designer’s criteria for allowable seepage losses, and
monolithic and hence in such cases seepage can
flow pattern.
take place through such joints. It is, therefore,
preferable to use rigid concrete diaphragm walls to 9.4 Joints, Junctions and Sub-surface Grouting
act as cut-offs for barrageheir structures.
9.3 Choice of-Panel Dimensions 9.4.1 Joints
9.3.1 Choice of panel dimension depends on 9.4.1.1 In case of rigid diaphragm wall, joints be-
various considerations as below: tween the primary and secondary panels are
a) Stability: In general, short panels are stabler generally achieved by use of form tubes (stop-end
than long panels. However, in soft ground tubes). The concrete faces of the primary panels are
short panels are preferred. roughened using special tools prior to concreting
b) Concreting: It shall be possible to place the the secondary panels.
total volume of the concrete for a panel 9.4.1.2 In case of a rigid type single diaphragm.wall,
before setting, or significant stiffening, the joints between the successive panels are
takes place. generally grouted in accordance with IS 4999 : 1991
C> Excavation Equipment: It shall be ensured on upstream face, by method of grouting .through
that the panel length shall not be shorter tubes with sleeves (tube-e-manchette grouting
than a single bite of the grab. method) which is usually adopted for grouting of
d) Number of Stop-End Tubes: Placing and ex- alluvium. In doing so, joints between the panels are
traction of stop-end tubes is costly. sealed from the upstream side.
e) Reinforcement: Size and weight of each 9.4.1.3 In case of two lines of rigid type of
reinforcement cage must allow easy han-
dling with available equipment at site. diaphragm walls, alluvium in between the two walls
shall be grouted, if warranted, by the method
9.3.2 Each joint is a potential source of seepage. It described in 9.4.1.2 to achieve better reduction in
is desirable, therefore, that the number of panel permeability.
joints shall be kept to the minimum. An ap-
propriate size of the panel shall be selected on the 9.4.1.4 Flexible type of diaphragm walls can be
basis of considerations (a) and (b) above. This size constructed without any joints as a continuous con-
shall then be analyzed for consideration (c) and struction process. However, faces of primary panels
then the remaining considerations taken care of. are required to be roughened by grab teeth or by
Panel volume shall be of reasonable size and special tools, prior to filling the secondary panels
moderate in 1engt.h because of the possible to get a better joint.
shrinkage of panels. Final checks shall be made on
9.4.1.5 Interface between the bottom end of
the closing panels.
diaphragm wall and bedrock/impervious strata
9.3.3 A practical maximum panel length shall be of shall be grouted to achieve water tightness. This
the order of 10 m wherein concrete can effectively will be achieved while grouting the strata below the
be placed using two tremie pipes in a panel of 600 bottom of the diaphragm wall.
4
IS 14344 : 1996
9.4.2 Junctions sequent loadings. During earthquake, top portion

9.4.2.1 Junctions of the diaphragm wall will of the diaphragm wall will be more vulnerable to
generally be at the following locations: damage. Extension of rigid type of diaphragm wall
is not desirable from such considerations. Hence,
a) Junction of the bottom end of the precautions shall be taken to prevent possible
diaphragm wall with sub-surface strata.
damages along the extended length of diaphragm
b) Junction of the diaphragm wall at both ends
wall into the core. Alternatively, it would be
with hill abutment/any structure.
preferable to provide a partial cut-off-trench below
4 Junction of the top end of the diaphragm impervious core to a depth required by permissible
wall within the structure.
internal hydraulic gradient considerations, and to
9.4.2.2 Bottom end of the diaphragm wall shall be keep the top of diaphragm within the impervious
keyed to a depth of 600 to 1000 mm into impervious backfill of the part+ cut-off-trench up to ground
soil or rock. level, or below. This also reduces the possibility of
9.4.2.3 At the junctions of rigid and flexible types damage to the diaphragm wall near the ground
of wall with hill abutments, or any structure, it is during earthquake.
necessary to provide adequate creep length to get 9.4.2.5 Top end of the diaphragm wall shall be
safe exit gradients. Diaphragm walls shall, there- rounded to avoid stress concentration at the
fore, extend into the abutment or any structure corners.
to a minimum length which provides safe seepage
9.4.2.6 Whether the diaphragm wall is extended
gradient not exceeding 4 horizontal to 1 vertical. into the impervious core, or is kept below the
Panel length adopted for construction of
ground level within partial cut-off-trench, a cover
diaphragm walls should, however, be adjusted
of plastic clay shall be provided around the
according to the required extension.
diaphragm wall to safeguard against any possible
9.4.2.4 Top end of diaphragm wall, whether of damage to the wall or to the impervious core. This
rigid or flexible type, will remain either below the cover shall consist of clayey soil of relatively high
ground level or will extend above the ground level plasticity with its liquid limit more than 50. This
into an impervious core. Extent of the embedment clay cover will act as a deformable ‘cushion’ and will
of diaphragm wall into the core can be better reduce stress concentration. It will also improve
decided with the help of finite element analysis. the interface contacts. Dimensions of cover above
Without such study, extension of the diaphragm top of diaphragm wall shall, however, be decided on
wall into core will be based on the designer’s judge- available literature/experience/model study, etc.
ment. Excessive internal hydraulic gradient can be Such treatment will be required for both the rigid
avoided by proper selective treatment around the and flexible type of diaphragm walls.
diaphragm wall in core, type of impervious soil,
9.4.2.7 Junction of flexible type of diaphragm walls
width of impervious core, downstream drainage
with rigid structures shall be avoided.
arrangement, etc. In absence of finite-element study
it is apprehended that the diaphragm wall can 9.4.2.8 Typical juncrion details of rigid/flexible
damage the impervious core as the foundation set- diaphragm wall with impervious core are shown in
tles under the weight of the embankment and sub- Fig. 1.
Alldimensions
in millimetres.
FIG. 1 JUNCTIONDETAILSOF DIAPHRAGM WALL WITHIMPERVIOUS
CORE
IS 14344 : 1996
9.4.2.9 Qpical junction details for diaphragm-wall state with development of steady state of seepage
located upstream of the toe of earth dam are~shown within the embankment. Loads acting on the
in Fig. 2. upstream face of the diaphragm wall may be con-
sidered asfollows:
9.4.3 Sub-subsurface Grouting
9.4.3.1 The bed rock below the rigid and flexible a>Effective lateral pressure exerted by the
foundation soil over the depth of diaphragm
type of diaphragm wall is generally grouted to a
wall between ground level and its bottom.
required depth by providing pipes inside the panels
b) Effective lateral stress component con-
while casting, to reduce the permeability of bed
tributed by the structural load over the en-
rock. Drilling the holes directly into the diaphragm
tire depth of diaphragm wall.
wall after its casting shall be avoided as it is practi-
cally impossible to keep the holes within the wall. 4 Hydrostatic pressure acting perpendicular
Also in doing so there is a risk of disturbing the to the face of the diaphragm wall consider-
panel material and thereby damaging the wall ing head of water corresponding to FRL.
during drilling. 9.5.3 If an analysis is carried out by finite element
9.5 Loading on Diaphragm Wall or similar type of method, it is possible to incor-
porate all the intermediate loading stages involving
9.5.1 A diaphragm wall is a structural component effect of sequeritial construction. Otherwise wall
embedded in soil, analysis shall, therefore, involve loadings mentioned in 9.5.1 and 9.5.2 may be
soil-structure interaction. A diaphragm wall, adopted, as the case may be.
whether rigid or flexible, is subjected to various
loading conditions such as construction of struc- 9.6 End Conditions
ture for which diaphragm wall is provided, first
reservoir filling and subsequent operating condi- 9.6.1 Flexible types of diaphragm walls are
tions. Hence, loading conditions on a diaphragm designed to undergo deformations under loading.
wall are complex and need careful consideration. Hence their structural behaviour in bending is not
Loading considerations also depend upon method of much importance. Only rigid types of diaphragm
of analysis selected for assessing the behaviour of walls need structural analysis to take care of bend-
diaphragm wall as well as its location. End of con- ing stresses without developing appreciable defor-
struction condition may not be of much importance mation which may result in cracking.
if diaphragm wall is so located that loading on 9.6.2 Structural behaviour ol rigid type ol’
either side is reasonably symmetrical. However, diaphragm wall is different from any isolated siruc-
the diaphragm wall located near the upstream toe tural member, as it involves soil structure interac-
of the dam/barrage/weir and constructed prior to tion. Till date, it has remained a matter of debate
construction of dam/barrage/weir, may undergo about end conditions to be adopted for structural
deformations in horizontal and vertical directions. design of the diaphragm wall. Considering the em-
In such cases loads due to stresses in horizontal bedment depth in impervious stratum negligible at
direction, on account -of post construction of bottom as compared to the total depth of
dam/barrage/weir, are of importance. diaphragm wall and upper end embedded in soil,
9.5.2 In subsequent stages, the maximum loads on the end conditions can be considered as hinged at
diaphragm wall are expected when reservoir is fully both the ends. This shall be considered as a guide
charged to full reservoir level @XL) and the struc- only. Depending upon his own experience and/or
ture as well as the foundation soil on the upstream with the help of finite element study, the designer
of the diaphragm wall are in completely saturated may select suitable end conditions.
FIG. 2 JUNCIION DE’I’AILSOF DIAPHRAGM WALL LocA’I‘~-AI IN ‘I‘H~ lJww-* OFI‘H~~

TOE OF EARTH DAJVI
6
IS 14344 : 1996
10 GUIDELINES FOR STRUCTURAL DESIGN 10.1.2.2 The water-cement ratio of concrete used
shall ensure easy flow through tremie pipe used in
10.1 Rigid Type of Diaphragm Wail
concreting. However, the water-cement ratio shall
10.1.1 Smlctural Analysis not be greater than 0.6. The concrete mix shall have
the required slump. 10 percent extra cement shall
Rigid type of diaphragm wall is to be analyzed be added for under water work.
either by the method of beam on elastic foundation
or by finite~element method (FEM). 10.1.3 Design of Reinforrwwt
10.1.1.1 Method of beant on elastic foundation 10.1.3.1 Steel reinforcement is required to be
provided in case of rigid type of diaphragm wall lo
The diaphragm wall shall be considered in plane resist bending moments and shear stresses com-
strain state and as such, unit length of diaphragm puted as mentioned in 10.1. The design of reinfor-
wall with entire depth as the span is to be con- cement that is, size and spacing of bars, minimum
sidered as a beam resting on elastic soil media on steel requirements etc, shall be carried 0111in ac-
the~downstream face. Loads are to be considered cordance with IS 456 : 1978.
actinz upon the upstream face of the diaphragm
wall. Analysis is to be carried out using appropriate 10.1.3.2 An allowance of 10 percent to 20 percent
equations for bending moments and shear stresses shall be made for a reduction in bond strengh due
for a beam resting on elastic foundation with as- to the probability of lodging of sand-laden @led
sumed end conditions. slurry in case of deformed bars.
10.1.3.3 Reinforcement cage shall be designed for
10.1.1.2 Finite elenwzt method (FEM) sufficient strength to resist handling stresses.
Cages shall be able to resist uplift pressures during
Finite element analysis takes into account soil trcmic concreting and as such adequate tic bars
structure interaction. Finite element analysis shall shall be provided. It is imperative that the trcmic
be carried out either as gavity turn-on analysis or pipe passes between faces of the reinforcement
sequential construction analysis. Sequential con- cage freely, so that, it is possible to lift and lower
struction analysis is, however, preferred as it takes the tremie pipe frcqucntly during concreting.
into account the elastic modulus of soil changing
10.1.3.4 Spacers shall be provided to the outsidc
with different stress Icvcls during construction. The
horizontal main rcinforccmcnt barb at I‘rcqucnt in-
finite clement analysis shall incorporalc intcrlhcc
tcrvals along ihc height ofcagc, 10 place the cage in
clemcnts along the contact boundary of’ the
ccntrc 01’rhc rrcnch, and I’or easy lowcrin~ 01‘the,
diaphr;igm wall and surrounding boil mahh. Elimi-
cage.
nation of intcrfacc clcmcnts results in I;duky stress
and displacement computations, due to stress 10.1.3.5 Rcinlorccmcnt in the diaphragm \+all ih
transfer through common nodes. placed in Ihc form of cages. A single cage can bc
prepared if it is practicable to lift the cage and to
10.1.1.3 Finiteelement method lakesconsiderable plocc it in position without distorting the cage.
time for analysis as well as testing. This afl’ects the Where it is not feasible to lower the cage in one
project schedule. On the orhcr hand, a simplified section of full height, due to the limitations of the
method like beam on elastic foundation, in which equipment, siteconsiderations etc, the cagcshall bc
sequential construction cannot be accounted for is fabricated in sections. After loweringthe first cage
not a refined method like FEM. As a compromise section and keeping it just projected above the
it is recommended to analyze the diaphragm wall guide walls the following cage section shall bc
by the~method ofbcam on elastic foundation and to welded keeping it suspended above the lowcrcd
carry out finite element analysis simultaneously as enc.
construction goes on. After completion of the
10.1.3.6 Connections between the reinforccmcnt
diaphragm wall, performance shall be evaluated by
bars and other steel sections shall be welded with
comparison of instrumentation observations of
design considerations as well as to withstand han-
stresses and displacements with those obtained by
dling stresses.
finite element analysis.
10.1.3.7 To ensure easy flow of concrete, minimum
spacing between reinforcing bars shall not hc less
than 100 mm.
10.1.2.1 Concrete l’or rigid type of diaphragm wall 10.2 I~lesil~le ‘I’ypes of I)iaphr:~pl \Vatt
shall bc ol’ M20 pdc (see IS 4% : 1978). Whcrc
rcquircd, concrete mis design (or rigid Lype 01 10.1.1 S/,uC/Llra/ ,4/7tr!)~.sr.\
diaphragm wall shall be done to ohlain specified 10.2.1.1 Plastic concrelc diaphragm wall or cc-
compressive strength. mcnt bcntonitc slurry trench diaphragm \\:rll OI
IS 14344 : 1996
earth backfilled siurry trench diaphragm wall are shear tests in the same condition under which sur-
relatively flexible and capable to deform under rounding soil specimens are tested.
stresses in the surrounding soil. Hence, develop-
ment of stresses is not a design problem. These 10.2.2.3 Mix shall have adequate unconfined com-
diaphragm walls shall, therefore, be designed to pressive strength to take the weight of the structure,
undergo deformations compatible with those in the to resist the soil stresses at depth and to resist
surrounding soil without development of cracks. erosion.
10.2.1.2 As a whole, the diaphragm wall will 10.2.2.4 In addition to requirements stated above,
deform due to the following reasons: the mix shall also possess other properties, that is,
durability, erodibility and workability.
a) Due to the settlement of the structure, that
is, dam/barrage/ weir under its own weight; 10.2.2.5 Mix for plastic concrete/cement-ben-
b) Due to the settlement and deflection of the tonite shall have permeability of 10m6to 10s7cm/s.
foundation beds under the weight of the
10.3 Earth Backfilled Slurry Trench Diaphragm
structure;
Wall
C> Due to the horizontal deflections during
first filling of the reservoir; and 10.3.1 In this type of diaphragm wall the backfill is
d) Subsequently to the alternating loads re- generally made by mixing the in-situ materials ob-
lated to the use of the reservoir water. tained with slurry during excavation of the trench
and earth material from additional sources, if re-
Diaphragm walls shall, therefore, be constructed of quired. Ascement is not used, it will not be possible
materials which possess characteristics to to obtain compressive strength. Hence impervious-
withstand/adjust with such deformations imposed ness is the governing criteria.
without cracking. Ideal materials are those which
give the deformation characteristics similar to 10.3.2 Material to be used from additional sources
those of the surrounding soil. In case of shall be impervious clay. Moreover, materials ex-
homogeneous sub-surface soil, or when the varia- cavated from the trench with slurry shall be the
tion of Young’s Modulus of overburden soil with finer material obtained after screening to remove
depth is of low magnitude, materials having the coarser fractions. Thus, as such, mix design is
Young’s Modulus 4 to 5 times greater than the not required for this type of diaphragm wall.
over-burden soil are adequate.
10.2.1.3 Evaluation of the behaviour of the

11.1 Requirements of Slurry
diaphragm wall shall be made either by elastoplas-
tic method or by the finite element method. 11.1.1 Bentonite slurries, used for supporling cx-
cavation shall fulfil the following requirements :
10.2.1.4 The governing criteria is that the
diaphragm wall shall be impervious. a> Support the excavation by exerting hydros-
tatic pressure on its walls.
10.2.2 Concrete Mix
b) Remain in the excavation area and not flow
10.2.2.1 For plastic concrete diaphragm wall the into the soil.
water cement ratio shall not be greater than 0.5. C) Suspend detritus to avoid sludgy layer build-
ing up at the excavation base.
10.2.2.2 Mix design for flexible types of diaphragm
d) Clean displacement by concrete.
wall needs careful consideration. Modulus of elas-
ticity of surrounding soil shall be obtained by con-
e> Screening or hydrocycloning to remove
detritus and enable recycling.
ducting adequate number of triaxial shear tests in
conditions appropriate for loading. Mix shall have 9 Easy pumping.
modulus of elasticity 4 or 5 times greater than that To achieve these requirements the slurry shall have
of the surrounding soil. The modulus~of elasticity properties as given in Table 1. However, they shall
of the mix shall be obtained by conducting triaxial be confirmed to suit the site conditions.
IS I4344 : 1996
stable 1 Requirements of Slurry

(Clause 11.1.1)
Property Method of Test Permissible Value at 20°C

Density Mud balance or hydrometer 1.04 to 1.25 g/ml
yH value pH indicator paper strips ~9.5to 12
Viscosity Marsh cone method 28 to 42 seconds
Plastic Fann Viscometer < 2OcP
Viscosity Shearometer 1.4 to 10 N/m’
IO-minutes gel strength or vane shear apparatus (14 to 100 dyne/L&)
Sand content 75-microns sieve 1% to 25%
11.1.2 Sodium bentonite powder shall be 11.1.3 Relationship between concentration C of

thoroughly mixed with potable water to form a fully bentonite slurry expressed as percentage by mass
dispersed lump-free homogeneous slurry. Suitable and the density r, is given below:
slurry tanks shall be used for this operation. Use of
us = 1.0 + 0.006 C
a slurry pump with special nozzle (see Fig. 3) is
suggested for preparing bentonite slurry. Use of NOTE - This relation is valid for Indian bentonites and
represents an average sample. There may be some variation
paddle stirrer or other mechanical devices such as
of bentonites. Laboratory calibration may be prepared for
colloidal grout mixer (see Fig. 4), may also be made the bentonite samples actually used.
for proper mixing of slurry. Temperature of water
and the slurry used shall not be less than S’C.
BENTONITE IN
WATER SUPPLY IN
TO TRENCH OR PIT
CONE MIXER
INSET ‘A’
FOLDED WIREMESHOR EXPANDED DIAPHRAGM PUMP

METAL SHAPEDTO FORM FILTER
FIG. 3 SPECIAL NOZZLE AND SLURRY MIXING PLAN’I
ENTRANCES SET
TANGENTIALLY TO INDUCE VERTEX +
CEMENTWATER
-.- MIX
~~
PASSED THROUGH TO SECOND DRUM - ‘SECONDARY MIXING OF
CEMENT SAND AND
WATER
GROUTPASSEDTHROUGH THIS
CIRCUIT FOR INITIAL MIXING
TRAP TO COLLECT
SMALL STONESANDOTHER
FOREIGN MATTERS
CENTRAL SHAFT FROM PRIME

MOVER DRIVING PUMP
FIG. 4 FLOW DIAGRAM OF CONCRETE DOUBLE DRUM COLLOIDAL GROW MIXEK

11.1.4 Table 2 gives guidance on the proportion of strength andyH value shall be carried out until a
bentonite suspension to be used for different sub- consistent working pattern is established, taking
soils based on Marsh Cone viscosity. into account the mixing process, blending of freshly
11.1.5 Tests-to determine density, viscosity, shear mixed benlonite slurry with previously used slurry
9
IS 14344 : 1996
Table 2 Proportions of Hentonite Suspension for Different Sub-soils

(Ckzrrse 11.1.4)
Proporlion of Viscosily by
Slorry, Iwll Marsh Cone, s
1:lO 40-42
1:12 35-40
1:16 33-35
1:20 26-32
ancl any process which is to be employed to remove effects of the filter cake also contribute towards
. impurities from previously used bentonite slurry. trench stability. Hydrostatic pressure alone repre-
sents 65 percent to 80 percent of the total stabiliz-
11.1.6 When results show consistent behaviour,
ing forces. If the density of slurry used can provide
the~tcsts for shear strength and pH value may be
a factor of safctyofone, due to hydrostatic pressure,
discontinued and tests required to determine den-
then the factor of safety of the actual trench shall
sity and viscosity bc carried out.
be between 1.25 to 1.50. Therefore, taking only
11.1.7 Frequency of testing shall be on panel to hydrostatic pressure and consideringF= 1, the den-
panel basis where bentonite slurry becomes heavily sity of slurry may be calculated as indicated by the
contaminated with fine sand during its first use, and following formula. This formula shall be used as a
on a daily basis~whcre slight contamination is cx- guide only.
pcctcd. In cases where a mechanical process is
employed to remove contaminating solids from the
slurry, frequency of slurry testing shall depend on Nc Cu
equipment employed. F=
H(r - )‘S)
11.1.8 Prior to placing of concrete in any panel a

where
bentonite slurry sample shall be taken (about 0.2 m H =
depth of the trench,
from the trench bottom) and the same shall be
C” =
undrained shear strength of clayey soils,
tested for density. The sampling shall be done care- r =
natural density of saluratcd soil,
fully by an appropriate method. The density thus
Ts =
density of the slurry needed for the
determined shall not be greater than 1.25 g/ml to
trench, and
ensure satisfactory placing of concrete. If the slurry A’, = bearing capacity factor which varies from
hisfound to have heavier density, the same shall bc
4 at the ground surface to 8 for deeper
thinned till the required density is achieved.
depths, depending upon D/B and LIB
11.1.9 Suitable slurry pumps, submersible pumps ratio of the trench. This factor accounts
or air lift pumps shall be used for replacing the for arching action in horizontal as well as
contaminated slurry at the bottom of trench by vertical directions (see Fig. 5).
fresh bentonite slurry.
B For snndy soils :
11.2 Stability of Slurry Filled Trenches
,‘s = r,v+ A (K,l.r’)
11.2.1 Mixing of bentonite in water forms slurry,
where
which is used during excavation of the trench for
diaphragm wall. Water from the slurry bleeds into -PI k,,tallcp
the sides of the trench and leaves behind a thin A J-C
2n k, tan ‘p
densely packed collection of colloidal particles
commonly referred to as a ‘filter cake’. Hydrostatic Kn = tan’(45” - p/2),
force of the slurry, acting in combination with filter P = angle of internal friction,
cake, provides stability to the sides of trench. r’ = effective unit weight of the sandy soil,
11.2.2 Bentonite slurry filled in the trench imparts = rsat - rw ,
stability mainly by applying hydrostatic pressure Ysat = saturated unit weight of soil, and
on the wall, against the impermeable thin film rw = unit weight of water.
formed along thewall. Secondly, the slurry filled in The value ofA depends upon depth/length ratio of
the trench provides passive resistance against the trench (=n) (see Fig. 6). As a genera1 rule, level
failure of the trench, and thirdly, the shearing resis- of bentonite slurry in the trench shall be adequately
tance of the slurry saturated zone and the plastering higher than the water level.
10
1s 14344 : 1996
9 LENGTH tion, and reduces fluid loss by increasing the

- OFCUT +
,z WIDTH 1) viscosity of slurry.
n-
C) Cement contamination is counteracted by
phosphates. Calcium gets removed and clay
solids get dispersed. Phosphates decrease
pH value thereby lowering viscosity and
yield value of slurry.
d) Carboxymethyl cellulose, gums or
presheared asbestos may be used to increase
viscosity and reduce filter loss.
e) To remove fine silty solids and clay solids
2 4 6 8 10 12
from the slurry, flocculants such as vinyl
ii
acetate maleic anhydride co-polymer or
DEPTH polyacrylamides shall be used. Guar gum
OFCUT +
WIDTH can flocculate clays, carbonates, etc.
FIG. 5 STABILITYFACTORNC FOR 9 Pregelatinized starch can be employed as a
fluid loss control. It can also hc used as ;I
RECTANGWL,AR CUTS IN CLAY
protective colloid against the effcot of
electrolytes.
REDUCTION FAGfOR 12 EQUIPMEN’I AND ACCESSORll%
2 0.4 0.6 0.6 1,o
12.1 Trerrching Ecluipment
Depending upon the type ofsoil encountered at the
site and the depth, length and thickness of the
diaphragm wall to be constructed, suitable trench-
ing equipment shall be chosen. General trenching
equipment shall include rotary boring rigs, percus-
sion boring rigs, trenching bucket type shovels,
mechanical grabs, hydraulic grabs, grabs with kelly
bars, grabs controlled by suspended wire ropes ofa
crane, direct mud circulation boring rigs, reverse
mud circulation rigs and submersible mortar drills
for trenching equipment. For gravelly soils,
boulder deposits and rock formations, specially
designed chiselling equipment shall be considered.
n= Zl2b If required, methods in combinations of the above
may be used.
FIG. 6 REDUCTION FACTORA FOR EARTH
PRESSUREIN TRENCH OF LENGTH 2B (cd=O) 12.2 Slurry Preparation and Testing Equipment
Tanks of suitable sizes and slurry pumps of suitable

11.3 Additives
capacity shall be used for storage, mixing and cir-
11.3.1 Where saline or chemically contaminated culation of bentonite slurry at the site. A separate
ground water is present, special additives as listed water pump shall be used for water supply to slurry
below, have to be used to render bentonite slurry fit tank. Equipment for sampling the slurry from deep
for use. Theseadditives shall be used in very small trenches and testing its concentrations, viscosity,
amounts of-O.1 percent to 0.5 percent by mass of the pH value and hardness of ground water, in which
slurry the bentonite slurry and concrete are piepared,
a) Ferrochrome lignosulphonate in combina- shall also be used. Testing of slurry after con-
tion with soda ash or bichromate of soda, tamination with soil or cement indicates the need
shall be used for effective bentonite hydra- of disposal or reuse as the case may be. Vibrating
tion, if hardness of sea water exceeds 200 screens, hydrocyclones and centrifuges for cleaning
PPm. the bentonite slurry for reuse shall be employed.
b) Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (SCMC) is 12.3 Concreting Equipment
another additive sometimes used. It
protects slurry against effects of Concrete mixers, tremie pipes of suitable length
electrolytes, accelerates filter cake forma- and size and concrete pouring devices (manual or
11
IS 14344 : 1996
mechanical) shall be used according to the need of 13.2 In soft ground or fill, guide walls have to be
the work. Lifting arrangement for tremie pipes taken deeper. When ground water table is close to
shall be capable of doing the work with desired surface, guide walls higher than the surface level
speed. shall be constructed to maintain additional slurry
12.4 Lifting Devices head.
13.3 Clearance between finished diaphragm wall
Cranes of suitable capacity and boom length, der-
and guide wall shall be 50 mm minimum, for
rick or any other suitable auxiliary rig shall be used
straight panels. Clearance shall be suitably in-
for lowering the reinforcement cage in trench. If the
creased when the panels are curved.
weight of the reinforcement cage and height are
small, this work can also be done by winch and 13.4 Finished faces of the guide walls towards the
pulley arrangement provided on the diaphragm trench shall be vertical.
walling rig. Cranes or rigs with winches of adequate 13.5 Guide walls after construction shall be suitab-
capacity may be used for operating the trenching ly propped to maintain specified tolerance.
grabs as necessary. f3.6 Mesh or cage reinforcement shall be used in
12.5 Grouting Equipment guide walls.
Panel joints and bed rock below the concrete 13.7 Level of slurry in the trench shall be main-
diaphragm wall have to be grouted. Necessary tained at least up to bottom level of guide~walls.
equipment to perform this job efficiently shall be However, the level shall be increased if ground
used. water table is higher.
12.6 General Guidelines 13.8 For heavy trenching machinery, guide walls
shall be constructed with suitable ground slab (on
Selection of trenching shall be made to suit the soil
both sides of the walls).
conditions. Vibrations produced during construc-
tion shall not have any damaging effect or cause any 13.9 Guide walls get support from adjoining
sort of instability to existing structures. Considera- panels and, therefore, their construction shall be
tion shall be given to selection of equipment which done continuously.
are required to work on a site with restricted space 13.10 Cast In-Situ Diaphragm Wall
or head room.
13.10.1 Rigid type of diaphragm wall, or plastic
13 STAGES OF CONSTRUCTION concrete diaphragm wall, shall be constructed by
13.1 Pre-trench and Guide Walls resorting to either successive panel method or al-
ternate panel method. For cement bentonite slurry
A trench is excavated in advance for about 1 m to 2
trench diaphragm wall, or earth backfilled slurry
m depth. Reinforced concrete guide walls of 100 trench diaphragm wall, alternate panel method’of
mm to 250 mm thickness are constructed on both
construction is suitable in view of the time that is
the faces of pre-trench (see Fig. 7), they act as guides required to achieve hardness of the mix put in the
to trenching equipment during excavations. They
trench.
also provide support over the trench area subjected
to heavy construction surcharge pressures. Besides, 13.10.2 Successive Panels Method
guide walls define the planned path of excavation. In this method, a panel shall be cast in continuation
of the previously completed panel. Only one form
tube is needed for creating a joint with the
preceding panel. However, with larger width and
greater depth of diaphragm wall, it may not be
possible to use form tubes due to handling, lower-
ing~andextraction difficulties. In such cases, special
tools, like semi-circular chisels, are used to form a
joint with the preceding panel. Thus, use of ~form
tubes is eliminated. Rapid construction is possible
with this method. However, there is a probability of
insufficient hardening of the concrete in the
DIAPHRAGM WALL preceding panel with the subsequent possibility of
damage.
-j-+-j- NOTE - Form tubes of 1 m diameter and 30 m length have
I been successfully used.
I i
All dir&ensions
in’millimetres. 13.10.2.1 Excavation of successive trench panels
FIG. 7 PRE-TRENCHAND GUIDE WALLS (see Fig. 8A) shall be done with the help of suitable
12
IS 14344:1996
machinery. Trench panels shall be kept filled with 13.10.2.5 Stop end tubes shall be taken out
bentonite slurry of suitable consistency and vis- gradually after initial set of concrete. This has to
cosity during the excavation period. be done carefully with the help of a suitable crane,
13.10.2.2 Astop end tube with a smooth surface or or any other lifting device, so as not to cause any
a structural section shall be inserted in the trench damage or cracks in concrete at the panel end.
at the end of the successive panel to support con- 13.10.2.6 Suitable joints shall be adopted to form
crete and to form a suitable joint with the next a watertight joint between the panels.
panel.
13.10.2.3 The reinforcement cage shall then be 13.10.3 Alternate Panel Method
loweredinto the trench panel and shall be suitably 13.103.1 With alternate panel construction using
supported. Concrete cover for the reinforcement primary and secondary panels, strength developed
shall be maintained by use of spacers. in concrete will be sufficient before excavating the
13.10.2.4 Before placing concrete in the panel, the adjoining panel. Thus, there is no danger of
trench shall be properly flushed to clean the bot- damage to the concreted panel. In this method,
tom and to remove thicker suspension from the primary panels are cast first leaving suitable gaps in
bottom and lower levels. Density of the slurry shall between. Secondary panels are then cast in these
be checked by taking a sample about 0.2 m from the gaps (see Fig. 9). Two stop end tubes are used at the
bottom. If the density of the sample is found to ends of the primary panels to support concrete and
exceed 1.25 g/ml, flushing shall be carried out with to from a joint with the secondary panels.
fresh bentonite slurry. Concreting in the trench 13.10.3.2 Due to the space left by stop-end tubes,
panel shall be done through one or more tremie
primary and secondary panels are of different sizes.
pipes with suitable funnels (see Fig. 8B).
The end shape .of the panels will also be different.
However, shape of the primary end panel shall be
such as to form a good joint with secondary panels.
Other construction techniques are similar to those
of the successive panel method.
13.10.4 Direct Circulation Method
13.10.4.1 This method is used with -rotary or per-
cussion type of rigs where drilling fluid (bentonite
slurry) is pumped through drilling rods. It can be
used for successive panel or alternate panel con-
struction. Stages of construction are shown in Fig.
10. Simple trenching rigs for excavation are used.
Circular concreting tremie pipes for backfilling the
trench panel have to be used. This method is
suitable for shallow depths and for bringing up
lighter cuttings.
13.10.4.2 The trench panel is excavated by making
overlapping bore holes with bentonite slurry- jet in
combination with percussion and to and fro rotary
motion of jetting pipe, having a suitable cutter at
the tip. A special semi-circular cutter shall be used
for providing appropriate shape at each panel end
to form a suitable joint.
13.10.4.3 Operations of filling bentonite slurry in
the trench and lowering of reinforcement cage into
the trench panel are similar to those described
under successive panel method.
13.10.5 Reverse Circulation Method
13.10.5.1 The reverse circulation method shall be
used to make trench panels as shown in Fig, 11.
8B CONCRETItiG Forward and backward movement of the rig from
FIG. 8 SUCCESSIVEPANEL CONSTRUCTION one end of the panel to the other, increases the
(EXCAVATIONAND CONCRETING) depth of the panel in a zig-zag manner.
13
IS 14344 : 1996
13.11 Cement Bentonite Slurry Trench

Diaphragm Wall
13.11.1 For cement bentonite slurry trench
diaphragm wall it is preferable to use reverse cir-
culation method so that bentonite slurry at the
bottom of the trench is sucked out along with the
chiselled material.
13.11.2 At the end of excavation, the bentonite
slurry in the trench may have much higher density
than fresh bentonite slurry due to contamination of
soil. This bentonite slurry shall therefore have to
be replaced by fresh bentonite slurry having
predecided concentration.
13.11.3 The contaminated slurry is to be replaced
by keeping the volume of fresh slurry flowing into
the trench, equal to the volume of contaminated
slurry being pumped out from the bottom of the
trench. This is possible as contaminated slurry is
heavier than fresh slurry.
13.11.4 After complete replacement with fresh
bentonite slurry, samples of the bentonite slurry
shall be collected from one-third, two-thirds and
I = Primary Panels bottom depths of the panel to check uniformity of
II= Secondary Panels the slurry in the trench.
NOTE - Due to space left by stop end tubes primary and
secondary panels are of different sizes and panel end shape. 13.11.5 After filling the trench completely with
fresh bentonite slurry, a required quantity of ce-
FIG. 9 CONSTRUCTION OF PANELS
ment shall be added. Estimation of quantity of
cement required for a panel has to be done consid-
STAGE 1
ering full depth of wall, that is, up to platform level
BORE HOLE STAGE STAGE .3 and actual width of trench formed. For this pur-
REINFORCEMENT
I CAGE INSERTION pose, slurry from the trench shall be pumped out
STAGE 4 from the bottom of the trench into a mixing tank
CONCRETING THROUGH
having proper arrangements for mixing with ce-
OVERLAPPING BOR
ment. In this tank cement shall be added bag by bag
till the entire predetermined quantity of cement
gets mixed. While adding cement there shall be a
continuous flow of cement bentonite slurry from
the trench to the mixing tank and from the mixing
tank to the trench by gravity, that is, pumped out
and pumped in volume to remain equal. This
process shall be continued till required quantity of
cement is added to the Ijancl. Cement bentonite
slurry shall be kept in circulation for a further 15
minutes to ensure uniformity of mix. At the end of
circulation, samples shall be collected from one-
third, two-thirds bottom depths of panel to check
FIG. 10 STAGES OF DIAPHRAGM WALL CON- the uniformity.
STRUCTION BY DIRECT CIRCULATION METHOD
NOTE- For proper mixing of cement and bentonite slurry
it is very essential to have powerful pumps so that complete
13.10.5.2 High capacity pumps shall be used to circulation of cement bentonite slurry can be achieved for the
suck the loosened soil in the slurry‘filled trench. entire depth of trench within 10 minutes.
Separators, or sedimentation tanks, shall be used to 13.11.6 After mixing of the cement in a particular
retain the soil cuttings and to pass the slurry for panel, excavation for the adjacent panels can be
circulation and reuse. carried out after allowing minimum 7 days for
13.10.5.3 This method is suitable for greater cement bentonite slurry to attain sufficient
depths and to bring up heavier cuttings. strength. No form tubes are used for joints.
14
IS.14344 : 1996
FIG.~~ TRENCHEXCAVATIONBYREVERSECIRCULAI'ION MN-HOD
13.11.7 Cement bentonite slurry trench use of tremie, clam-shell or direct pushing into the
diaphragm wall is constructed without any joints trench, displacing the slurry.
between the panels. Hence, while excavating the
14 TOLERANCES
adjacent panel, over-cutting of the earlier cast
panel shall be carried out. In order to ensure 14.1 Guide Walls
proper over-cutting the excavating tool shall be so
Finished faces of the guidewalls towards the trench
selected that verticality is maintained.
shall be vertical. There shall-be no ridges or abrupt
13.11.8 Bleeding occurring on setting of cement changes on the face of the guide wall and variations
bentonite slurry shall be replaced by fresh cement from a straight line or a specified profile shall not
bentonite slurry, generally after 7 days of casting. exceed 25 mm in 3 m.
13.12 Earth Backfilled Slurry Trench 14.2 Diaphragm Wall
Diaphragm Wall
14.2.1 Verticality
13.12.1 An earth-backfill slurry trench diaphragm
wall is constructed by excavating a narrow vertical Faces of the wall and ends of the panel shall be
trench having width of 600 mm to 1500 mm. The vertical within a tolerance of 1:80.
process of excavating such narrow trenches is 14.2.2 In positioning of reinforcement, lon-
similar to those described in 13.10.2, 13.10.3, gitudinal tolerance of cage head at top of the guide
13.10.4 and 13.105. wall, measured along the trench, shall be 75 mm and
13.12.2 After the trench has been excavated to the vertical tolerance at cage head in relation to top of
final grade, it shall be ~backfilled with earthern guide wall shall be 50 mm.
backfih materials. This can be achieved by mixing
15 TESTING
in-&u materials obtained with slurry during excava-
tion of the trench and earth materials from addi- 15.1 Testing of materials to be used for the work
tional sources, as required, to obtain the desired shall be done in a laboratory to confirm their
engineering properties. The backfill is placed by usability.
15
IS 14344: 1996
15.2 Mix for rigid concrete, plastic concrete and 16.1.3 Piezometric Levels
cement bentonite slurry shall be designed in a
laboratory and testing shall be done to ascertain To judge the efficiency in watertightness of the
various parameters like compressive and tensile diaphragmwall, residual discharge collected down-
strength, permeability, modulus of elasticity, erodi- strea? of the cut-off wall is the essential measure-
bility,pH value, etc, to confirm that the design mix ment. This can be determined by a double network
satisfies the design requirements. of piezometers placed on either side of the wall and
well protected by filters. Chemical and physical
15.3 Samples of the mix at the time of placing shall analysis of the water may be useful to pinpoint its
be collected and kept in airtight sealed moulds of source. Observation frequency shall not be more
specified size till due~dates ofvarious tests. Impor- than 15 days.
tant tests to be performed are as under:
16.1.4 .Permeability
a) Compressive Strength
100 mm diameter tubes extending to random
This is the defined stress af which the
depths, shall be placed at the centre of the thickness
material will fail. Tests shall be carried out
of the diaphragm panels at randomly chosen loca-
at 7,28 and 90 days.
tions. After a period of 28 days bore holes may be
b) Triaxial Compressive Strength drilled into the diaphragm below the tubes and
Triaxial compressive strength tests shall be permeability tests by pumping in method carried
carried out on filling materials like plastic out. The in-situ permeability of the diaphragm
concrete, cement, bentonite, etc to deter- shall be compared with the specified limit as per
mine stress-strain characteristics, modulus requirements.
of elasticity and shear parameters. Tests 17 RECORDS
shall be carried out at 7, 28 and 90 days in
consolidated undrained conditions. 17.1 Following records shall be maintained’in a
manner approved by the Engineer-in-charge:
C) Permeability
Permeability tests on samples shall be con- a) Name of projWwork;
ducted after 28 days in a membrane b) Panel No. and reference drawing No;
permeameter. Cl Date of commencement and completion of
excavation;
16 INSTRUMENTATION (9 Date of concreting of panel;
e) Length of panel;
16.1 Placement of instruments simultaneously
with casting of the panel is difficult, as there~is a 9 Thickness of panel;
possibility of damaging the instruments, wires, etc, g> Top of guide wall level;
or loosing their sensitivity due to vibrations h) Depth of guide wall;
generated during placement of concrete. Ii is, j) Top level of wall as cast, in relation to top of
therefore, preferable to install the instruments guide wall at rhe edges and al the centre;
outside the completed diaphragm wall to measure Q Depth of panel from base of top of guide
in-situ performance. wall;
m) Strata encountered;
16.1.1 Deformation of the Smrcture
n) Volume of panel and volume of concrete
16.1.1.1 For the purpose of measuring deforma- used, slump, water-cement ratio;
tion behaviour of the diaphragm, inclinometers at PI Cubes taken and their results;
various locations shall be installed close to the Q) Details of reinforcement (Cage type);
diaphragm wall. r) Details of any obstructions/peculiar condi-
tions encountered and time spent and
16.1.2 Settlement Gauge measures taken in overcoming them;
Settlement gauges may be installed at selected loca- s) Amount of bleeding observed; and
tions to measure vertical displacements. Gauges 1) 5pe and proportion of any additives used
shall not have an error of more than 1 mm. and reasons for use.
16
IS 14344 : 1996
ANNEX A
(Clause 2.1)
LIST OF REFERRED INDIAN STANDARDS
IS No. Title IS No. Title

269 : 1989 Specification for 33 grade ordi- 1489 (Part 2) : Specification for Portland cement:
nary Portland cement (fourth 1991 Part 2 Lined clay based (third
revision) revision)
383 : 1970 Specification for coarse and fine 1498 : 1970 Classification and identification
aggregates from manual sources of soils for general engineering
for concrete (second rewkion) purpose (jirst revision)
432 (Part 1) : Specification for mild steel and 1786 : 1985 Specification for high strength
1982 medium tensile steel bars and deformed steel bars and wires for
hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement (third
concrete reinforcement : Part 1 revision)
Mild steel and medium tensile
1892 : 1979 Code of practice for sub-surface
steel bars (third revision)
investigations for foundations
455 : 1989 Specification for Portland slag (first revision)
cement yburth revision)
2116 : 1980 Specification for sand for mason-
456 : 1978 Code of practice for plain and ry mortars Qirst revision)
reinforced concrete (third revision)
4999 : 1991 Recommendation for grouting of
1139 : 1966 Specification for hot rolled mild pervious soils (first~revision)
steel, medium tensile steel and
6955 : 1973 Code of practice for sub-surface
high yield strength steel deformed
expioration for earth and rockfill
bars for concrete reinforcements
dam
(revised)
1489 (Part 1) : Specification for Portland cement: So41 : 1990 Specification for rapid hardening
Portland cement
1991 Part 1 Fly ash based (thit-d
revision) 12584 : 1989 Specification for bentonite for
grouting in civil engineering
works
17
BIS is a statutory institution established under the Bureau ofIndian Standards Act, 1986 to promote
Copyright
BIS has the copyright of all its publications. No part of these publications may be reproduced in any form
without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use, in the course of
Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director (Publications), BIS.
reviewed periodically; a standard along with amendments is reaffirmed when such review indicates that
no changes are needed; if the review indicates that changes are needed, it is taken up for revision. Users
of Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest amendments or edition by
referring to the latest issue of ‘BIS Handbook’ and ‘Standards Monthly Additions’.
This lndian Standard has been developed from Dot : No. RVD 08 ( 141).
Headquarters:
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110002 Telegrams : Manaksanstha
Telephones : 323 01 31,323 83 75,323 94 02 (Common to all offices)

NEW DELHI 110002 { 323 38 41
Eastern : l/14 C. I.T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Maniktola 337 84 99,337 85 61

CALCUTTA 700054 1 337 86 26,337 9120
Northern : SC0 335-336, Sector 34-A, CHANDIGARH 160022 60 38 43

1 60 20 25
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, MADRAS 600113 235 02 16,235 04 42
1 235 15 19,235 23 15
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri (East) 832 92 95,832 78 58

MUMBAI 400093 8327891,8327892
Branches : AHMADABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR.

COIMBATORE. FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD.
JAIPUR. KANPUR. LUCKNOW. PATNA. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
Printed at Dee Kay Printers, New Delhi-l 10015, India.

IS : 3370 ( Part I ) - 1965
( Reaffirmed 1999 )
Indian Standard
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR CONCRETE
STRUCTURES FOR THE STORAGE
OF LIQUIDS
PART I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
( Tenth Reprint AUGUST 1992 )
UDC 621’642 : 666’972
__
0 Copyright 1966

NEW DELHI 110002
IS:337O(PartI)-1965
Indian Standard
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR CQNCRETE
STRUCTURES FO,R THE STORAGE
OF LIQUIDS
Cement and Concrete &ctional Committee, BDC 2

Chairman Rejresenfing
SHBI I(. K. NAB~EZIAB The Concrete Association of India, Bombay
Members
SHBI N. H. MOEILE ( Alternak to
Shri K. K. Nambiar )
SHBI K. F. ~NTIA M. N. Dastur & Co ( Pvt ) Ltd, Calcutta
COL G. BENJAMIN Engineer-in-Chief’s Branch,_Armv, Headauarters
S~sr R. S. MEHANDRU ( Alternatc)~
SHBI P. S. BEATNA~A~ Bhakra & Beas Designs Organization, New Delhi
DB I. C. DOS M. Pam CUDDOU Central Water & Power Commission (Ministry of
Irrigation & Power )
SEXI Y. K. MTJBTHY ( Alternate)
SEBI N. D. D~BTAEY In personal capacity (Dutt Niwas, 27 Laburnam
Road, Bombay-7 )
SEEI N. G. DEWAN Central Public Works Department, New Delhi
SUPIO~NTENDING)ENOINEEFI,
2ND &ROLE ( Alternate)
Da R. R. ,HA~IANC+ADI The Associated Cement Companies Ltd, Bombay
Saar: V. N. PA1 ( Aknats )
SEBI P. C. HAZBA Geological Survey of India, Calcutta
JOINT DIBE~OB STAXDABDS Research, Designs & Standards Organisation ( Minis-
(B&S) try of Railways )
DEZQTY DIBEOTO~ STANDARIX~
(B&S) (Al&m&)
SHBI S. B. Josri~ S. B. Joshi & Co Ltd, Bombay
SHBI M. M. LAL U. P. Government Cement Factory, Churk
PBOB S. R. MEH~A Cen~l.$oad Research Instrtute ( CSIR ), New
DB R. K. GHOSH (Altemafe)
SERL S. N. MUKEBJI National Test House, Calcutta
Srutr N. ,C. SENQUPTA ( Alternate.)
SERI EBACIE A. NADI~~HAE Institution of Engineers ( India), Calcutta
SHSI C. B. PATEL National Buildings Organization ( Ministry of Works
& Housing)
SHRI R~BINDEB SIN~H ( Alternuts )
F’BOSG. S. RAYASWAMY Cent;Arkz;ilding Research Institute ( CSIR ),
SEBI M. G. TAMHANKAB ( Alternafe )
( Continuedon page 2 \
8UREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

NEW DELHI 110002
ISr3370(PartI)-1965
( Conlinucdfm )agc 1)
Saar T. N. S. RAO Gammon India Ltd, Bombay
Sam S. R. PINHEIRO ( Altema& )
REPRESENTATIVE Martin Burn Ltd, Calcutta
SEIU NIHAR CHANDRA ROY Dalmia Cement ( Bharat ) Ltd, Calcutta
SECRETABY Central Board of Irrigation & Power, New Delhi
DB BE. SUBBA~AJU Indian Roads Congress, New Delhi
SHBI J. M. TBEHAN Roads Wing, Ministry of Transport
SHRI N. H. KESWANI ( Alternate )
DE H. C. VISVLBVABVA, Director, BlS ( Ex-ofiio Member)
Deputy Director ( Civil Engg )
smclntv
Soar: Y. R. TANEJA
Eatra Assistant Director ( Civil Engg ), BIS
Concrete Subcommittee, BDC 2 : 2

Convcnn
SEXI S. B. JOEBI S. B. Joshi & Co Ltd, Bombay
Members
SHBI N. H. BEAQWANANI Engineer-in-Chief’s Branch, Army Headquarters
DR I. C. DOS M. PAIS CUDDOO Central Water & Power Commission (Ministry of
SBRI Y. K. MUBTEY ( Altcrnafe )
DEPUTY DIRECTOR STANDARDS Research, Designs & Standards Organization
(B&S) ( Ministry of Railways )
DIBECTOB Engineering Research Department, Hyderabad
SHRI V. N. GUNAJI Maharashtra Public Works Department
SERI M. A. HAFEICZ National Buildings Organization ( Ministry of Works
& Housing)
SRRI B. S. SHIVAMUBTHY ( AI&mate )
SERI C. L. HANDA Central Water & Power Commission ( Ministry of
SBRI P. C. HAZRA Geological Survey of India, Calcutta
SERI K. K. NAMBIAB The Concrete Association of India, Bombay
SHRI ,C. L. N. IYEN~AB ( Alternate )
Da M. L. Puxr Cent.Jlhyd Research Institute ( CSIR), New
PROB G. S. RAYASWAE~Y Central Building Research Institute ( CSIR )

Roorkee
Sasr M. G. TAMHANXAR (Al&note )
SHBI T. N, S. RAO Gammon India Ltd, Bombay
SHRI S. R. Praamso ( Alternufe )
S~JFERINTENDIN~ENOINEEB, 2ND Central Public Works Department, New Delhi
CIRCLE
SHRI 0. P. GOEL (A&mate)
SBRI J. M. TREEAN Roads Wing, Ministry of Transport
SHRI R. P. SIKKA ( Alternate )
DR H. C. VISVESVARAYA Indian Standards Institution
SHRI H. T. YAN Brai$vvz:taBurn 6% Jessop Construction Co Ltd,
a
Panel for Concrete Codes, BDC 2 : 2 : 1

SERI S. B. JOSHI S. B. Joshi & Co Ltd, Bombay
SHRI K. K. NAMBIAR The Concrete Association of India, Bombav
DR H. C. VISVESVARAYA Indian Standards Institution
2
IS:337O(PartI)-1965
Indian Standard
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR CONCRETE
STRUCTURES FOR THE STORAGE
OF LIQUIDS
0. FOREWORD
0.1This Indian Standard ( Part I) was adopted by the Indian Standards

Cement and Concrete Sectional Committee had been approved by the
Civil Engineering Division Council.
0.2 The need for a code covering the design and construction of reinforced
concrete and prestressed concrete structures for the storage of liquids has
been long felt in this country. So far, such structures have been designed
to varying standards adapted from the recommendations of the Institution
of Civil Engineers and of the Portland Cement Association with ‘the result
that the resultant structures cannot be guaranteed to possess a uniform
safety margin and dependability. Moreover, the design and construction
methods in reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete are influenced by
the prevailing construction practices, the physical properties of the
materials and the climatic conditions. The need was, therefore, felt to lay
down uniform requirements of structures for the storage of liquids giving
due consideration to these factors. In order to fulfil this need, formulation
of this Indian Standard code of practice for concrete structures for the
storage of liquids [ IS : 3370-1965 J was undertaken. This part deals
with general requirements. Three other parts of the code are the
following:
Part II Reinforced concrete structures
Part III Prestressed concrete structures
Part IV Design tables
0.3 Although the provisions of this code cover mainly structures for the
storage of liquids the general provisions of this code may also be applied
with such modifications as foun’d necessary, to suit the special conditions in
the design of reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete structures for
the conveyance of liquids, such as aqueducts and superpassages.
0.4 While the common methods of design and construction have-been
covered in this code, design of structures of special forms or in unusual
circumstances should be left to the judgement of the engineer and in such
3
ISr337O(PartI)-1965
cases special systems of

design and construction may be permitted on pro-
duction of satisfactory evidence regarding their adequacy and safety by
analysis or test or by both.
0.5 In this standard it has been assumed that the design of liquid retaining
structures, whether of plain, reinforced or prestressed concrete is entrusted
to a qualified engineer and that the execution of the work is carried out
under the direction of an experienced supervisor.
0.6 All requirements of IS : 456-1964* and IS : 1343-1960t, in so far as
they .apply, shall be deemed to form part of this code except where other-
wise laid down in this code.
0.7 The figures 1 to 7 given in this code are only diagramatic and are
intended merely to illustrate the definitions and principles given in the code
and need not be treated as preferred designs.
0.8, The Sectional Committee responsible for the preparation of this
standard has taken into consideration the views of engineers and technolo-
gists and has relatid the standard to the practices followed in the country
in this field. Due weightage has also been given to the need for interna-
tional co-ordination between the standards prevailing in different countries
of the world. These considerations led the Sectional Committee to derive
assistance from published materials of the following organizations:
British Standards Institution,
Portland CemeTt Association, Chicago, hSA, and
Institution of Civil Engineers, London.
0.9 For the purpose of decid,ing whether a particular requirement of this
standard is complied with, tHe final value, observed.,or cal+.dated, expres-
sing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960$. The number of significatit places retained in the
rounded off value shw)d be the same as that of the specified value in this
standard.
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard ( Part I) lays down the general requirements for the
&sign and construction of concrete structures, plain, reinforced or pres-
tressed concrete, intended for storage of liquids, mainly water.
The requirements applicable specifically to reinforced concrete liquid
retaining structures are covered in Part II.
_-__
*Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete revision).
(second
tCode of practice for prestressed concrete.
$Rules for rounding off numerical values ( rcmksd).
4
IS:337O(PartI)-1965
1.2 This code does not cover the requirements for reinforced and res-
tressed concrete structures for storage of hot liquids and liquids o P low
viscosity and high penetrating power like petrol, diesel oil etc. Special
problems of shrinkage arising in the storage of non-aqueous liquids and the
measures necessary where chemical attack is possible, are also not dealt
with. The recdmmendations, however, may generally be applicable to
the storage at normal temperatures of aqueous liquids and solutions which
have no deterimental actiofi on concrete and steel or where sufficient
precautions are taken to ensure protection of concrete and steel from
damage due to action of such liquids as in the case of sewage.
2. MATERIALS
2.1 The requirements for materials shall be governed by 4 of

IS : 4X-1964* and 4 of IS : 1343-1960t for reinforced concrete and pres-
tressed concrete members, respectively, with the following additional
requirements:
4 Porous aggre.gates- Under no circumstances shall the use of porous

aggregates, such as burnt clay and broken brick’ or tile, be
allowed for parts of structure either in contact with the liquids
on any face or enclosing the space above the liquid.
b) Prestressing steel - The prestressing steel for prestressed concrete

members of the structure shall comply with the requirements of
either IS : 1785-1961f. or IS : 2090-1962s.
2.2 Jointing Materials -Joint, fillers, joint sealing compounds, water
bars and joint cover plates shall conform to the requirements of relevant
Indian Standards.
3. CONCRETE MIX
3.1 Provisions in 5 of IS : 456-1964* and 4.2.5 of IS : 1343-1960t shall

apply for reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete members, respecti-
vely, subject to the following further requirements:
a) Except in case of thick sections as described in 7 and parts of
structure neither in contact with the liquid on any face nor
enclosing the space above the liquid, concrete mix weaker than.
M 20dshall not be used.
*Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete ( secondr~i~ion).

tCode of practice for prestressedconcrete.
$Spccification for plain hard drawn steel wire for pretrcsscd concrctc. ( Since revised
and split into two parts ).
$Spccilication for high tensile steel bars used in prestremd concrete.
5
IS : 3370 ( Part I ) - 1965
b) The minimum quantity of cement in the concrete mix shall be

not less than 330 kg/ms in reinforced concrete work, 360 kg/m*
in post tensioned prestressed work and 380 kg/m3 in pretensioned
prestressed work. The maximum quantity of cement in the
concrete mix shall preferably not exceed 530 kg/ma of concrete.
c) The design of the mix shall be such that the resultant concrete
is sufficiently impervious. The mix obtained in accordance with
the above, if fuIly compacted, will generally give a degree of
impermeability adequate for all ordinary purposes. In special
circumstances, the engineer-in-charge should satisfy himself that
an adequate permeability is obtained by percolation tests.
3.2 Pneumatic Mortar

3.2.1 The grading of fine aggregates for pneumatic mortar should con-
form in general to grading zone I or II specified in Table 3 of
IS : 383-1963*.
NOTE -Pneumatic mortar is mortar applied pneumaticalIy through a suitable
nozzle; it is used, for example, as cover to external prestrcssingsteel. A- qq internal
rendering.
3.2.2 The proportions of pneumatic mortar should be such that the
ratio ( by weight) of cement content to fine aggregate is neither less than
(~3 nor more than 0.5.
3.2.3 A suitable mix for final cover coat of pneumatic mortar is 50 kg
cement, 4.5 kg hydrated lime and 140 kg of dry sand of such size that it
will pass through 2.36 mm IS Sieve.
3.3 Imperviousness of Concrete Mix - In the construction of concrete
structures for the storage of liquids, the imperviousness of concrete is an
important basic requirement. The permeability of any uniform and
thoroughly compacted concrete of given mix proportions is very largely
dependent on the water-cement ratio. While an increase in this ratio
leads to an increase in the inherent permeability, a very much reduced
water-cement ratio of a mix with a given cement content may cause compac-
tion difficulties and thus may prove equally harmful. For a given mix
made with particular materials, there is a lower limit to the water-cement
ratio which can be used economically on any job. It is essential to select
a richness of mix compatible with available aggregates, whose particle
shape and grading have an important bearing on workability which must
be suited to the means of compaction selected. Efficient compaction
prefer&ly by vibration is essential. In practice, it is usually convenient,
particularly when dealing with thin congested reinforced sections, to specify
a cement content sufficiently high to ensure that thorough compaction is
obtainable while maintaining a sllficiently low water-cement ratio. In
*Specification for coarse and fine aggregatefrom natural sourcesfor concrete (r&red).
(Since revised 1.
6
IS:337O(PartI)-1965
thicker sections, where a reduction in cement content might be desirable to

restrict the temperature rise due to cement hydration, a lower cement
content is usually permissible, partly because the overall permeability of
~ the section is reduced by the greater thickness and partly because less
congested conditions may permit thorough compaction of a somewhat
drier mix.
While proper attention must be paid in achieving-a mix of inherently
low permeability, it should be recognized that common and more serious
causes of leakage in practice, other than cracking, are defects such as
segregation and honey combing and in particular all joints are potential
source of leakage.
The mixes as specified in 3, if fully compacted, will give a degree of
permeability adequate for all ordinary purposes. In special circumstances,
where necessary, the engineer should satisfy himself by a percolation test,
that an adequate degree of impermeability is obtained.
4. SI’I’F, CONDITIONS
4.1 The following conditions of the site in relation to the functional and
structural requirements of the liquid retaining ( storage ) structure materi-
ally influence the methods of design and the cost of the structure:
a) Physical characteristics of soil in which the liquid retaining
structure may be partly or wholly enclosed and also the physical
and geological features of the supporting foundations,
b) Extent of water-logging at the site, and
c) Chemical properties of the soil and of the ground water.
4.2 In making the choice of the site and in the preparation of the design
the factors mentioned in 4.1 should be taken into account generally as
indicated below:
Exfemal eurfhpr.~~e - Relief from external earth pressures either
wholly or partially should not generally be relied upon, unless
the operation of such pressures throughout the service life of the
liquid retaining structure is ensured. On the other hand, walls of
the liquid retaining structure shall be checked for external
pressures under empty or partially-empty conditions.
Water-logged ground - If in the sitting of a liquid retaining
structure, water-logged ground cannot be avoided, the dangers
of the external water pressure shall be carefully-_ guarded against
_
by the following: *
1) Designing the structure to resist such pressure under empty or
partially-empty conditions and taking precautions to prevent
floating and ensuring stable equilibrium under all conditions
of internal and external loads. It is advisable to make the
7
IS:i370(Pa*tI)-1965
design such that the ‘minimum gravity weight exceeds the

uplift pressure by at least 20 percent.
2) Providing under Boor drainage to reduce the level of the
external water as far as local conditions permit.
3) Providing relief valves discharging into the liquid retaining
structure when the external .pressure exceeds the internal
pressure; this arrangement is feasible only in cases when the
liquid retaining structure is not required for the storage of
liquids which should not be contaminated.
4) Designing both internal and external faces of the walls and
tloor as water retaining faces, where the walls and floors of
the liquid retaining structure are submerged in water or
water bearing soils.
4 Stability - The equilibrium and safety of structure and parts of
it against sliding and overturning especially when the structure
is founded on a side long or sloping ground, shall also be checked.
4 Sttthnent and subsidence- Geological faults, mining, earthquakes,
existence of subsoils of varying bearing capacities may give rise,
to movement or subsidence of supporting strata which may result
in serious cracking of structure. Special considerations should
be given in the preparation of the design, to the possible effect
of subsidence or movement of the foundation strata.
4 Injurious soils - Chemical analysis of the soil anu ground water is
essential in cases where injurious soils are expected to exist, as
concrete structure may suffer severe damage in contact with such
soils. The use of sulphate resisting cement will increase the
resistance to the action of certain injurious soils but may not
afford complete safeguard. An isolating coat of bituminous or
other suitable material may improve the protective measures.
5. PROTECYMON AGAlNST' CZORROSION

5.1 The type of liquid to be retained should be considered in relation to
the possibility of corrosion of steel or attack on concrete with corrosion
waters ( as in the case with certain natural waters ), it is desirable to use
richer and denser concrete and provide increased cover to steel. Consi-
derations may also be given to the use of special cements, such as,
sulphate-resisting cement or high alumina cement. Where attack is likely
to be appreciable the provision of an impervious protective lining should
be considered.
6. CONTROL OF CRACKING
6.1 Design of liquid retaining structures has to be based on the avoidance
of cracking in the concrete having regard to its tensile strength. Important
8
Is:337O(PartI)--1965
causes of cracking in concrete and measures to be adopted for avoiding

them are given below.
6.1.1 Design of reinforced concrete members shouId be made in accor-
dance with the usual principle of ignoring the tensile resistance of concrete.
Additionally, it should also be ensured that the calculated tensile stress on
the liquid retaining face of the equivalent concrete section ( after allowing
for the steel area in equivalent concrete units) does not exceed the limits
prescribed by this standard [ JCCTable 1 of IS : 3370 ( Part II ) - 1965’ ]
assuming in the calculations that the entire section of the concrete ( includ-
ing cover) participates in resisting the direct and flexural loads. The
permissible limits of tensile stress in the concrete fGr calculations relating to
resistance to cracking will naturally provide a much smaller margin of
safety against ultimate tensile strength of concrete because the consequences
of cracking are usually much less serious than those of structural failure.
In members less than 225 mm thick, the requirement of limiting’ the
tensile stress as given in 6.1.1 shall also be applied to the face remote from
the water retaining face.
6.1.2 Plain concrete liquid retaining structures or members may be
designed against structural failure by allowing tension in plain concrete as
per the permissible limits for tension in bending specified in IS : 456-1964t.
This will automatically take care of failure due to cracking. However,
nominal reinforcement in accordance with the requirements of
IS : 456-1964t shall be provided for plain concrete structural members.
6.1.3 The design of prestressed concrete members is based upon ’ no
tension ’ being developed in the concrete section under service conditions.
The design of prestressed concrete shall however be further checked against
cracking of the liquid retaining face with a load factor against cracking
_r* n
01 1.4.
6.1.4 Cracking may also result from the restraint to shrinkage, free
expansion and contraction of concrete due to temperature and shrinking
and swelling due to moisture effects. Such restraint may arise from:
a) the interaction between reinforcement and concrete during drying
shrinkage,
b) the boundary conditions at the foundations or other parts of the
structure, and
c) the differential conditions through the large thickness of massive
concrete. Some of the methods employed to control or prevent
such cracking are given in 6.1.4.1 to 6.1.4.6.
*Code of practice for concretestructuresfor the storage of liquids, Part II Rrinforccd
concrete structures.
tCcde of practicefor plain and reinforcedconcrete ( second revision ),
IS : 3370 ( Part I ) - 1965
6.1.4.1 Correct placing of reinforcement, use of small sized bars and

use of deformed bars lead to a difused distribution of cracks.
6.1.4.2 The risk of cracking due to overall temperature and shrinkage

effectsmay be.minimized by limiting the changes in moisture content and
temperature to which the structure as a whole is subjected. Underground
reservoirs can remain permanently wet. It will be advantageous if during
construction of such reservoirs thin sections below final water level could
be kept permanently damp. It will, however, be impracticable to main-
tain permanent wetness in elevated structures which unavoidably may be
left empty for a period.
6.1.4.3 Cracks can be prevented in thick walls ( or even in thinner

sections) by avoiding the use of thick timber shuttering which prevent the
easy escape of the heat of hydration from the concrete mass. Due to such
heat of hydration, the concrete wall is raised to a relatively high tempera-
ture which will be retained during the period the concrete hardens. On
removaIc&he form work, as the temperature of concrete falls to that of the
surrounding air, the concrete contracts. Such contraction will take place
without cracking if the free movement of the wall is unrestricted, but cracks
may subsequently develop where one or more of the edges are restrained.
6.1.4.4 The risk of cracking can also be minimized by reducing the

restraints on the free expansion or contraction of the structure. With long
walls or slab; founded at or below ground level, restraints can be
minimized by the provision of a sliding layer. This can be provided by
founding the structure on a flat layer of concrete (see Note ) with inter-
position of some material to break the bond and facilitate movement.
However, the length of the wall that can be kept free of cracks by the use
of a sliding lajier in its foundation is .strictly limited and is related to the
tensile strength of the wall section. In approximate terms, the tensile
strength has to be sufficient to overcome the resistance to sliding of one
half of the length of the wall. Control of cracking thus requires sub-
division of the structure into suitable lengths separated by movement joints.
The maximum length desirable between joints will depend on the tensile
strength of the wall and mav be increased by suitable reinforcement. The
effectiveness of movement joints in controlling cracking will depend not
only on their spacing but often on their precise location. This is a matter
of experience and may be characterized as the place where cracks would
otherwise develop, for example, at changes of section. The location of al!
movement joints should be indicated on the drawings.
NOTE -In normal circumstances this flat lsycr of concrete may be weaker than that
used in other parts of the structure, but not weaker than M 100 specified in
IS : 456-19645. Where, however injurious soils or agressive ground water are expected,
the concrete should not be weaker than M 150 specified in IS : 456-1964*, and if
necessary a sulphate resisting or other special cempnt should b used.
*Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete ( secondrrvirian ).

IS:3370(PutI)-lb65
6.1.4.5 Where reservoirs are used for reception or storage of hot

liquids, allowance should be made for the additional stresses produced by
difference in temperature between inside and outside of the reservoir. The
severity of the temperature gradient through the concrete can sometimes be
reduced by internal insulation.
6.1.4.6 Whenever development of cracks or overstressing of the
concrete in tension cannot be avoided, the concrete section shoukl be
suitably strengthened. In making the calculations either for ascertaining
the expected expansion or contraction or for strengthening the concrete
section, the following values of the coefficient of expansion due to tempera-
ture and coefficient of shrinkage may be adopted:
Coefficient of expansion 11 X IO-‘/%
Coefficient of shrinkage initial shrinkage on first drying
450 x 10-s of the original length;
drying shrinkage 200 x 10e6 of the
original length
6.2 Sustained stresses due to temperature and shrinkage effects may be
modified by ‘the occurrence of creep. This is often advantageous, for
instance, if the reservoir is filled at a slow rate ( a procedure which is
usually adonted ) the margin of safety against cracking may be increased
by the occur tence of creep. This procedure also has the advantage that
resaturatlon of the concrete before it is fully loaded will reduce the contri-
b&on which drying shrinkage might make to the formation of cracks.
6.3 Where reservoirs are protected with an internal impermeable lining,
the requirement that all cracking of the concrete be avoided should be
retained unless it is established on the basis of tests or experience that the
lining has adequate crack bridging properties.
7. THICK SECTIONS
7.1 Thick sections shall be those parts of structure which have thickness
greater than 450 mm. There is a likelihood of cracking in such sections as a
consequence of temperature rise during hydration of the cement and
subsequent cooling. Such cracking is not easy to control by reinforcement.
The following are some of the measures that may be adopted for reducing
the likelihood of cracking:
a) Magnitude of the temperature rise should be restricted by limiting
the cement content, or by using a type of cement with a low rate
of heat of evolution or adopting suitable construction methods;
Portland cements with lower rates or strength development
generally give lower rates of heat evolution. In such cases the
permissible stresses shall conform to requirements of 3.3. Tem-
perature rise may also be restricted by casting the concrete in ,-
11
shallow lifts at .intervals of a few days so as to allow the escape qf
part of heat from the exposed upper surface.
b) Steep temperature grading will occur by sudden chilling of the
concrete surface. This should be avoided, for instance, some
protection may be required when removal of heavy timber form-
work coincides with on set of cold weather.
c) Restraint to overall contraction may be limited by provision of
movement joints and by provision of suitable sliding layer
( see6.1.4.3 and 6.1.4.4 ). Another cause of restraint which may
lead to cracking occurs when a substantial lift of concrete is cast
upon a cold foundation. A better procedure is to avoid excessive
disparity in temperature between successive lifts and where prac-
ticable to introduce shallow lifts when starting from or resuming
work on a cold foundation.
‘I.!2 While concreting in thick sections, the requirements of IS : 456-196P
shall apply as far as possible.
8. JOINTS
8.1 Joints shall be categorized as below:
a) Movetnent Joints - There are three categories of movement joints:
Cfmtracfionjoint - A movement joint with a deliberate discon-
tinuity but no initial gap between the concrete on either side
of the joint, the joint being intended to accommodate contrac-
tion of the concrete ( see Fig. 1 ).
A distinction should be made between a complete
contraction joint (see Fig. 1A ) in which both concrete and
reinforcing steel are interrupted, and a partial contraction
joint (.see Fig. 1B ) in which only the concrete is interrupted,
the lemforcing steel running through.
Expa&m joint - A movement joint with complete discontinuity
in both reinforcement and concrete and intended to accom-
modate either expansion or contraction of the structure
(see Pig. 2).
In general, such a joint requires the provisron of an
initial gap between the adjoining parts of a structure which by
closing or opening accommodates the expansion or contraction
of the structure. Design of the joint so as to incorporate
sliding surfaces, is not, however, precluded and may some
times be advantageous.
*Code of practice for plainand reinforcedconcrete( ssrond
reuisian
),
12
lSz337O(Partl)-19G
DlSCClNflNUltY IN
CONCRETE BUT NO JOINT SEALING
INITIAL GAP\ ,-WATER BAR COMPOUND-\ ,,&lRIP PAINTING
OF
STEEL r/DISCONTINUITY IN
CONCRETE BUT NO
STEEL
IA INITIAL GAP
10
IA Complete Contraction Joint 1B Partial Contraction Joint
FIO. 1 TYPICAL ~N'TBWTION Joxx-~e
WATER BAR-\ It- INITIAL GAP
LY JOINT FILLER\
DISCONTINUITY IN BOTH
CONCRETE AND STEEL
Fm 2 A TYPIOAL FXPANSIONJOINT
3) Sliding joint - A movement joint with complete discontinuity

in both reinforcement and concrete at which special provision
is made to facilitate relative movement in place of the joint.
A typical application is between wall and floor in some
cylindrical tank designs ( se@Fig. 3 ).
b) Construction Joint-A joint in the concrete introduced for
convenience iri construction at which special measures are taken
to achieve subsequent continuity without provision for further
relative movement, is called a construction joint. A typical
application is between successive lifts in a reservoir w@l
(see Fig. 4).
:
13
1:357O(PartI)a65
STRIP PAINTING
JOINT SEALING
OR RUBBER PAD
FIG. 3 A TYPICAL SLILXNO JOINT
CONTINUITY OF
STEEL
Fxo. 4 A TYPICAL CONSTIKJCTIONJOINT
The position and arrangement of all construction joints

should be predetermined by the engineer. Consideration should
be given to limiting the number of such joints and to keeping
them free from possibility of percolations in a similar manner to
contraction joints.
4 Temprary Open Joints - A gap temporarily left between the con-
crete of adjoining parts of a structure which after a suitable
interval and before the structure is put into use, is filled with
mortar or concrete either completely ( Fig. 5A) or as provided
below, with the inclusion of suitable jointing materials ( Fig. 5B
and SC). In the former case the width of the gap should be
sufficient to allow the sides to be prepared before filling.
Where measures are taken for example, by the inclusion of
suitable jointing materials to maintain the watertightness of the
concrete subsequent to the filling of the joint, this type of joint
may be regarded as being equivalent to a contraction joint
( partial or complete ) as defined above.
8.2 Design of Joints -Design of a movement joint should aim at the
following desirable properties for its efficient functioning:
a) The joint should accommodate repeated movement of the struc-
ture without loss of watertightness.
14
fF.
i.
STRIP. PAINTING
INlTIAL GAP LAlER
INITIAL GAP LATER F;&;t;ffgH
FILLED WITH CONCRETE
NG
COMPOUND
SURFACES
5A 58
INIT STRIP PAINTING

JOINT SEALING C
FILLING
SC
Fm. 5 TYPXCAL TEMPORARY OPEN JOINTS
b) The design should provide for exclusion of grit and debris which
would prevent the closing of the joint.
c) The material used in the construction of movement joints~should
have the following properties:
1) it should not suffer permanent dutortion or extrusion and
should not be displaced by fluid pressure.
2) it should not slump unduly in hot weather or become brittle
in cold weather.
3) it should be insoluble and durable and should not be affected
by exposure to light or by evaporation of solvent or
plasticisers.
4) in special cases, the materials should be non-toxic, taintless or
resistant to chemical and biological action as may be specified.
8.3 Spacing of Joints - Unless alternative effective means are taken to
avoid cracks by>allowirng for the additional stresses that may be induced by
temperature or shrinkage changes or by unequal settlement, movement
joints should be provided at the following spacings:
a) In reinforcement concrete floors, movement joints should be
spaced at not more than 7*5 m apart in two dirbions at right
15
IS? 3370 ( Part I) - 1965
angles. The wall and floor joints should be in line except where
shdmg joints occur at the base of the wall in which case corres-
pondence is not so important.
For, floors with only nominal percentage of reinforcement ( smaller
than’fhe minimum specified ), the concrete floor should be cast iid
panels with sides not more than 4.5 m.
In concrete walls, the vertical movement joints should normally
be placed at a maximum spacing of 75 m in reinforced walls and
6 m in unreinforced walls. The maximum length desirable
between vertical movement joints will depend upon the tensile
strength ,of the walls, aqd may be increased by suitable reinforce-
ment. Thus when a shding layer is placed at the foundation ofa
wall, the length of wall that can be kept free of cracks depends
upon the capacity of wallsection to resist the friction induced at
the plane of sliding. Approximately the wall has to stand the
effect of a force at the plane of sliding equal to weight of half the
length of wall multiplied by the coefficient of friction.
Amongst the movement joints in floors and walls as mentioned
above, expansion joints should normally be provided at a spacing
of not more than 30 m between successive expansion joiitts or
between the end of the structure and the next expansion joint+11
other joints being of the contraction type.
When, however, the temperature changes to be accommodated
are abnormal or occur more frequently than usual as in the case
of storage of warm liquids or in uninsulated roof slabs, a smaller
spacing than 30 m should be adopted, ( that is a greater propor-
tion of the movement joints should be of the expansion type )
When the range of temperature is small, for example, in certain
covered structures, or where restraint is small, for example, in
certain elevated structures none of the movement joints provided
in small structures upto 45 m length need be of the expansion
type. Where sliding joints are provided between the walls and
either the floor or roof, the provision of movement joints in each
element can be considered independently.
8.4 Malsing of Joints -Joints shall gtarerally be made according to the
broad principles discussed in 8.4.1 to 8.4.3.
8.4.1 Construction Jo&t, -These should be set at right angles to the
general direction of the member ( see l&g. 4 ). The position and arrange-
men4 of construction joints should be determined by the engineer at the
de&ign stage and indicated on the drawings.
The surface film of the first-placed concrete should preferably be
rcmov?d whilst the concrete is still green to expose the aggregate and leave
a sound irregular surface. This may be eRected by spraying with water, -
16
IS:337O(P1lrtI)-1965
or air and water, assisted by light brushing, where necessary. If the con-
crete has been allowed to harden, it will be necessary to achieve the desired
surface by hacking the whole of the surface, care being taken to avoid
damaging the aggregate.
While the remainder of the concrete should be kept continuously wet,

curing of the joint surface may be suspended a few hours before concreting
is to be resumed so as to permit no more than superficial drying of the
joint surface. Just before concreting is resumed, the roughened joint
surface should be thoroughly cleaned and freed from loose matter, pre-
ferably, without re-wetting, and then treated with a thin layer of cement
grout, worked well into the surface, or treated with cement/sand mortar in
which water/cement and sand/cement ratios do not exceed those in the
new concrete. Special care should be takec to avoid segregation of the
concrete along the joint plane and to obtain thorough compaction.
Alternatively, for horizontal joints the layer of grout or mortar may
be omitted, provided that the workability offirst batches of concrete placed
in contact with the joint is slightly increased.
8.4.2 Movement Joints - These require the incorporation of special

materials in order to maintain watertightness whilst accommodating rela-
tive movement between the sides of the joint. Suitable materials for this
purpose are referred to in 8.5.
Movement joints, particularly those in floor and roof, also require
protection against the entry of debris which may interfere with the closing
of the joints.
8.4.2.1 Contrilction joints - The joints face of the first-cast concrete

should be finished against a stopping-off board, or vertical end shutter,
which, in the case of a partial contraction joint, should be notched to pass
the reinforcement.
Steps should be taken to prevent any. appreciable adhesion between
the new and the old concrete.
The joint should be suitably treated so as to maintain watertightness
during movement of the joint ( see Fig. E and 8.5)
8.4.2.i Expansion joints - These require the provision of an initial gap

between the concrete faces on the two sides of the joint and this can be
conveniently done by the use of materials discussed in 8.5. The initial
width of this gap should be specified by the engineer and should be suffi-
cient to accommodate freely the maximum expansion of the structure. In
determining the initial width, regard should be paid to the requirements ~
of the jointing materials. These will normally require the maintenance of
a certain minimum width of gap during maximum expansion of the /
k
17 ,
xs:3370(Part1)-1965
T METALLIC WATER BAR
WATER BAR
6B
TWO COAT STRIP

MOULDED WATER BAR
PAINTING
\
6C 6D
FIG. 6 TYPICAL DETA’LLBSROWINCZUSE OB JOINTINQ MATEBIALB TN
MOVEMENT JOINTB ( GINTIZACTION TYPE )
structure. The joint should be suitably treated so as to maintain water-

tightness during movement of the joint ( sod8.5 and Fig. 7 ).
8.4.2.3 Sliding joints - The two concrete faces of a sliding joint should
be plane and smooth.
Care should be taken by the use of a rigid screeding board or other
suitable means to make the top of the lower concrete as flat as possible.
This surface can usefully be improved by finishing with a steel float and
rubbing down with Carborundum.
Bond between the concrete of the two components should be preven-
ted by painting or by inserting building paper or other suitable material.
The joint should be suitably treated so as to maintain watertightness
during movement of the joint.
8.4.3 Temporary Open Joints - The concrete on both sides of the joints
Aould be finished against stopping off boards.
18
I!h337O(Par&I)-1965
+lETALLIC WATER BAR WATER BAR

/-JOlNT SEALING COMPOUND
YJOINT FILLER LJOINT FILLER
7A 78
,-JOINT FILLER
Cl CLAMPING
PLATE-I r COPPER JOINT COVER PLATE
r-GASKET
PLASTIC POINTING
RUSTLESS
BOLT
L‘cl PLATE CAST LJ~NT FILLER

f RUBBER WATER BAR
INTO CONCRETE
7c 70
LEAD CAULKING JOINT SEALING TWO COAT STRIP

SHEET LEAD JOINT COMPOUND7 r PAINTING
COVER PLATE
PAINT-/ /- JOINT FILLER 7F

7E STRIP PAINTING
JOINT ~EALI
COMPOUND
7G
Fro. 7 TEIOAL DXTAILE SHOWIH~ USE or JOINTR?G MATERI- IN MOVXMENT
JOIN- (EXPA?SSIONTYPE)
ISt337O(PartI)-1965
In order to minimize the extent of subsequent movements due to

shrinkage the joint should be left open until shortly before the reservoir is
put into service and then filled in with mortar or concrete of specified .
proportions. Where possible, the joint should be filled when the tempera-
ture is low.
Immediatly before filling the gap, the joint faces should, if possible,
be thoroughly cleaned and prepared in the same way as for construction
joints ( see8.4.1).
Where it is intended to treat this type of joint as equivalent to a
contraction joint for the purpose of this code, the joint should be suitably
sealed so as to maintain watertightness during subsequent movement of
the joint.
85 Jointing Materials -Jointing materials may be classified as follows:
a) Joint fillers,
b) Water bars and joint cover plates, and
c) Joint sealing compounds ( including primers where required ).
8.5.1 Jo& Fillers-Joint fillers are usually compressible sheet or strip
materials used as spacers. They are fixed to the face of the first placed
concrete and against which the second placed concrete is cast. With an
initial gap of about 30 mm, the maximum expansion or contraction that
the filler materials may allow may be of the order of 10 mm.
,’
Joint fillers, as at present available, cannot by themselves function
as watertight expansion joints. They may be used as support for an
effective joint scaling compound in floor and roof joints. But they can
only be relied upon as spacers to provide the gap in an expansion joint,
the gap being bridged by a water bar ( see Fig. 7 ).
85.2 Wafer Bars -Water bars are preformed strips of impermeable
material which are embeded in the concrete during construction so as to
span across the joint and provide a permanent watertight seal during the
whole range of joint movement. The most usual forms of water bars are
strip with a central longitudinal corrugation ( see Fig. 6A and 7A ),
Z shaped strip ( see Fig. 7B ), and a central longitudinal hollow tube ( see
Fig. 6B and 7C ) with thin walls with stiff wings of about 150 mm width.
The material used for the water bars are copper bars, sheet lead, natural
or synthetic rubbers ( see Fig. 7C ) and plastics such as polyvinyl chloride
( PVC ) ( see Fig. 6B ). Galvanized iron sheets may also be used with the
specific permission of the engineer-in-charge provided the liquids stored or
the atmosphere around the liquid retaining structure is not excessively
corrosive, for example, sewage.
Of the metals available copper is most suitable for use as water bar as
regards ductivity and resistance to corrosion in air, water and concrete.
20
Isr337O(PartI)-1!36!i
It may, however, be attacked by some wastes. If sheet lead is used, it

should be insulated from concrete by a good coat of bituminous or suitable
composition. Natural and synthetic rubbers and plastics have very consi-
5 derable advantage in handling, splicing and in making intersections.
With all water bars, it is important to ensure proper compaction of
the concrete. The bar should have such shape and width that the water
path through the concrete round the bar should not be unduly short.
The holes sometimes provided on the wings of copper water bars to
increase bond shorten the water path and may be disadvantageous. The
water bar should either be placed central* in the thickness of the wall or
its distance from either face of the wall should not be less than half the
width of the bar. The full concrete cover to all reinforcement should be
maintained.
The strip water bars at present available in the newer materials need
to be passed through the end shutter of the first-placed concrete. It cau
be appreciated, however, that the use of the newer materials make possible
a variety of shapes or sections. Some of these designs, for example, those
with several projections (see Fig. 6D ), would not need to be p&
through the end shutter and by occupying a bigger proportion of the
thickness of the joint would also lengthen the shortest alternative water
path through the concrete.
8.5.3 Joint Cover Plates -Joint cover plates are sometimes used in
expansion joints to avoid the risk of a fault in an embedded water-bar.
The cover plate may be of copper or sheet lead. If copper cover plate is
used it should be clamped to the concrete .face on each side of the joint
using suitable gaskets to e&u-e watertightness (me Fig. 70). If sheet
lead is used, the edges may return into grooves formed in the concrete and
be made completely watertight by lead caulking (see Fig. 7E). Faces of
the concrete to which sheet lead is to be fixed should be painted with bitu-
minous or other suitable composition and the lead sheet should be similarly
coated before fixing.
8.5.4 Joint Sealing Compounds -Joint sealing compounds are imper-
meable ductile materials which are required to provide a watertight seal
byadhesion to the concrete throughout the range of joint movement. The
commonly used materials are based on asphalt, bitumen, or coal tar pitch
with or without fillers, such as lime stone or slate dust, asbestos fibre,
chopped hemp, rubber or other suitable mater;?!. “rhese are usually
applied after construction or just before the reservoir is put into service by
pouring in the hot or cold state, by trowelling or gunning or as preformed
strips ironed into position. These may also be applied during construction
such as by packing round the corrugation of a water bar. A primer is often
used to assist adhesion and some local drying of the concrete surface with
the help of a blow .lamp is advisable. The length of the shortest water..
21
IS:3370(Part I)- 1965
path through the concrete should be, extended by suitably painting the
surface of the concrete on either side of the joint.
The main difficulties experienced with this class of material are in
obtaining permanent adhesion to the concrete during movement of the
joint whilst at the same time ensuring that the material does not slump or
is not extruded from the joint.
In floor joints, the sealing compound is usually applied in a chase
formed in the’ surface of the concrete along the line of the joint (see
Fig. 7C ). The actual minimum width will depend on the known charac-
teristics of the material. In the case of an expansion joint, the lower part
of the joint is occupied by a joint filler ( see Fig. 7F ). This type of joint is
generally quite successful since retention of the material is assisted by
gravity and, in many cases, sealing can be delayed until just before the
reservoir is put into service so that the amount ofjoint opening subsequently
to be accommodated is quite small. The chase should not be too narrow
or too deep to hinder complete filling and the length of the shortest water
path through the concrete should be extended by suitably painting the
surface of the concrete on either side of the joint. Here again a wider
joint demands a smaller percentage distortion in the material.
An arrangement inc&porating a cover slab, similar to that shown in
Fig. 7G, may be advantageous in reducing dependence on the adhesion of
the sealing compound in direct tension.
Using of sealing compounds for vertical joints is not very successful.
A stepped-joint instead of a straight through-joint with a water bar incor-
porated in the joint and sealing compound packed round the corrugation
of the water bar would be much more successful.
9. CONSTRUCTION
9.0 Unless otherwise specified in this code, and subject to the following
additional recommendations, the provisions of IS : 456-1964* and
IS : 1343-1960t shall apply to the construction of reinforced concrete and
prestressed concrete liquid retaining structures, respectively.
9.1 Thick Sections -The precautions necessary in the construction of
thick sections shall be observed as per requirements of 7.
9.2 Joints -Joints shall be constructed in accordance with requirements
of8.
9.3 Mixing and Placing of Pneumatic Mortar
9.3.X Mixing -The aggregate and cement should be mixed in an
approved mechanical mixer and delivered from an approved mechanical
*Code of practicefor plain and reinforced concrete ( second revision ).

*Code of practice for prestressedconcrete.
22
IS:3370(PartI)-1965
digester. The minimum amount of water should be injected into the

mixture as this will ensure maximum density of the mortar.
9.3.2 Placing -The pneumatic mortar should be applied with an
approved nozzle by a skilled operator. ..The velocity of the material leav-
ing’ the nozzle should be maintained uniform and should be such as to
produce minimum rebound of sand.
9.3.3 Cuting - Immediately after pneumatic mortar has been placed it
should be protected against premature drying by shading from strong
sunshine and shielding from the wind. As soon as it has hardened just
sufficiently to avoid damzge it should be thoroughly wetted and thereafter
kept wet continuously for at least seven days. Adequate protection
against fluctuations in temperature by shading and shielding, shall also
be given.
9.4 Construction of Floors
9.4.1 Floors Founded on the Ground
S.4.1.1 The ground should be covered with an at least 75 mm thick

plain concrete screed of composition as described in 6.1.4.4. Floors cast on
the ground should be in not less than two layers, the bottom layer of which
may comprise or replace the plain concrete screed. When the screeci forms
an integral part of the floor slab forming one of the two layers then the
mix for screed shall conform to the requirements of 3.
9.4.1.2 A layer of building paper or other suitable material should be
laid between successive layers.
9.4.1.3 The layers, other than the plain concrete screed, if used;
should be placed in panels, the sides of which should not exceed 7.5 m in
the case of reinforced slabs and 4.5 m in the case of plain slabs.
The tendency for the development of cracks in the upper layer of
paving slab or a reservoir Aoor is greatly diminished if the reinforcement is
discontinuous through the joints and it is recommended that the floor
panels be laid in chessboard fashion ( all the ‘ black ’ or a11 the ‘ white ’
squares first ). The edges of the panels in the bottom layer may be butt-
jointed and the panels in the various layers should be arranged to break
joint.
9.4.2 Suspended Floors - Floors which are not directly supported on the
ground should be cast in panels, the sides of which should not exceed
7-5 m. At joints in suspended floors, the surface of the panels for a width
not less than the thickness of the panel on each side of the joint should be
primed and painted with at least two coats of bituminous or other approved
paint.
23
IS:3S7U(YartI)-1965
9.4.3 Junction of Floor and Walls -Where the wall is designed ‘to be
monolithic with the bottom slab, a suitable arrangement of reinforcement
and form-work shall be made to facilitate the form-work to fit tightly and
avoid leakage of cement paste from newly deposited concrete as such leak:
age if allowed to take place is very liable to cause porosity in the finished
concrete. One such arrangement is by providing a continuous upstand
section of the wall cast at the same time, as, and integrally with, the slab;
the height of this upstand must be sufficient to enable the next lift of
form-work to fit tightly and avoid leakage of the cement paste from the
newly deposited concrete.
9.5 construction of Walls

9.5.1 In all cases where the reinforcing steel is discontinuous at vertical
contraction joints, the walls should be constructed in alternate panels with
as long a pause as practicable before the concrete is placed in the interven-
ing panels.
9.5.2 Where the reinforcement is continuous through vertical joints in
walls, construction in alternate panels may result in a greater tendency to
the’ development of cracks in those panels which are cast between two
earlier placed panels, the existence of which increases restraint of the
natural shrinkage of the intermediate panel.
9.5.3 The height of any lift should not exceed 2 m unless special
precautions are taken to ensure through compaction throughout by
me&a&al vibration or by other suitable means.
9.5.) All vertical joints should extend the full height of the wall in un-
broken alimment.
9.6 8Ivface Finish to Prastressed Concrete Cylindrical Tanks - The
circumferential prestressing wires of a cylindrical tank should be covered
with a protective coat, which may be pneumatic mortar, having a thick-
ness that will provide a minimum cover of 40 mm over the wires.
9.7 Formwork
9.7.1 Removal of Formwork - The requirements shall conform to 29.2.3 of
IS : 456-1964*.
9.7.2 Bolts passing completely through liquid-retaining slabs for the
purpose of securing and aligning the form-work should not be used unless
effective precautions arc takerrto ensure water-tightness after removal.
9.8 Lining of Tanks . - The type of liquid to be stored should be consi-
dered in relation to the possibility, of corrosion of thesteel or attack on-the
*Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete ( sand rmXon).
24
IS : 3370( Part I) - 1965
concrete. Provision of an impermeable protective lining should be consi-

dered for resistance to the effects of corrosive liquids. Certain natural
waters exhibit corrosive characteristics and in such cases it is important to
obtain a dense impermeable concrete and with a higher cement content.
An increased cover to the steel is also desirable. Use of sulphate resisting
portland cement, pozzolana cement, of blast-furnance slag cement may in
certain cases be advantageous.
10. TESTS ON STRUCTURE

10.1 In addition to the structural test of the structure, as given in 21.3 oi
IS : 456-1964*, the tanks shall also be tested for watertightness at full
supply level as described in 10.1.1, 10.1.2 and 10.1.3.
10.1.1 In the case of tanks whose external faces are exposed such as
elevated tanks, the requirements of the teSt shall be deemed to be satisfied
if the external faces show no signs of leakage and remain apparently dry
over the period of observation of seven days after allowing a seven day
period for absorption after filling.
10.1.2 In the case of tanks whose external faces are submerged and are
not accessible for inspection, such as underground tanks, the tanks shall be
filled with water and after the expiry of seven days after the filling, the
level of the surface of the water shall be recorded. The level of the water
shall be recorded again at subsequent intervals of 24 hours over a period
of seven days. The total drop in surface level over a period of seven days
shall be taken as an indication of the watertightness of the tank. The
engineer-in-charge shall decide on the actual permissible nature of this
drop in the surface level, taking into account whether the tanks are open
or closed and the corresponding effect it has on evaporation losses. For
many purposes, however, underground tanks whose top is covered may be
deemed to be water-tight if the total drop in the surface level over a period
of seven days does not exceed 40 mm.
10.1.3 If the structure does not satisfy the conditions of test, and the
daily drop in water level is decreasing, the period of test may be extended
for a further seven days and if specified limit is then reached, the structure
may be considered as satisfactory.
l Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete ( srcond misim ) .
25
BUREAU OF INDIAN STAND,ARDS
Headquarters;
Manak Bhrvan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, NEW DELHI 110002
Telephones : 331 01 31, 331 13 75 Telegrams : Manaksanrtha
( Common to all offices) ’
Regional Off7ces: Telephones i
Central : -Manak Bhavan, 9 Bshadur Shah Zafar Marg, 331 01 31
NEW DELHI-110002 [ 3311375
*Eastern : 1 /14 C.I.T. Scheme VI I M, V. I. P. Road, 362499
Maniktola, CALCUTTA 700054
Northern : SC0 445-446, Sector 35-C,
CHANDIGARH 160036 121843
31641
41 24 42
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, MADRAS 600113 412519
41 2916
twestern : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri (East), 6 32 92 95
BOMBAY 400093
Branch Oflces:
‘Pushpak’ Nurmohamed Shaikh Marg, Khanpur,
AHMEDABAD 380001 [ 26348
2 63 49
SPeenya Industrial Area, 1 st Stage, Bangalore Tumkur Road
BANGALORE 550058 1 38 49 55
56
Gangotri Complex, 5th Floor, Bhadbhada Road, T. T. Nagar, 66716
BHOPAL 462003
Plot No. 82/83, Lewis Road, BHUBANESHWAR 751002 5 36 27
53/5, Ward No. 29, R. G. Barua Road, 5th Byelane, 3 31 77
GUWAHATI 781003
5-8-56C L. N. Gupta Marg ( Nampally Station Road), 23 1083
HYDERPBAD 500001
6 3471
RI4 Yudhister Marg, C Scheme, JAIPUR 302005
16 98 32
21 68 76
1171418 B Sarvodaya Nagar, KAN PU R 208005
121 82 92
Patliputra Industrial Estate, PATNA 800013 6 23 05
T.C. No. 14/1421, University P.O., Palayam 621 04
TRIVANDRUM 695035 [ 621 17
inspection Off7ce (With Sale Point) :
Pushpanjali, 1st Floor, 205-A West High Court Road, 2 51 71
Shankar Nagar Square, NAGPUR 440010
Institution of Engineers ( India ) Building, 1332 Shivaji Nagar, 52435
PUNE 411005
*Sales Offlce in Calcutta is at 5 Chowringher Approach, P-0. Prlncep 27 66 00
Street, Calcutta 700072
fSales Office in Bombay Is at Novelty Chambers, Grant Road, 89 65 26
Bombay 400007
*Sales Office in Bangalore Is at Unity Building, Narasimharaja Square 22 36 71
Bangalore 560002
AMENDMENT NO. 1 COTOBER 1982
TG
ISd7D(Part I)-1965 CODE OF PRACTICE fOR CONCRETE
STRUCTURES FOR THE STORAGE OF LIQUIDS
Alterations
--- ---
(Page 3, oluu8e 0.3) - Substitute the following

for the existing clause:
'0.3 Although the provisions of this code cover mainly

3tructurer for the storage of liquids, the general
requirements given in Part I of this code my generally
apply to the design of reinforced concrete and
prestressed concrete structures for the conveyance
of liquids, such as aqueducts and superpassages; the
other requirements given in the code may also be applied
with appropriate modifications.'
(?age 6, ckxzaw 3.1, Zast line) - Substitute

'impermeability @F lpermeability'.
&$s 7s cZuu8e 3.3, t&e 13) - Substitute

'impemeability* for'permeability'.
@DC 2)
Printed at Slmco Printing Press, Dell?-

t
IS : 3370 ( Part II ) - 1965

( RealYhmed 1991)
Indian Standard ( Reaffirmed 1999 )
CODE OF PRACTKE FOR

CONCRETE STRUCTURES FOR THE
STORAGE OF LIQUIDS
PART II REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Tenth Reprint FEBRUARY 1992

( Incorporating Amendment No. 1 )
UDC 621.642:666.982
t
@ Copyright 1976

MANAK BHAVAN, 9 BAHADLJB SHAH ZAFAB MARG
NEW DELHI lloo(n
August 1976 I. , .i
Gr 4
IS : 3370 ( Part II ) - 1965
Indian Standard
STORAGE OF LIQUIDS
Cement and Concrete Sectional Committee, BDC 2
Chairman Rc~resenting
SRRI K. K. NABIBIAR The Concrete Association of India, Bombay
Mcm bus
Srr~r N. H. MoHILB ( Afternate to
Shri k. k. Nambia; )
SARI K. F. ANTIA M. N. Dastur & Co ( Pvt ) Ltd. Calcutta
COL G. I~KNJAMIN Engineer-in-Chief’s Branch, Army Headquarters
SNXI K. S. MEHANDRU ( Altarnatr 1
SrfRI P. S. RRATNAQAR Bhakra & Beas Designs Organization, New Delhi
Drr I. C. Dos M. PAIS CUDDOU Central Water h Power Commission ( Ministry of
SHRI Y. K. MLJRTIIY( Alfwnatc )
SAXI N. D. -DAVTARY ’ In personal capacity ( Dutt Niwiwb-r,27 Laburnam Road,
Bombay 7 )
SHRI N. G. DEWAN Central Public Works Department, New Delhi
SUPERINTENDINCA ENQINIPER,
‘LNDCIRCLE ( Alternate )
DR R. R. HATTIAN~ADI The Associated Cement Companies Ltd, Bombay
SHRI V. N. PAI ( Alternate )
SHRI P. C. HAZRA Geological Survev of India, Calcutta
JOINT DIRECTOR STANDARDS Research. Designs & Standards Organization
(B&S) ( Ministry of Railways )
DEPUTY DIRECTOR STAND-
ARDS ( B & S ) ( AknatC )
SRRI S. B. JOSRI S. B. Joshi & Co Ltd, Bombay
SIiRI M. M LAL ;.nS;$ovcrnmrnt Cement Factory! Churk
Poor S. R. MEHRA e Road Research Instltutc ( CSIR),
New Delhi
DR R. K. GHOSH ( Afternatr )
SHRI S. N. MUKERJI National Test House, Calcutta
SERI N. C. SENQUPTA( Altcrnatr )

NEW DELHI 110002
IS : 3370 ( Part II ) - 1965
~Continlled
frompage1 )
SHRI ERACA A. NADIRSHAH Institution of Engineers ( India ) Calcutta
SEEI C. B. PATEL National Buildings Organization ( Ministry of
Works & Housing )
SRRI RABINDER SIN~H ( Afternatc )
PROS G. S. RAXASWAMY Central Building Research Institute ( CSIR ),
Roorkc e
SHRI M. G. TIYEANKAR ( Altarnate )
SERI T. N. S RAO Gammon Indja Ltd; Bombay
SHRI S. R. PINREIRO’( &am& )
REPRU~NTATIVE Martin Burn Ltd: Calcutta
SERI NIHAR CEANDRA ROY Dalmia Cement ( Bharat ) Ltd. Calcutta
SECRETARY Central Hoard of Irrigation & Power, New Delhi
DR BH. SUBBARAJU Indian Roads Congress, New Delhi
SHRI J. M. TKEHAN Roads Wing, Ministry of Transport
SHRI N. H. KE~WANI ( Alfcrnafr )
DR H. C. VZSVEEVARAYA, Director, BIS ( Ex-o$icio Member ) I
Deputy Director ( Civ Engg )
SecreLary
SRRI Y. R. TANEJA
Extra Assistant Director ( Civ Engg ), ,BlS
Concrete Subcommittee, BDC 2 : 2

Conoener
SH~I S. B. JOSHI S. B. Joshi & Co Ltd, Bombay
Members
SHRI N. H. BHAQWANANI Engineer-in-Chief’s Branch, Army Headquarters
Da I. C. DOS M. PAIS CUDDOW Central Water & Power Commission ( Ministry of
Irrigation 82 Power )
SHRI Y. K. MURTHY ( Alternate )
D;~BVT,YSy~~~~~~ STANDARDS Research,. Designs & Standards Organization
( Muustrv of Railways )
DIRECTOR Engineering Research Department, Hyderabad
SERI V. N. GUNAJI Public Works Dcpartmexit, Government 01
Maharashtra
SHRI M. A. HAPEEZ National Buildings Organization ( Ministry of Works
& Housing )
SHRI B. S, SHIVAYURTHY ( Alternote )
Saab C. L. HONDA Central Water & Power Commission ( Ministry o
SHRI P. C. HAZRA Geological Survey of India, Calcutta
SEEI K. K. NAMBIAR The Concrete Association of India, Bombay
SHRI C. L. N. IYEN~AR ( Altenznte )
DE M. L. PURI Centr$hyad Research Institute ( CSIR ), New
PBO~ G. S. RAMASWAMY Central Building Research Institute ( CSIR )

Roorkce
SIIRI M. G. TAMHANKAR ( Alkrnatr )
( continued on page 1st
2
IS : 3350 ( Part II ) - 1965
Indian Standard
STORAGE OF LIQUIDS
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This Indian Standard ( Part II ) was adopted by the Indian Stan-
dards Institution on 19 November 1965, after the draft finalized by the
Cement and Concrete Sectional Committee had been approved by the
Civil’Engineering Division Council.
0.2 The need for a code covering the design and construction of rein-
forced concrete and prestresscd concrete structures for the storage of
liquids has been long felt in this country. So far, such structures have
been designed to varying standards adapted from the recommendations
af the Institution of Civil Engineers and of the Portland Cement Asso-
ziation with the result that the resultant structures do not possess a
uniform guaranteed margin of safety and dependability. Moreover, the
design and construction methods in reinforced concrete and prestressed
concrete are influenced by the prevailing construction practices, the
physical properties of the material and the climatic conditions. The need
was, therefore, felt to lay down uniform requirements of structures for the
storage of liquids. In order to fulfil this need, formulation of this Indian
Standard code of practice for the storage of liquids ( IS : 3370 ) was
undertaken. This part [ IS : 3370 ( Part II )-19651 deals with reinforced
concrete structures. Three other parts of the code are the following:
Part I General requirements

Part III Prestressed concrete structures
Part IV Design tables
0.3 Although the provisions of this code cover mainly structures for the
storage of liquids, the general provisions of this code,may also be applied,
with such modifications as found necessary, to suit the special conditions
in the design of reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete structures for
the conveyance of liquids such as aqueducts and superpassages.
0.4 While the common methods of design and construction have been
covered in this code, design of structures of special forms or in unusual
3
IS I 3370 ( Part II ) - 1965
circumstances should be left to the judgement of the engineer and in such

cases special systems of design and construction may be permitted on
production of satisfactory evidence regarding their adequacy and safety
by analysis or test or by both.
0.5 In this standard it has been assumed that the design of liquid retaining
structures, whether of plain, reinforced or prestressed concrete, is entrust-
ed to a qualified engineer and that the executron of the work is carried
out under the direction of an experienced supervisor.
0.6 All requirement of IS : 456-1964* and IS : 134%1960f, in so faf as
they apply, shall be deemed to form part of this code except whereother-
wise laid down in this code.
0.7 The Sectional Committee responsible for the .preparation of this
standard has taken into consideration the views of engineers and tech-
nologists and has related the standard to the practices followed in the
country in this fi:ld. Due weightage has also been given to the need for
international co-ordination among the standards prevailing in different
countries of the world. These considerations led the Sectional Committee
to derive assistance from published materials of the following organiza-
., tions:
British Standards Institution,
Institution of Civil Engineers, London, and
Portland Cement Association, Chicago, USA.

standard is complied with, the final value, observed or calculated, ex-
pressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960$. The number of significant places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this
standard.
ld SCOPE
1.1 This standard ( Part 11 ) lays down the requirements applicable speci-
fically to reinforced concrete structures for the storage of liquids, mainly
water. These requirements ate in addiiion to the general requirements
laid down in IS : 3370 ( Part I )-19655.
*Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete ( second raoision ).

+Codc of practice for prestrcsscd concrete.
SRules for rounding.off numerical values ( rmised ).
@Zodeof practice for concrete 8tructurcs for the storage of liquids: Part I Genenl
requirements.
IS : 3370 ( Part II ) - 1965
1.2 This code does not cover the requirements for reinforced and pre-
stressed concrete structures for storage of hot liquids and liquids of low
viscosity and high penetrating power like petrol, diesel ,oil, etc. Special
problems of shrinkage arising in the storage of non-aqueous liquid
and the measures necessary where chemical attack is possible, are
also not dealt with. The recommendations, however, may generally be
applicable to the storage at normal temperatures of aqueous liquids and
solutions which have no detrimental action on concrete and steel or where
sufficient precautions are taken ‘to ensure protection of concrete and steel
from damage due to action of such liquids as in the case of sewage.
2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Design and construction of reinforced concrete liquid retaining struc-

tures shall comply with the requirements of IS : 3370 ( Part I j-1965+.
3. DESIGN
3.1 General - Provisions shall be made for conditions of stresses that

may occur in accordance with principles of mechanics, recognized methods
of design and sound engineering practice. In particular, adequate consid-
eration shall be given to the effects of monolithic construction in the
assessment of bending moment and shear.
3.1.1 Before taking up the detailed design, the designer should satisfy
himself on the correct estimation of loads and on the adequate statical
equilibrium of the structure, particularly in regard to safety against over-
turning of overhanging members; in the latter case the general arrange-
ment should be such that statical equilibrium should be satisfied even
when the overturning moment is doubled.
3.2 Basis of Design

3.2.1 General basis of design shall be in line with the recommendations
of IS : 456-1964t except where otherwise specified in this code. The parts
of the structure neither in contact with the liquid on any face nor enclos-
ing the space above the liquid, as in case of staging of a water tower,
shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of IS : 456-1964t.
3.2.2 Design of .members other than those excluded by 3.2.1 shall be

based on consideration of adequate resistance to cracking as well as ade-
quate strength. Calculation of stresses shall be based on the following
*Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids: Part I General
requirements.
tCode of practice for plain and reinforced concrete ( second revision).
5
IS t 3370 ( Part II ) - 1965
assumotio:rs in addition to the generaiassumptions given in IS : 456-

1964’:
a) In calculations for both flcxure and direct tension ( or combina-

tion of both ) relating to resistance to cracking, the concrete is
capable of sustaining limited tensile stress, the whole section of
concrete including the cover, together with the reinforcement
being taken into account.
b) The total shear stress given by the following equation shall not
exceed the value given in 3.3.1 whatever the reinforcement
provided:
Total shear stress = - Q
b jd
where
Q = total shear,
b = breadth, and
jd = lever arm. ,
c) In strength calculations the concrete has no tensile strength.
3.2.3 Plain Concrete Structures - Plain concrete members of reinforced

concrete liquid retaining structures may be designed against structural
failure by allowing tension in plain concrete as per the permissible limits
for tension in bending specified in IS : 456-1964”. This will automatically
take care of failure due to cracking. However, nominal reinforcement in
accordance with the requirements of IS : 456-1964* shall be provided for
plain concrete structural members.
3.3 Permissible Stresses in Concrete
3.3.1 For Resistance to Cracking- For calculations relating to the resistance

of members to cracking, the permissible stresses in tension ( direct and
due to bending ) and shear shall conform to the values specified in Table
1. The permissible tensile stresses due to’bending apply to the face of the
member in contact with the liquid. In members less than 225 mm thick
and in contact with the liquid on one side, these permissible stresses in
bending apply also to the face remote from the liquid.
3.3.2 For Strcn@h Calculations - In strength calculations, the permissible
concrete stresses shall be in accordance with 8 of IS : 456-1964*. Where
the calculated shear stress in concrete alone exceeds the permissible value,
reinforcement acting in conjunction with diagonal compression in the
concrete shall be provided to take the whole of the shear.
*Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete ( second rcuirion ).

IS : 3370 ( Part II ) - 1965
TABLE 1 PERMlSSIBLE CONCRETE STRESSES IN CALCULATIONS

RELATING TO RESISTAi%CE TO CRACKING
( Clause 3.3.1 )
GRADE cm CONCRETE PIsR3IIssIlII.I~: S1’I~I.SSI.:R Sniwn

kg/cm2 == ( Q/hjd)
~-_-_-h-_--_._~
Direct Tension Dt~e
Tension to Bendin;;
M 150 11 15 15
M 200 12 17 17
M 250 13 18 19
M YOO 15 20 22
M 350 16 22 :!‘,
M 400 17 24 27
3.4 Permissible Stresses in Steel
3.4.1 For Resistance to Cracking - When steel and concrete arc assumctl
to act together for checking the tensile stress in concrete for avoidance of
cracks, the tensile stress in the steel will be limited by lhe rcquircment
that the permissible tensile stress in the concrete is not excccdcd; so the
tensile stress in steel shall be equal to the product of modular ratio of
steel and concrete, and the corresponding allowable tensile stress in
concrete.
3.3.2 For Strength Calculations - For strength calculations, the permissible

stresses in steel reinforcement shall be as given in Table 2.
3.5 Stresses Due to Drying Shrinkage or Temperature Change -
Stresses due to drying shrinkage or temperature change may he ignored
provided that:
a) the permissible stresses specified in 3.3 and 3.4 arc not otherwise
exceeded.
b) adequate precautions are taken to avoid cracking of concrete
during the construction period and until the reservoir is put into
use.
c) the recommendations of this code [see IS : 3370 ( Part I )-1365* ]
as regards the provisions of joints and for suitable sliding layer
beneath the reservoir are complied with, or the reservoir is to be
used only for the storage of water or aqueous liquids at or neai
ambient temperature and the circumstances are such that the
concrete will never dry out.
requirements.
IS : 3370 ( Part II ) - 1965
TABLE 2 PERMISSIBLE STRESSES IN STEEL REINFORCEMENT .FOR

STRENGTH CALCULATIONa
( Cfausc 3.4.2 )
SL TYPF.OFSTRERS IN STEEL PERMISSIBLE STRESSES IN kg/ems

No. REINFORCEMENT c----.-*-_------~
Plain Round Mild High Yield Strength
Steel Bars Conform- Deformed Bars
ing to Grade 1 of Conforming to
IS : 432 ( Part I )- IS : 1786-19li6t or
1966’ IS : 1139-1966~
(1) (3) (4)
i) Tensile stress in members under 1 150 1 500

direct tension
ii) Tensile stress in members in
bending:
a) On liquid retaining face of 1 150 1 500
members
b) On-f:lccaway from liquid for 1 150 I 500
members less than 225 mm
c) On face away from liquid for 1 250 1 900
members 225 mm or more in
thickness
iii) Tensile srrcss in shear reinforcc-
ment:
a) For mcmbcrs less than 1 150 1 500
225 mm thickness
b) For mcmbrrs 225 mm or 1 250 1 750
more in thickness
iv) Compressive stress in columns I 250 1 750
subjected to direct load
NOTE-Stress limitations for liquid retaining faces shall also apply to the
following:
a) Other faces within 225 mm of the liquid retaining face.

b) Outside or external faces of struc1urcs away from the liquid but placed in
water logged soils up to the level of the highest subsoil water level.
*Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire
for concrete reinforcement: Part 1 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars ( second
froision ) .
tSpccification for cold twisted steel bars for concrete reinforcement ( wised ).
SSprcification for hot rolled mild steel, medium tensile steel and high yield strength
steel deformed bars for concrete reinforcement ( rcuisrd ).
3.5.1 Shrinkage stresses may, however, be required to be calculated

in special cases, when a shrinkage coefficient bf 300 X lOa may be
assumed.
8
IS : 3370 ( Part II ) - 1965
3.512 When the shrinkage stresses are allowed, the permissible stresses,
tensile stresses in concrete ( direct and bending ) as given in Table 1 may
be increased by 33b percent.
3.5.3 Where reservoirs are protected with an internal impermeable
lining, consideration should be given to the possibility of concrete even-
tually drying out. Unless it is established on the b&is of tests or
experience that the lining has adequate crack bridging properties,
allowance for the increased ef&ct of drying shrinkage should be made in
the design.
4. FLOORS
4.1 Provisions of Movement Jointc - Movement jointsshall be pro-
vided in accordance with 8 of IS : 3370 ( Part I )-1965*.
4.2 Floors of Tanks Resting on Ground - If the tank is resting

directly over ground, floor may be constructed of concrete with a nominal
percent;ige of reinforcement ( smaller than the minimum specifird in 7 )
provided it is cert,lin that the ground will carry the. load without
appreciable subsidence in any part and that the concrete floor is cast in
panels with sides not more than 4.5 metrcs with contraction or expansion
joints between. In such cases a screed or concrete layet not less than
75 mm thick shall first be placed on the ground and covered with a sliding
layer of bitumen paper or other suitable material to destroy the bond
between the scrced and floor concrete.
In normal circumstances the screedlayer shall be of grade not weaker
than M 100 specified in IS : 456-19647, where injurious soils or aggressive
water are expected, the screed layer shall be of grade not weaker than M
150 specified in IS : +j6-1964t and if necessary a sulphate resisting or
other special cerhent should be used.
4.3 Floors of *auks Resting on Supports - If the tank is supported

on walls or other similar supports, the floor slab shall be designed as floors
in buiidings for bending moment,s due to’water load and sslf weight. The
worst conditions of loadings may not be those given in 9.3 of IS : 456-
1964?, since water level extends over all spans in normal construction
except in the case of multi-cell tanks, these will have to be determined by ii
the designer in each particular case. f
4.3.1 When the floor is rigidly connected to the walls ( as is grnerally

the case ) the bending moments at the junction between the walls and
floor shall be taken into account in the design of floor together with any
direct forces transferred to the floor from the walls or from the floor to the
wall due to the suspension of the floor from the wall.
requirements.
tCode of practice for plain and reinforced concrete ( second rruirim ).
9
IS : 3370 ( Part II ) - 1965
If tht: \v.rlls art: Il,)rl-motlolitllic with the floor slab, such as in cases
wvi!I’I’~*m:~v(:~r~t:!lt joilrts h;tve been providctl between the floor slabs and
w iii%,, tlrc fh)or shall be d:signcd only for the vertical loads on the floor.
4.3.2 III continuous T-beams or L-beams with ribs on the side remote
~I.OIII tlr(, li(luitl, the tension in concrete on the liquid side at the face of
till- sapports shall not exceed the permissible stresses for controlling cracks
in cl)rrcrcte. The width of the slab given in 9.2.2 of IS : 456-1964* shall
be made the basis for calculation of the rcsistancc to cracking of T-beam,
L-beam sections at supports.
4.3.3 The floor slab may be’suitably tied to’&e~~vaIls’by reinforcement

bars proprrly embedded in both the slab and the walls. In such cases no
separate beam ( curved or straight ) is necessary under the wall, provided
the wall of the rank itself is designed to act as a beam over the supports
under it.
4.3.4 Si~mctimes it rn;ry hc economical to provide the floors of circular

tarlks in the shape of dome. In such casts the dome shall be designed
for the vertical load of the liquid over it and the ratio of its rise to its
diameter shall Ix 30 adjrrsrccl that the stress&in the tlomr are, as far as
possible, wholly comprcssivc. The, dome shall be supported at its bottom
on the rirlg ?lram which shall be designed for resultant circumferential
tension in addition to vertical loads.
5. WALLS
5.1 Provision of Joints

5.1.1 Sliding jkints at the Base of the Wall - Where it is desired to allow
the walls to cspuid or contract separatrlv from the floor, or to prevent
moments at the base of tlte wall owing to fixity to the fl&or, sliding joints
may be emuloycd.
5.1.1.1 Consitlrrations affecting the Spacing of vertical movement

joints arc discussed in 8 of IS : 3370 ( Part I )-1965t. While the majo-
rity of these joints may be of the partial or complete contraction type,
sufficient joints of the expansion type should be provided to satisfy the
rrquiremcnts of 8 of IS : 3370 ( Part I )-19657. r
5.2 Prqmure on Walls 1

5.2.1 In liquid rct:lining structures with fixed or floating covers, the gas
pressure cl~v~~lc~l~cd ahove liquid surface shall be added to the liquid
pressure.
--
*r:ndr: of practice: fr,r plain and rrinforced concrete ( second reaisiotl ).
+~Adc of prar.:icc fol conc~c~c structures for the storage of liquids: Part I General
IS : 3370 ( Part PI ) - 1965
5.2.2 When the wall of liquid retaining structure is built in ground or

has earth embanked against it, the effxt of earth pressure shall be taken
into account as discussed in 4 of IS : 3370 ( Part I )-1965*.
5.3 Walls of Tanks Rectangular or Polygonal in Plan - While

designing the walls of rectangular or polygonal concrete tanks, the
following points should be borne in mind:
In plane walls, tbc liquid pressure is resisted by both vertical and
horizontal bcndillg moments. An estimate should be made of the
proportion of the pressure resisted’ by bending mclments in the
vertical and horizor,tal planes. The direct horizontal tens&n
caused by the direct pull due to water pressure on end walls should
be added to that resulting from horizontal bending moment. On
liquid rrtaining faces, the tensile stresses due to the combination
of direct horizontal tension and bending action shall satisf)J the
fLJllowing condition:
where
t’ = Calculated direct tensile stress in concrete,
t = Permissible direct tensile stress in concrete ( see
Table 1 ),
(set’ = Calculated tensile stress due to bending in concrete,
an d
Get = Permissible tensile stress due to bendir.g in concrete ( see
Table 1 ).
b) At the vertical edges <where the walls of a reservoir are rigidly
joined, horizontal reinforcement and haunch bars should be pro-
vided to’ resist the horizontal bending moments, even if the Ivalls
are designed to withstand the whole load as vertical beams or
cantilever without lateral supports.
c) In the case of rectangular or polygonal tanks, the side walls act
as two way slabs, whrreby the wall is continued or restrained in
the horizontal direction, fixed or hinged at the bottom and hinged
or free at the top. The walls thus act as thin plates subject to
triangular loading and with boundary conditions varying between
full restraint and free edge. The analysis of moment and forces
may be made on the basis of any recognized method. However,
moment coefficients, for boundary conditions of wall panels fog
some common cases are given in IS : 3370 ( Part IV )-1967t of
this code for general guidance.
-
*Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids: Part I General I
requirements. _
tCode of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids: Part IV Design
tables.
ii
IS : 3370 ( Part II ) - 1965
5.4 Walls of Cylindrical Tanks - While designing walls of cylindri-

cal tanks, the following points should be borne in mind:
4 Walls of cylindrical tanks are either cast monolithically with the

base or are set in grooves and key ways ( movement joints ). In
either case deformation of the wall under the influence of liquid
pressure is restricted at and above the base. Consequently, only
part of the triangular hydrostatic load will be carried by ring
tension and part of the load at the bottom will be supported by
cantilever action.
b) It is difficult to restrict rotation or settlement of the base slaband
it is advisable to provide vertical reinforcemeut as if the walls
were fully fixed at the base, in addition to’ the reinforcement re-
quired to resist horizontal ring tension for hinged at base condi-
tions of walls, unless the appropriate amount of fixity at the base
is established by analysis with due consideration to the dimen-
sions of the base slab, the type of joint between the wall and slab
and, where applicable, the type of soil supporting the base slab.
5.4.1 Coefficients
_ . for
_. ring
^ tension and vertical moments for ~-
different-_
conditions CJf‘ thr walls for some common cases are given in Is : 3370
( Part IV )-1967* for general guidance.
6. ROOFS
6.1 Provision of Movemtnt Joints - To avoid the possibility of sym-
pathetic cracking, it is important to ensure that movement joints in the
roof correspond with those in walls if roof and walls are monolithic. If,
however, provision is made by means of a sliding jnint for movement
between the roof and the wall, correspondence of joints is nc,t so
important.’
6.2 Loading - Fixed covers of liquid retaining structures should be
designed for gravity loads, such as the weight of roof slab, earth cover, if
any, live loads, and mechanical equipment. They should also be designed
for upward load if the liquid retaining structure is subjected to internal
gas pressure.
6.2.1 A superficial load sufficient to ensure safety with the unequal
intensity of loading which occurs during the placing of the earth cover
should be allowed for in designing roofs. The engineer should specify a
loading under these temporary conditions, which should not be exceeded.
In designing the roof, allowance should be made for the temporary condi-
tion of some spans loaded and other spans unloaded, even though in the
final state the load may be small and evenly distributed.
*Code of practice for cbncrcte structurer for the storage of liquids: Part IV
Design tables.
12
IS : 3370 ( Part II ) - 1965
6.3 Water-Tightness - In case of tanks intended for the storsge of water

for domestic purposes, the roof must be made water-tight. This may be
achirved bv limiting the stresses as for the rest of the tank or by the use
of the covciing of waterproof membrane or by providing slopes to ensure
adequate drainage.
6.4 Protection Against Corrosion - Protective measures shall be

provided to the lmderside of the roof to prevent it from corrosion due to
condensation.
7. DETAILING
7.1 Minimum Reinforcement
7.1.1 The minitnum reinforcement in walls, floors and roofs in each of

two directions at right angles shall have an area of O-3 percent of the
concrete section in that direction for sections up to 100 mm thick. For
sections of thickness greater than 100 mm and less than 450 mm the
minimum reinforcement in each of the two directions shall be linearly
reduced from 0’3 percent for 100 mm thick section to 0 2 percent for
450 mm thick section. For sections of thickness greater than 450 mm,
minimum reinforcement in each of the two directions shall be kept at
0.2 percent. In concrete sections of thickness 225 mm or greater, two,
layers of reinforcing steel shall be placed one near each face of the section
to make up the minimum reinforcement specified in this clause.
7.1.1.1 The minimum reinforcement specified in 7.1.1 may be
decreased by 20 percent in case of high yield strength deformed bars
conforming to IS : 1786-1966* or IS : 1139-1966t.
7.1.2 In special circumstances ( scu 4.2 ) fl:)or slabs may be constructed
with percentage of reinforcrment less than that specified above. In no
case the percentage of reinforcement in any member shall be less than
that specified in IS : 456-1964:.
7.2 Minimum Cover to Reinforcement

7.2.1 For liquid faces of parts of members either in contact with the
liquid or enclosjng the space above the liquid ( such as inner faces of roof
slab ), the minimum cover to all reinforcement should be 25 mm or the
diameter of the main bar, whichever is greater. In the presence of sea
water and soils and water of corrosive character the cover should be in-
creased by 12 mm but this additional cover shall not be taken into account
for design calculations.
‘Specification for cold twisted steel bars for concrete reinforcement ( reoisrd ).
t’ipeclfication for hot rolled mild steel, medium trnsile steel and high yield rtrength
steel deformed bars for concrete rcmforcement ( revised ).
*Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete ( second r&ion ).
13
IS : 3370 ( Part II) - 1965
7.2.2 For faces away from the liquid and for parts of the structure,
neither. in contact with the liquid on any face nor enclosing the space
above the liquid, the cover shall conform to the requirements of IS : 456--
1964*.
7.3 Size of Bars, Distance Between Bars, Laps and Bends - Subject
to the requirements of 7.3.1 and 7.3.2, details regarding reinforcement
such as size of bars, distance between bars, laps and bends in bars, and
fixing of bars shall comply with the provisions of IS : 456-1964* and
IS : 2502-1963T.
7.3.1 Bends in Bars - In bends in reinforcing bars, the local stresses on

concrete may be increased to three times the value pe.rmitted in 3.3.2 for
concrete in direct compression.
7.3.2 Laps in Bars - Bars should be lapped only when such practice is.
unavoidable. Where laps are used they should be designed in accordance
with the relevant requirements of IS : 456-1964’.
*&de of practice for plain and reinforced concrete ( second revision ).

vodc of practice for bending and fixiig of bars for concrete reinforcement.
14
IS : 3370 ( Part II ) - 1965
[ Continuad from page ? )

SHRI T. N. S. RAO Gammon India Ltd, Bombay
Sum S. R. ~INHRlllO : Alternate )
SUPAILINTENDINO ENOINEER, END - Central Public Works Department
CIRCLE
SHW 0. P. GOEL ( Alfernale )
SRRI J. M. TR~HAN Roads Wing, Ministry of Transport
SHRI R. P. SIKKA ( Altcrnare )
.DR H. C, VI~DSVAILAYA Indian Standards Institution
Srr~tr II. T. YAN Braithwaite Burn & Jcssop Construction CO Ltd
Calcutta
Panel for Concrete Codes, BDC 2 : 2 : 1
‘SIrRl S. B. JOSHI S. B. Joshi & Co Ltd, Bombay

.SHILI 1~. K. N.wsr.41~ The eoncrete Association of India, Bombay
Da H. C. VISVWVARAYA India Standards Institution
Headquarters:
Manak Ehavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg. NEW DELHI 110002
Telephones: 331 01 31, 331 13 75 Telegrams: Manaksanstha
Central : Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, 331 01 31
NEW DELHI 110002 I 331 13 75
*Eastern : l/14 c. I. -. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, 36 24 99
Maniktola, CALCUTTA 700054
Northern : SC0 445-446, Sector 35-C, 21843
CHANDIGARH 160036 I 3 1641
41 24 42
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, MADRAS 600113 41 25 19
I 41 2916
TWestern : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri ( East ), 6 32 92 95
BOMBAY 400093
Branch Offices:
IPushpak’, Nurmohamed Shaikh Marg, Khanpur, 2 63 48
AHMADABAD 380001 I 2 63 49
SPeenya Industrial Area 1st Stage, Bangalore Tumkur Road 38 49 55
BANGALORE 560058 38 49 56
I
Gangotri Complex, 5th Floor, Bhadbhada Road, T. T. Nagar, 667 16
BHOPAL 462003
Plot No. 82/83. Lewis Road. BHUBANESHWAR 751002 5 36 27
531’5. Ward No. 29, R.G. Barua Road, 5th Byelane, 3 31 77
GUWAHATI 781003
5-8-56C L. N. Gupta Marg ( Nampally Station Road ), 23 1083
HY DEPABAD 500001
6 34 71
R14 Yudhister Marg. C Scheme, JAIPUR 302005
( 6 98 32
117/418 B Sarvodaya Nagar, KANPUR 208005
{ ;: z; ‘ss
Patliputra Industrial Estate, PATNA 800013
T.C. No. 14/1421. Universitv P.O.. Palayam
TRIVANDRUM 695035
inspection Offices ( With Sale Point ):
Pushpanjali, First Floor, 205-A West High Court Road,
Shankar Nagar Square. NAGPUR 440010
Institution of Engineers ( India ) Building, 1332 Shivaji Nagar, 5 24 35 ‘t \
PUNE 411005
*Sales Office in Calcutta is at 5 Chowringhse Approach, P. 0. Princep 27 68 00

Street. Calcutta 700072
tseles Office in Bombay is al Noveltv Chambers, Grant Road, 89 66 28
Bombav 400007
$Sales Office in Bangalore is at Unity Building, Narasimharajs Square, 22 36 71
Bangalore 560002
c
Reprography Unit , BIS, New Delhi, India
_
/
AMEF!DNENT No. 2 /+Gusr 1981
TO
IS:337O(Part 2)-1965 CODE OF W4CTICE FOR CONCRETE
STRUCTURES FOR THE STORAGE OF L It&IDS
PART 2 REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Alteration
-w-w- .
(Rzge 3, clause 0.3; - Ebbstitute the follouiIlg

for the existing clause:
'0.3 Altbughth e provisions of this code cover mainly

structures for the storage of liquids, the general
requirements given in Part 1 of this codemaygenerally
apply to the design of reinforced concrete and
prestressed concrete structures for the conveyance of
liquids, such as aqueducts and superplssages; the other
kequiranents given in the code may al= be applied with
appxqriate modifications.'
(mc 2) i
Reprography Unit, BIS, New Delhi, India

( Reaffirmed 1991 )
DESIGN AID FOR ANCHORAGES FOR

SPILLWAY PIERS, TRAINING WALLS AND
DIVIDE WALLS
UDC 627’231’8 : 72’011
0 BIS 1993

NEW DELHI 110002
June 1993 Price Group 6

Spillwaps Including Energy Dissipators Sectional Committee, RVD 10
FOREWORD
This special publication gives a method for design of anchorages for spillway piers, training walls
and devide walls by computing stresses transferred to the base block from the piers/walls ( see
IS 12720 : 1993 ‘Structural design of spillway training walls and divide walls - Criteria’ and
IS 13551 : 1992 ‘Structural design of spillway crest and pier - Criteria’ ) with the help of suitable
tables.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this special publication, is
L
complied with, the final value, observed or calculated expressing the result of a test analysis,
should be rounded off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960 ~‘Rules for rounding of numerical values
~( revised )‘. The number of significant places retained in the rounded of value should be the
same as that of the specified value in this special publication.
b
ISBN 81-7061-040-O
SP 55 : 1993
DESIGNAIDFORANCHORAGESFOR
SPILLWAYPIERS,TRAININGWALLSAND
DIVIDEWALLS
1 SCOPE X Y
and b where x and y are the distances along
This Special Publication gives a method for the design
iF
horizontal and vertical axis from the origin as shown
of anchorages for spillway piers, training walls and in Fig. 1.
divide walls with the help of tables.
2.3 To obtain the stresses in the base block due to
2 METHOD ADOPTED FOR CALCULATION central wall, the following multiplication factors should
OF STRESSES be worked out:
2.1 Due to loading on the wall the stresses developed 6M

would be transferred to the base block and diffusion ~F -P and -
b ’ b b2
of stresses into the base block is of considerable
importance for determination of depth of anchorage The stresses due to unit value of shear force F,
of reinforcing bars. The wall may be an end wall moment M and normal force. P are given in the
(see Fig. 1) or central wall (see Fig. 2). The diffusion Tables 4, 5 and 6 respectively for different values of
of stresses would be in the quarter infinite block or
X
end wall, whereas it would be in the semi-infinite - and $ where x and y are the distances along
block for the central wall. b
horizontal and vertical axis from the origin as shown
2.2 To obatain the stresses in the base block due in Fig. 2.
to end wall, the following multiplication factors should
be worked out: 2.4 The actual horizontal and vertical stress should
be obtained by multiplying the unit values given in
F P M the tables with corresponding multiplication factor.
- , T- and -
b b2 2.5 For horizontal anchorage, OXdistribution is plotted
at different vertical sections and the total tensile force
where is calculated at each of these sections. The horizontal
anchorage steel is provided for the maximum tensile
F = shear force at the base of the wall, force obtained at these vertical sections.
P = normal force,
2.6 The vertical stresses in the base block would
M = moment at the base of the wall, and diminish as the depth increases. Hence, the vertical
b = base width of the wall. reinforcement in the wall may be continued up to
the depth where the tensile stresses developed are
within permissible limits.
The horizontai stress OX, the vertical stress cry and
shear stress txy due to unitvalue of shear force F, 2.7 Computations based on these tables for design
moment M, and normal force P, are given in the of anchorages for a divide wall resting directly over
Tables 1, 2 and 3 respectively for different values of the foundation rock are given in Amtex A.
b
I--!
4-l
P
F
I
M
3
I G- ORIG
Ik
F
X
Y
FIG. 1 END WALL FIG. 2 CI’NTRAL. WALL
SY 55 : 1993
Table 1 Stresses in End Wall Due to Unit Shear Force

( Clause 2.2 )
0.00 0.19 1.50 2.80 2.87 1.97 1.53 1.26 1.07

0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 1.13 1.50 1.13 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.32 0.96 1.35 1.47 1.37 1.20 1.07 0.96

0.25 -1.12 -0.51 0.00 0.27 0.28 0.12 0.06 0.03 0.03
0.00 0.46 0.71 0.58 0.46 0.35 0.25 0.18 0.13
0.00 0.13 0.45 0.64 0.80 0.87 0.88 0.84 0.80

0.50 -1.28 -0.64 0.00 0.92 0.32 0.22 0.15 0.09 0.07
0.00 0.06 0.23 0.34 0.42 0.39 0.32 0.26 0.21
0.00 0.02 0.10 0.25 0.40 0.52 0.59 0.62 0.62

0.75 -1.25 -0.77 -0.20 0.13 0.26 0.24 0.19 0.14 0.11
0.00 -0.06 0.02 0.16 0.27 0.31 0.31 0.27 0.24
0.00 -0.01 0.02 0.08 0.18 0.29 0.38 0.44 0.46

1.00 -1.08 -0.71 -0.31 0.02 0.17 0.21 0.19 0.16 0.13
0.00 -0.09 -0.06 0.04 0.15 0.22 0.24 0.25 0.23
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.03 0.09 0.16 0.23 0.29 0.32

1.25 -0.96 -0.67 -0.35 -0.08 0.08 0.15 0.18 0.16 0.14
0.00 -0.08 -0.09 -0.03 0.06 0.13 0.18 0.20 0.20
0.00 0.00 -0.01 0.00 0.04 0.09 0.14 0.19 0.23

1.50 -0.87 -0.61 -0.37 -0.15 0.00 0.09 0.14 0.14 0.14
0.00 -0.08 -0.10 -0.06 0.00 0.07 0.12 0.15 0.16
0.00 -0.01 -0.02 -0.01 0.01 0.03 0.08 0.12 0.15

1.75 -0.77 -0.57 -0.37 -0.19 0.05 0.04 0.10 0.11 0.12
0.00 -0.07 -0.09 -0.08 -0.03 0.02 0.07 0.11 0.13
0.00 -0.01 -0.02 -0.02 -0.01 0.01 0.03 0.07 0.10

2.00 -0.67 -0.53 -0.37 -0.22 -0.09 -0.01 0.06 0.08 0.09
0.00 -0.07 -0.08 -0.08 -0.05 0.00 0.03 0.08 0.10
NOTES
0.x
1 The order of listing of the stresses ux, uy, wy is (
\z,
2 The negative sign indicates tension and positive sign indicates compression.
SP 55 : 1993
Table 2 Stresses in End Wall Due to Unit Moment
( CZause 2.2 )
0.00 0.38 1.79 3.84 3.33 1.00 0.60 0.50 0.50

0.00 -0.60 -3.00 0.00 3.00 6.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.38 0.83 0.90 0.91 1.00 0.94 0.64 0.45

0.25 -5.10 -2.69 0.13 2.37 1.50 0.38 0.13 0.09 0.04
0.00 -0.73 -0.91 -0.43 0.50 0.28 0.27 0.22 0.13
0.00 -0.10 -0.19 -0.20 0.07 0.37 0.43 0.39 0.40

0.50 -3.71 -2.24 -0.19 0.14 1.34 0.69 0.27 0.12 0.08
0.00 -0.94 -0.97 -0.42 0.37 0.60 0.38 0.26 0.21
0.00 -0.26 -0.45 -0.51 -0.30 0.02 0.17 0.24 0.19

0.75 -2.43 -1.86 -0.38 0.77 0.97 0.73 0.37 0.20 0.14
0.00 -0.72 -0.90 -0.45 0.03 0.48 0.34 0.27 0.22
0.00 -0.12 -0.32 -0.47 -0.37 -0.27 -0.04 0.01 0.06

1.00 -1.66 -1.34 -0.51 0.32 0.53 0.50 0.40 0.18 0.18
0.00 -0.50 -0.70 -0.53 -0.13 0.22 0.24 0.20 0.19
0.00 -0.01 -0.18 -0.35 -0.38 -0.28 -0.20 -0.10 -0.09

1.25 -1.28 -0.94 -0.49 0.10 0.33 0.38 0.29 0.24 0.13
0.00 -0.35 -0.55 -0.34 -0.12 0.03 0.09 0.13 0.11
0.00 -0.07 -0.15 -0.31 -0.20 -0.29 -0.20 -0.10 -0.09

1.50 -0.89 -0.69 -0.37 -0.11 0.16 0.20 0.22 0.15 0.18
0.00 -0.27 -0.38 -0.33 -0.19 -0.10 0.00 0.03 0.09
0.00 0.02 0.01 -0.14 -0.30 -0.30 -0.27 -0.16 -0.12

1.75 -0.65 -0.52 -0.33 -0.18 -0.07 0.10 0.21 0.16 0.15
0.00 -0.16 -0.26 -0.27 -0.21 -0.14 -0.09 0.00 0.04
0.00 -0.02 -0.08 -0.14 -0.18 -0.19 -0.18 -0.16 -0.12

2.00 -0.50 -0.46 -0.34 -0.20 -0.06 -0.01 0.09 0.12 0.12
0.00 -0.12 -0.20 -0.22 -0.19 -0.17 -0.09 -0.04 0.00
NOTES
an
1 The order of listing of the stresses cm, cy, vcy is cry
\ TXY
3
SP 55 .: 1993
Table 3 Stresses in End Wall Due to Unit Normal Force

( Clause 2.2 )
QL.._ --
Ir----II 6
0.00 0.03 0.07 0.13 -0.25 -0.57 -0.46 -0.45 -0.43

0.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 I.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.03 0.03 0.06 -0.06 -0.19 -0.26 -0.29 -0.30

0.25 1.00 1.10 0.93 0.90 0.56 0.04 0.02 0.06 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.02 0.08 0.13 0.08 0.03 0.00 -0.01
0.00 0.02 0.01 0.00 -0.03 -0.09 -0.14 -0.17 -0.20

0.50 1.10 0.96 0.90 0.88 0.43 0.14 0.07 0.03 0.02
0.00 -0.02 0.05 0.10 0.24 0.16 0.08 0.03 0.01
0.00 0.00 -0.06 -0.06 -0.08 -0.05 -0.07 -0.09 -0.12

0.75 1.15 0.83 0.85 0.77 0.45 0:23 0.13 0.07 0.04
0.00 -0.02 0.06 0.17 0.22 0.18 0.11 0.06 0.03
0.00 -0.06 -0.09 -0.04 -0.03 -0.03 -0.03 0.04 -0.06

1.00 1.28 0.53 0.74 0.61 0.44 0.29 0.18 0.11 0.07
0.00 0.03 0.07 0.16 0.19 0.17 0.12 -0.08 0.05
0.00 -0.07 -0.06 -0.036 -0.02 -0.004 0.00 -0.01 -0.02

1.25 1.07 0.88 0.74 0.59 0.45 0.32 0.21 0.14 0.09
0.00 0.07 0.104 0.13 0.17 0.16 0.13 0.10 0.07
0.00 0.00 -0.003 -0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01

1.50 0.98 0.83 0.70 0.57 0.44 0.33 0.28 0.17 0.12
0.00 0.07 0.11 0.14 0.15 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.08
0.00 0.00 0.01 0.02 -0.02 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.02

1.75 0.90 0.75 0.66 0.55 0.44 0.34 0.26 0.19 0.14
0.00 0.07 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.14 0.13 0.11 0.09
0.00 0.00 0.01 0.02 osT3 0.03s Q.04 0.04 0.04

2.00 0.8? 0.13 0.63 0.53 0.44 0.35 0.21 0.21 0.16
0.00 0.06 0.10 -0.13 0.14 0.14 0.13 0.11 0.10
NOTES
i
1 The order of listing of the stresses cx, cry, cry is !
\5
4
SP 55 : 1993
Table 4 Stresses in Central Wall Due to Unit Shear Force

(Clause 2.3)
fZ:l
ORIGIN-, -
\
0.0000 0.6994 2.92.50*1.0246 0.6994 0.5394 0.4413 0.3742 0.3252 clx

0.00 o.oooo 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 00.0000 0.0000 0.000 0.0000 0.0000 OY
-1.0000 -1.0000 -1.0000 00.000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 =Y
0.000 0 0.3850 0.6023 0.6695 0.5820 0.4868 0.4131 0.3573 0.3142 0.x
0.25 0.0000 0.1273 0.2996 0.1469 0.0551 0.0255 0.0138 0.0084 0.0055 ay
-0.4502 -0.3929 -0.3471 -0.2851 -0.1707 -0.1082 -0.0741 -0.0539 -0.0409 WY
0.000 00.1474 0.2577 0.3488 0.3850 0.3734 0.3446 0.3134 0.2846

0.50 0.0000 0.1567 0.2546 0.2107 0.1273 0.0739 0.0449 0.0289 0.0196
-0.1817 -0.186
2 -0.2251 -0.248
9 -0.2112 -0.1614 -0.122
0 -0.0939 -0.0739
0.000 0 0.0598 0.1215 0.1873 0.2385 0.2627 0.2657 0.2574

0.75 0.0000 0.1273 0.2037 0.2022 0.1567 0.1098 0.0753 0.0524
-0.0805 -0.0978 -0.142
4 -0,180
6 -0.1848 -0.165
0 -0.1388 -0.1145
0.000 00.0269 0.0615 0.1019 0.1474 0.1788 0.1962 0.2024

1.00 0.0000 0.0959 0.1592 0.1754 0.1567 0.1254 0.0955 0.0717
-0.0405 -0.055
1 -0.0908 -0.126
9 -0.145
7 -0.145
6 -0.1342 -0.1188
0.0000 0.0134 0.0332 0.0612 0.0927 0.1210 0.1420 0.1551 0.1616 ax

1.25 0.0000 0.0720 0.1242 0.1469 0.1440 0.1265 0.1047 0.0841 0.0668 OY
-0.0227 -0.0332 -0.0595 -0.0892 -0.1110 -0.1204 -0.1196 -0.1126 -0.1028 WY
0.0000 0.0072 0.0191 0.0373 0.0598 0.0826 0.1024 0.1174 0.1275 ox

1.50 0.0000 0.0551 0.0979 0.1219 0.1273 0.1198 0.1058 0.0899 0.0749 w
-0.0138 -0.0212 -0.0403 -0.063
6 -0.0839 -0.096
9 -0.1021 -0.1013 -0.0967 WY
0.0000 0.0026 0.0074 0.0155 0.0269 0.0403 0.0541 0.0670 0.0780 ux

2.00 0.0000 0.0343 0.0637 0.0845 0.0959 0.0988 0.0955 0.0884 0.0795 OY
-0.0062 -0.0100 -0.0203 -0.0343 -0.0490 -0.061
5 -0.0706 -0.0759 -0.0779 =J
* atx/b = 0.49andy/b = 0
Note-Positive
signindicates
compressive
stresses
andnegative
signindicatestensile
stresses.
5
SP55 : 1993
Table 5 Stresses in Central Wall Due to Unit Moment

( Clause 2.3 )
PyY=2
’
“““c.”:‘lljl/’ .‘/”
0.000 0 +0.500 0 1.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.0000 cm

0.00 0.000 0 to.500 0 1.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.0000 ay
0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 lxy
o.ooo0 0.004 0 0.046 0 0.092 9 0.050 4 0.027 0 0.015 8 0.010 0 0.006 7 0.x
0.25 0.000 0 0.387 5 0.347 1 0.060 4 0.011 1 0.003 1 0.001 1 0.000 5 0.000 2
0.225 1 0.132 8 -0.126 0 -0.077 8 -0.024 8 -0.009 6 -0.004 4 -0.002 3 -0.0013 zy
0.000 0 -0.054 4 -0.032 6 0.024 5 0.037 5 0.030 1 0.021 5 0.015 2 0.010 9 ux

0.50 0.000 0 0.210 6 0.225 1 0.109 9 0.040 5 0.015 5 0.006 6 0.003 1 0.001 6 uy
0.181 7 0.107 8 -0.029 6 -0.067 3 -0.043 4 -0.023 4 -0.012 8 -0.007 4 -0.004 5 uy
0.000 0 -0.040 8 -0.039 8 -0.010 0 -0.011 9 0.018 5 0.017 7 0.014 8 0.011 8 ux

0.75 0.000 0 0.112 5 0.142 4 0.102 4 0.056 3 0.028 4 0.014 5 0.007 7 0.004 3 a,
0.120 8 0.083 0 0.009 8 -0.032 4 -0.036 2 -0.026 9 -0.017 9 -0.011 7 -0.007 7 ury
0.000 0 -0.026 2 -0.032 1 -0.019 4 -0.003 6 -0.006 4 0.010 4 0.011 0 0.010 1 0x

1.00 0.000 0 0.063 5 0.090 8 0.080 7 0.056 3 0.034 9 0.020 8 0.012 4 0.007 5 OY
0.0810 0.062 3 0.022 5 0.009 3 -0.022 1 -0.022 2 -0.018 0 -0.013 4 O.tjO9 8 “XY
0.000 0 -0.016 8 -0.023 6 -0.019 3 0.009 9 -0.0015 0.003 8 0.006 4 0.007 2 (7x
1.25 0.000 0 0.038 2 0.059 5 0.060 4 0.049 2 0.035 4 0.023 9 0.015 8 0.0104 ay
0.056 8 0.047 0 0.024 5 0.002 7 -0.010 5 -0.015 2 -0.015 0 -0.012 8 -0.0102 my
0.000 0 -0.011 1 -0.017 1 -0.016 4 -0.0115 -0.005 6 -0.000 8 0.002 4 0.004 2 (Jx
1.50 0.000 0 0.024 4 0.040 3 0.044 7 0.040 5 0.032 5 0.024 3 0.017 5 0.012 3 aY
0.041 5 0.036 1 0.022 8 0.008 2 -0.002 9 -0.008 9 -0.011 0 -0.010 7 -0.009 5 TXY
0.000 0 -0.007 6 -0.012 4 -0.013 3 -0.010 9 -0.007 2 -0.003 4 -0.000 4 -0.001 6 (7x
1.75 0.000 0 0.016 3 0.028 1 0.033 3 0.032 6 0.028 4 0.023 0 0.017 7 0.013 3 ay
0.031 5 0.028 3 0.020 1 0.010 2 0.001 6 -0.004 2 0.007 2 -0.008 2 -0.008 0 “XY
0.000 0 -0.005 4 -0.009 2 -0.010 5 -0.009 6 -0.007 4 -0.004 7 -0.002 2 -0.0002 ax

2.00 0.000 0 0.011 4 0.020 3 0.025 1 0.026 0 0.024 1 0.020 8 0.017 0 0.013 5 ay
0.024 7 0.022 7 0.017 4 0.010 6 0.004 1 -0.000 9 -0.004 1 -0.005 8 -0.006 4 =Y
NOTE-Positive sign indicates compressive stresses and negative sign indicates tensile stresses.
SP 55 : 1993
Table 6 Stresses in Central Wall Due to Unit Normal Force

(Clause 2.3)
P-1 I ORIGIN
+l.OOO 0 +l.OOO0 1.000 0 o.OQO0 o.oooo 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.0000 crx
0.00 +l.Otxl 0 t1.000 0 1.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0
0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.0000 :y
0.450 2 0.392 9 0.347 1 0.285 1 0.170 7 0.108 2 0.074 1 0.053 9 0.0409 0x

0.25 0.959 5 0.902 2 0.496 9 0.089 2 0.019 3 0.006 3 0.002 7 0.0013 0.0007 cly
0.000 0 -0.127 3 -0.299 6 -0.146 9 -0.055 1 -0.025 5 -0.013 8 -0.008 4 -0.005 5 uy
0.181 7 0.186 2 0.225 1 0.248 9 0.2112 0.161 4 0.122 0 0.093 9 0.073 9 ax

0.50 0.818 3 0.734 7 0.479 7 0.213 7 0.083 9 0.035 8 0.017 2 0.009 2 0.005 3
0.000 0 -0.156 7 -0.254 6 -0.210 7 -0.127 3 -0.073 9 -0.044 9 -0.028 9 -0.019 6 s
0.080 5 0.097 8 0.142 4 0.180 6 0.184 8 0.165 0 0.138 8 0.114 5 0.094 5 ax

0.75 0.668 2 0.607 1 0.448 0 0.270 5 0.145 7 0.077 2 0.042 5 0.0217 0.015~1
0.000 0 -0.127 3 -0.203 7 -0.202 2 -0.156 7 -0.109 8 -0.075 3 -0.052 4 -0.037 4 z$
0.040 5 0.055 1 0.090 8 0.126 9 0.145 7 0.145 6 0.134 2 0.118 8 0.103 2 ax

1.00 0.549 8 0.510 5 0.409 2 0.287 6 0.184 8 0.114 2 0.070 6 0.044 5 0.028 9 ay
0.000 0 -0.095 9 -0.159 2 -0.175 4 -0.156 7 -0.125 4 -0.095 5 -0.0717 -0.0540 *y
0.022 7 0.033 2 0.059 5 0.089 2 0.1110 0.120 4 0.119 6 0.112 6 0.102 8 ax

1.25 0.461 8 0.436 5 0.370 0 0.285 1 0.204 5 0.140 7 0.095 2 0.064 6 0.044 3
0.000 0 -0.072 0 -0.124 2 -0.146 9 -0.144 0 -0.126 5 -0.104 7 -0.084 1 -0.066 8 $
0.013 8 0.021 2 0.040 3 0.063 6 0.083 9 0.096 9 0.102 1 0.101 3 0.096 7 ax

1.50 0.395 8 0.379 1 0.334 1 0.273 5 0.211 2 0.156 8 0.113 9 0.082 1 0.059 3 uy
0.000 0 -0.055 1 -0.097 9 -0.121 9 -0.127 3 -0.119 8 -0.105 8 -0.089 9 -0.0749 Txy
0.009 0 0.014 2 0.028 1 0.046 3 0.063 8 0.077 2 0.085 3 0.088 4 0.087 8 ax

1.75 0.345 3 0.333 9 0.302 4 0.258 3 0.210 2 0.165 0 0.126 6 0.095 9 0.072 3
0.000 0 -0.043 0 -0.078 4 -0.1012 -0.110 8 -0.109 8 -0.101 9 -0.090 8 -0.078 8 :y
0.006 2 0.010 0 0.020 3 0.034 3 0.049 0 0.061 5 0.070 6 0.075 9 0.077 9 ax

2.00 0.305 8 0.297 6 0.274 6 0.242 1 0.204 7 0.167 7 0.134 2 0.105 9 0.082 9 ’
0.0000 -0.034 3 -0.063 7 -0.084 5 -0.095 9 -0.098 8 -0.095 5 -0.088 4 -0.079 5 zy
NOTE - Positive sign indicates compressive stresses and negative sign indicates tensile stresses.
7
SP 55:1993
ANNEX A
( Clause 2.7 )
COMPUTATIONS FOR DESIGN OF ANCHORAGE REINFORCEMENT

FOR A DIVIDE WALL ( see Fig. 3 )
~Given : As there is concrete slab on both sides of the wall,

therefore, semi-plate infinite theory (see 2.3) should
1. Base width of wall = 2.5 m
be used to calculate horizontal anchorage and the
2. Direct load per m run = 72 t depth up to which the vertical reinforcement bars
should be taken to.
3. Shear force per metre run = 50 t
4. Bending moment per metre run Here
= 166.667 t.m
Direct load per metre run
5. Vertical reinforcement in wall on either face
for direct load and moment = 25 mm deformed P = 72 t.
bars conforming to IS 1786 : 1985 @ 140
mm c/c Shear force per metre run
6. Concrete mix used = M 20 F = - 50 t.
7. Permissible tensile stress in steel = 80% of Bending moment per metre run
2.300 t/cm2 = 1.84 t/cm2
M = - 166.667 t.m
8. Allowable tensile stress in concrete ~= 1%
of compressive strength of concrete = Multiplication Factors
0.01 x 2 000 = 20 t/m2
P 72
9. Allowable tensile stress of fresh rock = - = - = 28.80 t/m2
b 2.5
20 t/m2 (assumed same as concrete in this
example. For permissible stresses relevant E -50
Indian Standard be referred to) - = - = -20.0 t/m”
b 2.5
10. The anchorages for the divide wall are to be
designed for loading on one side and with !i.K= 1 6 x 166.667
= -160.00 t/m:
no water on other side and vice/versa. b2 (2.5)2
B=2*5m
t -1
.. ,. ,: :
.. .. .p
.,r * .
‘.
a’. . ’ ,M--olVloE WALL

VEINFORCEMENT NO:
.A:‘+ SHOWN)
.: k’ ip.:
12.Om
22 .i‘
M-166.667 t.m
1.
,:
.c) :.
M
P-72 I
F-=501
F PI:.
a:
. .
_- -t- :4 .
-_
F-f?ESHROCK
FIG. 3 DESIGN OF A DIVIDE W,UL
8
SP 55 : 1993
Total horizontal and vertical stresses at different points -189.7 t/m2

calculated on the basis of different tables are indicated
in Table 7 and 8 respectively.
Design of Horizontal Anchorage
For design of horizontal anchorage horizontal stresses

on vertical planes should be considered. Table 7
(indicating the value of ax) is referred to:
i) At x/b = 0.25
Here
65.188 2.97 6*55t1m2

~ =
xz 0.625 - x2
65.188 x 0.625 iii) At x/b = 0.75

or x2 =
65.188 + 2.97
From Table 7 it may be seen that the maximum
= 0598 m tensile stress at this section is 20.4 t/m2 which is
approximately equal to the permissible tensile stress
20 t/m2, hence no reinforcement is required at this
-650166 t/m2 section.
From the above it is seen that maximum horizontal

tensile force is:
= 61.68 t/m-run
m
Area of steel required
61.88 *
= - = 33.5 cm2
1.84
I-971Jm2
Provided 25 mm deformed steel bars @ 140 mm
c/c
Also
The length on either side of the divide wall up to
which horizontal anchorage reinforcement to be
65.188 20
- or_x1=0.18m provided is determined in the following manner :
0.598 = x1
0 At xlb = 0.5 (face of the wall)
Total tensile force (hatched area) Anchorage length required = 45 d = 45 x
25 = 1 125 mm
= (65*188 + 20) x (0 598 - 0.18)
= 1.125 m from the ~face of the wall.
2
= 17.8 t/m-run ii) At x/b = 0.75 maximum tensile stress is equal
to 20.49 t/m2, which is very close %o the
ii) At x/b = 0.50
tensile stress of 20 t/m2 for the mix used.
The steel rods are not under tension here.
Here
Reinfrocement is required up to a length
(189.70 - 9.41) = (20 - 9.41) equal to 12 d beyond this point, that is,
0.625 x 12 x 25 = 300 mm = 0.30 m or 0.625 +
0.30 = 0.925 m from the face of the wall.
or x = 0.036 7 m Hence provide horizontal anchorage up to
1.125 m (1.20 m say) from the face of the
Total tensile force (hatched area) wall.
Design of Vertical Anchorage

= (189’7 + 20) x (0.625 - 0.036 7)
2 For design of the depth of vertical anchorage
= 61.68 t/m-run Table 8 should be used.
SP 55 : 1993
It is seen that for a permissible tensile stress of vertical anchorage may be provided for a minimum
20 t/m*, a depth of 0.75 b (width of divide wall) depth equal to thickness of the divide wall, that is,
should be sufficient (In table 8 at x/b = 0.5 and 2.5 m.
y/b = 0.75; oy is only 13.9 t/m2 tensile). However,
Reinforcement details are shown in Fig. 4.
FIG. 4. TYPICAL REINFORCEMFNT

DETAILSOF ANCHORAGE
10
Standard Mark
The use ~of the Standard Mark is governed by the provisions of the Bureau of Indian
I
producer. Standard marked products are also continuously checked by BIS for conformity
to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the
use of the Standard Mark may be granted to manufacturers or producers may be obtained
.
Bureau of Indian Standards .,I
BJS is a statutory institution established under the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 1986 to promote
and attending 10 connected matters in the country.
Copyright
any form without the prior permission in writing of BlS. This does not preclude the free use, in the
designations. Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director ( Publications ), BIS.
Amendments are issued to starldqrds as the need arise? on the basis of comments. Standards are also
reviewed periodically; a standard along with amendments is reaffirmed when such review indicates that no /
changes are needed: if the review indicates that changes are needed, it is taken up for revision. Users of I
Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest amendments or edition by
‘i
referring to the latest issue of ‘BIF Handbook’ and ‘Standards Monthly Additions’. Comments on this 1
Jndian Standard may be sent to BIS giving the following reference: /
Dot : No. RVD 10 ( 95) 1
Amend No. Date of Issue Text Aflected

!
Headquarters:

Telephones : 331 01 31, 331 13 75 Telegrams : Manaksanst ha
(-Common to all Offices )
Cantral : Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg 331 01 31

NEW DELHI 110002 I 331 13 75
Eastern : l/14 C. I. T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Maniktola 37 84 99, 37 85 61

CALCUTTA 700054 i 31 86 26, 37 86 62
Northern : SC0 445-446, Sector 35-C. CHANDIGARH 160036 53 38 43, -53 16 40

1 53 23 84
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, MADRAS 600113 235 02 16, 235 04 42
i 235 15 19, 235 23 15
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri ( East ) 632 92 95, 632 78 58
BOMBAY 400093 { 632 78 91, 632 78 92
Branches : AHMADABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. COIMBATORE.

FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR.
LUCKNOW. PATNA. THlRUVANANTHAPURAM.
Printed at Printrade, New Delhi, India

:h : 8826- 1978
Indian Standard
GWDELINES FOR DESIGN OF LARGE
EARTH AND ROCKFILL DAMS
Dam Sections ( Non-overflow ) Sectional Committee, BDC 53
Cfuairman Representing
hsr v. B. PATEL Public Works Department, Government of Gujarat,
Gandhinagar
3Zcmbcrs
SHRI R. N. BANSAL Beas Designs Organization, Nangal Township
SHRI R. S. SACHDEVA ( Altnnafc)
Jh M. C. C%ATU~VEDI Indian Institute of Technology, New Delhi
CHIEF ENGINEER ( CIVIL ) Kerala State Electricity Board, Trivandrum
CHIEF ENGINEER, MID Public Works Department, Government of Andhra
Pradesh, Hyderabad
‘SUPERINTENIJINO ENGINEER,
CD0 ( Aftcrnafc )
Chum ENUINEELL ( D&R ) Irrigation Works Department, Government of
Punjab, Chandigarh
DIHECTOR ( HW ) ( Affnnote )
CHIEP ENGINEER ( P ) & JOIST Irrigation Department, Government of IMaharash-
SECKETA~~Y tra, Bombay
SUPERINTENDII~G ENQINEZR
DIRECif;~~~ DAN ), CD0 ( Alfnnufc )
Central Water & Power Research Station, Punt
DIIZE~TO~ ( E & RDD ) Central Water Commission, New Delhi
DEPUTY DIRJXTOH ( E & RDD )
( &erno2c )
DR K. T. SUN~A~ARAJA IYENQAR Indian Institute of Science, Bangalorc
Smr P. J. JANUS Associated Cement Companies Ltd, Bombay
SHRI M. R. V~NAYAKA ( Alternate )
SARI Y. K. MEHTA concrete Association of India, Bombay
REPRESENTATIV,G Institution of Engineers ( India ), Calcutta
SHRI D. M. SAWR Hindustan Construction Co Ltd, Bombay
SHRI V. B. D~sar ( A&mate)
SECRETARY Central Board of Irrigation and Power, New Delhi
UNDER SECRETARY ( AbmalC )
SUPERINTENDINQ ENQINEER, CD0 Public Works Department, Governme.It of< Jarat,
Gandhinagar
EXECUTIVE ENQINEER, UNIT
‘ C ‘, CD0 ( AlLmute )

This publication la protected under the Indian Copyright Act ( XIV of 1957 ) al,,.1
publisher shall be deemed to be an infringement of copyriaht under the said Act.
18:8826-1978
( Continued from @ge 1 )

Mem hers Representing
SHRIP.K. VEDAFTAYAG.*X Public Works Department, Government of Tamil
Nadu, Madras
SHRI D. AJITHA SIJIIEA, Director General, IS1 ( Ex-ofiio Member )
Secretary
SHRI K. K. SITARMA
Assistant Director ( Civ Engg ), ISI
Earth and Rockfill Dams Subcommittee, BDC 53 : 2
Convener
DIRECTOR ( E & RDD ) Central Water Commission, New Delhi
Mem hers
DEPUTY DIRECTOR ( E Sr RDD ) [Alternate to
Director ( E & RDD ) ]
SHRI R. N. BANS.AL Beas DesignsI Organization,
_ Nangal Township
SHRI S. P. GUPTA ( Alternafs )
DR M. C. C~ATUKV~UI Indian Institute of Technology, New Delhi
CI~IEF Escwpme ( P ) & JOIST Irrigation and Power Department, Government of
SECRETAI~Y Maharashtra, Bombay
SUPCRISTENUISG ENGINlZXl.
( EA~TII Da51 ), CD0 ( Alternate )
SHRI K. R. D~*rvn In personal capacity ( Jvo. 2, Rehem Mansion, Colaba
Cawwry, Bombay-400039
SIIRI HAM MOIIAN Irrigation Department, Government of Uttar
Pradesh, Lucknow
SHRI L. P. BI~ARDWAJ ( Alternate )
SHRI T. K. NATALMAN Central Road Research Institute, New Delhi
S~PERINTENUISG ENGINEER, CD0 Public Works Department, Government of Gujarat,
Gandhinagar
EXECUTIVE ENGINEER, UNIT
‘ B ’ CD0 ( Alternate )
Panel for Design of Large Earth and Rockfill Dams, BDC 53 : Pl
Convener
SHRI I.P. KAPILA Irrigation Works Department, Government of
Punjab, Chandigarh
Members
SHRI M. I.. KAUSHAL Beas Designs Organization, Nangal Township
DR J. PUX~:S~OTTAX Public Works Department, Government of Andhra
Pradesh. I-l\dt rabad
SHRI S. N. Guru Rau Central Water Commission, New Delhi
SHE1 M. M. SHAH Public Works Department, Government of G\t,jaIit.
Gandhinagar
SHBI H. D. Slt.\ltsIA Irrigation Research Institute, Roorkce
2
IS : 8826 - 1978
Indian Standard
GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF LARGE
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution
>)II 28 April 1978, after the draft finalized by Dam Sections (Non-
overflow ) Sectional Committee had been approved by the Civil Engineer-
ing Division Council.
0.2 With the advancement in the design and construction of large

earth and rockfill dams on relatively unfnvourable foundations, a number
of river valley prcjects in the country require construction of earth and
rockfill dams to achieve overall economy. It is, therefore, considered
fxccessary to provide guidelines for the design of such structures in the
i-ountry.
0.3 In formulation of this standard, due weightage has been given to
international co-ordination among thr standards and practices prevailing
:I1 diGrent ccuntries in additir):l to t!icse relatin g to the practices in the
!if Id in this country.
0.4 This standard deals with yllidrlinrs for design of large earth and
1oc,kfill dams. While dcrtlirlg xvitll various componctltx of earth and rockfill
:!,t rns, references have been m~rlr: to the fijllowin:; Indian Standards which
iirs:d with some components of earth xncl rockfill dams independently.
IS: 1893-1975 Criteria fix rartl~quakc resistant design of structures
( third renision )
IS : 2720 ( Part SSX\‘)-l9Y6 Methods of test for soils: Part XXXV
Mcasurcrncnts of nrgztive pox water pressure
IS: 4999- 1968 Recommcntl:~t i\)ns for grouting of pervious soils
IS : 503(3- 1368 Code of pr;~~.:ticc for design, construction and main-
tennnc-e of rclicf wclis
IS @We-197 I lic,conlrnc.lltl,tic,ns for pressure grouting of rock
foundaLions in river x-:11!(~),projects
IS G9.~.i-l!~i3 Sul~su~~fxc csplotxtion of earth and rockfill dams
IS 7356 ( Part ! 1-197.i Cotlc ~fpracticc fi)r installation, maintenance
and 0l)scrvntion of ir~str~rrtlcnts fix port pressure measurement
in earth dams: Part I Porous tube type piczotneters
3
IS : 8826 - 1978
IS : 7356 (Part II )-I976 Code of practice for installation, mainten-

ance and observation of instruments for pore pressure
measurement in earth dams: Part II Twin tube hydraulic
piezometers
IS : 7436 ( Part I )-1973 Guide for types of measurements for
structures in river valley ~projects and criteria for choice and
location of measuring instruments: Part I Earth and rockfill dams
IS : 7500-1974 Code of practice for installations and observation of
cross arms for measurement of internal vertical movement in
earth dams
IS : 7891-1975 Code of practice for stability analysis of earth dams
IS : 8237-1976 Code of practice for protection of slope for reservoir
embankments
IS : 8414-1977 Guidelines for designofunderseepage control measures
for earth and rockfill dams
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard lays down guidelines for design of large earth am
rockfill dams.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the following definitions shall apply.
NOTI<- I:or the cicfinirions of terms pcxrtaining to soil mechanics reference may
be made to IS : 2809-1972*.
2.1 Borrow Area - The source of construction materials required for
earth and rockfill dam.
2.2 Casing - All zones other than the core in a zoned earth dam, also
called she11 or shoulder.
2.3 Core - A zone of impervious rarth within a zoned earth or rockfill
dam.
2.4 Cut-Off - A barrier to reduce seepage of water through foundation
and abutments.
2.4.1 Full Cut-Off - A cut-off taken to an impervious stratum.
2.4.1.1 Posifive cut-qf- A full cut-off in the form of an open excavated
trench and back filled with compacted impervious material.
NOTE-Full cut-offs are also provided in the form of sheet piles, plastic
diaphragm, concrete diaphragm, grouted cut-off, cut-off wall, etc.
2.4.2 Partial C&0$ - A cut-off which does not go down to impervious
stratum.
*Glossary of terms and symbols relating to soil engineering (first rmision ),
4
2s I 8826 - 1978
2.5 Freeboard - The vertical distance between the crest of the embank-
ment ( without camber ) and the maximum reservoir water level.
2.6 Full Reservoir Level ( FRL ) - SeeIS : 5477 ( Part I )-1969*.
2.7 Homogeneous Earth Dam - An earth dam composed of single
type of material.
2.8 Horizontal Filter - A layer of uniform or graded pervious materials
placed horizontally.
2.9 Impervious Blanket - An upstream impervious soil layer laid over
a relatively pervious stratum and connected to~the core.
2.10 Inclined/Vertical Filter - A layer of uniform or graded pervious
materials, placed inclined or vertical.
2.11 Large Dams - Dams exceeding 15 m height above deepest bed
level. Dams between 10 m and 15 m height may be treated as large
dams, provided volume of earthwork exceeds 0.75 million ms or volume of
storage exceeds 1 million m3 or the maximum flood discharge exceeds
2 000 cumecs.
2.12 Lowest Water Level ( LWL ) or Minimum Drawdowxm Level
(MDDL) -The lowest level to which a reservoir may be lowered
keeping in view the requirements for hydro-power generation or irrigation
and other needs.
2.13 Main Rockfill - A zone of dumped/compacted rockfill to provide
structural support for the dam by its mass and internal stability against
the water pressure of the reservoir.
2.14 Maximum Water Level ( MWL ) - SeeIS: 5477 ( Part IV )-1971 t.
2.15 Membrane - A thin impervious barrier provided, either on the
upstream face or in the central portion of a rockfill dam, to prevent
seepage through the dam.
2.16 Parapet Wall - A wall provided along the edge of the embankment,
2.17 Pore Pressure - The pressure developed in the fluid within the
voids of the soil under external force when drainage is prevented.
2.18 Relief Well - See 1s : 5050-1968:.
2.19 Riprap - It is the protection to the embankment material against
erosion due to wave action, velocity of flow, rain-wash, wind action, etc,
*Methods of fixing the capacities of reservoirs: Part I General requirements.
tMethods of fixing the capacities of rcrervoirr: Part IV Flood storage.
$Code of practice for design, construction~and maintenance of relief wells.
5
1S : 8826 - 1978
provided by placing a protection layer of rock fragments or manufactured

material.
2.20 Rockfill Dam - An embankment consisting of variable sizes of
rock to provide stability and an impervious core or membrane to provide
water-tightness.
2.20.1 Earth Core Type RockJill Dam -A rockfill dam composed of an
internal core of rolled earthfill supported by shells of dumped/compacted
rockfill on either side of the core. The core may be vertical or sloping
upstream.
2.20.2 Rock&l Dam with Upstream Membrane - A dam composed of loose
rock usually dumped/compacted in place, with an upstream impervious
membrane of concrete or asphaltic concrete.
2.21 Rock Toe - A zone of free draining material provided at the toe
of the dam.
2.22 Rubble Cushion - A zone of hand laid or derrick laid rock
provided between the main rockfill and the upstream impervious
membrane to act as a cushion to support the upstream membrane and
equalize settlement.
2.23 Sudden Drawdown - The rate of lowering of reservoir water level
which does not allow full dissipation of pore pressure simultaneously with
the lowering of reservoir water level.
2.24 Toe Drain - A trench filled with filter material along the down-
stream toe of an earth dam to collect seepage from horizontal filter and
lead it to natural drain.
2.25 Turfing - It is a cover of grass grown over an area to prevent
erosion of soil particles by rain-wash.
2.26 Zoned Earth Dam - An earth dam composed of zones of different
types of soil.
3. COMPONENTS OF EARTH AND ROCKFILL DAMS
3.1 Earth Dam
3.1.1 An earth dam generally consists of the following components ( see
Fig. 1A and 18):
cut-off,
Core,
Casing,
Internal drainage system,
Slope protection, and
Surface drainage.
6
PERVIOUS COVER
I. Positive cut-off 6. Inclined and horizontal filters

2. Grout curtain 7. Rock toe and toe drain
3. Central impervious core 8. Riprap with filter
4. Upstream casing 9. Catch water drain
5. Downstream casing
NOTE -- Horizontal filters at intermediate levels are sometimes also placed in the upstream casing aone where E
casing meterial is of impervious nature.
i
1A EARTH DAM WITH CENTRAL CORE AND POSITIVE CUT-OFF
g
I
FIG. 1 COMPONENTS
OF EARTH DAM- Contd
5
ae
DOWNSTREAM
PARTIAL CUT OFF
INCLINED IMPERVIOUS CORE PERVIOUS

FOUNOATION
IMPERVIOUS STRATUM
1. Impervious blanket
2. Rock toe and toe drain
3. Relief well
4. Tlirfing
5. Berm
1B EARTH DAM WITH INCLINED CORE AND PARTIAL CUT-OFF

FIQ. 1 COMPONENTS OFEARTH DAM
fS : 8826 - 1978
3.1.2 The foliowing components are provided in special cases:

a) Impervious blanket, and
b) Relief well.
3.2 Rockfdl Dam
3.2.1 A rockfill dam generally consists of following components (see
Fig. 2A and 2B):
a) Main rockfill,
b) 1) Upstream impervious membrane/zone
or
2) InternaI core,
Cl Rubble cushion, and
4 Cut-off wall.
1. Main rxkfill 1. Main rocklill

2. Rubble cushion 2. Roiled earth core
3. Impervious membrane ( Reinfarccd 3. Filters
concrete or other types 1
4. Cut.off wall~plinth
2A ROCKFILL DAM WITH UPSrREAM 2B EARTH CORE TYPE ROCKFtLL

IMPERVIOUS MEMBRANE DAM
FIG. 2 COMPONENTS OF ROCKFILLDAM
4. FUNCTIONS AND liMX%GN REQUIREMENTS

4.0 The functions and design requirements of the components are
described at 4.1 to 4.13.
4.1 cult-off
4.1.1 The cut-off is required for the following functions:
a) To redude loss of stored water through faundation and abutments,
and
b) TO prevent subsurface erosion by piping.
9
IS : 6626 - 1978
4.1.2 The type of cut-off should be decided on the basis of detailed

geological investigation. It is desirable to provide a positive cut-off.
Where this is not possible, other measures like a partial cut-off with
upstream impervious blanket and pressure relief measures on the down-
stream may be provided.
4.1.3 Recommendations for location and size of cut-off are given
at 4.1.3.1 to 4.1.3.5.
4.1.3.1 The alignment of the cut-off trench should be fixed in such a
way that its central line should be within the upstream base of the
impervious core and it should be keyed into rock or continuous impervious
strata.
4.1.3.2 The bottom width of cut-off trench may be fixed taking
following factors into consideration:
a) Provide sufficient working space for compaction equipments,
b) Provide sufficient working space to carry out curtain grouting, and
c) Provide safety against piping.
A minimum width of 4 m is recommended. A bottom width of
10 percent to 30 percent of hydraulic head may be provided to satisf)
requirements of piping. This may be suitably increased to satisfy other
requirements of mechanical equipments and curtain grouting. The sitl**
slopes depend upon substrata. Side slopes of at least 1 : 1 or flatter m. 5’
be provided in case of overburden, while l/2 : 1 and l/4: 1 may ‘UC
provided in soft rock and hard rock respectively.
4.1.3.3 The positive cut-off should be taken at least one metre into
continuous impervious substratum.
4.1.3.4 The partial cut-off is specially suited for horizontally stratified
foundations with relatively more pervious layer near top. The depth of
the partial cut-off in deep pervious alluvium will be governed by:
a) permeability of substrata, and
b) relative economics of depth of excavation governed usually by
cost of dewatering versus length of upstream impervious blanket.
4.1.3.5 The cut-off in the flanks on either side should normally
extend up to the top of impervious core, particularly in case of steep
abutments.
4.1.4 Kccessity of grouting below the bed of cut-off trench will arise if
the cut-off trench is terminated in rock formation and the rock is
weathered or having cracks, joints and crevices. Necessity of grouting may
be decided, based on percolation tests. Rock having a lugeon value of
xnxe than 5 should ht. grouted so as to bring post-grouting lugcon value
10
IS : 8826 - 1978
of about 5 lugeons. The depth of grouting is determined by percolation

tests in stages of 4 to 5 m each and determining necessity of grouting in
each stage. The depth of grouting does not normally exceed half the head
of water.
4.1.5’The necessity of grouting below the bed in case of partial cut-off
trench will be governed by the cost and effectiveness of the grout curtain
vis-a-vis the value of water loss through seepage below and beyond the
partial cut-off trench. Alluvial strata having permeabiiity in excess of
10-s cm/s shall be treated thoroughly by grouting with a suitable material.
Strata of permeability between 10-Z cm/s and 10-s cm/s may be treated to
reduce the permeability to the extent possible. The grouting of strata
having permeability less than 10-a cm/s will be difficult, expensive and
time consuming ( see IS : 4999-1968* ).
4.1.5.1 The depth of grout curtain depends upon the depth at which
the impervious substrata is met. If the impervious stratum is available at
reasonable depth, the grout curtain should be extended to that depth.
Otherwise the grout curtain should extend to a depth depending on
percentage reduction in seepage desired.
4.1.5.2 At the abutment contacts of the cut-off trench, care should
be taken to avoid seepage by outflanking.
4.1.6 The backfill material for cut-off trench shall have same properties
as those prescribed for the impervious core at 4.2.1.
4.2 Core
4.2.1 The core provides impermeable barrier within the body of the dam.
Impervious soils are generally suitable for core. However, soils having
high compressibility and liquid limit are not suitable as they are prone to
swelling and formation of cracks. Soils having organic content are also
not suitable. IS: 1498-19707 may be referred for suitability of soils for
core. Appendix A gives recommendations based on IS: 1498-1970t.
Rrcomrnendations regarding suitability of soils for construction of core for
earth dams in earthquake zones are given in Appendix R.
4.2.2 Core may be located either centrally or inclined upstream. The
location will depend mainly on the availability of materials, topography
of site, foundation conditions, ~diversion considerations, etc. The main
advantage of a central core is that it provides higher pressures at the
contact between the core and the foundation reducing the possibility of
leakage and piping. On the other hand inclined core reduces the pore
,: *R&ommendations for grouting of prrvious soils.
tl’lassification and identification of soils for general engineering purposes (JErsr
recision ) .
11
IS:8826 - 1978
pressures in the downstream part of the dam and thereby increases its
safety. It also permits .construction of downstream casing ahead of the
core. The section w&h inclined core allows the use ,of relatively large
volume of random material on the downstream.
4.2.3 The following practical considerations govern the thickneq of the .
core:
a) Availability of suitabie impervious material;
c) Permissible seepage through the dam; and
d) Availability of other materials for casing, filter, etc.
However, the minimum top width~of the core should be 3.0 m.
4.2.4 The top level of the core should be fixed at least 1 metre above
the maximum water level to prevent seepage by capillary syphoning.
4.3 Casing
4.3.1 The function of casing is to impart stability and protect the core.
The relatively pervious materials, which are not subject to cracking on
direct exposure to atmosphere, are suitable for casing. IS : 1498-1970*
may be referred for suitability of soils for casing. Appendix A gives
recommendations based on IS : 1498-1970*.
4.4 Internal Drainage System
4.4.1 Internal drainage system comprises inclined filter, horizontal

filter, rock toe, toe drain, etc.
4.4.2 Inclined or vertical Filter - Inclined or vertical filter abutting the
outer slope of the impervious core is provided maimly to collect seepage
emerging out of the core and thereby keeping the downstream casing
relatively dry.
4.4.3 Horizontal Filter - Horizontal filter collects the seepage from the
inclined or vertical filter or from body of the dam and carries the seepage
to the toe drain.
4.4.4 Rock Toe - The main functions of rock toe are to facilitate
drainage of seepage water and to protect the lower part of the downstream
slope from tail water erosion.
4.4.5 Toe Drain - The toe drain is provided at the downstream toe of
the earth dam to collect seepage from horizontal filter and to discharge
the same away from the dam by suitable means according to site
conditions.
*Classification and identification of soils for general engineering purposes (/irst

revision) .
12
IS : 8826 - 1978
4.4.6For design of components of the internal drainage system,

‘ Indian Standard drainage systems for earth and rockfill dams ’ (under
preparation ) may be referred.
4.5 Slope Protection
4.5.1 Upstream Slope - The upstream slope protection is ensured by

providing riprap. For design of riprap IS : 8237-1976* may be referred.
4.5.2 Downstream Slope - The downstream slope protection is ensured

by providing riprap or turfing. It is a usual practice to protect thr down-
stream slope from rain cuts by providing suitable turfing on entire slope.
For details of downstream slope protection, IS: 8237-1976* may be
referred.
4.6 Surface Drainage - For surface drainage of downstream slope of

dam, reference may be made to IS : 8237-1976*.
4.7 Impervious Blanket
4.7.1 The horizontal upstream impervious blanket is provided to increase

the path of seepage when full cut-off is not practicable on pervious founda-
tions. The impervious blanket may be provided either with or without
partial cut-off. It necessitates the provision of relief wells near downstream
toe of the dam to reduce uplift pressure. Impervious blanket shall be
connected to core of the dam, as shown in Fig. 1B.
4.7.2 The material used for impervious blanket should have far less
permeability than the foundation soil. To avoid formation of cracks the
material shocld not be highly plastic. Reference may be made to
IS : 1‘&98-19iOf for suitability of SO& for blanket. Appendix A gives
recommendations based on IS : 1498-197Ot. A 30-cm thick layer of random
material over the blanket is recommended to prevent cracking during
exposure to atmosphere.
4.7.3 The impervious blanket may be designed in accordance with
IS: 8414-1975:.
4.7.4 The length of path of under-seepage along the upstream
impervious blanket and the partial cut-off should be such that it provides
adequate factor of safety to critical value of exit gradient at the down-
stream toe so as to prevent undermining of subsoil. Properly graded
inverted filter should be provided for protection against piping action at
*Code of practice for protection of slope for reservoir embankments.

tClassification and identification of soils for general engineering purposes (first
Fmision) .
SGuidelines for tiesign ofunderseepage control measures for earth and rockfill dams.
13
IS : 8826 - 1978
the downstream of core. This permits free movement of water but

prevents the movement of subsoil particles.
4.8 Relief Wells - Relief wells ( Fig. 1B ) are generally provided down-
stream of partial cut-off to relieve excess hydrostatic pressure. For details
of relief wells, reference may be made to IS : 5050-1968*. Relief wells are
also provided as adjunct to grouted cut-off to take care of possible
seepage.
4.9 Main Rockfill
4.9.1 The function of the main rockfill (see Fig. 2A and 2B) is to
provide structural support to the impervious upstream membrane or core
and to provide stability against the water pressure from the reservoir.
4.9.2 Settlement of rockfill takes place in the following two stages:
a) During construction, and
b) After the reservoir is filled.
4.9.2.1 Horizontal movement of rockfill also takes place on filling of

reservoir and like vertical settlement it continues over a long time, at a
continuously decreasing rate. The settlement of the compacted rockfill
after placing the rubble cushion and the impervious facing is generally of
the order of‘ 1 percent of the height.
4.10 Upstream Impervious Membrane
4.10.1 The impervious membrane is placed on the upstream face of the

dam ( Fig. 2A ). It has following advantages as compared to earth core:
a) The dam with upstream membrane has a greater margin of
safety against shear failure because of (1) low pore pressures in
rockfill, (2) larger rockfill mass to resist water pressure, and (3)
water pressure having larger downward component;
b) The pervious rock embankment developes no uplift as it permits
free percolation of water upward from the foundation;
c) The upstream membrane is exposed for inspection and repairs;
d) The dam can be raised by dumping rock on the downstream side
and then extending the membrane upward on the sloping surface;
e) The upstream membrane permits grouting of the rock below
cut-off wall at the upstream toe while the embankment is being
constructed; and
f) The dam has comparatively lesser volume of fill.
4.X0.2 Tykes of Upstream Imperuious Membrane - The upstream impervi-
ous membrane may be of reinforced concrete, asphaltic concrete, etc.
_..
*Code of practice for design, construction and maintenance of relief wel!s.
14
1s : 6626 - -1978
4.10.2.1 Reinforced concrete membrane - The reinforced concrete

membrane on the upstream face of a rockfill dam is the most common
type because of its dtirability and ease of construction. The joints between
the slabs may be 25 to 50 mm wide in horizontal direction and 50 to
75 mm wide in vertical direction. Horizontal joints should be avoided as
far as possible. The joints should be filled with a plastic or compressible
material to keep out dirt. Water stops should be used for watertightness.
The thickness of concrete slab should be about one percent of the head of
water with a minimum thickness of 30 cm. The reinforcement should be ,,
provided in both directions and equal to about 0.5 percent of concret
area. For 30 cm thick slab, reinforcement should be provided in one lay r
and for thicker slabs, two layers may be provided. ,P
4.10.2.2 Aghaltic concrete membrane - The asphaltic concrete

membrane is widely used because it -is cheaper than concrete. It is more
flexible than concrete slab and it can be constructed rapidly. It is easier
to repair than concrete in the portion above reservoir water level. The
main disadvantage of this type of membrane is that the material is
relatively soft and is more easily damaged than concrete. The asphaltic
concrete s!mr~!tl qcnerally consist of well graded aggregates with about
10 pcrccnt of tiller material passing through 75-micron IS sieve. Pure
asphalt binder of al)out 8 to 10 percent by mass of aggregate should be
used. The male&i1 should be mixed and compacted hot. An air content
of 2 to 3 percent is optimum. The following two types of asphaltic
membrane are used:
a) Laminated type consisting of rubble masonry transition over

rockfill, then a layer of porous concrete, overlaid with a layer of
asphaltic concrete, placed in two layers and rolled. Finally, a
layer of reinforced concrete is provided as protective and insulating
cover; and
b) A purely asphaltic concrete paving with thickness about 1 percent
of the head of water with a minimum thickness of 30 cm. It is
placed in layers and rolled.
4.11 Rubble Cushion -- il dry rubble layer between the main rockfill
and the upstream impervious membrane is provided with hand laid or
derrick laid rock to act as a cushion for equalizing settlement and providing
an even surface for lnying the upstream membrane. The rubble cushion
layer ( Fig. 2A ) should be carefully laid with large voids chinked with
spnlls. The rubble cushion transmits and distributes the water load from
the impcGous facing to the main rockfill. Generally the rubble cushion is
thiC!iCr at Imltonl thfi at top. However, it should have suficicnt
horizontal \virlth to permit the movement of caterpillar cranes or the
scttitlg ul) oI’dcrI4cliS. A rnilGmum thickness of 3 m normal to the slope is
15
IS : 8826 -1978
desirable. If the upstream fact is to be provided steeper, a thicker rubble

cushion layer may be provided as it has to retain the loose rockfill
be!Cnd it.
4.12 Cut-Off Wall
4.1’2.1 Cut-off wall is ~SD called ’ plinth ‘. It is provided near upstream

toe of a membrane rockfill dam ( Fig. 2.4 ) to provide watertight
cormection between membrane and foundation. The dimensions of cut-off
wall/plinth are based on following requirements.
a) The contact length on foundation should be adequate to provide
a minimum seepage path, for example, one-twentieth to one-tenth
of head of water, but not less than 3 m, depending on rock
quality;
b) It should serve as a cap for consolidation or curtain grouting;
c) It should provide surface to facilitate ~membrane form walk; and
d) It shouid provide at least 1 m rockfill under membrane to permit
the membrane to deflect normal to its face,
4.13 Earth Core - Earth core, either vertical or inclined upstream,
forms an impervious barrier in an earth core type rockfill dam ( Fig. 213 ).
This type of core needs special attention at the contact of rockfill by way
of providing filter layers between the earth core and rockfill. The
suitability of material is the same as in case of core of earth dam
given at 4.2.
5. BASIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
5.1 Earth Dam - The basic requirements for design of earth dam arc
to ensure (a) safety against overtopping, (b) stability, and (c) safety against
internal erosion.
5.1.1 Overtofi&n,o - Sufficient spillway and outlet capacity should be
provided to prevent overtopping of earth embankment during and after
construction. The freeboard should be sufficient to prevent overtopping
by waves and should takeinto account the settlement of embankment and
foundation.
5.1.1.1 Freeboard for wave run up on slope shall be provided in
accordance with the provisions contained in ‘ Indian Standard rccommen-
dations for freeboard requirements in earth dams ’ ( underflrefiaration ).
5.1.1.2 Analysis should be made for computing the settlement of the
eml>nnk:r!cnt and of the foundations in order to determine extra freeboard
to be pr:lvided as settlement allowance. For unyielding foundation, the
anlount of settlement for the embankment should be restricted to 1 percent
of the bright of dam. For compressible foundations, the settlement shoulc!
16
IS : 8826 - 197%
be computed based on laboratory test results and should be provided for

by increasing the height of dam correspondingly. Longitudinal camber
should be provided eon the top of dam along the dam axis to provide for
settlement. The camber varies from zero height at the abutments to
maximum at the central section in the valley where maximum settlement
is anticipated.
5.1.2 Stability Analysis - The slopes of the embankment shall be stable

under all loading conditions. They should also be flat enough so as not to
impose excessive stresses on foundation. Embankment slopes shall be
designed in accordance with the provisions contained in IS : 7894-1975*.
The upstream slope shall be protected against erosion by wave action
and the crest and downstream slope shall be vrotected against erosion
due to wind and rain.
5.1.3 Stvjage Control - The seepage through the embankment and

foundation should be such as to control piping, erosion, sloughing and
excessive loss of water. Seepage control measures are required to control
seepage through dam and seepage through foundation. Design for control
of seepage through dam shall be made in accordance with provisions
contained in ‘ Indian Standard drainage systems for earth and rockfill
dams ’ ( under preparation ). Design for control of seepage through founda-
tion may be made in accordance with provisions contained in
IS : 8414-19777.
5.2 Rockfill Dam - The basic requirements for design of rockfill dam
are essentially same as described in 5.1 for earth dam. However, the
slopes shall be designed in accordance with c Indian Standard code of
practice for stability analysis of rockfill dams ’ ( undcr&@zration ).
6. SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
6.0 In addition to basic design requirements given at 5, the following

special design requirements, should also be satisfied for both earth and
rockfill dams:
a) Control of cracking,
b) Stability in earthquake regions, and
c) Stability at junctions.
6.1 Control of Cracking - Cracking of impervious zone results into a

failure of an earth dam by erosion, piping, breaching, etc. Due considera-
tion to cracking phenomenon shall, therefore, be given in the design of
earth dam.
*Co& of practice for stability analysis of earth dams.

vuidelines for design of underseepage control measures ftir earth and rockfill dams.
17
IS : 8826 - 1978
6.1.1 Reasons of Cracking - Cracking in the core of earth or rockfill dam

occurs due to foundation settlement and/or differential movements within
the embankment. Differential movements in the embankment take place
due to the following reasons:
a) Unsuitabk and/or poorly compacted fill materials,
b) Different compressibility and stress-strain characteristics of the
various fill materials, and
c) Variation in thickness of fill over irregularly shaped or steeply
inclined abutments.
6.1.1.1 Cracking also develops by tensile strains caused by various
loads, such as dead load of the structure, filling of the reservoir and seismic
forces. Hydraulic fracturing of the core may also occur when the hydrostatic
pressure at a section in the core exceeds the total minor principal stress at
that section.
6.1.2 T’ypes of Cracks - Cracks may be classified based on the following
factors:
a) Mechanism by which cracks are developed, such as tensile,
compressive, shrinkage or shearing.
b) Types of surface with which the cracking is associated, such as
flat or steep.
c) Physical process involved, such as moisture or temperature
changes, loading or unloading action and dynamic activity, such
as blasting or earthquakes.
6.1.2.1 Tensile stresses produce cracks on flat surface by caryllary
action in the moisture range just below saturation. Tensile Stress steep
slope category cracks are associated with slumping in poorly consolidated
materials.
6.1.2.2 Shrinkage cracks are produced by wetting and drying action
in the moisture range of plasticity index.
6.1.2.3 Compression cracks on flat surface are produced by an
abrupt change in moisture followed by substantial consolidation and
cracking around the periphery of the affected area.
6.1.2.4 Cracking associated with shearing is commonly associated
with steep slopes. There are two conditions in this category. One is
differential settlement which involves a limited range of motion and the
other is a slide failure which may involve any amount of motion. The
differential settlement condition commonly involves a structure extending
over two or more kinds of foundation with differing compressive
characteristics or a differential loading condition on a single kind of
foundation material.
18
1s : 6626- i978
6.1.2.5 Slide failures may be associated with loading, unloading or

moisture change, the distinguishing characteristic is the potential for
continued movement.
6.1.3 Inzjmtance of Cracks - Relative importance of each type of crack

category or group is given at 6.1.3.1 to 6.1.3.3.
6.1.3.1 Where permeability and possible erosion are of primary
concern, the tension group is potentially the most serious. In this group,
the cracks are open and although usually only superficial, those associated
with steep slopes may extend to depths comparable to the size of structure
involved. Though the development of this type of cracking is from the
surface, it may persist, although deeply buried, where eventually it may
contribute to unsatisfactory seepage action.
6.1.3.2 Where maintenance of position is a prime structural require-
ment the compression type of cracking is the most important because it is
probable that when this type of cracking appears the settlement has
already completed.
6.1.3.3 Shearing cracks are identified primarily by displacement
between the two sides and a tearing configuration. Unlike tension or
compression cracking, shearing cracks commonly occur early in the failure
action and further movement can be expected after the first cracking
shows up.
6.1.4 Measures for Control of Cracking- Following measures are recom-

mended for control of cracking:
a) Use of plastic clay core and rolling the core material at slightly
more than optimum moisture content. In case of less plastic clay,
2 to 5 percent bentonite of 200 to 300 liquid limit may be mixed
to increase the plasticity.
Use of wider core to reduce the possibility of transverse or
horizontal cracks extending through it.
Careful selection of fill materials to reduce the differential
movement. To restrict the rockfill in lightly loaded outer casings
and to use well graded materials in the inner casings on either
side of the core.
Wide transition zones of properly graded filters of adequate width
for handling drainage, if cracks develope.
Special treatment, such as preloading, presaturation, removal of
weak material, etc, to the foundation and abutment, if warranted.
Delaying placement of core material in the crack region till most
of the settlement takes place.
19
I$ : 8826 - 1978
g) Arching the dam horizontally between steep abutments.

h) Flattening the downstream slope to increase slope stability in the
event of saturation from crack leakage.
j) Cutting back of steep abutment slopes.
6.2 Stability in Earthquake Zones - Dams situated in earthquake
zones are likely to be subjected to additional stresses and deformation on
account of earth acceleration. This needs a special treatment. Following
are the principal additional factors to be considered while designing an
earth dam in earthquake zones:
4 The stability of the slopes of the embankment under the extra
forces set up by the lateral and vertical accelerations.
% The settlement of loose or poorly compacted fill or foundation
material leading to loss of freeboard and thereby possible
overtopping.
4 The cracking of the impervious fill leading to possible failure by
piping.
4 Liquefaction of deposits of loose sand in the foundation of the
dam, causing cracking, sliding or actual horizontal movement of
the dam.
~6.2.1 Following measures are recommended against the factors listed
in 6.2:
a) The stability analysis of slopes with earthquake considerations
shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions contained
in IS : 7894-1975*.
b) Additional freeboard shall be provided to avoid possible over-
topping due to settlement of embankment or foundation or both
during an earthquake.
c) The measures recommended for control of cracking under 6.1.4
shall be adopted. In addition, provisions shall be made for
discharging the maximum anticipated leakage rapidly. For this
purpose, downstream zones of large quarried rock or screened
gravels and cobbles are recommended. The impervious core
should be made thicker for resisting the piping action. The top
of the dam should be made~thicker by increasing the crest width
or by using flatter slopes at the top than would be required in
non-seismrc regions, so as to increase the path of seepage through
cracks.
d) The foundation should be as compact as possible. All loose and
soft material should be excavated and removed, if possible, or
recompacted.
----- --- ---
*Code of practice for stability analysis of earth dams.
20
IS : 6826 - 1978
6.3 Stability at Junctions - Junctions of earthwork with foundation,

abutments, masonry structures like overflow and non-overflow dams and
outlets need special attention with reference to one or all of the following
criteria:
a) Good bond between earthwork and foundation,
b) Adequate creep length at the contact plane,
c) Protection of earth dam slope against scouring action, and
d) Easy movement of traffic.
6.3.1 Junction with Foundations - Earth dams may be founded on soil

overburden or rock. For foundations on soils or non-rocky strata,
vegetation like bushes, grass roots, trees, etc, should be completely removed.
The soil containing organic material or dissoluble salt, should also be
completely removed. After removal of these materials, the foundation
surface should be moistened to the required extent and adequately rolled
before placing embankment material. For rocky foundation, the surface
should be cleaned of all loose fragments including semi-detached and over-
hanging surface blocks of rock. Proper bond should be established between
the embankment and the ?ock surface so prepared.
6.3.2 Junction with Abutments - The rocky abutments should be suitably
shaped and prepared in order to get good contact between the impervious
core of the embankment and the rock. Overhanps, if any, should be
-removed. VerticaI surfaces should be excavated to form modcrate slopes,
not less than 1 in 4 to 1 in 5. A wider impervious zone and thicker
transitions are also provided sometimes at the abutment contacts to increase
the length of path of seepage and to protect against erosion.
6.3.2.1 The bond between rocky or non-rocky abutments shollld be
established as in 6.3.1. In addition, sufficient creep length should be
provided between impervious section of the dam and the abutment, so as
to provide safety against piping. The creep length should be not less than
4 times the hydraulic head.
6.3.3 Junction with Non-overJlow Dam - Junction of non-overflow

masonry/concrete dam with earth dam is provided by suitable key taken
sufficiently inside the earth dam. The length of key depends on creep
length. The bond between the key and the earthwork should be cstah-
lished by proper compaction of contact layers. Sometimes these contact
layers are mixed with 2 to 5 percent bentonite with liquid Iimit of 200 to
300 to cause expansion and hence to have tight joints. Sometimes the
.junction of earth dam with non-overflow dam is provided with earth
retaining walls perpendicular or skew at the junction of non-overflow dam
with the overflow dam. Such retaining walls shorten the length of non-
overflow dam ( transition length ), but thty themselves add to the cost.
21
IS : 8826 - 1978
The alignment of the dam and the junction may sometimes have to be
modified to suit smooth transition of road on top of dam from non-overflow
section to earth dam section.
6.3.4 Junction with Outlets - Proper bond should be provided between
the earthwork and the outlet walls by providing staunching rings at
intervals so as to increase the path of percolation along the contact by 20
to 30 percent.
7. SELECTION OF DAM SECTION

7.1 Earth Dam - No single type of cross section of earth dam is suited
for all site conditions. The adoption of the particular type of embankment
section depends upon the following factors:
a) Availability of the suitable local material in sufficient quantity
within reasonable range;
b) Foundation conditions and cut-off requirements;
c) Types of earth moving machinery;
d) Diversion considerations and construction schedule;
e) Climatic conditions in relation to placement moisture content
control: subsequent moisture content changes, etc; and
f) Safety with respect to stability and seepage.
7.1.1 <oning - If only one type of suitable material is readily availabi
nearby, a homogeneous section is generally preferred. If the materi:’
;Lvailable is impervious or semi-pervious, a small amount of pervious
material is required as casing for protection against crackin On the other
Irand, if it is pervious, a thin impervious membrane is reqt%ed as core to
%rm the water barrier.
7.1.1.1 A znned dam is, however, preferred where different types of
soils are available from borrow area. It also facilitates the use of
compulsory excavation from foundatiou, approach channel, tail channel,
etc. The zoned earth dam is generally composer! of an impervious core
bounded by transitions and/or outer casing of pervious material. In zoned
cnrth dam, the weaker materials are often utilized most economically ill
tile form of random zones. Random zones are gemrally provided bclo~.~
minimum drawdown ievel on upstream side and on downstream o!‘
inclined filter. When ttte random zone is of rclativcly impervious material,
horizontal filters at different elevations ou upstream and downstream arc
provided ( see Fig. 1A ).
7.1.1.2 The zoning of earth dam as planned in the design may h;lvc
to be altered or rnodificd during execution stage in view of the following:
a) The materials estimated are itot available accordin,g to rcquire-
ment;
..
‘. .,
is : 8826 - 1978
b) Different types of material encountered, which could not be

ascertained during investigations;
4 Construction difficulties;
4 Construction schedule; and
4 New foundation features.
7.1.2 Top Width - The width of the dam at the crest should be fixed
according to the working space required at the top. No dam should have
a crest width of less than 6 m.
7.1.3 Settlement Allowance - At the end of construction, the crest of the

dam should be suitably raised above the desjgned top level of the dam to
zllow for post-construction vertical deformatton resulting from compression
and/or settlement of the embankment and foundation SO that there may
be no reduction in the designed freeboard above the maximum reservoir
level. This extra height of the dam is provided in the form of a
longitudinal camber over the designed top level, varying from zero at the
abutments to a maximum value at the centre of gorge where the dam will
be the highest and the settlement of the embankment will be the most.
The extra height to be so provided to compensate for compression in the
fill material should generally be between 0.2 percent and 0.4 percent of
the embankment height, depending on the soil type, in respect of earth
embankments and rockfill dams where the material is placed in layers and
compacted with the addition of water. The deformation on account of
compression in the embankment would be greater in the case of dumped
rockfill. Generally, a provision of 1 to 2 percent of the embankment
height above the designed top level may be provided to account for both
embankment compression and foundation settlement in respect of earth
and rock611 dams.
7.1.4 Berms - Berms have the following purposes:
a) To break the continuity of the slopes thereby reducing surface
erosion in case of downstream slope,
b) To provide level surfaces for construction and maintenance
operations, and
c) To prevent undermining of the lower edge of the riprap in case
of upstream slope.
7.1.4.1 The berm should slope towards the inner edge to prevent
rain-water from flo\ving over the outer edge and down the slope of dam.
~1 slope of 1 in 50 is recommended for this purpose. A minimum berm
width of 3.0 m is recommended. However, 5 to 6 m width is desirable.
One berm for every vertical elevation of about 10 to 15 m is recommended.
.4 berm is also desirable at elevation of top of rock toe.
fS : 8826 - 1978
7.2 Rockfill Dam

7.2.1 zoning - The rockfill embankment mainly comprises impervious
membrane for watertightness and supporting rockfill. Adoption of a
particular. type of rockfill dam is generally governed by considering the
merits and demerits of each type with reference to a particular site.
Separation of rockfill zone into several different zones and specifying
different gradation for each zone is considerably expenGve in processing
of the rock to meet the requirements. Usually, it will be satisfactory to
use quarry run rock in the entire rockfill zone so as to produce reasonably
uniform rock embankment with free drainage characteristics.
7.2.2 Top Width - The criteria for top width are .same as those for
earth dam as described in 7.1.2.
7.2.3 Crest Height - The criteria for fixing crest height are same as those
for earth dam as described in 7.1.3.
8. CHOICE OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
8.1 Earth Dam - Because of huge quantities of material involved in
construction of earth dam, the material must come from borrow areas
and quarries close to the site, The earth dam may be designed as a
llomc~~cneous one or zoned type depending upon the qualities and
quantities of the various materials available from the borrow areas and
li)uxd;ltiom. To economize the design, even erratic material that cannot
bc rclicd upon to have the consistent minimum properties needed for any
zone can be utilized in random zones, It is a general practice to utilize
tile materials available in their natural state rather than to improve the
proprrties of the materials by blending, mixing, screening, washing, etc.
‘The designer should aim at maximum utilization of the material available
from compulsory excavations.
8.1.1 The soils available from the borrow areas and excavation shall
be identified and classified in accordance with IS : 1498-1970*.
3.1.2 Suitability of soils for construction of earth dam in accordance
with IS : 1498-iY70* are given in Appendix A for general guidance of the
designer. These values should not be adopted as such in any given case,
Recommendations regardin g suitability of soils far construction of core in
earthquake zones are given in Appendix B.
8.2 Rockfill Dam - The rock for main rockfill should bc hard, sound
and durable so as to resist excessive breakdown during handling and
placing operations. In general. unweathered igneous and metamorphic
rocks are suitable for rockfill, while sedimentary rocks are not desirable.
Shales which slake in the presence of air and rocks which shatter into very
small pieces or have high percentage of chips or dust are not suitable. The
*CinsZication and identification of soils for general cngincering purposes (firsl
rccisiun ).
24
IS : 8826 - 1978
chips and dust should not be more than 10 percent. The angular bulky
rocks are preferred as against flat elongated rocks or rounded boulders.
If rounded cobbles or boulders are used, they should be scattered through-
out the rockfill and not concentrated in pockets.
8.2.1 Impervious material suitable for core of earth dam is also suitable
for core of rockfill dam ( see Appendix A ).
8.2.2 The choice of material for rigid membranes is given in 4.10.2.
9. INSTRUMENTATION
9.1 Earth Dims - For instrumentation in earth dams, the Indian
Standards mentioned in 0.4 and report of CW and PC, instrumentation
committee mentioned below may be referred:
‘Report of the Committee on Instrumentation for Dams and
Hydraulic Structures, Part I and Part II. Ministry of Irrigation and
Power, Government of India, New Delhi; December 1965 ‘.
9.2 Rockfill Dams - Instruments to measure vertical and horizontal
movements of the rockfill and pore pressures in earth core may be
provided. For details IS : 7436 ( Part I j-1973* may be referred.
APPENDIX A
( Clauses4.2.1, 4.3.1, 4.72, 5.1.2 and 8.2.1 j
SUITABILITY OF SOILS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF

EARTH DAMS
Rdative Suitability Homogeneous zoned Earth Dam Imjwrvious

Dykes ~--_-__h___----_~ Blanket
Impervious Pervious
Core Casing
Very suitable GC GC SW, GW GC
Suitable CL, CI CL, CI GM CL, CI
Fairly suitable SP, SM, CH GM, GC, SM, SP, GP “SE’ ;:>
SC, CH
Poor - ML,MI,MH - I_’
Not suitable - OL, 01, OH - -
Pt
NOTE - Refer IS : 1498-1970t.
*Guide for types of measurement for structures in rivrr valley projects and criteria
for choice and location of measuring instruments: Part I Earth and rockfill dams.
?Classification and identification of soils for general engineering purposes (first
rwirion ) .
25
IS : 8826 - 1978
APPENDIX B
( Clauses 4.2.1 and 8.1.2 )
SUITABILITY OF SOILS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF CORE

OF EARTH DAM IN EARTHQUAKE ZONES
Si Relative Suitability Type of Soil

NO.
1. Very good Very well graded coarse mixtures of sand,

gravel and fines, ~Dss coarser than 50 mm,
D5s coarser than 6 mm.
If fines are cohesionless, not mare than
20 percent finer than 7.5 micron IS Sieve.
2. Good a) Well graded mixture of sand, gravel and
clayey fines, Dss coarser than 25 mm. Fines
consisting of inorganic clay ( CL with
plasticity index greater than 12 ).
b) Highly plastic tough clay (CH with
3. Fair a) Fairly well graded, gravelly, medium to
coarse sand with cohesionless fines. Dss
coarser than 19 mm, Ds between 0.5 mm
and 3.0 mm.
Not more than 25 percent finer than 75
micron IS sieve.
b) Clay of medium plasticity (CL with
4. Poor a) Clay of low plasticity ( CL and CL-ML )
with little coarse fraction. Plasticity index
between 5 and 8. Liquid limit greater
than 25.
b) Silts of medium to high plasticity ( ML or
MH ) with little coarse fraction. Plasticity
index greater than 10.
c) Medium sand with cohesionless fines.
5. Very poor a) Fine, uniform, cohesionless silty sand, Dss
finer than 0.3 mm.
b) Silt from medium plasticity to cohesionless
( ML ). Plasticity index less than 10.
26
AMENDMENT NO. 1 DECEMBER 2008
TO
IS 8826:1978 GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF LARGE
(Pages 3 and 4, clause 0.4) — Substitute:
a) ‘IS 1893: 2004’ for ‘IS 1893-1975’.
b) ‘IS 2720 (Part 35) : 1974’for ‘IS 2720 (Part XXXV)-1976’.
c) ‘IS 4999: 1991’ for ‘IS 4999-1968’.
d) ‘IS 5050: 1992’for ‘1S 5050-1968’.
e) ‘IS 6066: 1994’for ‘IS 6066-1971’.
f) ‘1S 7356 (Part 1) : 2002’for ‘IS 7356 (Part 1)-1974’.
g) ‘1S 7356 (Part 2) :2003’ for ‘IS 7356 (Part 2)-1976’.
h) ‘IS 7436 (Part 1): 1993’for ‘IS 7436 (Part 1)-1973’.
j) ‘1S 8237: 1985’for ‘IS 8237-1976’.
(Page 5, clause 2.18) — Substitute ‘IS 5050:1992’ for ‘IS 5050-1968’.
(Page 11, clause 4.1.5) — Substitute ‘IS 4999: 1991‘ for ‘1S 4999-1968’,
(Page 13, clauses 4.5.1, 4.5.2 and 4.6) — Substitute ‘IS 8237:1985’ for
‘IS 8237-1976’.
4
(Page 14, clause 4.8) — Substitute ‘IS 5050: 1992’jor ‘IS 5050-1968’.
(Page 16, clause 5.1.1.1) – Substitute the following for the existing A
‘%1. 1.1 Freeboard for wave run up on slope shall be provided in accordance with
the provisions contained in IS 10635 : 1993 Guidelines for freeboard ●
❉
requirements in embankment dams.’
(Page 17, clause 5.1.3, third sentence) — Substitute the following for the
existing:
1
. .
..
Amend No. 1 to IS 8826:1978
‘Design for control of seepage through dam shall be made in accordance with
provisions contained in IS 9429: 1999 ‘Code of practice for drainage systems
for earth and rockfill dams’.
(Page 17, ciause 5.2, second sentence) — Delete.
(Page 24, clause 8.1) – Insert the following after the second sentence:
‘Based on assessment of gee-technical parameters and techno-economic

considerations, flyash conforming to IS 3812 : 1981 may be utilized in selected
zones in the downstream casing, especially downstream of filter zone.’
(Page 25, clause 9.2) – Substitute ‘IS 7436 (Part 1) :1993’ for ‘1S 7436
I
(Part 1:)-1973’.
i
*
.
i
(WRD 9)
ReprographyUnit BIS,New Delhi,India
,,
. .,\
.’
..

Irrigation Codes3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Irrigation Codes3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IS : 11223 - 1985

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

Classification Gross Storage Static Head at FRL

Size as Determined in 3.1.2 Inflow Design Flood for Safety of Dam

Floods of larger or smaller magnitude may be used if the hazard

Design Condition I : Under inflow design flood for safety of dams

4.1 Free-Board and Clearances — The free-board as specified in

Amendments Issued Since Publication

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

Eastern : 1/14 C. I. T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Kankurgachi  337 84 99, 337 85 61

Spillways Including Energy Dissipators Sectional Committee, BDC 54

Chairman Rcpresen t ing

( Continues from page 1 )

c>Generation of hydro-electric power;

4 Water supply for municipal or industrial uses;

4 To pass the flood discharge in conjunction with the spillway;

f) Flood control regulation to release water temporarily stored in

d Depletion of the reservoir in order to facilitate inspection of the

h) To furnish necessary flows for satisfying prior right uses down-

j> For maintenance of a live stream for abatement of stream

different countries in addition to relating it to the practices in the field

2.1 Sluices may be classified depending upon their purpose, their

2.1.1.1 Horizontal sluices are generally used under the following

a) When the sluices are drowned at the exit; and

2.1.1.2 The width of the sluice barrel is generally kept uniform

2.1.2 Trajectory Type Sluice - The barrel of this sluice is generally

IA Straight Barrel Sluice

1B Trajectory Type Sluice

FIG. 1 TYPE OF SLUICE

In case the trajectory profile defined by the above ~equation would

2.1.2.3 The height of the sluice is gradually reduced from down-

For a free discharging sluice Hr shall be measured from the reservoir

KL = constant, which is obtained after considering all the

g = acceleration due to gravity; and

3.1.2.1 When open channel flow is controlled by regulating gates,

Q = --&/G C.L. ( HI 312 - Hi 313)

Q= discharge to be passed through the sluice;

g= acceleration due to gravity;

TABLE 1 COEFFICIENT OF DISCHARGE, C, FOR CONDUIT ENTRANCES

PARTICULARS COEBFICIENT OF DISCHARGE, C

Gate in thin wall-unsuppressed Il.70 0.60 O-63

C = coefficient of discharge for submerged orifice or tube

3.2 Shape of Sluices - Generally rectangular gates are preferred.

3.3.1 For a rectangular or square sluice the entrance transition may

where D is the vertical height of the sluice ( downstream of the entrance

3.3.2 For _a rectangular entrance with bottom placed even with

3.3.3 For a circular entrance the entry transition is given by the

3.4.1 In order to ensure the pressure flow conditions throughout the

3.4.3 In case of an upturned exit, the shape and dimensions of the

3.4.4 In case the sluices are located in a spillway section, then no

FIG. 2 TYPESOF SLUICE EXIT

FIG. 4 TYPICAL DETAILS OF SLUICE LOCATED IN THICK SPILLWAY PIER

iii) For free flow

Fl, = Froude number at Vena contracta

3.6.3 Normally a sluice located in a spillway section should not

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

Adhoc Panel for Cirteria for Structural Design of Energy Dissipators

IS : 7365-1974 Criteria for hydraulic design of bucket type energy

FIG. 1 DEFINITION SKETCH

Fb2 = Permissible bond stress between ground and rock

Tw = Tail water depth

FIG. 2 CASE I SHOWING UPLIFT FORCES

4.3.3 In view of drainage arrangements provided below the basin floor,

No. of anchors ( n ) [ 0.5 ( D 2 × W + t b × W ) – ( D 1 × W + Wc t b ) ]